Home

Sony SAC7000 Computer Accessories User Manual

1. f 1 l LILLIE liii B C OWT FFA ACER Trel Tre2 Tres Tre4 Tred Trec6 Tre Trc8 Tracks 1 8 of your ACID project in the virtual view Tre Tre1lQ fTrell Tre12 tTrel3 Trc1i4 TrelS Irei 6 If you press the right preset button the next set of tracks in your project Preset buttons will be exposed Pressing the left preset will take you back to tracks 1 8 Left Right In the real world Adding envelopes and automating them A couple of common questions when using the Behringer BCF2000 is How do add envelopes to an ACID track and How do set up the Behringer to record the envelope s moves The following instructions should guide you through that process 1 Opena 2 Onthe n ACID project Behringer unit turn on the automation mode by pressing Downshift Edit For more information see Encoder Groups buttons on page 292 Note You can select multiple tracks at one time by pressing the bottom row of buttons for each track 3 Inthe track header choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch to determine how the automation will be written eA ol Fa OR kodi 5 j i Automation Settings button in the track header L2dB co Center Automation Orr 12 Automation Read vol 1 0dB I e Automation Write Touch Pan 43 R I Automation Write Latch 294 APPEN
2. The FX Automation Chooser dialog appears 4 Select the Band2 Frequency check box and click OK An effect automation envelope appears on the track 6 Add points to the envelope so that the Band2 Frequency parameter oscillates between about 100 Hz and 3000 Hz For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113 Making automated changes more stark ACID envelopes allow you to change settings for a variety of features over time While you may often use envelopes to transition smoothly from one setting to another you can also create interesting effects by making stark changes between settings Abruptly changing volume or pan By holding its setting until the next envelope point the hold fade curve allows you to use volume and pan envelopes to make abrupt changes For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 144 1 Select a track and press Shift V volume or Shift P pan to add an envelope Tip You can also use this technique on a bus track Click the Envelope Tool button to select the envelope tool Right click the first point on the envelope and choose Hold from the shortcut menu Add several more points by double clicking the envelope Note that each new point also has the hold fade curve a Set each point to a different level For more information see Adjusting individual envelope points on page 143 You can repeat the pattern by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly F
3. to erase the entire event e Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events The markers provide a visual cue to the mapped groove You can also right click a track header and choose Remove Groove from Track from the shortcut menu to remove all groove events from a track Removing unused grooves from your project 1 Pa From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn t already visible Click the Remove All Unused Grooves from Project button to remove any grooves that have not been used in your project WORKING WITH TRACKS 125 Removing a groove from your project 1 Select a groove in the Groove Pool window 2 Click the Remove Selected Grooves from Project button The selected groove is removed from your project If the groove is in use a confirmation will be displayed if the Confirm groove deletion when still in use check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Creating grooves You can add grooves to your project by using an existing track duplicating existing grooves importing grooves or by creating an entirely new groove from scratch Using Groove Cloning to create a new groove using a track in your project ACID can analyze a clip s audio to extract its groove so you can apply its feel to other clips Note Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop clips only 1 Right click a track header in the track list and choose Paint Clip from
4. Only the selected Events to events split at the be split cursor position Cursor position and split point Splitting a time selection Making a time selection allows you to split events at the time selection s in and out points across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting Loop bar Loop bar In point A Out point Split point Split point EDITING EVENTS 59 Splitting events within a time selection When selecting events within a time selection only the selected events in the time range split at the in and out points Events before splitting Events after splitting Selection bar Selection bar Only the selected event splits at the in and out points Event to split at the time selection s in and out points In point Out point Split point Split point Joining events You may join events on ACID tracks that have been segmented along the timeline Joining events is an efficient way to redraw an event and remove any splits or silent regions between events You would want to join events if you decided that the event should play uninterrupted over the specified time range 1 Select the events or range of events that you want to join For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 38 2 From the Edit menu choose Join or press J The selected events are joined Select all the events that you want to join You can also select the first and last events you wan
5. is selected the track is muted regardless of the mute automation settings Adding or removing mute automation 1 Selecta track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu 3 From the submenu choose Mute A check mark is displayed next to the command and an envelope is added to the timeline 4 You can adjust the automation by editing the envelope in the timeline or by using the Mute button in the track header when the Automation Settings button is selected USING AUTOMATION 137 Adjusting mute automation settings Select the Automation Settings button x The Mute button is displayed as S4 Click the Mute button to change the track s mute automation state at the cursor position The button behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the button mutes the entire track e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the button changes state to reflect the envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the button edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If you click the Mute button during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more infor
6. 2 Select each plug in you want to add and click the Add button or browse to a packaged effects chain Tip To reorder the plug ins within the chain drag a plug in button to a new location or click the Shift Plug In Left or Shift Plug in Right buttons 3 Once you have added all of the plug ins and specified the plug in chain order click on the OK button to close the Plug In Chooser and return to the Audio Plug In window 4 Adjust the settings for the effects For more information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button 9 Muting a bus track Click the Mute button amp to prevent a bus track from being played in the mix Click the Mute button on additional tracks to add them to the mute group To unmute a track click the Mute button again Muting or unmuting a bus track Deselect the Automation Settings button t to toggle trim mode Click the Mute button When you have a group of tracks muted hold Ctrl while clicking the Mute button on an unmuted track to remove all other tracks from the mute group Hold Ctrl while clicking the Mute button on a muted track to reset all Mute buttons Adjusting mute automation When you select the Automation Settings button 2 the mute button is displayed as a and you can use the control to edit volume automation Soloing a bus track Click the Solo button to solo all selected audio bus tracks Click the Solo button on additional tracks
7. 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste Locking envelopes to events Track envelopes extend for the length of a track and are independent of the events on the track This means that the envelope remains in place when you move the events in the track However track envelopes can be set to move with the underlying events thus preserving the timing of envelope points in relation to events To lock all of the envelopes in a project to the events in which they occur click the Lock Envelopes to Events button lt 3 or from the Options menu choose Lock Envelopes to Events You can turn this feature off by clicking the button again The original event Moving the event with Lock Envelopes to Events turned on Moving the event with P Lock Envelopes to Events turned off Hiding track envelopes After you have created your envelope and set your envelope points you may hide the envelope Hiding an envelope does not affect the envelope point settings or track playback Hiding volume pan bus or assignable effect envelopes 1 Select the track s whose envelope s you want to hide 2 From the View menu choose Show Envelopes A submenu appears A check mark next to an envelope type indicates that it is visible in the track view 3 From the submenu choose the type of envelope you want to hide The specified envelope type no longer appears in the track view for the selected track You can use the same steps to display the envelope
8. DIX B 4 Toadda volume pan or mute envelope do the following a To adda volume envelope purple move the track fader b To adda pan envelope red twist the track knob c To add a mute envelope green press the top row button of the track Twist the track knob to add a pan envelope Mute Press the top row envelope track button to add a mute envelope Pan envelope Volume envelope a aiiis Cursor Move the track fader to add a volume envelope Note Jo add envelope points place your cursor where you want to add the point by twisting the track knob pan pressing the top row track button mute or moving the track fader volume 2 chunkan irae Pan envelope Mute envelope Volume envelope Envelope points in the timeline 5 After an envelope is added to a track you can set up the Behringer BCF2000 to record the volume pan and mute envelope s moves in your ACID project a On the Behringer unit turn on the automation mode by selecting Downshift Edit b Place the cursor at the beginning of your ACID project c Use assignable button 4 to play your project For more information see Assignable buttons on page 293 As the cursor moves past the envelope points the faders will move automatically volume the top row button will light red mute and the red lights around the track knob will light up pan Tip You can add points to the envelope as the project is p
9. Open and run the BCF2000 Version 1 10 firmware zip file Open and run the firmware update utility zip file Turn off the Behringer BCF2000 and turn it back on after a few seconds The LCD display should quickly flash 1 10 to indicate that the firmware has successfully installed Then the LCD display should read P 1 If P 1 is not displayed turn off the Behringer BCF2000 Press and hold the first push button in the top row of buttons under the first knob and turn the unit back on The LCD display should now read P 1 Plug the USB cable into the back of the Behringer BCF2000 and into your computer s USB port Note n addition to USB mode you can also use the Behringer BCF2000 in MIDI mode For more information about MIDI connections refer to the documentation on the Behringer Web site at http www behringer com 11 12 Press and hold the Edit button and press the Store button at the same time The LCD display should read EG edit global mode Turn the first rotary encoder labeled Type on the Behringer unit clockwise slightly until the LCD displays U 1 U 1 indicates USB mode In the LCD display U 1 will flash for just a moment and then read EG again Press the Exit button to exit the edit global EG mode The LCD display should read P 1 Turn off the Behringer BCF2000 Press and hold the second push button in the top row of buttons under the channel knobs and turn the unit back on The LCD should now display NC C
10. and Solo buttons To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane Fs Touch WJ enter A 0 a 6 0 Muting a bus When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can click the Mute button amp to prevent a bus from being played in the mix Click the Mute button on additional busses to add them to the mute group To unmute a bus click the Mute button again When the Automation Settings button is selected the Mute button is displayed as and you can use the button to edit mute automation on the bus track Soloing a bus Click the Solo button to mute all unselected busses Click the Solo button on additional busses to add them to the solo group To remove a bus from the solo group click its Solo button again Adjusting bus panning or volume When the Faders control region is visible each bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane Adjusting panning When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo field dragging to the left will place the bus in the left soeaker more than the right and dragging to the right will place the bus in the right speaker You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Au
11. Allows you to add a constant value to existing note durations Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the amount you want to add to notes e Subtracting from duration Allows you to subtract a constant value from existing note durations Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the amount you want to subtract from notes Scale by Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply selected note durations by a percentage For example setting this slider to 200 would double note durations Select the Change start times check box if you want to change the start times of notes while changing duration For example if you set the Scale by slider to 50 and select the Change start times check box you can compress notes so they play in double time If you set the Scale by slider to 50 and clear the Change start times check box note durations will be shorter but their positions on the timeline will not change Limit Select this radio button and choose Min and Max values to restrict note durations to the specified range For example if you choose an eighth note as the Min setting and a half note as the Max setting sixteenth notes will be changed to eighth notes and whole notes will be changed to half notes Notes between the Min and Max settings are unaffected 4 Select the tracks or events you want to edit e Select a track to edit all events on the track Hold Ctrl or Shift while c
12. GETTING STARTED 53 7 Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit If an image file exists when you Open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image 8 Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before burning 9 Select the Eject when done check box if you want the CD to eject automatically when burning has completed 10 Click OK to start burning 54 CHAPTER 2 Chapter 3 Editing Events In this chapter you ll learn about basic event editing techniques such as cutting copying pasting trimming splitting and joining events You ll also learn how to use ripple editing to expand the possibilities of timeline editing Finally you ll take a look at advanced editing techniques such as slipping and sliding events changing event properties and adding event envelopes Note For the basic event editing topics in this chapter make sure that ripple editing is turned off Verify that the Ripple Edits command in the Options menu is not selected For more information see Ripple editing on page 61 Co
13. Inserts the Chopper selection as an event in the track view at the current cursor position Inserts the Chopper selection as an event in the track view at the play cursor position Shifts the track view s cursor position to the left by the length of the increment arrow Shifts the track view s cursor position to the right by the length of the increment arrow Links the length of the increment arrow with the length of the selection When toggled on the length of the increment remains equal to the length of the selection When toggled off you can configure the increment independently of the Chopper selection Halves the length of the Chopper selection Doubles the length of the Chopper selection Shifts the Chopper selection to the left by the length of the selection Shifts the Chopper selection to the right by the length of the selection Shifts the selection left by the increment length Shifts the selection right by the increment length Doubles the length of the increment arrow Halves the length of the increment arrow Inserts a region Inserts a marker Marks the start point of a loop region Marks the end point of a loop region Once the endpoint is established the loop region becomes highlighted Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper When working with events in the Chopper you can drop markers and create regions just like in the track view For more information see Using project markers and regio
14. Preview Bus Sends NO Meters Faders 1 3 0 5 Basic Aco SF Acous Urban Ri Urban Ri Distorted Bells View pane Channel strips The Mixing Console window is explained in the following sections The Mixing Console toolbar The Mixing Console toolbar is displayed at the top of the Mixing Console window and allows you to quickly configure the window s display downmix audio dim the output or add tracks assignable effects or busses Item Description Ex Properties and i Click the E amp button to open the Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog or click the down ayou arrow and choose a command from the menu Audio Properties Displays the Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog Show Channel Displays or hides the Channel List on the left side of the Mixing Console List window Select a channel strip s check box to display it in the Mixing Console or clear a check box to hide a channel strip without removing it from your project USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 151 Item Description Show Channels Choose a command to configure which channel strips are displayed in the Mixing Console window e Show All Channels Displays all channel strips in the Mixing Console e Audio Tracks Shows or hides audio track channel strips e MIDI Tracks Shows or hides MIDI track channel strips e Audio Busses Shows or hides auxiliary bus channel strips e Input Busses Shows or hides
15. Undoing a series of edits Clicking the down arrow next to the Undo button displays the project s undo history The history displays as a drop down list with the most recent edit located at the top Undoing an edit in the list requires all subsequent edits to be undone as well 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Undo button The undo history appears 2 Locate the edit to be undone Notice that all subsequent edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to be undone is indicated at the bottom of the drop down list 3 Click the edit to be undone The project is restored to the state it was in prior to the selected edit Undoing all edits Choosing Undo All from the Edit menu undoes all project edits and automatically adds them to the redo history Using redo To redo an edit click the Redo button on the toolbar or press Ctrl Shift Z Edits are re performed in the reverse order they were undone Tip You can also redo the most recent undone edit by choosing Redo from the Edit menu Redoing a series of edits Clicking the down arrow next to the Redo button displays the project s redo history The history displays as a drop down list with the most recently undone edit located at the top Redoing an edit in the list requires all subsequently undone edits to be re performed as well 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Redo button The redo history appears 2 Locate the edi
16. You can change the key of an individual event without affecting the pitch of the track or project Right click the event in the track view choose Pitch Shift from the shortcut menu and choose Up Semitone or Down Semitone from the submenu The pitch shifts one semitone in the direction specified oe and the amount of shift displays on the event itself ae You can also change an event s key using keyboard shortcuts For more information see Event editing commands on page 308 Adjusting time Two commands are provided for adjusting your project s timeline Insert Time and Fit to Time Inserting time Use the Insert Time command to insert a specified amount of blank space into the project at the current cursor position This feature can be used to create space in the project for new events 1 Position the cursor where you want to insert time 2 From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears 3 Enter the amount of time you want to insert and click OK Note The Insert Time dialog uses the measures beats ticks format used by the beat ruler WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 93 Fitting to time The Fit to Time command allows you to adjust the project s overall length to a specified amount of time Note The maximum and minimum length is limited to reduce the possibility of creating audible artifacts through the compression expansion process 1 From the Edit menu choose Fit to Time The Fit to Time dialog ap
17. Adding build ups If you are attempting to build projects that escape the perceived limitations of computer generated loop based music you should concentrate on reproducing the subtle and not so subtle dynamics associated with live instrumentation APPENDIX C 299 One of the simplest but most effective examples of this is the build up When musicians play live there is a tendency to increase dynamics as a song enters a chorus or refrain Think of how a drummer uses accents drum rolls and fills that steadily increase in volume to enter a song or indicate an approaching change from verse to chorus or chorus to bridge This effect is easily reproduced by adding a volume envelope to the track Add points at the various drum beats and adjust them so that the volume steadily increases For more information see Adding volume or pan envelopes on page 138 Creating wah wah effects with automated Track EQ You can use the automatable Track EQ effect to create a custom wah wah effect on a track The example below provides sample values to use in the Track EQ plug in but you can adjust the settings to suit your taste 1 Click the Track FX button F on the track to which you want to add the effect The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Adjust the settings for band 1 as follows Frequency 20 000 e Gain 14 9 e Rolloff 24 3 Adjust the settings for band two as follows e Gain 15 e Bandwidth 0 9 4 Click the FX Automation button
18. Enable low pass filter on LFE Select this check box to limit the audio sent to the LFE channel in a 5 1 surround project For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 235 GETTING STARTED 29 Item Description Cutoff frequency for low pass filter Enter a low pass cutoff frequency value for 5 1 surround projects Audio sent to the LFE channel is limited to frequencies lower than the value you enter Applying a low pass filter approximates the bass management system in a 5 1 decoder and ensures that you re sending only low frequency audio to the LFE channel Available only in ACID Low pass filter quality Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine the sharpness of the low pass filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve Available only in ACID Recorded files folder This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you record new audio or MIDI tracks Choose lt Project gt to save recorded files in the same folder as your ACID project file or click the Browse button to choose a different folder The recorded files folder from the Folder tab of the Preferences dialog is used by default unless you choose a project specific location If you select the Start all new projects with these settings check box the setting on the Folder tab of the Preferences dialog will be updated to use the folder specified in the Project Properties dialog Start all new projects with these Select this chec
19. MIDI Step Record Step size J a 24576 ticks L Tuplet E in time of DE Duration fi 7o S 12288 ticks Velocity As Played WORKING WITH MIDI 191 7 Use the MIDI Step Record dialog to set options for recorded MIDI notes a Click the Step size button and choose interval between the beginnings of notes Select the Tuplet check box to set irregular intervals For example to set a triplet interval in 4 4 time select the Tuplet check box and choose 3 in time of 4 b Click the Duration button and choose length of the note s sustain When you choose a duration longer than the step size notes will overlap c Toset the note on velocity for recorded notes type a value in the Velocity box If you want to record note on velocity from your controller select the As Played check box 8 MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play them and notes are added to an event in the timeline Notes MIDI controller adjustments such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements are not recorded in step record mode Ifyou press a key before releasing the current key both notes will be recorded at the same timeline position Release both keys to advance to the next step 9 To stop recording close the MIDI Step Record dialog or click the Stop button on the transport bar Using MIDI merge recording Click the MIDI Merge Record button to build a MIDI part by recording repeatedly into a loop regi
20. Note f you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper you cannot assign busses to different devices Choose the device that you want to use for playing the rear channels right surround and left surround in a 5 1 surround project Choose the device that you want to use for playing the center and LFE channels in a 5 1 surround project The Playback buffering seconds slider specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during playback The larger the number the more buffering that occurs during playback This value should be as low as possible without gapping To set it start at 25 and play a typical song Move some of the track faders If the playback gaps at all try increasing this slider in small increments until the gapping stops As you increase this slider the RAM meter at the bottom of the ACID window will indicate more RAM usage If you simply cannot get playback to be free of gapping you need to either decrease the number of tracks you are trying to play simultaneously install more RAM in your computer so you can increase buffering buy a faster access hard drive or minimize the number of audio plug ins you are trying to use simultaneously Select this check box and drag the Track buffering slider if you want to adjust the amount of audio that is prerendered ahead of the cursor position When the check box is selected a separate processing thread is used to render audio from tracks On multiprocessor or multicore compu
21. Off Velocity Speed of the note s release 0 127 Low values produce a soft release high values produce a staccato release Duration Length of the note s sustain in measures beats ticks Packed NRPN Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event NRP MSB Parameter s most significant byte NRP LSB Parameter s least significant byte Data MSB Value for the most significant byte Data LSB Value for the least significant byte Packed RPN Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event NRP MSB Parameter s most significant byte NRP LSB Parameter s least significant byte Data MSB Value for the most significant byte Data LSB Value for the least significant byte Patch Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Bank LSB Least significant byte value for the bank Bank MSB Most significant byte value for the bank Patch Number of the patch you want to play Pitch Bend Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Pitch Number of cents by which you want to bend the pitch Poly Pressure Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Note Note to wh
22. Stephanie Output Settings Input Filters clip Pool Message Filter Ww Enable Record all Record selected items Record unselected items MIDI Message Type Channel Messages kd Mote C Polyphonic Key Aftertouch C Channel Aftertouch C Pitch Bend C Program Change Select the track where you want to apply the filter From the View menu choose Track Properties In the Track Properties dialog click the Input Filters tab Choose Message Filter from the drop down list at the top of the page Select the Enable check box Select your recording options Item Description Record all Select this radio button if you want to record all MIDI messages from the input port Record selected items Select this radio button if you want to choose which MIDI messages you want to record Record unselected items Select this radio button if you want to choose which MIDI messages you want to ignore when recording Choose a setting from the MIDI Message Type drop down list The box at the bottom of the page displays the available MIDI messages Select the check box for each MIDI message that you want to filter When editing note messages you can double click the Min and Max boxes to type the notes you want to filter Tips e Ifyou re recording into two tracks you can use note message filters to split your keyboard and create two separate parts For example set track 1 to record only notes A1 to B4 and set track 2
23. Viewing incoming timecode You can view the incoming timecode in the time display located directly above the track list Right click the time display and choose MIDI Timecode In from the shortcut menu to show the incoming MTC time This display also shows status and error information If Trigger from MIDI Timecode is enabled but no MTC is detected the display reads Waiting If the wrong frame rate of MTC is being detected the display reads Wrong format WORKING WITH MIDI 227 Generating MIDI clock MIDI clock differs from MTC in that it contains tempo as well as positional information MIDI clock is essentially measured in ticks from the beginning of the project MIDI clock sends 24 ticks per quarter note The advantage of using MIDI clock is that tempo changes are sent to the chasing application and they will be preserved 1 Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send the clock This option can be found on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 262 2 From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Generate MIDI Clock from the submenu MIDI clock is generated when you click the Play button Viewing outgoing MIDI clock You can view the outgoing clock in the time display located directly above the track list Right click the time display and choose MIDI Clock Out from the shortcut menu to display the outgoing MIDI clock time Exporting MIDI files By usin
24. e Bus sends are pre volume and pre mute by default When bus sends are pre volume you can create a cue mix that is independent of your main mix To change to post volume right click the bus fader and choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu e Ifyou want to apply track panning to bus sends including pan position and panning mode right click the bus fader and choose Link to Main Track Pan from the shortcut menu e When Link to Main Track Pan is not selected the track sends a center panned stereo signal using the track s current panning mode Select the Use legacy track send gain check box on the Audio page of the Preferences dialog if you want to configure audio track sends to behave as they did in ACID 6 0 and earlier When the check box is selected you can open projects created with earlier versions of ACID and be assured they will sound the same as they did in earlier versions of ACID For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 Using track automation envelopes Track envelopes allow you to control volume panning assignable effect send levels bus send levels and effect parameters for effects that support automation for a specific track You can distinguish the various envelopes by their color For more information see Using Automation on page 137 112 CHAPTER 7 Choosing stereo pan types When you pan a track using the pan slider or a pan envelope you can choose among several pan types to determine how t
25. e Notes are added to an event in the timeline e MIDI controller adjustments such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements are recorded as track envelopes For more information see MIDI controller automation on page 147 MIDI controllers are recorded in touch timeout mode envelope points are created or edited when you change a control setting When you stop adjusting the control existing envelope points on the timeline are preserved MIDI controllers that are switches such as a damper pedal are always recorded in latched mode envelope points are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points When recording returns to the beginning of the loop region existing MIDI controller envelopes are unaffected For example you could record note data the first time recording passes through the loop region record pitch bend controllers the second time and modulation the third time Note Envelope points are not thinned when recording MIDI controllers from a hardware device 10 To stop recording click the Record button again or click the Stop button on the transport bar Editing MIDI on the timeline Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button tal to edit MIDI events directly on the timeline In this mode you can draw and erase notes in a piano roll or drum grid view Free Fi
26. pii 6145 1 7169 1 Preserve pitch when stretching 1 1 T ae Method lastique x oo 00 03 500 e wle lia Notes e Ifyou adjust a clip s properties and do not click the Save button the new properties are saved in your ACID project only the media file is not modified Ifyou adjust a clip s properties and click the Save button the modified properties are embedded in the media file if possible you will be prompted to save to a different file if necessary e When you load a project the clip properties saved in the ACID project are displayed first If clip properties have been edited since the project was saved or if the clip was modified in an external editor you can click the Reload button Reload to load the properties saved in the file Managing a track s clips Each track in your ACID project can contain multiple distinct media files called clips Use the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window to add remove and preview clips For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 Adjusting general clip properties The General tab displays information about the file associated with a track and allows you to change the ACID type apply pitch shifting to all events on the track that use the same clip and adjust time stretching for Beatmapped clips 116 CHAPTER 7 Changing clip type Choose a setting from the ACID type drop down list to change the way the c
27. to select it You can hold Ctrl while clicking to select multiple notes Cc A 4 at gt g gt N T D A F O gt at O oO ef at O A L D a at 3 Cc ct 2 4 g gt lt g at n oO lt a A J Q fa J on Oo te Q m Q a O O D te at g gt te va 2 14 A c O gt O O x lt te O Cc J or at a gt g m O at 0 Nn lt O c want to edit 4 Drag notes left or right to change their position on the timeline or drag up or down to assign a note to a different pitch Tips Hold Shift while dragging to override horizontal snapping press Shift after you click Hold Alt while dragging to constrain to horizontal or vertical movement Editing note duration 1 Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button fall 2 Select theDrawtool 3 Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll drum grid Hold Shift while dragging to override horizontal snapping press Shift after you click WORKING WITH MIDI 197 Editing note velocity Note velocity is represented in the timeline by velocity stems To show or hide velocity stems in inline MIDI editing mode choose Show Inline MIDI Editing from the View menu and then choose Show Note On Velocities or Show Note Off Velocities from the submenu Free Fingers O 7 aS m 1 Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button Ef 2 Sel
28. 1 Add busses to your project For more information see Adding a bus on page 162 2 If the window isn t already visible choose Mixing Console from the View menu 3 Ifthe I O control region isn t already visible click the I O button in the View pane 4 To choose an output device click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu Ai Bus e Bus C Bus io Tia Tia a Master Left Right Front Bus B Left Right Front Bus fLeftfRight Front Lefk Right Front i Centeri LFE Lefti Fight Rear Routing a bus to a hardware output Before you get started verify that you are using Windows classic wave drivers or an ASIO driver 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio Device tab 2 From the Audio device type drop down list choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or an ASIO driver 3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Note fyou have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop down list on the Audio Device tab in the Preferences dialog you will not be able to assign the bus to a different device USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 163 Using bus track headers 1 Add busses to your project For more information see Adding a bus on page 162 2 If bus tracks aren t already visible choose Show Bus Tracks from the View menu 3 Click the Playback Device Selector button on the audio bus track and choose an ouput device from the menu e The button is displayed asa E when a bus is rou
29. ASX File Attack Attenuation Audio Compression Manager ACM Audio Interchange File Format AIFF Audio Proxy File sfap0 Bandwidth Beatmapped track The glossary contains terms and their definitions that you may come across in the manual This glossary not only includes terms associated with ACID software but also includes relevant industry terms An ACID project file that contains all information regarding the project including track layout envelope settings and effects parameters In addition all audio files used in the project are embedded into the project file This number is based on the Computer ID number of the computer on which the software is installed Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate When you register your copy of the software Sony generates an activation code for you based on the Computer ID number Once you enter the activation code the ACID application will not time out Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have the software installed on the computer where you will be using it A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM See Windows Media Format A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recordi
30. Automating VSTi parameters 107 211 Automation Adding envelope points 142 Adding volume or pan envelopes 138 Adjusting volume or pan settings 138 Assignable effects automation 139 Bus automation 139 Drawing envelope points 143 Editing envelopes 142 Generic control surfaces 286 Latch mode 147 MIDI controller 141 MIDI program change 142 Modes 147 Mute automation 137 Recording 147 Showing or hiding controls 137 Thinning envelope points 143 Touch mode 147 Track automation 137 Track effect automation 140 Volume or pan 138 Balance panning model 113 241 Beat ruler 21 Beatmapped clips Stretching properties 121 Beatmapped tracks 34 Stretching properties 117 Beatmapper wizard 113 Behringer BCF2000 control surface 288 Configuring ACID 289 Overview 288 Setting up hardware 288 Bit depth 29 Burning CDs 51 Bus Assigning to a track 111 Bus automation 139 Adding bus envelopes 139 Adjusting bus automation levels 139 Bus tracks 106 Adding effects 106 Adding envelopes 106 Automating VSTi parameters 107 Monitoring output levels 107 Muting 106 Soloing 106 Busses Adding or deleting 162 Adjusting levels sent from tracks 112 146 Assigning tracks to 19 111 Automating parameters 139 Automation 139 Bus send volume envelopes 142 Input 168 Output 162 Panning 239 CD Extracting media 32 INDEX i Writing media 51 Changing 158 Changing a section s color 67 Changing an
31. Creating a new media library You can create multiple media libraries as necessary to organize your media Each media library is maintained by the Media Manager software as a separate database that stores information about the media contained within it 1 From the Media Manager window click the Media Library actions button il and choose New Media Library from the menu The New Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Inthe Name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 3 The Folder box displays the path to the folder where the library will be created Click Browse to choose a different location 4 Click the Create button to create the new library Opening a media library The Media Manager window displays the contents of the current media library You can open a different library at any time Important When you open a media library the Media Manager tool creates a transaction log file This file is created in the same folder as the medialib file and uses the same base name as the medialib file For example the transaction log file for default medialib would be default_log ldf Do not delete these log files Doing so will prevent you from opening the associated library When the Media Manager tool closes it automatically removes the log file If the application terminates inappropriately close all running ACID windows restart ACID and close the application to clear the log file In the Media Manager window cl
32. J A A A A A A j j re we eves fan b 4 4 4 CONDAUIBWN Item Description 1 Marker 1 9 Press to place the cursor at marker 1 or hold Shift and press to place the cursor at marker 9 Automation When the Settings button is selected hold the button and turn the V Pot to change the automation recording Mode mode for each track and bus track 2 Marker 2 10 Press to place the cursor at marker 2 or hold Shift and press to place the cursor at marker 10 Pan Mode When the Settings button is selected hold the button and turn the V Pot to change the current panning mode 3 Marker 3 Press to place the cursor at marker 3 4 Marker 4 Press to place the cursor at marker 4 Input When the Settings button is selected hold the button and turn the V Pot to change record input monitoring Monitor settings when you re using an ASIO audio device 5 Marker 5 Press to place the cursor at marker 5 Pre Post When the Pan button is selected press the Settings button and then hold F5 while pressing the V Pot to change the bus or assignable effects output fader to Pre FX or Post FX When the Sends button is selected press the Settings button and hold F5 while pressing the V Pot to change a track s bus or assignable effects send level to Pre Volume or Post Volume Press the Sends button to scroll through the available bus and effects sends 6 Marker 6 Press to place the cursor at marker 6 Default Press the Settings button and hold F6 while pressing the V
33. Repeat step 3 until you have marked all CD tracks Burning a disc disc at once 1 Inserta blank CD in a supported CD R CD RW drive 2 From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD The Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog appears 3 From the Drive drop down list use the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 4 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns 5 Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Note Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc 6 Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box e Burn CDs begins recording audio to your CD immediately Test first then burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only do not burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD
34. Root note Don t transpose x Number of beats 8 Stretching method Looping segments x Transient sensitivity 100 Timing tightness 16th notes Stretch spacing 16th notes v Redetect Beats elella o gt gt M i w i DI 1 1 000 ombination beat Stretch marker stretch marker Tip Click the Redetect Beats button to apply the ACID beat detection algorithm to existing media You ll notice that the Stretch tab looks similar to the Groove Editor window Both windows contain beat anchors and markers however the markers on these windows perform complementary functions e On the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window the beat markers indicate beats in the media and the beat anchors indicate the adjustment that is required to quantize the media to straight time before applying a new groove In the Groove Editor window a beat anchor represents the beat that will be adjusted and a groove marker represents the point in time when that beat will be played when the groove is applied A groove marker can occur before or after the beat anchor A line connects a groove marker to its associated beat anchor If you want to hear the results of editing beat anchors and markers select the Play Quantized button H at the bottom of the Clip Properties window and use the Clip Properties transport controls to preview the loop Playing the clip in Play Quantized mode demo
35. WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 87 Placing and moving regions Regions are placed at the start and end points of a loop region time selection You may place a region in one of the following ways From the Insert menu choose Region e Right click the marker bar choose Markers Regions from the shortcut menu and choose Insert Region from the submenu e Press R Region start Region end _ Loop region 7 After you place a region you may change its position by dragging the region tag to the desired position Tip You can move a region without changing its size by holding Alt while dragging either region tag Naming regions You can name the placed regions in your project You may want to name regions based on parts of the project or to define the amount of time that the regions encompass For example you may want to identify introductions solos or special time related features in your project as reference points 1 Right click the region s start tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu A box appears next to the tag 2 Type a region name and press Enter to save the name Navigating to regions While you are working on your project you may have scrolled to a portion of the project where the cursor is not visible You may click in the track view to move and view the cursor or you may use region tags to bring the cursor into view To move the cursor to the selected region tag right click the region tag and choose Go T
36. You can configure up to five generic MIDI control surfaces to work with the ACID interface For information about your specific device please refer to the manufacturer s documentation For more information see Configuring a generic MIDI controller on page 285 Configuring a Behringer BCF2000 controller The Behringer BCF2000 is fully supported by ACID and lends a tactile element to your editing sessions For more information see Configuring ACID to use the Behringer BCF2000 on page 289 WORKING WITH MIDI 229 230 CHAPTER 12 Chapter 13 Working with Video By adding a video track to your ACID project you can use the software as a scoring tool Video is always added to the top track in the track list Depending on your horizontal zoom level each frame displayed in the video track may represent multiple frames from the source video As you zoom in marks display to represent each frame and you can zoom further to view individual frames Managing video ACID makes it easy to add video to a project and work with the video track Adding or replacing video files Use the Explorer window to find the file you want to use and then add it to the project by double clicking it or dragging it into the track view The video file is placed in the top track and if the file has an audio stream it is placed as a separate one shot track in the track view If your project already contains a video track you are prompted to replace the exis
37. and buttons you can use assign those controls to adjust the tracks in your project For this example let s set up a MIDI keyboard with 8 knobs to adjust track volume Notes e You can use this same process to assign a controller to any configurable parameter To adjust track volume we re selecting Channel x oo 2 Se 11 Fader in the Host Command list in step 10 below However if you wanted to adjust panning you could choose Channel x Pan or if you wanted to adjust the bus send level you could choose Channel x Send Effect parameters cannot be controlled with a generic controller From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog Select the MIDI tab and verify that the port where your controller is connected is selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI input list Select the External Control amp Automation tab From the Available devices drop down list choose Generic Control and then click the Add button The Generic Control is added to the Active control devices list Double click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog Verify that the port where your controller is connected is selected from the MIDI input drop down list at the bottom of the dialog Because the MIDI keyboard in our example has 8 knobs type 8 in the Number of channels box Now let s assign buttons to shift the channel banks up and down so you c
38. ccc ccc cece e eee e eee eeneeees 223 Creating or editing program MAPS cc cece cece cece ee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeee 223 Creating program MAPS ccc cece cece tee sarrant eee eee eee e eens eee teeeeeeeteenees 224 Editing program Maps sessrres ro veuccad oa so gedewed EENDEN NEKTES EERTE EREET EERIE 224 Assigning a patch map to a MIDI device 0 ccc ccc ccc cece n eee eeneennes 225 Creating or editing drum MAPS cece cece cece eee e ee ee ee eset tense eeeaeaes 225 EGIUING E Ke LTE o I E E E E T E I E E E E E rues 225 Choosing a drum map for a track s susnssususuesesursesesuererrsrereseserreerrrrrrer 226 Synchronizing using MIDI timecode ccc cece cece cece ence ee eeeaeeenes 226 Generating MIDI timecode sisi eisss dese ewedds esi eas dh Sate dace dtus oid sewn awhPadarcdhe 226 Triggering from MIDI timecode ccc ccc cece eee een nee e eee eee eeennnaes 227 Generating MIDICIOCK 4 ci lt dexaiadewscbevwinecwid deus sdidodtdonaddhied teedaseuavabouadven 228 Exporting MIDI HES svc oinan nana utatubetade ete mie EE E ohovetauneaianetes 228 Saving MIDI clips for export cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee eeteeeeeeees 228 Exporting the project to a standard MIDI file ccc ccc eee eee eee enn eeenes 228 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Configuring a Mackie Control Universal 0 cece cece cece eee eee e eee eeeenees 229 COnfgunind d Frontier ThanZPOM ices 04en4u004 canataedese
39. click the Enable Snapping button to toggle it off Drawing note events The Draw tool limits you to drawing one pitch at a time In other words you cannot drag up and down with the Draw tool to draw note events across several pitches at once 1 Click the Draw Tool button The Draw tool is selected 2 Drag in the row for the pitch you wish to create A new note event appears as you drag Painting note events Unlike the Draw tool the Paint tool allows you to create note events across multiple pitches with a single drag of the mouse The Paint tool also allows you to select the note length you want to paint 1 Click the arrow adjacent to the Paint Tool button and choose a note length to paint from the menu 2 Click the Paint Tool button The Paint tool is selected 3 Drag to create new note events The new events appear as you drag Editing note events You can change the length or pitch of a note event using the Draw tool You can also cut copy and paste events in the same way you do in the main ACID window Changing pitch With the Draw tool selected drag a note event to a new row Changing length With the Draw tool selected drag the edge of a note event to a new location Tip As you drag the edge of a note event the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler To snap to smaller divisions click the Zoom In Time button at the bottom of the window to zoom in mor
40. i I l s 4 B Velocity gt gt il Kh Middle C Transport bar Previewing MIDI You can preview the entire MIDI file a loop selection or single notes using the piano roll editor Tip To control volume during playback in the piano roll editor drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window Previewing the MIDI file Use the transport bar buttons at the bottom of the piano roll editor to play your MIDI Tip You can use the Solo button to solo a particular MIDI track during preview playback Previewing a selection in looped playback You can preview a selection in looped playback just as you would in the main ACID window 1 Drag the handles of the loop bar in the piano roll editor to create the desired loop region 2 Click the Loop Playback button to turn on looped playback 3 Click the transport bar s Play button or press Space The piano roll editor loops the playback of the selected area To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button lf or press Space WORKING WITH MIDI 213 Adding note events You can add note events using the Draw tool or the Paint tool in the same way you do in the main ACID window Tip As you drag to create new events the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler To snap to smaller divisions click the Zoom In Time button at the bottom of the window to zoom in more tightly Or to turn off snapping altogether
41. selection in the Chopper 2 Click the Insert Selection button _ einsert clicking the Insert Selection button eJinsert_ to insert events Building instrument solos The previous section described an extended technique to create challenging rhythmic variations in your projects You can use a slightly different version of the slice and dice technique to build instrument solos for your projects To demonstrate this let s start with an event containing a simple bass riff 1 Slice and dice the file in the Chopper to create new riffs and add them to the project For more information see Using the Chopper on page 95 2 Use the pitch shifting to transpose some of the new events For more information see Changing an event s key on page 93 3 Apply volume envelopes to simulate the varying attacks associated with live soloing For more information see Adding volume or pan envelopes on page 138 4 Use tempo key time signature change markers to create passages with tempos that deviate from the project tempo For more information see Working with tempo key time signature change markers on page 91 Building scales Though it is well outside the intended scope of the application you can build unique scales from audio loops To do this you must first isolate a note and determine what pitch it is You can easily do this using the Spectrum Analysis tool in Sound Forge Once you isolate and identify the note choose Save As from the File
42. 2 Upshift assignable button 4 Downshift assignable button 1 Downshift assignable button 2 Downshift assignable button 3 Downshift assignable button 4 Knobs Items Rotating knobs Pressing knobs Description Rewind Press and hold to move backward through the timeline Fast forward Press and hold to move forward through the timeline Stop Press to stop playback and return the cursor to its position before playback started Play Pause Press to start playback Press again to stop playback and leave the cursor at its current position Inserts loop region to the cursor position Home Moves the cursor to the beginning of your project Record Adds a track to your project and arms it for recording Inserts a marker to your project Inserts a region marker into your project Turns selected loop region on or off Creates a loop region from the cursor position Description Controls panning busses sound devices and track effects for each track The knobs are velocity sensitive so rotating quickly changes values Chooses a selection APPENDIX B 293 Faders The faders control the following in your project e The track volume level e The automation envelope on the track when in automation mode Preset buttons The Preset b uttons allow you to move left or right through the BCFview virtual display to expose all the tracks in your project The virtual channel view will display 8 tracks at one time
43. 8 12 978 D 4 51 155 56 A 7 94 1864 7 AO 9 13 750 E4 52 164 81 B7 95 1975 5 A 0 10 14 568 F4 53 174 61 C8 96 2093 0 BO 11 15 434 F 4 54 184 99 C 8 97 2217 5 C1 12 16 352 G4 55 195 99 D8 98 2349 3 C 1 13 17 324 G 4 56 207 65 D 8 99 2489 0 D1 14 18 354 A4 57 220 00 E8 100 2637 0 D 1 15 19 445 A 4 58 233 08 F8 101 2793 8 E1 16 20 601 B4 59 246 94 F 8 102 2960 0 F1 17 21 826 C5 60 261 63 G8 103 3136 0 F 1 18 23 124 C 5 6l 277 18 G 8 104 3322 4 G1 19 24 499 D5 62 293 66 A8 105 3520 0 G 1 20 25 956 D 5 63 311 13 A 8 106 3729 3 Al 21 27 500 E5 64 32963 B8 107 3951 1 A 1 22 29 135 F5 65 349 23 C9 108 4186 0 B1 23 30 867 F 5 66 369 99 C 9 109 4434 9 C2 24 32 703 G5 67 391 99 D9 110 4698 6 C 2 25 34 648 G 5 68 415 31 D 9 111 4978 0 D2 26 36 708 A5 69 440 00 E9 112 5274 0 D 2 27 38 890 Ag 70 46616 F9 113 5587 7 E2 28 41 203 B5 71 439 88 F 9 114 5919 9 F2 29 43 653 C6 72 523 25 G9 115 6271 9 F 2 30 46 249 C 6 73 554 37 G 9 116 6644 9 G2 31 48 999 D6 74 587 33 A9 117 7040 0 G 2 32 51 913 D 6 75 622 25 A 9 118 7458 6 A2 33 55 000 E6 76 659 26 B9 119 7902 1 A 2 34 58 270 F6 77 698 46 C10 120 8372 0 B2 35 61 735 F 6 78 739 99 C 10 121 8869 8 C3 36 65 406 G6 79 783 99 D10 122 9397 3 C 3 37 69 295 G 6 80 830 61 D 10 123 9956 1 D3 38 73 416 A6 81 880 00 E10 124 10548 1 D 3 39 77 781 A 6 82 932 32 F10 125 11175 3 E3 40 82 406 B6 83 987 77 F 10 126 11839 8 F3 I 87 307 C7 84 1046 5 G10 127 12543 9 F 3 42 92 499 C 7 85 1108 7 220 CHAPTER 12 Creating ev
44. Bus B Vol 6 6 dB m W Touch Fan Center i BASS TAST Fx 2 foon a a F Post Fx 1 Inf e FX 2 0 0 dB FX 3 Inf hs Bus 4 InF Bus B 3 3 dB Bus C Inf Tip f you can t see the multipurpose slider drag the bottom edge of the track header to increase its height 2 Drag the fader to adjust the level of the track sent to the assignable effects chain If you set the Dry Out faders in your effects chain to inf you can adjust the wet dry balance using the Volume and FX settings on the multipurpose slider Volume will adjust the dry signal and FX will control the effect signals 110 CHAPTER 7 You can also use the Sends control region in the Mixing Console window to configure bus sends For more information see Using audio and MIDI track channel strips on page 155 Tips FX sends are post volume by default To change to pre volume right click the fader handle and choose Pre Volume from the shortcut menu If you want to apply track panning including pan position and panning mode to FX sends right click the FX fader and choose Link to Main Track Pan from the shortcut menu When Link to Main Track Pan is not selected the track sends a center panned stereo signal using the track s current panning mode Select the Use legacy track send gain check box on the Audio page of the Preferences dialog if you want to configure audio track sends to behave as they did in ACID 6 0 and earlier When the check box is sel
45. Choose Show lt Plug In Name gt to open the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s controls e Choose Bypass lt Plug In Name gt to temporarily bypass a plug in When an effect is bypassed its button is displayed in red text Insert Fe Track Noise Gate Track EQ bo e Choose Remove lt Plug In Name gt to remove a plug in from the effects chain e Choose Presets and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset e To replace the current plug in right click the effect s button and then choose a new plug in from the menu Plug ins are organized in submenus by type EQ Dynamics Reverbs etc 176 CHAPTER 10 Adjusting assignable effects input levels When the Sends control region is visible each assignable effects chain displays controls you can use to adjust and monitor the input volume of the effects chain To show or hide the Sends control region click the Sends button in the View pane Changing an effects chain s output device When the I O control region is visible each assignable effects chain displays controls you can use to set the chain s output device To show or hide the I O control region click the I O button in the View pane To choose an output device click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu Monitoring output levels When the Meters control region is visible each assignable effects chain displays meters you can use to monitor output levels To show or hid
46. FX button sg accesses the Audio Plug In window from which you can add edit and apply effects to the track For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 Freeze Track button The Freeze Track button ona MIDI track converts a MIDI track to wav file effectively taking your soft synths offline and conserving processing and disk resources Mute button Clicking the Mute button temporarily suspends playback of the corresponding track allowing you to focus on the project s remaining tracks A muted track appears grayed out in the track view For more information see Muting or unmuting tracks on page 42 Solo button Clicking the Solo button isolates the track during playback by muting the project s remaining tracks For more information see Soloing tracks on page 43 Record Device Selector button Click the Record Device Selector button to turn input monitoring on or off and choose a recording device INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 19 Surround panner In 5 1 surround projects the surround panner allows you to view and edit surround panning settings for a track Double click a surround panner to view the Surround Panner window and make fine panning adjustments Volume fader This dedicated volume fader controls how loud a track is in the mix A value of 0 dB means that the track plays with no boost or cut from the software Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the v
47. For more information see Knobs on page 293 Encoder Groups buttons with knobs These control panning busses sound devices and track effects For more information see Knobs on page 293 Faders These control the track volume level and automation envelopes For more information see Faders on page 294 Preset buttons These controls allow you to move left or right through the BCFview virtual display For more information see Preset buttons on page 294 Hardware setup You can use the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID after you have installed the appropriate USB driver firmware firmware update utility and BCFview virtual display from the Behringer Web site at http www behringer com 1 First open and run the USB MIDI driver zip file v1 1 1 1 for BCF2000 Note After installing the MIDI driver the B Control Rotary Fader 2000 12 23 2004 1 1 1 1 will be visible under Sound video and game controllers in your system s Device Manager 288 APPENDIX B 5 2 Device Manager EEk File Action View Help aes 2 Floppy disk controllers A Floppy disk drives IDE ATASATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers Keyboards 1 Mice and other pointing devices Monitors B Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT ol Processors Sound video and game controllers Audio Codecs JM E Control RotaryiFader 2000 12 23 2004 1 1 1 1 P Legacy Audio Drivers wm et m IL
48. Funk 02 ial Hip Hop 02 Groove Editor Bounce Length beats e j Pre Groove 1 1 000 11 132 11 576 12 000 I Selected groove map i 1 1 d Li Li Li 1 1 I 1 1 000 192 i 1 576 1 2000 Post Groove ey IDE Note The grooves listed in the Groove Pool are specific to your project If you ve deleted grooves and saved your project those grooves will be unavailable unless you import the grooves again For more information see Importing a groove on page 126 WORKING WITH TRACKS 123 A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music Groove maps in ACID expand on the software s ability to match the rhythm and timing of files nondestructively and in real time e Breathe new life into your collection of loops and MIDI files by creatively applying grooves to change the rhythmic feel e Adjust the timing of a track to add or remove a human feel e Quantize and map multiple tracks or loops to a common groove e Extract the groove from an existing audio file e Create new grooves from scratch e Different grooves can be applied to an entire track or portions of a track so you can easily match loops with incompatible feels and tighten loosen grooves nondestructively Note Grooves cannot be applied to tracks that contain Beatmapped clips Applying or removing grooves From the View menu choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window With the Groove Pool and Groove tool amp on th
49. GM2 Controllers Controller CC Def Envelope Curve Type Modulation No Portamento Time No Channel volume No No No No No No No No No No Linear Fach Linear Fach Linear Fach KS Pan Linear Fadi Expression Damper Pedal Portamento On Off M Sostenuto Soft Pedal Timbre Harmonic Intensity V Release Time a Attack Time Linear Fad Switch Hold Fade Switch Switch Linear Fad Hold Fade Hold Fade E 4444444 44 44 4 qididi d a ei aia adi ay ay 4 C Show all controllers Hide all Envelopes Reset all Envelopes Remove all Envelopes 2 Select the check box for each controller you want to automate with an envelope If the controller you want to automate isn t displayed select the Show all controllers check box at the bottom of the dialog 3 Click the down arrow inthe Envelope box and choose a command from the menu Command Description Insert Envelope If the controller does not have an automation envelope No is displayed Click the down arrow and choose Insert Envelope to add an automation envelope to the timeline Show Hide Envelope If the controller has an automation envelope Visible or Hidden is displayed Click the down arrow and choose Hide Envelope or Show Envelope to toggle its display Click the Hide all Envelopes button at the bottom of the dialog to hide all controller envelopes on the track Reset all envelope points If the controller h
50. Gate plug in on track one ThrLvl AttTim RlsTim Bypass ud1 Track Noise Gate 80 0 2 90 100 0 Falsel 1 1 Noise gate 1 PE mode uses the following controls e V Pots 1 4 Turn to edit the effect s parameters For switch parameters such as Bypass press the V Pot to change the setting e V Pot 5 Turn to scroll through an effect s property pages e V Pot 6 Turn to choose from a plug in s available presets Press the V Pot to choose a preset e V Pot 7 Turn to edit the current effect for a different channel e V Pot 8 Turn to choose other effects for the current channel Press the Inserts button again to view effects chains PS is displayed in the Assignment display The following example shows the effects chain on track one Aud1 TrcekNoisGate Track EQ TrackCmprss eae Fs PS mode uses the following controls V Pots 1 3 and 5 Turn to choose other effects for the current channel Press to edit the selected effect and enter PE mode V Pots 2 4 and 6 After choosing an effect with V Pot 1 3 or 5 press V Pot 2 4 or 6 to add it to the channel e V Pot 7 If a channel has multiple pages of effects in the chain turn to display additional effects In the previous example Aud 1 1 2 means that track one has two pages of effects V Pot 8 Turn to choose effects chains for other channels When lt No Insert gt is displayed above a V Pot you can turn the V Pot to view effects that you can add to the c
51. MIDI 187 Add to Project with Events Adds the file to the current ACID project at the cursor position adds tracks to the track list and creates events for the MIDI note data on each track Envelopes are added to the tracks to represent MIDI controller data For Type 0 MIDI files a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track e For Type 1 MIDI files a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track Add to Project with Events Rippled Adds the file to the current ACID project at the cursor position adds tracks to the track list and creates events Existing events are shifted downstream to make room for your MIDI file Envelopes are added to the tracks to represent MIDI controller data For Type 0 MIDI files a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track e For Type 1 MIDI files a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track Open as New Project Starts a new project adds tracks to the track list and creates events for the MIDI note data on each track For Type 0 MIDI files a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file e For Type 1 MIDI files a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file Freezing MIDI tracks Projects that us
52. On is selected the behavior is similar to Auto mode but you will always hear the input monitor during recording monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording into a selected event Important Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer s performance Effect automation envelopes are bypassed during record monitoring 4 Position the cursor where you want to start recording 184 CHAPTER 11 5 Select the Arm for Record buttons on the track where you want to record Arming a track enables it for recording When a track is armed the track meter displays the track s level If input monitoring is not on the meter displays the level of your input source If input monitoring is turned on the meter shows the level of the input source plus the track effects chain 6 Click the Record button on the Transport bar to start recording 7 To stop recording click the Record button again or click the Stop button on the Transport bar The Recorded Files dialog is displayed Recorded Files Leg DMy Documents Sony ACID Pro 6 0 Projects Show after every recording session 8 Use the Recorded Files dialog to confirm the file name and location of your recorded audio Click Delete or Delete All if you do not want to save the recorded files or click Rename to change the file s name 9 Click Done to close the Recorded Files dialog Your recorded file is displayed as a new event in the time
53. Options menu choose Snapping and choose Grid Only from the submenu The button image next to the command indicates that it is active Snapping to all elements With snapping turned on you may choose to snap to all elements From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Grid Only from the submenu The button image next to the Grid Only command appears deselected when snapping to all elements Tip Press Ctrl F8 to toggle between grid only and all elements WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 89 Changing tempo time signature and key You can set a tempo time signature and key for your ACID project You can also make adjustments during playback You can add specific tempo time signature and key changes within a project using tempo key time signature change markers These markers appear on the marker bar above the track view When the cursor passes over one of these markers the master project tempo key and or time signature changes in real time Set the tempo time signature and key for the whole project or change these elements dynamically in the timeline 95 E 3 4 22 4 44 82538 4 M A T BPM 4 Project Key Project Tempo slider Project Tempo Project Time Signature Changing project tempo You can change the tempo of a project without affecting the project s key Changing tempo using the Project Tempo slider Drag the Project Tempo slider at the bottom of the track list Dragging the slider to t
54. Out port Repeat Steps 2b and 2c for each Mackie Control Extender e Click Apply Note MIDI ports that are in use by a Mackie Control or Extender displaya icon to indicate that they are not available for MIDI track input or playback 3 Choose your control surface a Select the External Control and Automation tab in the Preferences dialog b From the Available devices drop down list choose Mackie Control and click the Add button to load the default profile 4 Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog 5 From the Options menu choose External Control to enable the Mackie Control Universal Configuring channel mappings for Mackie Control Extenders If you re using Mackie Control Extenders you ll need to set up your channel mapping Channel mapping tells the software how the devices are arranged on your desktop For example if your Mackie Control Universal is on the left of your Mackie Control Extender you could configure the Mackie Control to adjust channels 1 through 8 and use the Mackie Control Extender to adjust channels 9 through 16 If you have a Mackie Control Universal positioned between two Mackie Control Extenders you could adjust channels 1 through 8 on the left Extender adjust channels 9 through 16 on the Mackie Control Universal and adjust channels 17 through 24 on the right Extender 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the External Control
55. Panner window Tip You can also use the surround panner in the track header to pan your track Panning mixer controls You may choose to route tracks to busses or other mixer controls such as soft synths or assignable effect chains and pan them as a group rather than panning each track individually Note When you route a track to a bus or soft synth control stereo two channel output is sent to the mixer control and the mixer control sends 5 1 six channel output to the Master bus 1 Adda mixer control to the project For more information see Using the Mixing Console on page 151 2 Route tracks to the mixer control For more information see Assigning tracks to busses on page 111 3 Double click the surround panner on the mixer control to display the Surround Panner window WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 239 Surround Panner Double click to display Bus A Trim A the Surround Panner Touch window waana OE SO ee aano eh TTTTITTTTLTTTT Tr Tr CT wae ne ee ee ne en np ee ee 0 8 4 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240 5 Close the Surround Panner window Tip You can also use the surround panner on the mixer control to pan your track Using the Surround Panner window Whether you re adjusting track panning or mixer control panning you use the same controls in the Surround Panner window View the Surround Pann
56. Preserve Duration Luantize grid o J J pla d d C Tuplet fail in time of a Offset by ticks Options Swing Strength i 3 Select your quantization options Item Description Quantize start Select this check box to force the beginning note on messages of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the grid Quantize release Select this check box to force the end note off messages of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the grid Preserve duration If you select Quantize start or Quantize release you can select this check box to maintain the lengths of notes Quantize grid Click an icon to select the resolution of the quantize grid Tuplet Select this check box to set irregular beat boundaries for the quantize grid For example to quantize to triplet beat boundaries in 4 4 time select the Tuplet check box and choose 3 in time of 4 Offset by Select the check box and type a value in the box to offset the quantize grid by the specified number of ticks You can type negative values to shift the grid backward Swing Drag the slider to add a swing to the quantize grid When you set this slider to 0 notes are quantized directly to the grid Increasing the setting shifts every other grid boundary forward set to 300 to shift every other grid boundary to the next grid division Strength Drag the slider to adjust how strictly you want to quantize For example to quantize directly to the grid set t
57. Stop recording Out 70 l 2 6 60B ii Center i Recor 5 Stop recording by clicking the Record button again or the Stop button E on the transport bar 6 A small dialog opens displaying the name and location of the file or files that were just created Click Done to return to the main workspace Recorded Files Le DeMly Documents Sony ACID Pro 6 0 Projects Delete removes selected file Delete Al Rename changes the name of a selected file Delete All removes all files in dialog Show after every recording session Done Done returns to track view When a check mark appears in this box ACID software displays this dialog after each recording session 182 CHAPTER 11 Recording into a time selection By making a time selection you specify where along the timeline to record The time selection also determines how long the software records Any selected events that occur within the time selection are split and the recorded data is placed into the time selection 00 05 24 103 139 L000 z Bass Guitar Oi E Zt OI The event s waveform is displayed as it is recorded and automatically ee acl u Midi Recorded f stops recording when the cursor reaches the end of the time selection S EEE Recording into an event By recording into an event you automatically create a new clip containing the recorded material that is the same duration as the selected event The edges of the selected event serve as
58. Yes radio button and click Next to detect measures and downbeats The file will be able to stretch compress with the project s tempo Select the No radio button and click Finish if you want to add the file as a one shot The file will maintain its original length regardless of the project tempo Open the Clip Properties window for a Beatmapped track switch to the Stretch tab and click the Beatmapper Wizard button 2 The Beatmapper Wizard will draw the file s waveform and place a marker to locate the first beat of the first measure Click the Play button to verify the marker s position If the marker is positioned on a downbeat click Next Otherwise drag the marker to the appropriate location and click Next Tip Click the Reset button to set the downbeat marker to its original position 3 The Beatmapper Wizard will draw the file s waveform and place a region to indicate the length of the first measure WORKING WITH TRACKS 113 Click the Play button to verify the measure s length If the region is positioned correctly click Next Otherwise drag the ends of the loop region to the appropriate locations and click Next Select the Metronome check box if you want to play a click track at the detected tempo e Click the Halve Selection or Double Selection buttons or drag the ends of the loop region to adjust the measure length 4 The waveform is displayed with markers at the end of the measure Drag the
59. a Select the External Control amp Automation tab in the Preferences dialog b From the Available devices drop down list choose Mackie Control and click the Add button to load the default profile c Under Active control devices double click Mackie Control to open the Configure Mackie Control dialog Preferences lea VST Effects VST Instruments ReWireDevices Video Editing Syne General Audio Audio Device MIDI Display Othe Folders External Control amp Automation Smooth and thin automation data after recording or drawing Set controls to default values when automation i turned off Active control devices Device Template Status Double click Mackie Control to open Mackie Control User Map Enulated MCU active 8 controllable channels the Configure Mackie Control dialog d From the Device type drop down list choose Emulated Mackie Control Device 290 APPENDIX B e From the MIDI input and MIDI output drop down lists choose BCF2000 Configure Mackie Control Device type Emulated Mackie Control Device 1 w Channel mapping Chan 1 8 t re BCF2000 should be selected under MIDI output ia ad ae 5 Click OK in the Configure Mackie Control dialog to close it 6 Click OK in the Preferences dialog to apply your changes and close the dialog 7 From the Options menu choose External Control to enable the Behringer BCF2000 Note The faders should automatically move into positions that
60. a kick drum on every beat to producing a heavy dance foundation Conversely configuring a file with twice its actual number of beats results in half time playback 1 Right click the desired track in the track list and choose Clip Properties from the shortcut menu The Clip Properties window appears 2 Click the Stretch tab 3 Change the value in the Number of beats box Constructing the wall of sound As mentioned previously it is sometimes preferable to color and thicken mixes without resorting to effects and other digital processing Working without the benefit of multitrack recording music producer Phil Spector colored his songs by having several instruments play slightly different parts For example he might have an acoustic bass an electric bass and a piano play slight variations on the same basic riffs These variations along with the different timbre of the actual instruments produced a dense sonic mass that became known as The Wall of Sound e To add this aural density to your projects experiment with using two three or even four tracks of similar instrumentation e Alter the pitch of specific tracks to help them cut through the mix For more information see Changing a clip s key on page 93 e Further differentiate specific tracks using pan and volume envelopes to color the project and simulate live performance For more information see Using track automation envelopes on page 112 e Make the effects even more pronounc
61. a live concert CD For a continuous recording you can omit the pauses after tracks for continuous playback You can manually insert silence between your audio files to create a pause Note The Red Book specification also requires a two second pause at the beginning of an audio CD This pause is automatically added when you burn your CD Position your audio files on the timeline in the order in which you want them to play on your CD Position the cursor where you want to insert the pause between files From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears SL Enter two seconds in the Amount of time to insert box 5 Click OK Two seconds are inserted in the timeline at the cursor position Inserting CD track markers You can use CD track markers in your project to indicate to the CD R device where to mark the beginning and ending of a track during the writing process A Red Book CD can contain up to 99 tracks 1 Position your audio files and add pauses between them as necessary For more information see Adding pauses on page 53 2 Position the cursor at the start of an audio file 3 From the Insert menu choose CD Track Marker The marker appears in the marker bar and is automatically numbered Important You must place your first CD track marker at the beginning of your project Audio placed before the first marker will not be burned to CD Tip Once you have inserted a marker you can move or delete them as needed 4
62. a media file 4 Click the OK button to apply your changes and close the Tag Editor dialog Viewing or creating palettes The palette view provides another way of working with tags that can be useful for more focused searching You can use a palette to concentrate on a portion of the current tag tree In the palette view tags are displayed as a grid of buttons instead of the standard hierarchical tag tree 1 Click the Change Tags View button E to toggle the display of the tag tree and palette view 2 Click the down arrow next to the button to choose a saved palette or create a new palette Creating a palette 1 Click the down arrow next to the Change Tags View button and choose New Palette from the menu The New Palette dialog is displayed In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the palette In the Rows box specify the number of rows of buttons you want to display in the palette In the Columns box specify the number of columns of buttons you want to display in the palette PS Click OK to create the palette The palette is displayed as a grid with empty buttons USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 73 Assigning palette buttons 1 Perform either of the following actions to display the Tag Chooser dialog e Click an empty palette button or e Click an existing button and choose Choose Tag from the shortcut menu 2 Select the tag you want to assign to the button 3 Click the OK button
63. again Tip Select a track and press V to hide a volume envelope or P to hide a panning envelope Press the key again to display the envelope Hiding effect automation envelopes on a track To hide effect parameter envelopes click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose Hide All FX Automation Envelopes from the menu To display envelopes again click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose Show All FX Automation Envelopes from the menu Tip Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes Removing track envelopes You can remove envelopes from tracks quickly and easily Note When you remove an envelope from a track and then add it again you must recreate its envelope points USING AUTOMATION 145 Removing volume pan bus or assignable effect envelopes 1 Select the track s from which you want to remove the envelope s 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes A submenu appears showing a check mark next to the envelopes being used 3 From the submenu choose the type of envelope you want to remove The envelope type is removed from the selected track s Tip Press Shift V to remove a volume envelope or press Shift P to remove a pan envelope Deleting MIDI controller envelopes Click the down arrow next to the Insert Hide Envelope button fe next to the controller s slider in the track header and choose Delete Envelope If you want to show or hide a
64. allows the user to add clips and opens the Clip Pool The Paint Clip Selector button shows the clip type icons For more information see Understanding clip types on page 34 Clip type icons 4 Loop One shot Talr Beatmapped i MIDI if Loop button is selected in the Clip Pool MIDI if Loop button is not selected in the Clip Pool Track view In the track view you can view and edit the events in a track The area in which events display is the timeline The track view contains other elements which are described in the following sections 20 CHAPTER 1 Marker bar 7 lt lt Beat ruler at 41 1 49 1 57 1 65 1 TROI__1 ellie uaa Lalla Pas YT cra LATIN PERCUSSION PROMO 01 LATIN PERCUSSIC TEE 1000 poeple tne bended Vv ZERO GRAVITY BEATS 5 witsPROMO 03 rey Tl anand Mababa h elise sell iae Ie 00 01 30 00 01 45 oo 02 00 Li W lt gt Pl EE K F WIN Zoom controls Transport Time ruler bar if displayed Marker bar The marker bar runs the length of your project and contains the tags for markers and regions positioned along the project s timeline Beat ruler The beat ruler allows you to place events in reference to the musical time of bars and beats This ruler is fixed and does not update when you change the tempo This allows the events in the tracks to m
65. and other unexpected results can occur when sound effects are applied to files that contain DC offsets Decibel dB Device Driver Digital Rights Management DRM Digital Signal Processing DSP DirectX Downbeat Downloadable Sound DLS Drag and Drop Dynamic Range Envelopes Equalization EQ Event File Format Frame Rate A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In ACID most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback A system for delivering songs videos and other media over the Internet in a file format that protects copyri
66. as a new track 1 Make a selection in the Chopper 2 Right click the selection and choose Chop to New Track or Chop to New Clip from the shortcut menu The Chop to New dialog appears Tip You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list 3 Inthe File name box enter a name for the new file From the Save as type box choose a file format for the new file 5 From the Template drop down list choose a template for rendering the file or click Custom to create custom rendering settings For more information see Creating custom rendering settings on page 49 6 Click Save If you chopped to a new clip a new clip is added to the original track For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 If you chopped to a new track the file is added as a new track in the project Using the Chopper with one shots Selections of loops and Beatmapped files transfer flawlessly between the Chopper and the track view because the beats are clearly identified However one shot files present more of a problem You can use the following method to create accurate single hit selections in one shot files 1 Verify that the snapping options are active If snapping is not active choose Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 2 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 4 is selected 3 Create a selection of the desired musical length in the Chopper For more information se
67. as trim controls or automation controls for track volume panning assignable effects send and bus send levels Adjusting the trim control affects the level of the entire track To display trim controls in the track header deselect the Automation Settings button Track automation Track automation will always affect all events on the track This means that any event envelopes will be calculated after the track automation For more information see Using event envelopes on page 65 Tip Choose a fade type from the Audio default drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to set the default fade type that will be used when you add volume and panning envelopes This setting is used only when you create new envelopes when you add a point to an existing envelope the new point always uses the same fade type as the preceding envelope point Also this setting is not used for event envelopes Mute automation Mute automation changes a track s mute state throughout your project Mute automation is either on or off with no fade between If you want to use fades apply volume automation When you apply mute automation to a track it s possible to have a track that is muted and soloed simultaneously The mute state overrides the solo state e If atrack s Solo button is selected the track is included in the solo group but it will be muted whenever the mute automation is set to mute the track e Ifthe track s Mute button
68. bus assignable effects chain or soft synth bus Scanning your computer for plug ins Scanning your computer for VST plug ins is a two stage process first you need to tell ACID where your plug ins are installed and then you can scan those folders for plug ins Note You don t need to scan for DirectX or ReWire plug ins These plug ins are registered with Windows and are detected automatically 1 From the View menu choose Plug In Manager if the window isn t already visible Plug In Manager A all Plu g Ins Audio FX mall di Automatable cd Categories DirectX di Faworites di Packaged Chains di Track Optimized cd Vendors Loli VST Name W Sony Pan W Sony Paragr W Sony Param W Sony Pitch 5 i Sony Resona i Sony Reverb iH Sony Simple if Sony Smoot W Sony Time 5 Category Channel Strips Equalizer Equalizer Pitch and Tim Modulation Reverb Echo Delay Filters and FX Pitch and Tim Technolog DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX if Sony Track Dynamics if Sony Track EQ Equalizer i Sony Track i Sony Vibrato DirectX DirectX DirectX DirectX ReWire Devices g 7 gt B Ableton Live Engine Dynamics Flanger and Ph di Favorites Soft Synths W Sony Volume Channel Strips of nua m P 4 mn DirectX F 2 Click the Configure VST button 22 at the top of the Pl
69. buttons to change the magnification of the waveform Important Grooves are not applied using the markers on the Stretch tab Autodetected stretch markers are used to establish a baseline for applying other grooves with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool User defined markers have no effect on groove quantization You can add move and delete beat anchors and markers on the Stretch tab Moving anchors You can drag beat anchors and stretch markers to map the sample data in the waveform to a specific beat Moving a beat marker f changes the audio that will be played at a beat anchor location e Moving a beat anchor changes the beat on which the audio represented by a stretch marker will be played Beat anchors snap to the current grid spacing Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping press Shift after you click Adding anchors Double click the marker bar above or above the beat ruler to create a new anchor and marker Deleting anchors You can remove a marker by right clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu or by double clicking it Resetting beat anchors Right click the beat marker bar and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu to reset the markers to their last saved positions Adjusting stretching properties for Beatmapped clips Use the Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window to quickly edit Beatmapper information for a clip without starting the Beatmapper Wizard After you ve edited a clip s prop
70. change markers There are several ways to edit a tempo key time signature change marker e Position the cursor on or after the marker and adjust the Project Tempo Project Time Signature or Project Key controls The marker s text reflects the change e Right click the marker choose Edit from the shortcut menu and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo Key Time Signature Change dialog e Double click the marker text and type the new value e Double click the marker and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo Key Time Signature Change dialog Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust Tempo to Match Cursor to Marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker Deleting tempo key time signature change markers To delete a marker right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers When you add a tempo change marker to the timeline you can choose to change tempo gradually between markers Tempo curves are perfect for ramping tempo up or down 1 Add a tempo change marker to the timeline or double click a tempo change marker to edit an existing marker 2 Choose a setting from the Transition type drop down list to indicate how ACID will interpolate tempo between markers Option Description Looks Like Hold No tempo change will take
71. change to a play icon during playback 3 Click the Stop Preview button i to stop the preview or turn off the preview feature by deselecting the Auto Preview button If the file is offline you ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement Tip To preview a media file in its associated media player right click the file and choose Open with Player from the shortcut menu 78 CHAPTER 4 Adding media to your project After you ve added media to your library tagged it and searched for specific files or related media you ve probably found just the right piece of media for your current project You can add media to your project from the Search Results pane by performing any of the following actions e Dragging a file from the Search Results pane to the project timeline The file is added wherever you drop it Tip You can also drag files from the Search Results pane to the Windows desktop a folder or to another application that is an OLE object linking and embedding drop target e Double clicking a media file in the Search Results pane if the Double click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box is selected in the Media Manager Options dialog The file is added to the bottom of the track list e Right clicking a media file in the Search Results pane and choose Add to Project from the shortcut menu The file is added to the bottom of the track list If the file is offline you ll be prompted t
72. click and choose l Use Vertical Meters Yol 6 6 dB Lil Touch from the shortcut menu Pan Center iij 2 BASS TAST When clipping is detected the peak meter displays a red Clip indicator _ 5443 42 36 30 24 18 1 I Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters This shortcut menu allows you to reset clip indicators choose a display scale toggle vertical display or turn output meters off Working with groups of tracks Select a group of tracks by holding the Ctrl key while you click the track header of the desired tracks Now you can adjust the volume panning track color and other track attributes simultaneously Using undo and redo You have unlimited undo and redo capabilities in ACID Each edit you perform in the project is added to an undo history which allows you to quickly restore the project to any of its previous states In addition undoing an edit automatically places it in the project s redo history where it can be quickly re performed However any new edit performed on the project overwrites the redo history Note The undo and redo histories are cleared when you close the project or exit the application GETTING STARTED 43 Using undo To undo an edit click the Undo button on the toolbar or press Ctrl Z Edits are undone in the reverse order they were performed Tip You can also undo the most recent edit by choosing Undo from the Edit menu
73. correspond with your ACID settings APPENDIX B 291 Using the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID The following sections describe the default control mapping for the Behringer BCF2000 when used with ACID Encoder Groups buttons The Encoder Groups buttons when used alone or with Editing buttons Push buttons Assignable buttons or knobs allow you to change a variety of settings in your project Knobs Encoder Groups buttons Upshift Input Output Downshift Editing buttons B CONTROL gt FADER I Store CF2000 METZIN EAN e aj z Learn Exit Editing buttons Items Description Upshift Learn Saves your project Upshift Exit Turns the metronome on or off Input Displays the sound device in the BCFview virtual display for each track In this example Microsoft Sound Mapper McSnMp is shown BLvh 1 FFv ESv FDNBv SSSv BOSv ESv SFv McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp McSnMp Note Turning the knobs displays other available sound devices for each track For more information see Knobs on page 293 Input Store Displays the effects for each track BLvh 1 FFv ESv FDNBv SSSv BOSv ESv SFva None TrcEQ None None Reverb Reverb None None Note Turning the knobs displays what effects are used on each track For more information see Knobs on page 293 Input Edit Removes the sound device or track information from the virtual track viewer Downshift Store Bypasses Trac
74. display a drum grid only if a drum map exists for the current patch You cannot edit drum maps for GM2 drum kits Synchronizing using MIDI timecode ACID can generate MIDI timecode MTC and MIDI clock as well as trigger from MIDI timecode These features allow ACID to be synchronized with other audio applications and external audio hardware Note The software cannot chase MTC or MIDI clock Generating MIDI timecode MIDI timecode is a standard timecode that most applications and some hardware devices use to synchronize themselves Stable MTC is generated at all available frame rates for other applications to chase 1 Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send timecode and a frame rate for the timecode These options can be found on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 262 2 From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu MTC begins generating wherever you click the Play button 226 CHAPTER 12 Generating MTC with an offset In some cases you may want to start sending timecode with an offset e g 01 00 00 00 to allow time for multiple devices to synchronize You can create an offset on the ACID time ruler to accomplish this For more information see Using the ruler offset on page 249 Viewing outgoing timecode You can view outgoing timecode in the time display located directly above the track list Right click
75. edited groove in other projects you ll need to export it as a groove file and import the edited groove in each project where you want to use it 1 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window 2 Select a groove in the top portion of the window Tip f you want to audition your edits in real time apply the groove to an event and start looped playback before you start editing the groove The bottom half of the Groove Pool window displays your groove as a timeline with beat anchors and groove markers to represent how beats will be adjusted You ll notice that this view is similar to the Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window Both windows contain beat anchors however the markers on these windows perform opposite functions the beat markers P on the Stretch tab are used to remove an existing groove from a file and the groove markers on the Groove Editor window represent a new groove that can be applied with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool e Inthe Groove Editor window a beat anchor represents the beat that will be adjusted or the source of your groove adjustment A groove marker jj represents the point in time when a beat will be played This is the destination of your groove adjustment A groove marker can occur before or after the beat anchor A line connects a groove marker to its associated beat anchor 3 Use the Length spinner control to adjust the length of the gro
76. eee eee e nesses eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 Adding a MIDI controller envelope cece ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 Configuring MIDI track controller automation ccc ccc eee e eee eeeneees 210 Adding a program change keyframe ccc ccc eee eeeen eee e een e eens eeeeeennes 210 Add a SYSEX keyfraMe ss oct wienewagasawadeGowschventewensacumntatensaewenoendegusenecseens 211 Automating VSTi parameters sssssssesssssesssecesssersssereseserssererrserresereso 211 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 Editing MIDI Clip properties i6660 dscewiaseads sewadvewssbs sa 0G Sen siwesaGureaed wens de 212 Editing a MIDI clip with the Piano Roll 0 ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eeennees 212 Editing a MIDI clip with the List Editor 0 ccc ccc cece cent eee ee ennees 212 Merging controller data from a MIDI clip cece ccc cence cee eee e eee ee ee eeeeeeees 212 Using the piano roll editor 0 ccc ccc cc cee ce cece eee eee ete eeeenes 213 Viewing the piano roll editor 6 ccc ccc ccc ccc ee eee e eee ee eee eeeeneeeees 213 PICVICWING VINO coc cetnce wee ETEA ah eee Gewese eed dame ce Wee Saeed manera e teen eaeees 213 Adding NOOC VENE sererek orerar eda admunen ava bieuieter era tewouton eres tees caro men 214 ECGITING NOTE EVENTS 0 2ccdcedeuedndadees bande eedeeda cdrns teed Ven eeweeedaresdadveeerueein 214 TOGDIING NOE SNADDING si04asvee sedate aecenndo5 tear eeanaete bd AON ORS ENO AREN eee 216 OUGN
77. er aE ee ee a 1 i OHGe amp SO Track view Out 54 48 42 W 24 18 B Inf s OG amp O l Zm ot 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 i OL Gr O JUNKYARD RH 54 48 42 3 30 24 18 12206 Out 4 n 90 000 4 a9 pm 7 Nore 1 O O P PH EBK OF Bl B 2 ae Divider X Ji Junkyard Rhythms A gt w El BH g E Mixing Console 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Aylin ait ee SED J Extremely Abrasiv 0 JUNKYARD RHYTHMS mPROM Preview Audio ae Audio IE Audio Audio JJ Extremely Abrasiv 2 JUNKYARD RHYTHMS mPROM ee J Fluid Dynamics 3 JUNKYARD RHYTHMS mPROM a B Friendly Fire J JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM MIDI Iracks Microsoft Master Master Master Master Master J Futurist Drum nB 2 JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM Audio Busses Touch Touh Touch Touch eb Touch IB Groove Elements X JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM Input Busses 0 0 0 D D J Groove Spectrum g 2 JUNKVARD RHYTHMS rwPROM THONE eae I oe moa J JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM z i Headstrong Groo Assignable FX i fe Be Be ie p Hip Hop R amp B Vor JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM g Inf Inf Inf Inf Inf In Fi J JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM i HornCraft l I p ic Hip 2JJUNKVARD RHYTHMS rwPROM Preview Bus Ji Hy aeii al J JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM x 2 4 Ji ILONA J JUNKYARD RHYTHMS rwPROM rE 7 7 7 J Jazz Trap Kit z 7 io J Junkyard Rhythm Meters 6 0 11 8 14 8 10 5 16 2 11 8 EY Www
78. existing events timeline position adjusts by the total amount of the time selection that is being cut deleted or pasted from the clipboard You may turn on ripple editing mode by choosing Ripple Edits from the Options menu or pressing Ctrl L Note Ripple edit mode is not available unless you re using the Time Selection tool 4 Cutting events in ripple editing mode Cutting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks This information is placed on the clipboard from which you may paste the information back into your project 1 From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode 2 Click the Time Selection Tool button 3 Select the events you want to cut If you want all events within a time selection to be cut do not select any events and continue to step 4 Selecting multiple events on page 38 4 Drag along the marker bar to make a time selection All events and or portions of events within the region are highlighted 5 Click the Cut button on the toolbar to cut the event s to the clipboard The cut events and their time information are removed from the selected track s and placed on the clipboard Existing events in the selected track s move forward to occupy the space created by the cut Cutting time selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time inform
79. for this option to work e Ifthe selected file type supports it you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers and regions in the rendered media file e Ifthe selected file type supports it you can select the Save sections as regions with a media file check box to include sections in the rendered media file If the information cannot be saved to your media file an sfl file will be created using the same base name as your media file e Select the Save each track as a separate file check box to save each track in your project to a separate file All of the volume adjustments panning FX and events are saved with the track You can also use this feature to create tracks that you can use in multitrack recording software or Macromedia Flash e If your project contains video you can select the Stretch video to fill output frame do not letterbox check box to have your video reformatted so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area called letterboxing e If your project contains video and you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video you can clear the Fast video resizing check box Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but your rendering time will increase significantly Click Save A progress dialog appears GETTING
80. functions may not match the labels on the overlay You can click the Default All button in the Configure Mackie Control dialog to restore the default settings 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the External Control amp Automation tab APPENDIX B 271 3 Double click your Mackie Control in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog Configure Mackie Control Device type Emaan Wc EN Channel mapping Chan 1 8 w MIDI input SB Audigy MIDI 15 6000 Ww MIDI output 56 Audigy MIDI 10 6000 ka User defined surface control mappings Mackie Button Modifiers Host Function Fook Switch 4 Transport TogglePlay Foot Switch amp Shift Fook Switch B Transport Rec Foot Switch B Shift PLAY Transport Pause PLAY Shift Trackview CursorPreview PLAY Alt RECORD Transport Rec RFC CORD Shift Trackviews Track Pender Tobe Available host Functions Function Current Mapping Project Wew Unassigned Project MewQuick Unassigned Project Save Save Project Saveas Unassigned Project Load Unassigned Project Redo Shift Undo Project Undo Undo Project UndoAll Unassigned Projech Clear IndaHiskarw linassiqned 4 To add or change a function do the following a Select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list b Select an item in the Available host functions list c Click the Assign button 5 To remove
81. horizontally window docking area and track list will be hidden Minimize restore the track list Show Hide bus tracks Description Add selected file or currently playing file to the track list Keys F9 Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Up or Down Arrow Ctrl Up or Down Arrow Alt Up Arrow Shift Up or Down Arrow Ctrl Shift Up or Down Arrow 1 Ctrl F11 or Alt Ctrl Shift 1 Ctrl F11 or Ctri Alt Shift F11 or Shift Alt Keys Ctrl Enter Cursor placement loop region and time selection commands Description Go to beginning of active loop region or viewable area if no selection Go to end of active loop region or viewable area if no selection Toggle cursor between beginning and end of loop region Time select loop region when Time Selection tool is selected Toggle previous selection Go to beginning of project Go to end of project Move left by grid marks Move right by grid marks Go to using measures beats and ticks Go to using absolute time Set end of time selection using measures beats and ticks when Time Selection tool is selected Keys Home End Numeric keypad 5 Shift Q Backspace W or CtrltHome Ctrl End Page Up Page Down Ctrl G Shift G Ctrl Shift G Description Center in view Move cursor to corresponding marker or select corresponding region Move left right one pixel Move to marker s Move left right to event edit points including f
82. in the group but you cannot create events with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge trimming Expand the folder track to edit individual events For more information see Using folder tracks on page 128 Adding and editing events You have added media to the project and tracks have been created for the media files Now you can add events to the track view The following sections describe three basic techniques used when working with audio events painting deleting and moving Painting events After you add a media file to your project you must paint it on the timeline in order to hear it When you paint on the media file s track you create an event that displays the file s waveform You can paint events on the timeline using either the Draw tool or the Paint tool Clips can also be painted on the timeline with the Draw and Paint tools For more information see Adding clips to tracks on page 101 Note Media files must be added to the project before either of these tools can be used to paint events Placing events with the Draw tool The Draw tool is the most common method of placing events on the timeline This tool allows you to add events one at a time In addition you can use the Draw tool to select edit and move events For more information see Adding and editing events on page 35 1 Click the Draw Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Draw from the submenu The pointer displays as a penc
83. is displayed in red text e Choose Remove lt Plug In Name gt to remove a plug in from the effects chain e Choose Presets and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset The current preset is indicated by a check mark e To replace the current plug in right click the effect s button and then choose a new plug in from the menu Plug ins are organized in submenus by type EQ Dynamics Reverbs etc Adjusting input bus send levels When the Sends control region is visible each bus displays controls you can use to route the input bus to assignable effects chains or to busses that are routed to hardware outputs A bus cannot send to a bus that is directly or indirectly routed to the Master bus To show or hide the Sends control region click the Sends button in the View pane When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected click the Channel Send button and choose a bus or assignable effects chain from the menu and then drag the fader to adjust the send level When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected the fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit send volume automation on the bus track Notes e The trim level is added to the automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB e To adjust t
84. it even when your audience s hardware has fewer channels than the original mix The button represents the current playback mode rt 5 1 surround output bee Stereo output q Mono output J Dim Output Attenuates the volume of all busses that are routed to hardware outputs by 20 dB so you can check your mix at a lower level or answer the phone Click again to restore volume Insert Audio Track Adds an audio track to your project Fe e Insert MIDI Track Adds a MIDI track to your project f Insert Assignable FX Creates an assignable FX chain that you can route to one or more tracks in your project To delete an assignable FX chain right click the assignable FX channel strip and choose Delete from the shortcut menu am Insert Bus Adds a bus to your project The Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog is updated to reflect the new number of busses To delete a bus right click the channel strip for the bus and choose Delete from the shortcut menu we Insert Input Bus Adds an input bus to your project To delete a bus right click the channel strip for the bus and choose Delete from the shortcut menu H Insert Soft Synth Adds a soft synth to your project To delete a soft synth right click the channel strip for the soft synth and choose Delete from the shortcut menu 152 CHAPTER 10 The Channel List pane The Channel List pane is displayed on the left side of the Mixing Console window To show or hide the window click
85. it meena ena RERIN A AA mio EA a ATE R 93 Changing an events Key sieescscscua ved eiieusswdeawierieent eins ends ANRE 93 Adjusting TUNG 645 6cendcarescouesesesocnnsseuneseuesheessine sateen eer eo wtee EONA 93 TUN CNG 3n0ce segs arecge conga sie E EA ates ERE EE ee an esas ox 93 POO TING E E EAE es eatece cones eu tuese eeu ta ese renter EETA NEAS es 94 enO ME GNO ODEN cares o4 0s6e seme EE EEE 6 een eaees 95 Working in the Chopper Window ccceceee cece eee e teen eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 95 Viewing the Chopper ccc cece cece SiNNERS eee teen eee EER 95 Changing the Chopper giid s accutaddscoaddacedus Gowieawid sa Gerd eavsoobis ENATS 95 Changing Chopper snapping Options cece eee ee eee cence ence eee e ee eeeeeeeeenees 95 Magnifying the Chopper cece cence cence nen e nent eee e eee eee e teens 95 Previewing in the CHOpper cece cece cece eee EET OEE a ETE E 95 Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands 0 0 ccccc cece eens eee e ee eeenees 96 Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper ccc cece eee eee eeeeeeees 96 Creating selections in the Chopper cc cece cece cece eee e teen eens eeeeeeeaenes 96 Placing files in the Chopper ccc ccc cece cece eee nee e eee ee eee eee e eee eeeeennees 97 CREATING SClECHONS canacccrenniatinceansricuunes oa4ananines sae unumasaenceeudeiioeuseae wie 97 Creating selections of a specific musical length ccc c
86. left speaker should be positioned 30 left of center and the speaker in the surround panner is located 45 left of center To produce a true 45 left of center pan the signal is panned between the front and rear left speaker Using the grid to monitor panning The grid in the Surround Panner window helps you to visualize how your panning will sound The grid s spacing changes to match the current pan type The vertical lines represent the points where the left to right signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively at the far left line the left channel is 6 0 dB louder than the right channel The horizontal lines represent the points where the front to rear signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively As you adjust the Center fader the lines move forward or backward to compensate for the center channel gain Note The grid assumes that you re using a correctly set up surround system matched speakers and ideal positioning Variations in your monitoring system will cause inconsistencies between the graph and perceived output Automating panning You can automate panning on a track or mixer control by adding keyframes Keyframes are similar to envelope points in that they mark specific locations in the track where settings change However unlike envelope points keyframes appears just below the track to which they apply To add panning keyframes to a mixer control you must first view the mixer control in track view From the V
87. match what you hear after you enable Interpolate position you can attempt to compensate using the Position bias slider Moving this slider offsets the position forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the device When you select this check box buffers are not created prior to starting playback Some devices do not behave properly if you clear this check box If your audio stutters when you start playback try selecting this option Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used Adjusting this setting can decrease gapping or help you synchronize the input and output for record input monitoring Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate the buffer size you want to use Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the priority that is assigned to your audio buffers Increasing the buffers priority can help you attain smoother playback but it can also adversely affect other processes Customizing ASIO Port Naming When you use an ASIO sound card default names are displayed in ACID for each of the device s ports If you have a simple setup the default names probably work well enough for you However if you have a complex setup customizing the port names can help you keep track of your routing with meaningful labels For example if you have your control room monitors connected to outputs 1 and 2 on your sound card you could replace the default MainOut 1L and MainOut 1R port names wit
88. mode is selected When the button is not selected the buttons control trim static values 2 Bypass FX Press to bypass enable all audio effects 3 Metronome Press to turn the metronome on or off Hold Shift and press to toggle metronome countoff 4 Surround Press to toggle the project properties between stereo and 5 1 surround mode 5 Downmix Press to toggle the state of the Downmix Output button in the Mixing Console window 6 Dim Press to toggle the state of the Dim Output button in the Mixing Console window APPENDIX B 279 Project buttons The Project buttons perform various project level commands o e 0 ye ee 1 2 2 ee IIE 7 Item Description 1 Save Press to save your project 2 Undo Redo Press to reverse edit operations Hold Shift while pressing the button to reverse an undo operation 3 OK Not used 4 Cancel Not used Timeline buttons The Timeline buttons perform various commands for the project timeline aH O0000 e eae ee 4 I ee 5 6 7 Item 1 Marker Region Loop Select Mark In Go to In Mark Out Go to Out Event Trim Center Cursor 280 APPENDIX B Description Press to place a marker at the cursor position Hold the Ctrl button while pressing the button to remove a marker Press to convert the current selection to a region Hold the Ctrl button while pressing the button to remove a region Press to toggle looped playback mode Hold the
89. monitor the rendered file as it is created If metronome count in is enabled it will be turned off before real time rendering begins If the metronome is enabled for playback it will not be included in the rendered output For more information see Using the metronome to count off for playback or recording on page 181 1 From the File menu choose Real Time Render 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your file Important When using real time rendering render your project to a local hard drive Rendering to a network folder or removable drive can result in gapping 3 Type a name in the File name box or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing file 4 Click Save to start rendering your project from the beginning of the timeline Publishing to the Internet When your project is finished you have the option of publishing it to the Internet The most common place to publish your project is ACI IDplanet com a virtual community of ACID users ACIDplanet com allows you to do the following Share your music e Listen to projects built by other ACID enthusiasts e Download free loops e Enter remix contests co sponsored by Sony and major record labels Publishing your project to the Internet involves two distinct procedures creating a personal account and uploading the project Creating a personal account You can c
90. non automated effect versus an automated effect Removing plug ins from chains 1 Click the Track FX button The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Right click the plug in and choose Remove from the shortcut menu or click the Remove Selected Plug In button R 3 Click the Close button E3 to close the Audio Plug In window Tip To remove all plug ins in a chain right click the Track FX button t and choose Delete All Removing or bypassing all effects on tracks You can clear a track of all effects by right clicking the Track FX button and choosing Delete All from the shortcut menu You can bypass all of a track s effects without removing them by right clicking the Track FX button and choosing Bypass All from the shortcut menu To apply them again right click the Track FX button and choose Enable All from the shortcut menu Routing tracks to an assignable effects chain Routing tracks to an assignable effects chain allows you to assign multiple tracks to a plug in chain In order to route tracks to an assignable effects chain you must first add an assignable effects chain to your project For more information see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 1 Click the label on the multipurpose slider label and choose the desired assignable effects chain from the submenu The label changes to reflect the name of the assignable effects Bass Guitar Gir I Out cf 48 iE z 8 2 E e SoundMA Digital Audio 1 50
91. on page 95 Previewing clips Select a clip in the clip list and then click the Play button B to play it Click the Stop button to stop playback Changing an event s clip 1 Select the events you want to change 2 Right click a selected event and choose Event Clip The track s current clips are displayed in a submenu 3 Choose the clip you want to use from the submenu All selected events are updated to use the new clip Tip Press C or Shift C to change the selected event s clip by cycling forward or backward through the track s clips WORKING WITH TRACKS 103 Pitch shifting audio clips You can use the Clip Properties window to pitch shift all events on the track associated with a specific clip For more information see Adjusting pitch shift on page 117 Using the Clip Pool to manage clips You can use the Clip Pool to organize each track s media In the track header click the Paint Clip Selector button and then choose Clip Pool The clip list displays each track s clips the number of times the clip is used on the track and the path to the media file Clear a clip s check box to remove it from the Paint Clip Selector menu without removing it from the track To make the clip available again select the check box To set the active clip click the space next to a clip s check box The icon indicates which clip will be used for creating events with the Draw or Paint tool Click the Remove Unused Clips button to re
92. preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB 178 CHAPTER 10 Chapter 11 Recording Audio ACID software can record audio into multiple mono or stereo audio tracks while simultaneously playing back existing audio and video tracks You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware Audio is recorded to a media file on your computer and into an event on the timeline You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection Audio output from your computer during recording is not necessarily recorded with the new audio Recording does not alter any of the source media files in your project Even when recording into an existing event you are not overwriting the data in that event Instead the data is recorded into a new take for that event and saved to a media file on your hard drive For information about real time MIDI recording MIDI merge recording and MIDI step recording see Recording MIDI on page 189 Setting up your equipment There are numerous ways to connect your equipment to your system Refer to your equipment s documentation for specific setup instructions The following are some possible general configurations Basic setup This setup includes a simple microphone and speaker that are connected to the computer s sound card With a m
93. section label 68 Moving rendering templates 49 Moving sections 67 Multichannel MIDI files 187 Multipurpose slider 41 Multistream MIDI files 187 Mute automation 137 Muting Editing volume automation 42 Tracks 42 Note durations 198 Note velocity 198 Offsetting tracks 298 One shots Clips 34 Selecting in the Chopper 100 Online help 15 Opening Media files 31 Projects 30 Other preferences tab 263 Overview of ACID 16 Painting events 35 36 Palettes 73 Assigning buttons 74 Clearing buttons 74 Creating 73 Panic button 222 Panning Adjusting for input bus 171 Automation 138 vi INDEX Pan types 113 241 Surround 239 Tracks 41 112 146 Panning audio Envelope 142 Pasting Events 55 In ripple mode 63 Tracks 41 Patch maps 223 Piano roll editor 196 213 Adding note events 214 Continuous controller information 215 Deleting note events 216 Editing note events 214 Previewing MIDI 213 Quantizing note events 216 Selecting note events 215 Snap to scale 216 Undoing and redoing 216 Pitch shifting Clips 93 Events 64 93 Projects 91 Playing projects 45 Bypassing audio effects during playback 46 Playing from the cursor position 45 Playing the entire project 45 Using playback options 45 Using the transport bar 45 Plug In Manager Using ReWire devices 135 Using soft synths 136 Plug In Manager window 24 Plug Ins See Effects Post roll 183 Preferences Audio 255 Au
94. see Using the Media Manager on page 69 Adding media files from the Open dialog There are three ways to add media files from the Open dialog e Select the desired file and click Open e Right click the selected file and choose Select from the shortcut menu e Double click the selected file Adding media files from outside the application You can also add a media file to a project by dragging it from Windows Explorer to the track view Adding multiple media files simultaneously To add multiple media files to the project Ctrl click or Shift click to select the files and drag them to the track view or the track list Extracting media files from CD You can extract 44 100 Hz 16 bit stereo data from CDs Extracted CD tracks are added to new tracks in your ACID project 1 Insert a CD in the CD ROM drive 2 From the File menu choose Extract Audio from CD The Extract Audio from CD dialog appears 3 Ifyou have more than one CD drive choose the CD drive that contains the audio you want to extract from the Drive drop down list 32 CHAPTER 2 4 From the Action drop down list choose how you want to extract audio E Extract Audio from CD Actor Read by track k e Choose Read by track and select each track you want to racks to extract extract Each track is extracted to a new track in your project z Sah a e 00 02 33 0 amp 04E5 02 02 32 0204 65 04 48 65 02 44 00 e Choose Read entire disc to extract the curre
95. shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose the type of MIDI monitoring to be displayed Once you have made your selection the time display window displays both the MIDI code being input or output and a status message Setting default track properties Each new track has certain default properties including height volume pan type and track effects You can modify these track properties and then use the modified track as a standard for all new tracks you create 1 Modify a track s volume pg 41 pan type pg 113 height pg 40 and track effects pg 101 2 Right click the track header and choose Set Default Track Properties from the shortcut menu Set Default Track Properties Ei Select the properties to use a future defaults for new tracks These properties will default to the values of the current track IY Volume W Pan Type I Height T Track Fx IY MIDI Editors Restore original defaults Cancel 252 APPENDIX A 3 Select the check boxes for properties you wish to set Clear the check boxes for the properties you wish to leave as they are Tip Select the Restore original defaults check box to return to the original track properties 4 Click OK Setting ACID preferences From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog APPENDIX A 253 Using the General tab Item Automatically open last project on startup Show logo splash screen on startup Use Net No
96. single stream MIDI files to a track to add clips When you drag multistream MIDI files to a track tracks and events are created You can also drag events across tracks When you drag an event to a new track the event is added to the new track where you drop it and a clip is added to the track s clip pool e You can use the Chopper window to create new clips from the track s existing media For more information see Using the Chopper on page 95 Ifyou want to add a clip to a track without creating an event drag a file from the Windows Explorer Explorer Window or Media Manager window and drop it on the Paint Clip Selector button Guitar ol po Sa ii Yo 31d g E Touch Pan 100 L Bj 4E Hold Shift while clicking the Paint Clip Selector button to display the Open dialog where you can add a new clip WORKING WITH TRACKS 101 Setting the active clip and creating events It is simple to set active clips and create events with ACID 1 Click the Paint Clip Selector button in the track header A menu is displayed to list the track s current clips Piano amp 1 fa american PIANO PROMO 01 fl AMERICAN PIANO PROMO 02 Vol 31d bog Touch l a i aii iii a a i T iil n Pan 100 L jH 2 AMERICAN PI AMERICAN PIANO PROMO 02 EE AMERICAN PIANO PROMO 01 Mone Add clip Clip Pool 2 Choose a clip from the menu The selected clip is used for creating ev
97. step is to add media to the project You can use the Explorer window to locate preview and add media to your project You can also extract audio from a CD or download media from the Web If you have ACID you can also use the Media Manager to locate and add media files Previewing media from the Explorer window The Explorer window allows you to preview files in looped playback at the current project tempo before adding them to your project You can also preview files in the Explorer in conjunction with playing your project thereby allowing you to preview how a file will sound in the project To preview files use the Start Preview Stop Preview E and Auto Preview buttons at the top of the Explorer window 30 CHAPTER 2 Previewing a media file 1 Select the media file in the Explorer window that you want to preview 2 Click the Start Preview button The media file begins looped playback You can monitor its levels on the preview bus 3 Click the Stop Preview button to end playback Previewing multiple media files You can use the Explorer s multiple selection preview feature to preview a group of files in the order that you select them 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences In ACID click the Other tab of the Preferences dialog and select the Enable multiple selection preview in Explorer window check box If you want you can enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop box Secon
98. tab Choose Velocity from the drop down list at the top of the page Select the Enable check box Select a check box to indicate whether you want to edit note on or note off velocities Item Description Change Start Velocity Select this check box to edit note on velocities Change Release Velocity Select this check box to edit note off velocities Select a radio button to indicate how you want to change velocity Item Description Invert Select this radio button to invert note velocities When you invert a velocity it is subtracted from 127 negative values are forced to positive so a note with a velocity of 127 will be 0 after inversion a velocity of 10 will be 117 and so on Set to Select this radio button and drag the slider to change note velocities to a specific value Add Select this radio button and drag the slider to add or subtract a constant offset to note velocities Scale by Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply note velocities by a percentage For example setting this slider to 50 would reduce all note on or note off velocities by half Limit Select this radio button and type values in the Min and Max boxes to restrict note velocities to the specified range For example if you type 40 in the Min box and 90 in the Max box velocities below 40 will be set to 40 velocities greater than 90 will be set to 90 and velocities between 40 and 90 will be unaffected Note Note on velocities are bound b
99. tab in the Track Properties window and then select the patch you want to assign to the keyframe 210 CHAPTER 12 Add a Sysex keyframe 1 Right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelope and then choose Insert Sysex from the submenu 2 UsingtheDraw orEnvelope tool double click in the track s keyframe row to add a keyframe s Bonaflipis Luppus 3 To edit a keyframe double click it to display the System Exclusive Editor dialog Tip To hide the Sysex keyframe row without removing keyframes right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelope and then choose Hide Sysex from the submenu You can view the keyframe row again by right clicking the track header choosing Insert Remove Envelope and then choosing Show Sysex Automating VSTi parameters You can use the soft synth bus track to control parameter automation for VST instruments Adding parameter automation envelopes 1 Select the bus track header for a VSTi soft synth 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and then choose Soft Synth Automation from the submenu The Soft Synth Parameter Automation dialog is displayed 3 Select the check box for each parameter you want to automate with an envelope 4 Clickthe down arrow inthe Envelope box and choose a command from the menu Item Description Insert Envelope If the parameter does not have an automation envelope No is displayed Click the down arrow and choose Insert Envelop
100. that allow you to adjust the tempo of a project to easily synchronize audio with specific video frames Add your audio track s and video to your project If the Video Preview window is not displayed choose Video from the View menu Click the Play button to begin playback 1 2 3 4 Press H each time you want to place a time marker at a frame you want to emphasize where an explosion is heard for example 5 Click the Stop button to stop playback 6 Return to the leftmost time marker and fine tune its placement so it coincides exactly with the desired video frame Tip Holding Alt while pressing the right or left arrow keys allows you to step the cursor through your video by individual frames You may need to drag your time marker to the cursor to get it on the desired frame 7 Place the cursor at the point to which you want to synchronize your time marker For example you might want the frame that you marked in step six to coincide with a downbeat 8 Right click the time marker and select Adjust Tempo to Match Marker to Cursor from the shortcut menu The new tempo appears in the track list 9 Press T to insert a tempo change marker The adjusted tempo is detected and inserted into the tempo marker s box The tempo change marker preserves synchronization between the time marker and location on the beat ruler as you perform editing further down the timeline For more information see Adding tempo key time signature change
101. that will be used for tracks that you extract from audio CDs Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Render project This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you render your project Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Render to new This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you render to a new track Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Chop to new This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you create new tracks with the Chopper window Click the Browse button to choose a different folder New MIDI This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you export MIDI Click the Browse button to choose a different folder MIDI files are not created when you record MIDI or create new MIDI clips MIDI data for clips is stored within the ACID project This box displays the path to the folder where default grooves for new ACID projects are saved Click the Browse button to choose a different folder This folder is also used as the default location for saving exported grooves from the Groove Pool window Displays the folder where temporary files are stored Click Browse to specify a new folder When you add a media file to a project from a removable device a copy of the media file is stored in a temporary files folder This keeps the media file available for use even if the source of the media is no longe
102. the appropriate loops Similarly you could create tags for genres moods seasons client names locations scenes performer names and so on When you create a new library a default tag tree is displayed in the Tags pane You can create your own tags to customize the tags for your needs Tags are the fastest way to search a media library and they require very little disk space Tags are saved in your media library If a media file exists in multiple libraries tagging the media file in one library has no effect on the other libraries unless you save the tags to the files and use the Add Files to Media Library dialog to update tags and custom properties for all files Tip Ifyou want to see which tags are associated with a file as you re adding or removing tags drag the Tags column in the Search Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time Creating a tag Adding tags creates new tags in the current library only 1 Click the Add Tag button to add a new tag to the tree If a tag is selected the new tag will be added below the selected tag If no tag is selected the new tag will be added to the bottom of the tag tree 2 Type a name for the tag Press Enter 4 Ifyou want to change the icon used to display the tag right click it and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog 5 Ifyou want to change the tag s location drag it to a new location in the tag
103. the down arrow next to the Properties and Layout button amp and choose Show Channel List from the menu or right click the Mixing Console window and choose Show Channel List from the shortcut menu The top of the Channel and Group List pane displays a listing of all tracks busses and assignable effects chains in your project Select a channel s check box to include it in the Mixing Console display or clear a check box to hide the channel without removing it from your project Clicking a track bus soft synth or assignable effects chain in the Channel List pane selects that channel You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple channels to perform ganged edits The View pane The View pane is displayed on the left side of the Mixing Console window If the Channel List pane is visible the View pane is displayed between the Channel List pane and the Channels pane You can use the buttons in this pane to show or hide components in the Mixing Console Item Show All Audio Tracks MIDI Tracks Audio Busses Soft Synths Assignable FX Master Bus Preview Bus Insert FX Sends I O Meters Faders Meter Range Channel Width Description Click to show channel strips for all tracks busses and assignable effects chains Click to show or hide channel strips for audio tracks If your project does not contain any audio tracks this button is unavailable Click to show or hide channel strips for MIDI tracks If your proj
104. the format allows you to create custom settings the Custom button becomes active 3 Click Custom The Custom Template dialog appears 4 Make the appropriate setting changes for the chosen file format For information about specific controls in each file type s Custom Template dialog click the Help button g Tip To save the custom settings for future use enter a name for the template in the Template box and click the Save Template button ED 5 Click OK The Custom Template dialog closes Copying rendering templates between computers or user accounts You can make your customized rendering templates available on another computer or user account by copying sft2 files to the appropriate location in the new account or computer Rendering templates are stored in the following folders C Documents and Settings lt username gt Application Data Sony Render Templates ACID 7 0 lt plug in name gt in Windows XP e C Users lt username gt AppData Roaming Sony Render Templates ACID 7 0 in Windows Vista Notes The Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel e You can find a plug in s name by clicking the About button in the Render As dialog To make a template available on another computer or user account copy the sft file to the same location in another account For example to make JSmith s cu
105. the item displays an edit box type the parameter you want to search for If the item is displayed as a hyperlink click the value to display a control you can use to set the value 3 Choose whether you want to display files that match any or all of your search criteria e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that matches all of your search criteria 4 Select the check boxes for the advanced search criteria you want to include in your search or clear a check box to exclude that item Previewing media You can use the transport controls in the Media Manager window to preview media files 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to preview e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 2 Start playback e Ifthe Auto Preview button RE is selected playback will begin automatically e Ifthe Auto Preview button is not selected click the Start Preview button E to begin playback If you have multiple files selected they will be played back sequentially Each file s icon will
106. the menu The Track Properties dialog is displayed 2 Under the Output Settings tab select Drum Map from the drop down menu 3 Choose the drum map you want to use Track Properties Output Settings Input Filters Clip Pool Drum Map Controllers Voices Drum Map MIDI Crum Map Template k Device Description Standard Set 6M2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Standa L Room Set 6M2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Room L Power Set 6M2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Power J Electronic Set 6M2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Electro J Analog Set GM2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Analog Jazz Set GM2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Jazz Se L Brush Set GM2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Brush L orchestra Set GM2 Device Default General MIDI 2 Orches L SFY Set Me Device Default General MIDI 2 SFX Se lt MT gt Note You can also select drum maps by doing any of the following e Double click the MIDI track icon to open Track Properties dialog On the Output Setting tab choose Drum Map from the drop down menu e Click the Program button choose Drum Maps and then choose Select Drum Map 204 CHAPTER 12 Configuring MIDI input filters You can use the Input Filters tab set up MIDI message velocity or quantize filters Setting up MIDI message input filters Use the Input Filters tab to choose which notes or other MIDI messages you want to record or exclude from MIDI recordings d Pw Ys Track Properties
107. the shortcut MENU 4c a lt 005 dai e xu dirin ACTEN ENET ANENE catia btominaeuseadones 233 VIEWING ENG status Daf suiwa aden dew sew waiewdaeyaala kiana aa ieee anes EUW Sew a own 233 Previewing on external monitors ccc ccc ce cee cette eee eee eee ee eeeeeeees 234 oreo AIS VIGO EEE E E ieee mn cee E E ee ewer teen enone eeeeantenewes 234 Working with 5 1 SUrroUNd cc ccc ccc ccc cece eee e nent eee e eee e ee eeeeees 235 What is 5 1 SULOUNG 6 6 ccc eee t nE ENERE EE ESE EEES AO eee NEE EE 235 Setting Up surround Nardwalre ccc cece cece cece dttina nenoai Ee eana Esei 236 Setting Up Surround Projects xu 32e000s00 use enone esrene een eheoidecescreounece 236 Routing to hardware in the Mixing Console ccc cc ccc ccc cece teen teen eeeeees 237 Assigning audio to the LFE channel 0 ccc ee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 237 Adjusting VOUE sssr isisurricerreeure erene ke ee SEEE E ements owen coee boaee 238 Adjusting track volume o ociberoetewatisdeddateati sande staasieaadaas ena eeeehaseaedasanaar 238 Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels cece cece cece eee eee eeeeees 238 Adjusting channel levels cc ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee n eee e eee ee eeeeeeenees 238 Pail QUCIO EOE oases dana ican eens encanto near eee ba eae E 239 PANNING TdCKS s0gccunanantsaunaudouesetenduwnesacuenaencanotuenteens becaunmeneatevtuuan 239 Panning mixer controls 2 0 60 cece eee ee
108. the shortcut menu 2 Choose Add to Groove Pool from the submenu A new groove will be added to the Groove Pool window using the name of the clip you selected in step 1 Note Grooves that you create from existing clips will be available only in the project where they were created If you want to make a groove available to other projects export it to a groove file Tip You can also click the Add to Groove Pool button in the Clip Properties window to add a loop groove to the Groove Pool Duplicating a groove Existing grooves can serve as templates for creating your own grooves 1 Select the grooves you want to duplicate Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple grooves 2 Click the Duplicate Selected Grooves button amp The duplicated grooves are added to the Groove Pool 3 To change the name of a duplicated groove right click a groove and choose Rename from the shortcut menu 4 You can then edit the duplicated grooves as needed Importing a groove You can use the Import Grooves button to add grooves from groove files or other media files to the Groove Pool of your project 1 Click the Import Grooves button in the Groove Pool window The Import Groove dialog is displayed 2 Select the groove or media file you want to add Information about the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog 3 Click the Open button to add the new groove to the Groove Pool Tip You can extract a groove quickly by dragging a file
109. to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify the results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches 1 Add your search criteria a Click the Add New Search Criteria button _ in the Search pane The Search Criteria Chooser is displayed USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 77 b Double click an item in the Search Criteria Chooser or drag it to the Advanced section of the Search pane Search Results OOT EJ Clear Bit Depth 24 ACID Type Beat Count Tempo 267 Loop gt i6 115 000 C 268 Loop 16 115 000 A 269 Loop gt 8 115 000 D 270 Loop gt s 115 002 E oF lann gt 15 115 000 M Tips Ifan item in the Search Results pane displays a gt button you can click it to find related media For example clicking the button in the following example adds an item to the Advanced section to help you find other media with a beat count of 16 You can also drag a column heading from the Search Results pane to the Advanced section of the Search pane 2 Set parameters for each of your search criteria If
110. toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to move and click Move Up or Move Down 3 Click Close to save the toolbar changes and close the dialog Adding buttons to the toolbar A series of buttons are included that you may add to the toolbar These buttons are listed in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may also add separators on the toolbar to organize the buttons to suit your preferences You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on the dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 On the Available toolbar buttons pane use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and select it 3 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order For example if you want to add the Save As button and want it to precede the Publish button select the Publish button in the Current toolbar buttons pane Customize Toolbar ajx Available toolbar buttons Curent toolbar buttons ose Separator Reset nave As i fi Render As co CRS Help Ex Project Properties Ne A he Ripple Edits ag Cut Move Up n H Snap to Grid Only EL Copy Move Down 4 Click Add The new button is added above the selected button on the Current toolbar buttons pane gt Play e Paste 4 Tip You may also double click a button in the Avail
111. tooltip indicating the name of the envelope ee ee m ihr iat ee Track EQ Band Ganl _ Adding envelope points After you have inserted an envelope you can add envelope points to control the level of signal or amount of panning at specific points in time 1 Place the mouse pointer on the envelope line The envelope cursor Ep appears 2 Add an envelope point in one of the following ways Double click the envelope e Right click the envelope and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu Tip Ifyou add too many points you may delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu You may also clear all envelope points by selecting Reset All from the shortcut menu 142 CHAPTER 9 Drawing envelope points To create an envelope quickly you can draw freehand envelope curves in the timeline 1 WiththeDraw Envelope d4 or Time Selection F tool active hover over an envelope 2 Hold Shift and then click and drag over the envelope As you drag a trail of envelope points is created 3 Release the mouse button when you re finished drawing If the Smooth and thin automation data after recording or drawing check box is selected on the External Control and Automation tab of the Preferences dialog the number envelope points will be reduced when you release the mouse Unthinned envelope Thinned envelope Thinning envelope points Thinning envelope points decreases the nu
112. track assignable FX bus and soft synth channels cece cece ees 155 Using audio and MIDI track Channel Strips 0 ccc cc ccc ccc cee eee eee eens 155 Changho track SMaMe sacn0dte ceeds ern AN meade aye eared ioaval acer enw 156 Adding or editing track insert effects 2 0 ccc cece cece eee e eee eeeeneeneeneees 156 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 Adjusting bus or assignable effects send levels ccc ccc cece ec eee eee eee e eee eeeees 157 Change a track s input or OUTPUT device 6 ccc cece ee eee nee e eee e eee eeeeeees 158 Changing a track s automation mode cece ccc cece nent e eee e eee eeeeees 158 MULING OF SOIOING A track s4074r 0csseens canes teas aens an EE EAE EARNE AAI danas 159 Inverting a track s phase oteeds ace cuchaeateuonreseonpenwertundopeoosesenncareaseeeneauent 159 Arming a track for recording or toggling input monitoring ccc eee ee eee eee 159 Adjusting track panning or volume ccc ccc cece nnn eee e eee eeeeenennees 160 Using o tp t DUSSES lt v i rmiciannd ie dda ke deo cited kakak Aran Giese weeks econ eeeeaces 162 Adding or deleting Output busses cece eee ee eee eee e eee eee eeeeenees 162 ROULINGNDUSSES eer Enr Ee E EE EEEE seedy esueaetussee Gee cane tans eeu es 163 Assigning tracks to output busses cece eee e eens eeeeeanees 164 Adding or editing output bus effects ccc ccc cee eee e een eneeeneeneees 164 Automating effect paramet
113. vocal performances that sound as if they ve been sped up sometimes referred to as the chipmunk effect This option is only available for lastique Pro and Soloist Monophonic modes WORKING WITH TRACKS 117 5 Enter a value in the Formant Shift semitones box or use the spinner control to adjust the formants of all events that use the same clip Formant shifting can be used to deepen the tone of a vocal performance without changing the pitch For lastique Pro this amount represents the number of semitones to shift the timbre in addition to the offset required to compensate for any pitch shifting For example a setting of 0 000 applies formant correction with no additional shifting while a setting of 7 000 will apply formant correction and deepen a sound by 7 semitones This option is only available when the Preserve formants when stretching check box is selected Adjusting stretching properties for loops The Stretch tab in the Clip Properties window allows you to specify how pitch shifting and time stretching is handled for loop tracks Beat anchor Beat marker EJ Hy Reload Replace 2G DEA phe ph ht bp h bb phh ip G i I E J 1 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 560 00 00 01 000 00 00 01 500 00 00 02 000 00 00 02 500 H 10 00 03 000 oo 00 h hd DD DD DD PPD DD DDD DED DDD DDD DOD D all Clip Properties al ACID DJ EXPANDER vPROMO 04
114. window markers regions etc a t Allows you to automatically create crossfades when you overlap two audio events Track list This list identifies the track order in your project and contains the track s controls The following sections identify and briefly explain the controls located in the track list Arm for Record Record Device Selector Track number Bus Assignment Invert Track Phase Track name Track FX Setti ettings Mute Le _e Solo 54 4 d 35 7 AUDIO TRACKS 6 0 d amp a i Center i areae ly g SF Acoustic Strum 02 pd E F rk o T Volume slider Automation Minimize Track Height Maximize Track Height ue MIDI TRACK F Bells AiO nk MIDI Input A Auto All H analog Factory 1 Ma 0 oO Program MIDI Output wol 100 m tek Touch hi Controller data sliders Fan Cenker MIDI Recon Pitch Bend 5 192 PS MIDI controller data a c ee Insert controller envelopes Modulation ofi is Porkamento Time ofe Ge Minimize Maximize Track Height buttons These buttons control the track s appearance size on the track list and the track view Track number This area identifies the track s number in the project You can quickly change the track order by dragging selected tracks within the track list Track name When you add a file to a project the track name is initially the same name as the file s name Right click the track name and choos
115. you want to freeze VSTi technology does not allow you to freeze multiple ports Ha sollte 0 MIDI track before freezing 0 ie 2 Auto All DLS Soft 1 W Piano 1 Vol 100 Touch Pan Center ij gt MIDI Clip 27 Roundabout mibitrack after freezing all controls Sem nF other than Mute Solo Volume Pan and n i Automation Settings are unavailable Vol 00de I fy Touch Pant Center i 188 CHAPTER 12 Editing frozen tracks After you freeze a MIDI track you can adjust track volume and panning only Trim and automation controls are available in the track header and Mixing Console These controls behave as they do on an audio track For more information see Adjusting the mix on page 41 A frozen MIDI track does not allow you to edit the following Moving splitting deleting and drawing events are not available e MIDI data such as inline MIDI editing continuous controller messages SYSEX data volume and pan messages and voice changes is frozen e MIDI filtering is not available e MIDI track properties cannot be edited e The Chopper window is not available Unfreezing tracks 1 Select the tracks you want to unfreeze 2 Click the Freeze Track button ona selected track or right click a selected track and choose Freeze Track from the shortcut menu to clear the check box Recording MIDI You can use an external MIDI controller or the ke
116. your control surface Use the External Control amp Automation tab in the Preferences dialog to select the control surfaces you want to use and adjust their configuration For more information see Using the External Control amp Automation tab on page 265 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the External Control amp Automation tab 3 Choose a device from the Available devices drop down list and click the Add button The device is added to the Active control devices list 4 Double click the entry in the Active control devices list to display the configuration dialog For information about configuring specific MIDI controllers see Setting up a Mackie Control Universal on page 269 Using a Frontier TranzPort on page 283 Configuring a generic MIDI controller on page 285 or The Behringer BCF2000 control surface on page 288 Using your control surface This section describes how to use your control surface in general terms For information about your specific device please refer to the manufacturer s documentation 1 From the Options menu choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces 2 If necessary press the Automation button on your control surface 3 Click the Automation Settings button for each track you want to edit with the control surface and choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch to enable automation recording For more information s
117. 0 fps frames per second is typically used To synchronize with video 29 97 fps drop is usually used APPENDIX E 313 Frequency Spectrum Groove Hertz Hz In place plug in Insert Increment Insertion Point Loop Marker MIDI Channel Media Control Interface MCI Media File MIDI Clock MIDI Port MIDI Timecode MTC Multiple Bit Rate Encoding 314 APPENDIX E The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the frequency range is basically 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music By deviating from a machine quantized beat individual beats may be played early or late to change the feel of the music Applying a groove can simulate the timing patterns of human musicians lending a human feel to MIDI generated music or quantizing several distinct pieces of music to a common timing The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS An in place plug in processes audio data so that the output length always matches the input length A non in place plug in s output length need not match a given input length at any time for example Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings can creat
118. 2000 A EZELLEN ujip Editing buttons LI iTi ii itll LENT Pe FTT lilt hahni Ee kiii fii uhiti M E ihn da a nihil Tihalada didi hhl Sp E LE I ru fili AIEEE L Jee Preset buttons cae A Jii ME 1 Assignable buttons ON ea E EEEL LA E a pe EE EEE A eee bubala b a ELLE Llib UU ae iti l rads fH I tft it huhuli LITT pp Ip LL Sarees jy Note The following instructions describe using the Behringer BCF2000 only as an emulated Mackie Control Universal device However it can also be used as a generic controller To set up the BCF2000 as a generic controller see Configuring a generic MIDI controller on page 285 or the manufacturer s instructions Overview The buttons and knobs on the Behringer BCF2000 perform the following functions Encoder Groups buttons with Editing buttons These buttons control the save function metronome track effects display sound device display automation mode downmix output and bus display For more information see Push buttons on page 293 Encoder Groups buttons with Push buttons These buttons control track functions including mute solo track selection recording and adding a track to a project For more information see Push buttons on page 293 Encoder Groups buttons with Assignable buttons These buttons control play pause rewind fast forward record and home functions You can also add markers and regions to your project
119. 5 1 surround projects assignable effect chains routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Assignable effect chains routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information e Bus panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects busses routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning two channel information 26 CHAPTER 1 MIDI signal flow Track Volume Device or Soft Synth Assignment Soft Synth External MIDI Device Soft Synth Bus Audio Bus Master Bus FX Chain Bus Hardware Output Master Bus FX Chain Gain Mute Hardware Output INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 27 Notes on MIDI signal flow Soft synth panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects soft synth controls routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Soft synth controls routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information Bus panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects busses routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning two channel information 28 CHAPTER 1 Chapter 2 Getting Started Now that you have an understanding of the interface and controls found i
120. 73 Summary properties tab 29 Surround 235 245 Automating panning 242 245 Hardware setup 236 Keyframes 242 245 LFE channel 235 237 Panning 239 Rendering 245 Surround Panner window 23 240 Sync preferences tab 262 Synchronizing audio and video 231 Sysex keyframes 211 System requirements 15 Tagging media files 71 Tags Applying to media file 72 Arranging in the tag tree 73 Creating 71 Creating palettes 73 Deleting from library 73 Editing names or images 73 Removing from library 73 Removing from media file 72 Saving to media files 74 Subtags 73 viii INDEX Viewing palettes 73 Takes Recording audio as new 182 Tempo changes Marker 91 Project 90 Temporary files 31 264 Time Fitting projects to time 94 Inserting into projects 93 Time display 252 Time markers 84 Time ruler 21 249 Time selection Recording into 183 Splitting 59 Time signature changes Marker 91 Project 91 Timecode synchronization 226 228 Tips and tricks 297 303 Toggle automation mode 286 Toolbar 17 250 251 Track automation 137 140 Track automation envelopes 142 Track envelopes 142 145 Colors 142 Deleting points 143 Locking to events 145 Removing 145 Types 142 Track filters for MIDI 205 Track list 18 Track Properties window 23 115 123 202 Track view 20 Tracks Adding clips to 101 Adjusting bus send level 112 Adjusting general clip properties 116 Adjusting mix 41 Adjusting several simult
121. 8 to 32 767 For 8 bit sounds the range is 128 to 127 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the leftmost point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file A Microsoft file format that can handle audio and video presentations and other data such as scripts URL flips images and HTML tags Advanced Streaming Format files can be saved with asf wma or wmv extensions APPENDIX E 317 318 APPENDIX E Index Numerics 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack 235 245 246 5 1 Surround See Surround A AC 3 Encoder 235 245 246 Add channels panning model 113 241 Adding Events 35 Media to projects 31 MIDI tracks 187 Video 231 Adding notes 196 Adjusting bus send level 112 Adjusting section length 67 Adjusting the mix 41 Anchors Adding 121 Deleting 121 Moving 121 Reset beat anchors 121 Arming tracks to record 180 ASIO port naming 259 Assignable effects Adjusting levels sent from tracks 112 146 Automation 139 Volume envelope 142 Assigning patchmaps 225 Assigning tracks to busses 111 Audio Clip Properties window 115 Audio device preferences tab 257 Audio effects Automation 140 Audio Plug In window 23 108 110 Audio preferences tab 255 Audio properties tab 29 Audio signal flow 25 26 Automatic crossfades 60 Changing fade types 61 Creating 60 Automating Effects 112 146 Surround panning 242 245
122. A E teaser did EEA EE E E tive E E A E neon eed 195 Adding or deleting notes sunsnssussnesresesersorsorsersosserserseserrseseerrese 196 Editing Note POSIONS ssrresrerres dri erer EETA ESR EERTE TAREE EOAR ERER IARR E RENER 197 Editing NOLECUIAUION svete uns tvidwwavwnateuswtas EN E E N 197 EdItINO NOG VElOCIOY e502 oy ig etounedencaapedase sian EE E AREE AEEA 198 Processing and filtering MIDI events ccc ccc ccc cece ence eee eee eeenenees 198 Quantizing MIDI events ccc ccc cece eee eee e ene e teen eee e teen eeeeeeeeneeeeees 199 EGIUING VClOCILY 4 0i 4nercccelcsw 4d oaweuvanesd aunanusomeneeraadeanc donee aemed eons deanna 200 FARNO GUIGUON waveecevesessorsss ase EINTE EEANN NEE 201 Editing MIDI track properties ici isireierisrudisi undines tenn eee tent ENARA 202 Configuring MIDI track output SETTINGS ccc ccc cee eee teen ee eeeneeeeneees 202 Configuring MIDI input filters eee e een n ee eeeeeeeeees 205 Setting up MIDI quantize input filters 20 0 ccc ccc eee nent teen ee eeees 207 USING Tie CID POG icmcswsescnie noes nioiawressctaniammanecnecinanenstamennaoesntinrwnes 208 Toggling looped or one shot painting fora MIDI clip ccc ce eee eee eens 208 Editing a MIDI clip s time Signature ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e nent ee eenenes 208 MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes ccc cece cee eee e cence eee eeeeeeenaes 208 Adding a mute envelope ccc cc ccc ccc cece eee
123. ACID Pro Revised November 13 2008 After ACID software is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard appears This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Creative Software Inc Alternatively you may register online at http www sonycreativesoftware com at any time Registering your product will provide you with access to a variety of technical support options notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive to registered ACID users Registration assistance If you do not have access to the Internet registration assistance is available during normal weekday business hours Please contact our Customer Service department by dialing one of the following numbers Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Customer service sales For a detailed list of customer service options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday business hours Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of technical support options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support def
124. Adding effects to a bus track ccc cece ccc eee eee eee een nent eeeeeeneeneees 106 NC a DUST E E E raed aden ns wie E E dean ead tes cea oe euodes 106 SOIOING aHUS Tack aaqisicesacianoasseteciadsswse eN EEEREN 106 Monitoring bus track output levels cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeees 107 Automating VSTi parameters in soft synth bus tracks ccc cece cece eee e ee eneees 107 RESIZING US ACK acre wceen igen wedenehomnscoesonanouneure apie beteesneniwenebes 107 TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 WS IG TEAC CHCClS och sues EE E EEE EEE eee ies 108 Usmo TACK Cll COS ereinen irora ERA ANCENE ITEE ETEISEEN EAN TEA tak 108 Creating or adding to track plug in chains ccc cece cece eee tenn eeeeenes 108 Arranging plug in chain Order 0 ccc eee eee eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 109 Bypassing plug ins IN a chain ccc cece eee e eee e eee n eee eeeeeees 109 Bypassing effect AUTOMATION ccc ccc cece eee e teen eee e eee eee eeeeeenes 110 Removing plug ins from Chains ccc cece cece Teirin edrk r eee e eee AdE 110 Removing or bypassing all effects ON tracks ccc ccc cence eee eee e nent eeeeees 110 Routing tracks to an assignable effects Chain cece cece cece eee eee ee eneeees 110 Assigning tracks to DUSSES ccc cece eee ete eee ee ee ee ee eee e eee e eee eeeenenee 111 Using track automation envelopes ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee ee eeeeeeeees 112 Choosing stereo
125. B4 x eo o vol 100 Output CFF Pan Center External MIDI Device Preferences Pitch Bend 4fterbouch e Soft Synth 1 B4 Xpress Modulation Hm Insert Soft Synth Portamento Ti ee MIDI Channel 2 Choose a device from the list to send the current track to that device To route to a specific port in a ReWire 2 0 device choose your ReWire device application from the list and then choose a port from the submenu Note n order to render projects that contain MIDI tracks MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS VSTi or ReWire 2 0 soft synths Tracks that are routed to external MIDI devices will not be included in the rendered file For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 262 3 To choose which MIDI channel will be used to send MIDI data choose MIDI Channel and then choose a channel from the submenu Tip Ifyou want to select multiple input channels hold Ctrl and select additional channels from the MIDI Channel submenu Resetting MIDI ports When a MIDI port is stuck playing a sustaining sound a quick method to turn off MIDI ports is provided much like the panic button on MIDI hardware devices From the Tools menu choose Reset All MIDI Ports to send a global Note Off command to all MIDI ports Tip Press Ctri Alt F7 to reset all MIDI ports Rendering projects with MIDI tracks To render projects that contain MIDI tracks route the MIDI tracks to soft synths DLS sets rather than to external MIDI devices MIDI
126. CD track or MIDI file to your ACID project For more information see Adding media to the project on page 31 2 Click the Paint Tool button The Paint tool is selected 3 Press Ctrl and click in the track The entire file is painted onto the track at the position you clicked Note n a Beatmapped track the file is painted starting from the location you identified as the downbeat If the file contains pick up notes drag the left edge of the event to reveal audio before the downbeat Playing with duplicate tracks You can duplicate a track in your ACID project and then use the new track to create some interesting effects Detuning paired tracks Detuning a paired track is a quick and easy way to thicken an audio track without adding the additional processing of effects This trick works extremely well with synths pads strings and ambient sounds but you can also experiment with it to add body to drums basses and horns 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list The new track is the currently selected track 2 Use the plus and minus keys on your numeric keypad to change the pitch of the duplicated track Octave intervals e g 12 12 24 typically sound best when working with pitched audio however experimenting with other less ordinary intervals may produce surprising results When working with non pitched audio intervals do not matte
127. CENCE PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose syntax and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5 language Release 7 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the BSD licence as specified below The documentation for PCRE supplied in the doc directory is distributed under the same terms as the software itself The basic library functions are written in C and are freestanding Also included in the distribution is a set of C wrapper functions THE BASIC LIBRARY FUNCTIONS Written by Philip Hazel Email local part ph10 Email domain cam ac uk University of Cambridge Computing Service Cambridge England Copyright c 1997 2008 University of Cambridge All rights reserved THE C WRAPPER FUNCTIONS Contributed by Google Inc Copyright c 2007 2008 Google Inc All rights reserved THE BSD LICENCE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google Inc nor the names of their co
128. CID from using without uninstalling the plug in You can right click a plug in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored folder e The Unavailable folder contains plug ins that you have uninstalled since running ACID ACID preserves information about uninstalled plug ins so settings can be restored if the plug ins are reinstalled The Audio FX folder also contains additional folders you can use to organize and categorize your plug ins For more information see Organizing plug ins with folders on page 133 Displays your ReWire device client applications Select the All folder to display all ReWire clients The Ignored folder contains plug ins that you want to prevent ACID from using without uninstalling the plug in You can right click a plug in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored folder The ReWire Devices folder also contains a Favorites folder you can use to keep your most often used ReWire clients handy You can right click a plug in and choose Add to Favorites from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Favorites folder To create custom folders for organizing your plug ins you can right click a folder and choose New Folder from the shortcut menu Displays all your software synthesizers including the DLS soft synth and VST instrument VSTi plug ins Select the All folder to display all soft synths The Failed folder contains plug ins that did not scan correctly or timed out durin
129. Changing the selection of the Add tags and custom properties from files and Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check boxes also changes the settings in the Media Manager Options dialog 70 CHAPTER 4 9 Click the Search button to start adding files to the library 10 Click the Close button when you re finished A tag is automatically added to the tag tree when you search The tag name will include the date and time of the search and all files that were added or updated in the library are marked with this tag Removing media files from a library You can remove a reference to a media file from a library without affecting the media file itself 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to delete e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 2 Right click a selected file and choose Remove from Library from the shortcut menu or press the Delete key on your keyboard A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected files from the library Tagging media files Tagging helps you classify your media files For example if you wanted to keep track of loops played by a specific instrument you could create a tag with the name of the instrument and apply it to
130. Clearing a button Right click a palette button and choose Clear from the shortcut menu Deleting a saved palette 1 Right click a palette button and choose Delete Current Palette from the shortcut menu 2 Click the OK button when prompted to delete the palette from your library Saving tags and properties to media files Saving tags and properties to files makes all your organization portable if tags and custom properties are saved to files that information will be preserved in the files and can be added to the library by selecting the Add tags and custom properties from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Saving tags and properties to files affects only the current media library and libraries that you create after saving the information If you have multiple libraries you can add embedded tags and custom columns to existing libraries by opening the desired library and rescanning your media folders with the Add tags and custom properties from files check box selected in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Embedded file properties are also updated when you preview or add media to a project The following file formats can store this type of information internally e MP3 Windows Media Format WMA and WMV WAV e WAV64 e SFA PCA Scott Studios For other file types the Media Manager tool will save metadata to an sfl file using the same base name as your media file Follow these steps to save
131. Click the Mark Loop Start button r Select the last event you want to play Click the Mark Loop End button T Click the Play button to start playback Select the event where you want to begin playback and click the transport bar s Play button or press Space The piano roll editor begins playback and loops the marked selection To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button or press Space Filtering the list A MIDI file can contain a dizzying number of individual events You can speed the task of locating events in the list editor by applying a filter You can filter what the list editor displays either by track or by event type Filtering the list by event type 1 2 Click the Event Filter button The MIDI Event Filter dialog appears E MIDI Event Filter Fx MIDI events bo hide J Control Change L Patch Change C Poly Pressure C after Touch J Pitch Bend C Packed NRPN J Packed RPM CJ Sysex CJ Meta channels cane Select the check box for an event type to hide that type or clear the check box to display that event type 3 Click OK The list is filtered according to the criteria you selected Editing events Once you have located a particular event you can edit the parameters of the event as needed 1 Click in the event row you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Event button The Edit MIDI Event dialog appears 3 Tip You can also double click an event s M
132. DI track double click the track label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected track The channel strip in the Mixing Console and the track header are updated when you press Enter r Touch b L Center D i cj L Adding or editing track insert effects Note MIDI tracks do not have an Insert FX control region When the Insert FX control region is visible each track displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip To show or hide the Insert FX control region click the Insert FX button in the View pane Insert Fe Track Noise Gate Each effect is displayed as a button You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug in and preset name Tip When the Insert FX control region isn t visible you can click the Track FX button t in the Faders control region to display the Audio Plug In window for the track s effects chain Adding a plug in Click the Cote button and then choose a new plug in from the menu to add a new plug in to the effects chain Editing effects settings Click an effect s button to display the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s settings When you right click an effect s button a shortcut a menu is displayed Choose Show lt Plug In Name gt to open the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s controls e Choose Bypass lt Plug In Name gt to temporarily bypass
133. EE 80 Adding CUSTOMMCOIUNMNGS verrrrcveritirkies tesi ennir EE EEEREN EEEE EEEE OER 80 Setting Media Manager Options sussususussessessrssrrsersersersoersessersesse 81 Working in the Track View ssssnesunsnesenssnessessersreseessersorserseeese 83 Using project markers and regions cc cece ccc eee eee eee ee eeeees 83 Working with standard markers 0 ccc ccc cece cece e ee ee eee eens eens eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 83 Working with time Markers 0c ccc cee eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Working with command Markers cece cece cece e cece eee e eens nesses eeeeeeeeeeaees 85 Working with reGiOnS ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 87 Wale Bs a 2 9118 6 eee ee ree en ee ee ee ere 89 CHOOSING SMAPDING OPUIONS 050 cisei den convddssdestaswas sa undran iA ENEN EEE 89 Changing tempo time signature and key ccc cece cece cece e eee e ee eeeneees 90 Changing Project CAMPO cece eee eee eee ee eee eee e eee e eee e eee eee E 90 Changing project time SIQGNatUre 6 cece cece eee een eee neeeeeees 91 Changing Project key s0cxcniccadedeesyksaed pease se nedamek ante dadeweresne Ye baw teekwaseekees 91 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS Working with tempo key time signature change Markers cece ccc eee e ee enees 91 Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers ccc ccc cece eee eees 92 Changingaclip SCY ssessercserenere t
134. Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 177 Adjusting panning When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo field dragging to the left will place the bus in the left speaker more than the right and dragging to the right will place the bus in the right speaker You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Pan slider handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit pan automation on the bus track Note The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved but with an offset applied For example setting the trim control to 9 left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9 to the left Adjusting volume When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall trim volume of the bus You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Volume fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit volume automation on the bus track Note The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is
135. Gk OQ g SectricBass il OH Gkr s O S E Fugel solo A Gk O BB alto sax 1 OA Gk s O g Tenor Sax 1 A Gh amp O Bari sax i OA Gk O tromb 1 I A Gr amp O Audi Aud2 Aud3 Aud4 Aud5 Aud r Mic Inetiin 1 Mic Instin 1 Mic IinstIn i Mic Instin 1 Mic IinstIin 1 Mic Instin 1 Master Master Master Horns Horns Horns Eod Touch Eod Touch kod Touch Eod Touch Eod Touch kod Touch I I I I I I Center Center Center Center Center Center Gili Si I fF eo 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 Connecting a control surface You can use one Mackie Control Universal with up to four Mackie Control Universal Extenders one Frontier TranzPort or up to five generic control surfaces with ACID software Perform the following steps for each device 1 Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your control surface 2 see Configuring ACID to Configure ACID softwa use your control surface on page 268 re to use your control surface Connect the MIDI In port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI Out port on your control surface For more information Note f you re using a USB interface such as Frontier TranzPort just plug in the USB cable For information about your specific device please refer to the manufacturer s documentation APPENDIX B 267 Configuring ACID to use your control surface Use the MIDI ta
136. I events 217 Quantizing note events 221 Undoing and redoing 221 Locking events To track envelopes 145 Looped playback 45 Loops Clips 34 Creating in the Chopper 100 Exporting from projects 130 Stretching properties 118 Mackie Control Universal 229 267 Add new buttons 277 Arrow buttons 282 Audio video buttons 279 Channel section 273 Control buttons 274 Display buttons 276 Fader banks 276 Footswitches 274 Jog dial 283 Markers 277 Modifiers 279 Project buttons 280 Timeline 280 Transport buttons 281 View buttons 278 Window buttons 278 Main window 16 Markers 83 87 Adding 120 Beat anchors and markers for loop clips 121 Command markers 85 Deleting 120 In the Chopper 96 Marker bar 21 Moving 120 Reset stretching markers 120 Stretch markers for loop clips 120 Tempo key time signature markers 91 Time markers 84 Media files Adding from Media Manager 79 Adding to projects 31 Exporting loops from projects 130 Extracting from CD 32 Previewing in Chopper 95 Previewing in Explorer 30 Reloading 122 Replacing 122 Resolving offline 79 Saving track properties to 123 Searching 75 Tagging 71 Media libraries Tagging files 71 Media library Adding media files 70 Backing up 75 Creating new 69 Opening 69 Removing media files 71 Media Manager 32 69 Adding custom columns 80 Adding media from 79 Automatically hiding Search pane 80 Customizing view 80 Moving columns 80 M
137. IDI interface to the MIDI In port on your Mackie Control Universal 2 Connect the MIDI In port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI Out port on your Mackie Control Universal 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each Mackie Control Extender APPENDIX B 269 Configuring the software to use the Mackie Control Universal 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Enable your MIDI input and output ports a Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog e Preferences az YST Effects YST Instruments Rewire Devices Video Editing Sync Display Other Folders External Control amp Automation General Audio Audio Device MIDI Make these devices available for MIDI track playback Hardware Port Device MIDI Thru From SB Audigy Mackie Control v2 10 Reserved by Device AudioFireg Mackie Control Exte Reserved by Device M ake these devices available for MIDI input Hardware Port Device MIDI Thru To SB Audigy Mackie Control v2 10 Reserved by Device AudioFire8 Mackie Control Exte Reserved by Device lt gt Auto MIDI input routing b Inthe Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to the Mackie Control Universal s In port c Inthe Make these devices available for MIDI input box select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to your Mackie Control Universal s
138. Insert time marker Insert disc at once CD track marker Change tempo Insert Command marker Insert tempo change Insert key change Insert time signature change Insert tempo and key change Maximize timeline vertically window docking area will be hidden Maximize timeline vertically and horizontally window docking area and track list will be hidden Maximize timeline horizontally track list will be hidden Keys Ctrl R Ctrlt Home or W Ctrl End Page Up Page Down Keys Shift V Ctrl drag envelope point or segment Ctrl Alt drag envelope point or segment Alt drag R M H N Alt drag time marker C T K Shift K Shift T F11 Ctrl F11 Shift F11 APPENDIX D 309 Track list commands Description Mute selected tracks Solo selected tracks Record Cycle through effect automation envelopes Insert new MIDI track Mixing Console commands Description Change selection of a mixer control Move the right channel of the fader for the selected mixer control Move the left channel of the fader for the selected mixer control Select multiple adjacent mixer controls MIDI commands Description Insert new MIDI track Generate MIDI Timecode Generate MIDI Clock Copy to new MIDI clip Chopper commands Keys Description Z Render to new track X Show hide bus tracks Ctrl R Insert folder track E or Shift E Insert audio track Ctrl Alt Q Keys Description Left Right Arrow Select multiple n
139. Landscape 10 way Landsc Landscape 11 wav Landsc Landscape 12 wav Landsc Click the Maximize Minimize button to control the size of the window in the window docking area i E L HE Landscape m SE Loopettes aC Sonic Grab Bac w O Spacious n ie The Desert Dr H Sweet and Low Ba y Landscape 13 wayv i Landsc r a C Stils EH SurroundPrajects ofl Audio Loop beats at 85 0 BPM F F Click the handle to drag a window to a different location or dock Explorer d Media anager Groove Pool j Click a tab to view a window The default windows display in the window docking area when you start ACID for the first time Additional windows can be displayed by clicking the window s tab or by choosing the desired window from the View menu Tip You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11 The available windows can be docked anywhere at the bottom of the ACID window or floated over the ACID window or on a secondary monitor this setup requires a dual monitor video card You can also create floating docks anywhere by dragging more than one window to the same area Explorer window The Explorer window works similarly to the Windows Explorer You can use the Explorer window to locate preview and select media files to be added to your project You can also use the Explorer window to perform common file management tasks such as renaming files or creating folder
140. Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is not installed by default but you can install it from the ACID CD or download it from the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site http www sonycreativesoftware com reference After installing the library go to the Media Manager Options dialog click the Media Library Actions button di and choose Options from the menu and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop down list Searching for media files You can use the Media Manager tool to search the current media library for media files using keywords or tags Tips You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you like to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify the results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 75 Searching using a keyword 1 Select th
141. Mackie Control for Cubase Open and run the BCFview virtual display for BCF2000 Right click the virtual display and choose BCF2000 v BCF2000 01 h MPU 401 Configuring ACID to use the Behringer BCF2000 Is 2 3 Open your ACID project From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog Enable your MIDI input and output ports APPENDIX B 289 a Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog Preferences YST Effects VST Instruments ReWire Devices Video Editing Syne Display Other Folders External Control amp Automation General Audio Audio Device MIDI Make these devices available for MIDI track playback Hardware Port Device MIDI Thru Fro C N IDIA R DLS Synt None Not Enabled BCF2000 01 Emulated Mackie Control Device Reserved by C C MPU 401 None Not Enabled lt Make these devices available for MIDI input Hardware Port Device MIDI Thru To BCF2000 01 Emulated Mackie Control Device Reserved by Device C MPU 401 None Not Enabled Auto MIDI input routing b In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box select the BCF2000 check box c Inthe Make these devices available for MIDI input box select the BCF2000 check box d Click Apply Note MIDI ports that are in use by the Behringer BCF2000 displaya icon to indicate that they are not available for MIDI track playback or input 4 Choose your control surface
142. Measure slider to scroll through the song and click the Play button to verify that the detected measure length is accurate throughout the song The Beatmapper Wizard uses a single measure length for the entire song You can drag the end of the measure selection to change the measure s length However changing the length will affect the entire song if adjusting the last measure of the song causes the first measure to be incorrect the downbeat may not be positioned correctly or the song s tempo may not be consistent enough for the Beatmapper Wizard 5 Click Next when the measure lengths are correct Tempo information is added to your file 6 Select the desired check boxes Select the Change project tempo to match Beatmapped track check box if you want to set your project tempo to match the tempo calculated by the Beatmapper Wizard Selecting the check box ensures that your Beatmapped track plays at its original tempo e Select the Preserve pitch of the Beatmapped track when tempo changes check box if you want your track to maintain its pitch when your project tempo changes Clear the check box to create DJ style remixes the track s pitch will raise and lower with tempo changes as it would when a turntable s speed is manipulated Select the Save Beatmapper information with file check box if you want to save tempo information in the file When the check box is selected you can add the file to other ACID projects without starting the Beatma
143. O saiscdaiadeweesetadwedensseveswe wv edeteawese wade deneneddeetes ewer 144 Hiding track envelopes ccc cece eee te uenra NNE ER eee eee eee ee eeeenees 145 REMOVING TACK ENVEIODES 6 avuncesesdsad c ews cwdiiad need wil sale eueu ee eoee aided Pedwennss 145 Automating 5 1 surround projects cece cece e eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeees 146 Automation recording MOdES cece cece eee cette eee e eee e eens eee eeeeeeaaeaes 147 Recording automation SettingS ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee ene eeeenees 147 Editing sections of your recorded settings in Touch mode cece cece eee eee enes 148 Overwriting recorded settings in Latch mode ccc cece cece cece eee e teen eee eeeaes 148 Editing individual envelope points or keyframes 0 ccc cece ccc eee e teen eee e eens 148 Setting the automation recording mode for a track ccc cece cece cece eee e teen eeees 149 Using the Mixing Console ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e eee e cece eee eeeeeees 151 Understanding the Mixing Console WINdOW ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeees 151 The Mpdng Console TOOIDal ositecvstcerewseasad eens dteuved bens EEA NERES a ATENE 151 The Channel List pane cece cece eee eee AE e eee ee ee eee eeeeees 153 Whe VIEW PAINE orean cnc euceece ccs pene ena EANAN een esas oe race sees eenadates 153 CARING SUMS cae tareavan one Ge ew ons eRru need EE dake tee eee Gina oer aed twos 154 Adding
144. Pot on a channel to return the channel s settings to the track defaults 7 Marker 7 Press to place the cursor at marker 7 8 Marker 8 Press to place the cursor at marker 8 Add New buttons The Add New buttons add busses or tracks to your project l 4 4 1 2 Item Description 1 Track Press to add a new audio track 2 Bus Press to add an audio bus to your project APPENDIX B 277 Windows buttons The Windows buttons control the display of various ACID windows Item 1 Mixer 2 Video Preview 3 Plug Ins View buttons Damar MACKIE oc ren e Som T ee J ee Vee ee ee EEEE Description Press to show the Mixing Console window If the window is not docked pressing the button shows hides the window Press to show the Video Preview window If the window is not docked pressing the button shows hides the window Press to show the Plug In Manager window If the window is not docked pressing the button shows hides the window The View buttons control the display of various sections of the ACID window Item 1 Bus Tracks 2 Dock Area 3 Track List 278 APPENDIX B N ue aD lt gt Co e0ceeeee 3 0 Description Press to show or hide audio bus tracks in the ACID timeline When the Video button is selected press to show or hide the video bus track Press to show or hide the Window Docking Area at the bottom of the ACID window Press to show o
145. RAM 2 GB or more recommended e 150 MB hard disk space for program installation 8 GB of hard disk space for installation of all optional components e Microsoft Windows compatible sound card DVD ROM drive for installation e Supported CD recordable drive for CD burning only e Microsoft NET Framework 3 0 included on application disc Internet connection for Gracenote MusicID service NET 3 0 adds functionality to NET 2 0 After installing the NET Framework 3 0 versions 2 0 and 3 0 will be displayed in the Windows Add or Remove Programs listing Do not attempt to uninstall version 2 0 it is required by version 3 0 Installing ACID Prior to installing the software we recommend that you exit all open applications and temporarily turn off any virus protection 1 Insert the application disc The setup screen appears if AutoPlay is enabled for your DVD ROM drive Note f you have disabled the AutoPlay feature click the Start button and choose Run In the Run dialog that the DVD ROM drive letter and add setup exe Click OK to start the installation 2 Click Install The installation process begins 3 Follow the on screen prompts to install the appropriate version of the software for your computer Using online help You can access three varieties of help within ACID e Online help e Context sensitive help Help on the Web Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from th
146. STARTED 47 8 When rendering is complete you can choose one of the following options e Click Open to start the associated media player and play the newly rendered file e Click Open Folder to open Windows Explorer and display the location of the newly rendered file e Click Close to close the progress dialog and return to the ACID window Note MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS or VSTi soft synths to be included in the rendered output For more information see Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft synths on page 222 Supported formats for rendering The following table briefly describes the file formats available for rendering a project Format Extension Description ATRAC aa3 A Sony proprietary audio compression technology AIFF File aif The standard audio file format for audio used on Macintosh computers Dolby Digital AC 3 Pro ac3 A Dolby Laboratories proprietary audio compression format Dolby Digital AC 3 Studio FLAC audio flac A nonproprietary lossless audio compression format MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg MPEG files are a format used when burning audio and video to a Video CD Super Video CD or DVD MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation is supported through the use of the MainConcept MPEG plug in Note This format requires a separate purchase of the MainConcept MPEG plug in MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 A highly compressed format used for portable digital players and Internet sharing of media 20 free MP3 encodes are provi
147. Shift button while pressing the Loop Select button to create a time selection from the loop region Press to set the beginning of the loop region at the cursor position Hold the Shift button while pressing the Mark In Go to In button to move the cursor to the beginning of the loop region Press to set the end of the loop region at the cursor position Hold the Shift button while pressing the Mark Out Go to Out button to move the cursor to the end of the loop region Hold the Shift button while pressing the Event Trim Center Cursor button to center the cursor in the timeline view Item Description 7 RTZ Press to move the cursor to the beginning of the project End Hold the Shift button while pressing the RTZ End button to move the cursor to the end of the project Transport buttons The Transport buttons allow you to navigate the timeline and preview your project as EE RR S o O TEI e 1 a a a E 2 E 3 4 5 Item Description 1 Rewind Press and hold to move backward through the timeline at 20x speed 2 Fast Forward Press and hold to move forward through the timeline at 20x speed 3 Stop Press to stop playback and return the cursor to its position before playback started 4 Play Press to start playback Press again to stop playback and leave the cursor at its current position 5 Record Press to start recording Press again to stop recording and leave the cursor at its current position Hold the Shift butto
148. Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel The next time you start ACID the new keyboard mapping will be available from the Keyboard mapping drop down list in the Customize Keyboard dialog Resetting the default keyboard mapping Choose Default from the Keyboard mapping drop down list and click OK to restore the default configuration 266 APPENDIX A Appendix B Using Control Surfaces with ACID A control surface is a hardware device that uses knobs faders and buttons to control user interface elements that are normally controlled with a mouse Using a control surface lends a tactile feel to your editing sessions Unlike keyboard shortcuts which determine the shortcut s behavior based on the portion of the ACID window that has focus a control surface s mapped functions work no matter what part of the application has focus When your control surface is enabled an indicator is displayed in the track list and the Mixing Console to indicate which channels are under external control Multiple bars are displayed if a channel is under the control of multiple devices In the track list vertical bars in tracks 1 4 indicate that those tracks are under external control In the Mixing Console horizontal bars at the top of channels 1 4 indicate which channels are under external control ll solo ctr ll E G te O I E Drum kit I 0
149. TIZING NOC CV GING eerriirer reker konber EEE RERE EEEE EERI EEEL ATEAREN EEE REE 216 Deleting note events ssssuesussussssecsorsoesersersersesrererseesereserserreseeso 216 Undoingand redoing sensi scscdvoucateccume dies an seeeele ee eaunenie rues cadet wasene nies 216 Using thelist COMO csrsirrecirridire idee deed Eren nE AEREE ANE EAEE 216 Viewing the list editor nsusnusnnnusnunnunsnesesoeeresorsorsorsorsorsoesorserrerseen 216 Previewing MiOlesirrer intren riss ica s saat ats EEEREN IES EASE EEE AEST E TERNES 217 Filtering the list socicucswe ote ncanaeweotue eo reer a EREE A a AE 218 SoS E ETE ETET TETEE EE EE IE TE O TEEF EPEE EE I T 218 Creating EVENTS weri teisa rinta AENEAN AE EEA EE OE EA E TOE EEES 221 Quantizng events 45 4 44 0 240eseern nasa tio ee ds NENIAE EEREN OANE IEEE 221 Peleng CV GINCS pic arene crt cee porate EEE de EA EE E A E 221 Undoingandredoing cgaoh 4 cance ice ridt Tnn tensa henn ousGu nae ete eh be eee ones head 221 Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft SyNths 0 cece cece ence eee ee eeenees 222 Resetting MIDI DOTIS o54unaneapate ae nae tenre ENEI EEA aad bapa eee beware Sees 222 Rendering projects with MIDI tracks ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eect eeeees 222 Playing MIDI from external devices ccc cece cee eee e eee e nee eennnees 222 Adding external devices as MIDI inputs ccc cece eee cece eee e eee eeeeeeees 222 Assigning MIDI inputs to soft synth controls 0
150. TRACK VIEW 83 Naming markers You can name markers in your project You may want to name markers based on parts of the project For example you may want to identify choruses refrains bridges or instrument solos as reference points along the timeline 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be named The hand cursor d appears 2 Right click the marker and choose Rename from the shortcut menu A box appears next to the marker 3 Type a marker name in the box and press Enter to save the name Tip You can use the same steps to rename a marker Alternately you can double click the marker and enter anew name Navigating to markers While you are working on your project you may have scrolled to a portion of the project where the cursor is not visible There are two ways to move the cursor directly to the selected marker e Right click the marker and choose Go To from the shortcut menu Click the marker once e Press the number key not on the numeric keypad corresponding to the marker number Tip You may also navigate from one marker to the next by pressing Ctrl left right arrow key Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker Deleting markers You may remove markers from the project at any time Because markers a
151. Time Signature Change Key Time Signature Change dialog appears W Key change G 3 Select the Key Change check box and choose a key from the menu to change the key of all tracks from the cursor position until another key change marker is encountered ee e Time Signature change W Tempo change BPM 117 000 4 Select the Tempo Change check box and enter a new tempo in beats per minute in the edit box to change the tempo of all tracks from the cursor position until another tempo change marker is encountered Beats per measure Beat value When you add a tempo change marker you can choose an setting from the Transition type drop down menu to determine how the tempo is changed between markers For more information on using tempo curves see Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers on page 92 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 91 5 Select the Time Signature Change check box and make your Beats per measure and Beat value selections to change the time signature at the marker position The time ruler divisions and grid spacing will be updated accordingly Note Time signature changes must occur on the first beat of a measure If your cursor is not on the first beat of a measure the marker is placed at the nearest measure 6 Click OK A marker appears in the marker bar at the cursor position that displays the change information New marker and marker text 117 G 4 4 Editing tempo key time signature
152. To decrease the level of magnification click the Zoom Out Track Height button Note Double clicking the horizontal or vertical scroll bars adjusts the magnification so that as much of the project either horizontally or vertically is displayed as possible Click the Zoom Tool button 41 in the corner of the track view to temporarily change the cursor into the Zoom tool After you select an area of the track view to magnify the cursor reverts to the previously active tool Note Double clicking the Zoom tool adjusts both the horizontal and vertical magnification so that as much of the project is displayed as possible Window docking area This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available while working on a project Windows can be docked side by side or in stacks in the window docking area For more information see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 247 Click the Close button to remove a window from a floating dock or the window docking area E Landscape Z F 4 J Media Files Audio a Loops and Samples l Ol Sonic Excursions Fe ef Ebow Vibratior a H Elements 2 eof Introspective a E Landscape O1 way ilLandsc JLandscape 02 wav Landsc Landscape 03 wav Landsc Landscape D4 wav Landsc gt Landscape O5 way Landsc Landscape 06 wav Landsc Landscape OF way Landsc Landscape 08 wav Landsc Landscape 09 wav Landsc Gi
153. X send assignable effects channel strips A separate channel strip is displayed for each FX send assignable effects chain in your project For information on adding assignable effects chains see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 To show or hide channel strips for assignable effects click the FX Sends button in the View pane USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 175 Changing an assignable effect chain s name To rename an assignable effects chain double click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected assignable effects chain The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter POs Touch x O 0 enter Adding or editing effects When the Insert FX control region is visible each assignable effects chain displays its effects at the top of the channel strip To show or hide the Insert FX control region click the Insert FX button in the View pane Each effect is displayed as a button You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug in and preset name Insert Fe Track Moise Gate Adding a plug in Click the AE button and then choose a new plug in from the menu to add a new plug in to the effects chain Editing effects settings Click an effect s button to display the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s settings When you right click an effect s button a shortcut a menu is displayed e
154. a acne Se cea da wee EEEE E heen ss oor be Haas emis REEERE EENES 57 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS EIEN CCV CNIS conan cui E E E E acute eee ereaat EEEE A 57 PAIA VE S AEE E A S eat T O EEA 58 Splitting at the cursor POSITION 1 0 eee ee eee eee eee A 58 SPURDU ONG CVENE co 2iccedianvadisesdenuvedeewesiatratdaueticaveddeeee Gdindasnadiedeetead 59 SPURO MUIIPIECVENIS 4 0sr04scewen econ teaver cite EATEN EEEE AT ceweeeawes 59 Splitting a time selection cee eee cence eee e eee e eee e eee e eens e eee eeeeeeees 59 Splitting events within a time Selection cece cece cee eee eeeeeees 60 JOMMMC GV CIES axennuiveace aukoneuvonevcenedech acetate wean EEEE EEE EAE 60 Atomatic ClO 5510065 enere inte EnA EEEIEE Ena iaaa 60 Creating CrOSSfad ES fare cesentcoennententcenrsmedaduncenseesnaseeveeuiendsdsenaedeeteertes 60 ChianGing aee e aree E AA E E N AA E EE EN TONE IROA 61 Eee kE S Inn S PERE AA E P E E EAE EE EET ET EE 61 Cutting events in ripple editing mode cece cece ee eee eee e eee e eee e eee eeaaees 61 Deleting events in ripple editing mode ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 62 Pasting events in ripple editing mode ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eeeeeenes 63 Slipping and sliding events jest si0wss coves sew ndeewmsae couse esate ereesereeetewdeedeetes 63 Shifting the contents of slipping events ccc ccc cee eee e eee e eee eeeees 64 Slip trimming EVENTS ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eee e
155. a function select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list and click the Clear button 6 Toremove all functions click the Clear All button 7 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button Important The Mackie Control Universal can control either trim or automation settings In order to control automation settings the Automation button in the Audio Video section must be selected and the track or bus you want to edit must be set to Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch Hold the F1 button while turning the V Pot or use the Automation Settings button a to change the automation recording mode for each track and bus track 272 APPENDIX B Using the Mackie Control Universal The following sections describe the default control mapping for the Mackie Control Universal when used with ACID The Mackie Control Universal can control either trim or automation settings In order to control automation settings the Automation button in the Audio Video section must be selected and the track or bus you want to edit must be set to Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch Hold the F1 button while turning the V Pot or use the Automation Settings button to change the automation recording mode for each track and bus track Channel section The channel section includes V Pots knobs buttons and faders that you can use to edit your tracks and busses If you re us
156. a plug in 156 CHAPTER 10 When an effect is bypassed its button is displayed in red text Insert Fe Track Noise Gate Track EQ e Choose Remove lt Plug In Name gt to remove a plug in from the track effects chain e Choose Presets and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset e Toreplace the current plug in right click the effect s button and then choose a new plug in from the menu Plug ins are organized in submenus by type EQ Dynamics Reverbs etc Adjusting bus or assignable effects send levels Note MIDI tracks do not have a Sends control region When the Sends control region is visible each track displays controls you can use to route the track to busses and assignable effects chains To show or hide the Sends control region click the Sends button in the View pane Sends L Fre InF When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected click the Channel Send button and choose a bus or assignable effects chain from the menu and then drag the fader to adjust the send level When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected the fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit send volume automation on the track Notes e The trim level is added to the automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasin
157. able toolbar buttons pane to add it to the toolbar 5 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and close the dialog Removing buttons from the toolbar You may remove buttons and separators from the toolbar If you have added buttons to the toolbar removing unused or unwanted buttons allows you to maximize the toolbar s space You may remove toolbar buttons either directly on the workspace or via the Customize Toolbar dialog Removing buttons on the ACID workspace 1 Hold Shift and drag the button that you want to remove off the toolbar A hand icon m within an outline of the button indicates that you are removing the button 2 Release the mouse to remove the button Removing buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on this dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to remove 3 Click Remove The button is removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and will not appear on the toolbar Tip You may also double click a button to remove it 4 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and exit the dialog APPENDIX A 251 Using the time display The time display above the track list reflects the cursor s position on the timeline Changing cursor position You can edit the cursor position using time as it is displayed on
158. actions e Drag the plug in from the right hand pane to a category e Right click a plug in in the right hand pane choose Set Category or Set Instrument from the shortcut menu and then choose a category from the menu To change a plug in s category perform either of the following actions e Navigate to the folder select the plug in and drag it to a different category folder e Right click a plug in in the right hand pane choose Set Category or Set Instrument from the shortcut menu and then choose a category from the menu If you want to edit a category right click its folder and choose Edit Audio FX Category or Edit Soft Synth Instrument Category from the shortcut menu You can edit the category s name only for user created categories short name and description 134 CHAPTER 8 Renaming a plug in If you want to change a plug in s name right click the plug in in the Plug In Manager window and choose Rename from the shortcut menu You can then type a new name in the edit box To reset a plug in s default name right click the plug in and choose Reset Default Name from the shortcut menu Ignoring a plug in If you want to prevent ACID from using a plug in but you don t want to uninstall the plug in you can ignore it just right click a plug in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu To re enable an ignored plug in right click a plug in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu to deselect the Ignore comma
159. ad the program map you want to edit e Choose a setting from the MIDI Device drop down list Click the Load button and browse to the map you want to edit Tip Ifyou want to create a program map based on an existing map load a program map and then click the Save As button to save a copy of the program map with a new name 3 Toadd programs to the map click the Add New Program Ff or Add New Drum Program button to adda program to the table in the first available slot Note fa group is selected from the Voice Group drop down list the table lists only programs that belong to the selected group Any programs you add will automatically be associated with the selected group To remove a program from the map select a program and click the Delete button x To edit a program name double click the name and type a new value in the box 6 To change a program M to a drum program amp right click the program name and choose Drum Kit from the shortcut menu To change a drum program to a program right click the program name and choose Drum Kit from the shortcut menu to clear the check mark 7 Ifyou want to assign the program to a group right click the Group box and choose a group from the shortcut menu If you want to create a new group choose Add New Group and type a name in the box 224 CHAPTER 12 8 Double click the Prog MSB and LSB values to edit them and type the values that correspond to the appropriate program Plea
160. ade edges Move through a video event one frame atatime Create or extend loop region time selection Double loop region selection length Halve loop region selection length Shift loop region selection left Shift loop region selection right Keys Number keys not Keypad Left Right Arrow Ctrl Left Right Arrow Ctrl Alt Left Right Arrow Alt Left or Right Arrow Shift Left or Right Arrow apostrophe semicolon comma period APPENDIX D 307 Event editing commands Description Paint the entire media length for all media except video only when Paint tool is selected Cycle event clip forward for all selected clips Cycle event clip backward for all selected clips Select Draw tool Select next edit tool in list Select previous edit tool in list Undo Redo Cut selection Copy event Paste from clipboard Paste repeat from clipboard Paste insert Insert event at cursor Paste event at cursor Delete selection Move selected event s right one pixel Move selected event s left one pixel Temporarily suspend Snap To Erase entire event Split event s Pitch down one semitone 308 APPENDIX D Keys Ctrl click in timeline C Shift C Ctrl D D Shift D Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift Z Ctrl X Ctrl drag Ctrl V Ctrl B Ctrl Shift V Y Shift Y Delete Numeric keypad 6 Numeric keypad 4 Shift while dragging an event press Shift after you click Ctrl click event wit
161. adison WI 53704 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Sony Creative Software Inc in any way All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site located at http www sonycreativesoftware com The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Sony Creative Software Inc Copyright 2008 Sony Creative Software Inc Program Copyright 2008 Sony Creative Software Inc All rights reserved Table of Introducing ACID Software 0 ccc cc cece nec c eee cece n eet n eee e eee eteneeteneees 15 V CICOMCG cc ccunscecusaeoacnances neat ened conse duise rene ecu so ens sees Gena sensu TE 15 Contents System requirements ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee teeta eee eee n eee esses eeeennes 15 YS CAIN GMD EEE E E E E T te one te aur E E E S E E 15 U nO OWING RGD ereere ae E E see ne eal ee E E E E EER 15 ONIME REID eerren a EEE cs NETR KAE EETA Cade EEA 15 Context sensitive help ccc
162. ag the event edge the media moves with the event edge Sliding events Hold Ctrl Alt while dragging an event The slide cursor appears As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the event position changes You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length but want the event to play a different section of the source media file at a different point in your project Changing event properties To access event properties right click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu These properties are saved in the project but are not saved into the file when you save changes to a clip in the Clip Properties window For more information see Saving file properties on page 123 The following table describes each of the settings in the Event Properties dialog Item Description Start offset The Start offset for an event specifies a playback starting position that is different than the beginning of the file This is especially useful for loops you can change the feel of a loop by simply starting on beat two rather than beat one Pitch shift The Pitch shift value specifies a pitch shift for the selected event Event based pitch shift is calculated after the project key and any pitch shift assigned to a track For more information see Changing tempo time signature and key on page 90 64 CHAPTER 3 Item Description Quick fade edges to When you add an offset to an even
163. ag the volume line the event s decibel level is displayed Gain is 5 3 dB 3 Release the mouse to set the event s dB level After you set the event volume level you may change it later by dragging the envelope line Setting an event s fade in and out envelope curve You can control an event s envelope fade in and out characteristics by adjusting the event s envelope handles These handles allow you to control the length and dB level of fade ins and fade outs Also you can change the type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade characteristics 1 Place the mouse pointer on the upper corner of the event The envelope cursor 4 appears 2 Drag the envelope cursor and position the envelope curve As you drag the cursor the following information is displayed e The event decibel level e The length in measures beats ticks of the fade in or fade out H Gan at 1 4 000 ts 0 0 dE 3 Release the mouse to set the fade in or fade out characteristics Changing the event s fade curve type You can set an event s fade curves fast linear slow smooth or sharp that are used to raise or lower the volume over time Right click the fade region select Fade In Type or Fade Out Type from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate fade curve from the submenu Using sections With sections you can create different arrangements using simple drag and drop operations Each section header above the timeline r
164. age 64 Split position Two events However you may move either of the events which creates a gap SSS p Split position Two events Splitting at the cursor position splits all selected events that the cursor crosses on all tracks 1 Select the event s that you want to split 2 Place the cursor where you want the split to occur or make a time selection 3 From the Edit menu choose Split or press S The result of the split depends on how events were selected Splitting at the cursor position Splitting at the cursor position splits all events that the cursor crosses on all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting h Cursor position 4 After the split the three events become and split point six events 58 CHAPTER 3 Splitting one event Selecting a single event prior to splitting prevents other events from being split at the cursor s position Events before splitting Events after splitting Sb He HH Eventto HHH Only the selected ee ee ee ee eee be split ee event splits at the z cursor position Cursor position A and split point Splitting multiple events Selecting multiple events splits only the selected events at the cursor s position Be sure to set your cursor position before selecting events Attempting to set your cursor after selecting events causes you to lose your event selection Events before Events before splitting Events after splitting Events after splitting
165. age of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can be controlled via MIDI Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use normalization to make sure you are using all of the dynamic range available to you The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording A media file that cannot be located on the computer If you choose to leave the media offline you can continue to edit events on the track the events point to the original location of the source media file One shots are chunks of audio that are not designed to loop and they are streamed from the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they are longer than three seconds Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Unlike loops one shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project A plug in that uses the Open Plug in Technology OPT standard from Yamaha OPT plug ins provide tools for working with MIDI such as edit views effect processors and filters arpeggiators and real t
166. aintain their size when you adjust the tempo Time ruler The time ruler provides a timeline for your project This ruler can show real time in many different formats For more information see Changing the time ruler format on page 249 The ruler changes with tempo since the number of beats and beats per second of real time changes with tempo Transport bar The transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on your project Record new track Hi Move cursor to start of project Loop playback Move cursor to end of project x ip Play from beginning of project MIDI step record p Play project from cursor position MIDI merge record Toggle metronome for playback and recording EF wi gg Pause playback 5 Stop playback Toggle metronome countoff and set countoff options lal ve kd The software also includes keyboard shortcuts for these playback commands For more information see Playback commands on page 309 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 21 Zoom controls To the right of the horizontal scroll bar are the time zoom controls Clicking the Zoom In Time button increases the horizontal magnification of the project To decrease the level of magnification click the Zoom Out Time button Directly below the vertical scroll bar are the dedicated track height zoom controls Clicking the Zoom In Track Height button increases the vertical magnification of the project
167. amp Automation tab 3 Double click your Mackie Control in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog The current channel mapping is displayed on each device s LCD 270 APPENDIX B 4 Choose the channels you want to control with the Mackie Control Universal a From the Device Type drop down list choose Mackie Control b From the Channel Mapping drop down list choose the channels you want to adjust with the Mackie Control Universal Configure Mackie Control Device type Channel mapping Chan1 6 MIDI input 56 Audigy MIDI 10 6000 MIDI output 56 Audigy MIDI 10 6000 w koa w 5 Choose the channels you want to control with the Mackie Control Extender a From the Device Type drop down list choose Mackie Control Extender b From the Channel Mapping drop down list choose the channels you want to adjust with the Mackie Control Extender Configure Mackie Control Device type GFT steam glam aa eae Y MIDI input 6 Repeat Step 5 for each Mackie Control Extender 7 Click OK to apply your changes and close the Configure Mackie Control dialog 8 Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog Configuring or customizing control mappings Use the External Control amp Automation tab in the Preferences dialog to select the control surfaces you want to use and adjust their configuration Reminder When you customize your control mappings button
168. an control all the tracks in your project For example when you start using the controller the knobs will adjust tracks 1 8 When you shift the banks down you can control tracks 9 16 and so on a From the View function group drop down list choose Channels Select the Learn check box Select Channel Bank Down from the Host Command list Press the button or key you want to use to switch to the next group of 8 tracks Select Channel Bank Up from the Host Command list pan 5 Press the button or key you want to use to switch to the previous group of 8 tracks Choose Audio Channels from the View function group drop down list Program each knob a Verify that the Learn check box is still selected b Select Channel 1 Fader from the Host Command list c Turn knob 1 on your MIDI keyboard You ll notice that the Channel MIDI Message and MIDI Data columns are updated d Repeat steps 10a and 10b to program knobs 2 through 8 on your keyboard Now let s assign a button to toggle the controller in and out of automation mode so we can use the knobs to adjust the track s volume trim or record volume automation a From the View function group drop down list choose Assign 286 APPENDIX B b Select Toggle Automation Mode from the Host Command list c Verify that the Learn check box is still selected and then press the button or key you want to use to switch your control surface in and out of automation mode You l
169. anced search criteria In the preceding example the Search Results pane would display only files with tags High Tom AND Floor Tom Note f you have check boxes selected for parent and child tags those tags will be treated as an OR relationship regardless of whether Match Any or Match All is selected Sorting search results Click a column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending order based on that column Viewing previous searches Click the Previous Search button 44 in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate through your recent searches and update the contents of the Search Results pane After viewing previous searches click the Next Search button gt your current search Using advanced search options Quick text search Tags Par ET Audio a a amp Vocals Advance Media Manager Explorer Groove Po in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate back to If your media library contains many files and you re searching for a very specific media file the Advanced section of the Search pane can help you zero in on exactly the file you want If you want to perform an advanced search to refine the results of a previous search start by creating a quick search or tag based search and then perform the following steps Tips You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you like
170. and Use the Select All command e Use the Selection tool Note Unless stated otherwise selections can only be made using the Draw tool Selecting multiple events using the keyboard and mouse Holding Ctrl while clicking events allows you to select multiple nonadjacent events that reside on any track This method is useful when you need to move several scattered events by an equal amount within the project Holding Shift allows you to select multiple adjacent events Selecting any two events while holding Shift automatically selects all events located between the selected events Events may be selected from the same track or across tracks This method is useful when you want to move several adjacent events by an equal amount within the project Selecting multiple events using the Select All on Track command Right clicking any track in the track view and choosing Select All on Track from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track 38 CHAPTER 2 Selecting multiple events using the Select Events to End command Right clicking an event in the track view and choosing Select Events to End from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track after the selected event You use this command across multiple tracks by holding Ctrl to click events on several tracks and then right clicking and choosing Select Events to End from the shortcut menu Selecting events that use a specified clip Perform any of the following actions to se
171. and 3 and paste them into track 2 the event from track 1 is added to track 2 and a new clip is created for the new event A new track is created for the event from track 3 Copying clips across tracks without copying events You can use the Cut 3 Copy and Paste buttons on the audio Track Properties or MIDI Track Properties window to cut copy and paste clips across tracks 1 Click the Paint Clip Selector button on the track header and select Clip Pool g Fiano A Bh T Yo 3 1 Bs hE Tochi Pan 100 L jhk 2 AMERI AMERICAN FIANO PROMO DZ e AMERICAN FIANO PROMO 01 Mone Add Clip D 2 Inthe Clip Pool select the clip you want to cut or copy and then click Cut or Copy 3 Click the Paint Clip Selector button in the track header where you want to paste clips and then choose Clip Pool from the menu 4 Click the Paste button in the Clip Pool Creating new MIDI clips Right click a MIDI clip and choose Copy to New Clip from the shortcut menu to copy the selected clip to a new separate clip Copying an event to a new clip allows you to edit a single MIDI event without affecting other events that use the same clip Right click a MIDI track and choose Create Empty Clip from the shortcut menu to create a new empty clip and set it as the track s active clip Tip You can also use the Chopper window to create new clips from a track s existing media For more information see Working in the Chopper window
172. aneously 43 Assigning to a bus 111 Assigning to busses 19 111 Automating parameters 137 140 Beatmapped 34 Changing clip types 117 Changing color 40 choosing input recording device 43 Color preferences 263 Copying clips and events across 102 Copying trips without copying events 103 Copying cutting pasting 41 Default properties 252 Deleting 41 Device selection 19 Duplicating 41 Effects 108 110 Envelopes 112 146 Folder 35 128 Managing clips 116 MIDI 35 188 Monitoring output levels 43 Muting 42 Panning 41 112 146 239 Pitch shifting audio clips 104 Previewing clips 103 Properties 115 123 252 Renaming 40 Reordering 40 Resizing 40 Selecting events that use a specified clip 104 Soloing 43 Stretching properties 114 Unmuting 42 Using clips with 101 Using the Clip Pool 104 Volume 41 Working with 40 Transport bar 21 Transposing Beatmapped tracks to the project key 122 Keys within a project 91 Loop tracks to the project key 119 Project keys 91 Trimming events 57 Trimming sections 67 Understanding clip types 34 Undo 44 All edits 44 Series of edits 44 Undo history 44 Unfreezing MIDI tracks 189 Unmuting tracks 42 User accounts and rendering templates 49 Using clips with tracks 101 Using the Behringer BCF2000 control surface Automating envelopes 294 Encoder Groups buttons 292 Faders 294 Preset buttons 294 Using the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID 292 Using the C
173. annel amplifier home theater receiver channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is Connect front rear center and LFE speakers to the the center channel the right channel is the LFE amplifier channel Setting up surround projects You can configure an ACID project to use 5 1 surround in the Project Properties dialog You can also choose to apply a low pass filter for the LFE channel Applying a low pass filter approximates the bass management system in a 5 1 decoder and ensures that you re sending only low frequency audio to the LFE channel 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 Click the Audio tab 3 From the Master bus mode drop down list choose 5 1 surround 4 To limit the audio sent to the LFE channel do the following Select the Enable low pass filter on LFE check box and enter a value in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box The low pass filter isolates the audio sent to the LFE channel by limiting it to frequencies lower than the value entered in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box e Choose a setting from the Low pass filter quality drop down list to determine the sharpness of the filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format Some encoders require a specific cutoff frequency and rolloff while other encoders require that no filter be appli
174. apping behavior of the track view and Chopper are linked To enable snapping in both components choose Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 When snapping is turned on you can choose between snapping only to the grid or snapping to all elements For more information see Using snapping on page 89 Magnifying the Chopper There are three ways of adjusting the magnification of the Chopper Click the Zoom In Time and Zoom Out Time buttons located in the lower right corner of the window e Click within the Chopper and use the mouse wheel e Quickly magnify a selection by right clicking and choosing Zoom to Loop Region from the shortcut menu Previewing in the Chopper The Chopper contains a dedicated transport bar that can be used to preview selections prior to inserting them into the project USING THE CHOPPER 95 Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands In addition to the transport bar the Chopper contains a toolbar that is designed to make creating selections quick and easy The following table briefly describes the toolbar buttons and the associated keyboard commands Button Etl Insert i P h Keyboard front slash or A Ctrl comma Ctrl period semicolon apostrophe lt or comma gt or period Ctrl Shift comma Ctrl Shift period Ctrl semicolon Ctrl apostrophe R M O Function
175. ardware output To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 171 Adjusting panning When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the bus in the stereo field dragging to the left will place the bus in the left speaker more than the right and dragging to the right will place the bus in the right speaker You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Pan slider handle is displayed as a J and you can use it to edit pan automation on the bus track Note The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved but with an offset applied For example setting the trim control to 9 left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9 to the left Adjusting volume When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall trim volume of the bus You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Volume fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit volume automation on the bus track Note The trim level is added to the volume auto
176. as an automation envelope you can click the down arrow and choose Reset all envelope points to restore all points to the default value Click the Reset all envelope points button at the bottom of the dialog to set all points on all controller envelopes on the track to the default value Delete Envelope If the controller has an automation envelope you can click the down arrow and choose Delete Envelope to remove the envelope all envelope points from the timeline Click the Remove all Envelopes button at the bottom of the dialog to delete all controller envelopes on the track 202 CHAPTER 12 4 Double click the Def box and type a new value to change the default setting for a controller This value is used when you reset envelope points 5 Click the down arrow inthe Curve Type box to set the default fade curve for each controller s automation envelope The new curve type will be applied to all segments on the envelope You can right click a segment and choose a new fade curve to override the default curve type 6 Click the Save button if you want to save the current settings as a mapping file or click Load to browse to a mapping file that will replace the current settings Note You can also select controllers by doing either of the following e Double click the MIDI track icon to open Track Properties dialog On the Output Setting tab choose Controllers from the drop down menu e Click the Program button M choose Select Prog
177. ased mixer Understanding the Mixing Console window From the View menu choose Mixing Console to toggle the display of the Mixing Console window Toolbar Mixing Console 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Ee ped d4 Insert Audio Track Insert MIDI Track 2 Insert Assignable FX Insert Bus YF Insert Soft Synth Wleasic Acoustic Preview BJ aua uae Aud3 Aud4 duds Emon i anal 0 xi C Busa B Master Channel List ISF Acoustic St Inset FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Inset FX Sita FX Insert FX Insert FX zee i ee tela C Reverb i J v 4 Urban Riddim A B Distorted Farf al a eee eam Gn t analog Factory 1 Fx1 Sends Sends Sends Sends Sends BE Input m v Bus 4 E E maser Gi Gi Gi Ga a W W W ll D Pre F Pre Tf Pre Inf Pre TF pre Inf Post Inf Post Inf lo ro lo lo IO lo lo lo IO lo lo me Sound ma Sound ma Eound Ma Sound ma Auto Input Sound Ma ile C Tests Master _ Master Analog Fa Master _ C Master taser Gomina 1 l 1 Show All Jl Inf 6 0 60 3 3 20 20 02 02 2l 2 1 Inf Inf 6 6 __ Audio Busses a Assignable FX th Touch Touch Fo Touch Fo Touch r Touch Touch Z Touch Touch re Touch Touch _ Master Bus _ mm i W On W uj ee ore a Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center Center O Insert FX
178. ases to 0 dB The signal in the channel you are panning away from starts at a base dB level either 0 dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level For example when you pan fully to the right only the right channel is audible This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Constant Power pan type maintains a constant volume as you move the pan point from channel to channel This pan type which uses the constant power panning curve is most useful for panning monaural source media WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 241 e The Film mode allows you to pan between pairs of adjacent speakers in 5 1 surround projects using a constant power model This mode is optimized for theater style soeaker placement In stereo projects Film mode functions identically to Constant Power As you drag the pan point to the center speaker the sound becomes diffused through the front and rear speakers When the track is panned fully to the center speaker there is no output from the front and rear speakers Dragging the pan point to the center of the surround panner sends the signal to all speakers Note f you re panning fully to a single speaker in Film mode you may notice that some signal is mixed to the opposite speaker This is because the ideal placement for surround speakers does not match the representation in the surround panner For example panning to the front left speaker produces a low level signal in the rear left speaker This is because your front
179. ate a custom Drive Number column to assign any numeric rating to a media file You could then use the Advanced section of the Search pane to search using the Drive Number value When adding media to a library you can choose to add this information by selecting the Add tags and custom columns from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog 1 Right click the column headings and choose Custom Columns from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Add New Column button to add a custom column A new entry is added to the list 3 Inthe Name box type the name you d like to display as a column heading 80 CHAPTER 4 4 Select the Type box and choose Text or Integer from the drop down list to indicate whether you ll store text or numeric data in the column 5 Ifyou want to remove a custom column select an entry in the list and click the Delete Selected Columns button X The column and all data stored in the column is removed from the library 6 Click the OK button The column is added to the media library and the Search Results pane is scrolled to the right to display your new column Setting Media Manager options Use the Media Manager Options dialog to set options for working with the Media Manager tool 1 Click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Options from the menu The Media Manager Options dialog is displayed 2 From the Reference library drop down list choose the library you want to load when y
180. ation is placed on the clipboard Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Existing events adjust to occur sooner in the project EDITING EVENTS 61 Cutting time and event selections in ripple editing mode Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time information is placed on the clipboard Existing events occurring later than the time selection move forward by the length of the time selection Only tracks containing selected events are affected by the ripple edit Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Existing events on the top track adjust to occur sooner in the project z Deleting events in ripple editing mode Deleting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks However this information is not placed on the clipboard Existing events move forward when you delete material from a selected track 1 From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode 2 Click the Time Selection Tool button 3 Select the events you want to delete If you want all events within a time selection to be deleted do not select any events and continue to step 4 Selecting multiple events on page 38 Drag along the marker bar to make a time selection A
181. ault asp To listen to your support options by telephone please call 608 256 5555 About your rights in ACID software ACID is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement The End User License Agreement is first presented to you when you install the software Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the software For your reference a copy of the End User License Agreement for ACID is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com About your privacy Sony Creative Software Inc respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software ACID is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using ACID for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and
182. automated frequency changes sound more natural change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points For high to low frequency sweeps use a fast fade curve for low to high frequency sweeps use a slow curve For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 144 MIDI controller automation You can use envelopes to adjust MIDI controllers throughout a project Adding or removing MIDI controller automation 1 Right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelopes and then choose Configure Controllers from the menu The MIDI Track Controllers Automation dialog is displayed 2 Select the check box for each controller you want to automate with an envelope If the controller you want to automate isn t displayed select the Show all controllers check box at the bottom of the dialog 3 Click the down arrow inthe Envelope box and choose a command from the menu e Insert Envelope e Show Hide Envelope e Reset All Envelope Points e Delete Envelope For more information see You can use the Output Settings tab on the configure which controllers can be automated add remove or hide envelopes set default values and set each envelope s default fade curve on page 202 USING AUTOMATION 141 Adjusting MIDI controller automation settings Track level MIDI input filters available on the Input Filters tab in the Track Properties window allow you to control exactly which MIDI messages y
183. ay at 160 BPM 180 CHAPTER 11 The metronome sounds are created by the general MIDI sound set and the volume of the metronome is determined using the Preview fader in the Mixing Console Notes The metronome sound is not mixed in the final rendering of the project e Before rendering from a ReWire mixer application turn off the ACID metronome or the metronome will be included in the rendered output The metronome will not follow grooves that you ve applied to your project If you want to hear a grooved metronome use a simple click loop and apply the desired groove to the track Using the metronome to count off for playback or recording Metronome countoff allows you to use the metronome to count off a set number of bars before beginning recording or playback in the same way a drummer counts off with her sticks before the band starts playing From the Options menu choose Enable Metronome Countoff or click the Metronome Countoff 2 button on the Transport bar to turn metronome countoff on or off You can click the down arrow next to the button to set countoff options Item Description Enable Metronome Countoff Turns countoff on or off Countoff Always On Metronome counts off during playback and recording Countoff Only During Playback Metronome counts off during playback only When countoff is turned on for playback only the button will display a play icon ia Pe Countoff Only During Recording Metronome counts off
184. b in the Preferences dialog to select the device to which your control surface is connected For more information see Using the MIDI tab on page 260 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Enable your MIDI input and output ports a Select the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog b In the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback box select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to your control surface s In port c Inthe Make these devices available for MIDI input box select the check box for the MIDI port that is connected to your control surface s Out port Note MIDI ports that are in use by a Mackie Control Universal or Mackie Control Universal Extender display a icon to indicate that they are not available for MIDI track input or playback 3 Choose your control surface a Select the External Control amp Automation tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the External Control amp Automation tab on page 265 b Choose a device from the Available devices drop down list and click the Add button Adding a device loads its default profile If you want to customize the behavior of the control surface double click its entry in the Active control devices list 4 Click OK to apply your changes and close the Preferences dialog 5 From the Options menu choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces Configuring or customizing
185. bar from the View menu to display it again Reordering toolbar buttons You can change the toolbar s button order to suit your preferences You may either reorder the buttons directly on the workspace or via the Customize Toolbar dialog Reordering buttons on the ACID workspace 1 Hold Shift and drag the button that you want to move to the new location on the toolbar A hand icon m within an outline of the button indicates that you are moving the button 2 Release the mouse to drop the button in its new location Reordering buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available on the Toolbar You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears Customize Toolbar Curent toolbar buttons E Reset Ix Available toolbar buttons ds Show Yolume Envelopes EA Show Pan Envelopes lt 2 Trigger from MIDI Timecode ae Erase Tool Help Add gt EN Generate MIDI Timecode Generate MIDI Clack Bur Disc at Once Audio CD G Extract Audio from CD ki Edit in Sound Forge 7 0 an 4 d 250 APPENDIX A E E P d9 Envelope Tool Ai Time Selection Tool gt Groove Tool Groove Erase Tool wie Move Up ile E lek Move Down Separator 2 On the Current
186. bed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround panner Moves front back left right Makes fine adjustments Moves front back Moves left right Jumps to a corner edge or center of the surround panner Jumps to a location on the maximally inscribed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround panner Moves front back Moves left right Makes fine front back adjustments Makes fine left right adjustments When you pan a track or mixer control you can choose among several pan types to determine how the audio is panned The current pan type appears at the bottom of the Surround Panner window Right click the Surround Panner window and choose a pan type from the shortcut menu e The Add Channels pan type makes the audio appear to move as a unit among the surround channels As you move the pan point toward a channel speaker icon more and more of the signal from the other channels are folded into the channel you are panning towards until at the extreme all channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the channels In this pan type as you move the pan point from the center to a channel the signal in the channel you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either 0 dB 3 dB or 6 dB and incre
187. bus to monitor a source such as a talkback microphone Adding or deleting input busses From the Insert menu choose Input Bus or click the Insert Input Bus button in the Mixing Console window to add an input bus to your project You can add up to 26 input busses and you can change the number of busses at any time Adding a bus From the Insert menu choose Input Bus to add an input bus to your project Tip If the Mixing Console Window is visible click the Insert Input Bus button a Renaming a bus To rename a bus double click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected bus The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter 0 0 0 0 Drums Delete all characters in a custom bus name to reset a custom bus name to its default 168 CHAPTER 10 Deleting a bus Right click an input bus channel strip and choose Delete from the shortcut menu or select an input bus channel strip in the Mixing Console window and press the Delete key Using input bus channel strips A separate channel strip is displayed for each input bus in your project For more information see Using Input Busses on page 168 To show or hide channel strips for busses click the Busses button in the View pane Note nput bus channel strips are available only when using the Mixing Console in ACID Pro 7 Changing a bus s name To rename an input bus double
188. by Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the production of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2008 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby Digital 5 1 Creator technology is not intended for use in content creation for commercial or broadcast distribution or content that displays Dolby trademarks and logos Only Approved Dolby Digital Professional Encoders may be used for content that is commercially distributed or carries the Dolby Digital trademark and logo Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories lastique Pro Portions of this product use zplane lastique Pro V2 audio time stretching technology FLAC Ogg File Formats 2008 Xiph org Foundation Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the foundation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages includ
189. cally when burning is complete Select the Burn selection only check box to burn only the selected region Clear the check box to burn the entire project Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit If an image file exists when you Open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image From the Drive drop down list choose the drive for burning CDs From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Choosing Max uses your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning because of buffer underruns Click Start Important Once the CD writing begins cancelling the write operation renders the CD unusable 52 CHAPTER 2 Disc at once DAO CD burning The DAO burning process involves arranging your media on the timeline adding pauses between tracks as necessary inserting track markers and burning your CD Adding pauses Each CD track in your project should have a two second pause following it This default setting is based on the Red Book specification for audio CDs The exception to this standard is a continuous recording such as
190. cc cece eee eee e eee eeeeees 285 Configuring a generic MIDI controller 0 0 cece ccc ccc eee e teen eeeeees 285 Customizing your control MAPPINGS cece eee eee eee eee e eee eee eee eeeeneees 285 Loading a control mapping file ccc ccc cence eee e eee e eee eeeennees 286 Example of how you can set up MIDI keyboard as a generic control surface 286 The Behringer BCF2000 control surface ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee enennes 288 OVEIVICW ocec este teers EE E E T E E E E EE E E E T E 288 ArAw SERIO aea rE E E A EEEN 288 Configuring ACID to use the Behringer BCF2000 ccc cece cece eee ee eee eeees 289 Using the Behringer BCF2000 with ACID cc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e eens 292 Encoder Groups DUTIONS srseriserodiorere areeni rr unin Meunier uwelten le yeNKeleM Mweaawenare os 292 aE E E sane naeedep se cae Wad eee ease ay ease sou edoe a one deena E eee N 294 PICSCE OULIONS 4 c0u24creuonne tes EE E AEN cae EARE E ENANA E EAT 294 THE Teal ed a P E E setae E E vacues 294 Adding envelopes and automating them ccc cece cece cece eee e eee e ee eeeeeeenees 294 Fader AUTOMALION ceuccooecacdetaectsontaedsccwsontaessewnadarreesneanaateene was kaueioes 296 ACID THOS AO HICKS spec o6 avescenea tee ence nese aeasaeuuns saeseuseseunenr 5 aeeae eet 297 Adding long media files QUickly ccc cece eect eee eee e eee ee nena eeeenees 297 Playing with duplicate tracks 0
191. ccc ccc cee eee eee eee e eee e nese cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 FICO OM LMG WV CM cx cacacse I eae ecenucae bee ceeeenaecae seen seeanee AAA AEE EARE 16 Overview Of ACID software 2 ccc ccc eee e eee een eee e eee eeeeeeees 16 Mali WINDOW ore iE E ENEE AET A OEE T EE ENEE EE EAT E AE OE EET ORTA 16 TOODE e E a A E EE TE A E E ET AEE AA A EE ER ETA 17 TRACK Mol E E EAE E AE E E P E A E EE uer oes 18 TAKVI aeee EE E E E AIE AE EE EAE A EA A E EEE E 20 Window docking Glediinsicicaecsscteesiorwrene ng ind Posed os NANNTE CINARA ER 22 Audio signal OW srrerereereinie teire Eea RESETE EEEE EEDE RE EERI 25 MIDI signal OW nai cacecbadaapeesebic ia a aa a A 27 Geno State eera E E E F A EEEE EEEE 29 Staring DrOJECtS sincwuanenteneuhecentunactuetin ounde EEEE EEE AEA 29 Setting project properties siniese EEE E EEE 29 Opening existing projects esssesesessesssesesesecesecesseseceseceeseeseersreseees 30 Getting media files uouunusunsesnenernrrerreresuererrrrrrrrrererreseereserrese 30 Previewing media from the Explorer WINdOW ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eeeennees 30 Adding media to the project ccc ccc ccc cece eee ene e een e eee e eee eeeeeeenenees 31 Obtaining or editing CD information using Gracenote ccc cece cece eee teenies 33 Understanding CN TV DGS i cvanesdeeigwoessatntesd ess enn ee nehdeweesnetaeenaneneew aes 34 PODS a sckeayart aha a teenie yee be degen eelanaadatateian saa eeee oan ee seen tensa aee
192. ccc cece cece cece eee e eee e ene eeeeeeeneees 297 Detuning paired tracks ccc cece eect e eee eee eee tenet eee eneees 297 D plicatng WiN OMSET aaenaeaveasaee sarraa eed acuawe manu ENEA AAN E a ARN 298 TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 Creating ping pong pan effects ccc cece cece cece eee eee e nee e eee eeeees 298 Adding depth with assignable effects 0 cc cece cece cece eee ee een eeeeeeeenees 298 Playing double time half time 0 ccc cece cece ence eee t eee eee eee eeeeeenees 299 Constructing the wall Of SOUNd ccc ccc cece cece cee eee e eee eeeeeeees 299 Adding through subtraction 6 5 4 6 0 505 20059 seeds add buo9O 64S RAO weed Seed ws 299 Tweaking CyYnamMics 0 0 6 ccc ccc eee eee cence eee nee e eee eeeeeeeeneaes 299 Fading in and outof MIXES 4 siausx0ns 594000 swans sedan eiwenwhiveons eas sedeadasveivncaewes 299 Adding Duld DS c nuddaabewadadeud is omaundeudedawudeddasshoweisisniceceadanueges owes bes 299 Creating wah wah effects with automated Track EQ ccc ccc cece eee ences 300 Making automated changes more Stark cc ccc ccc cc cece tee eee eee eeenes 300 Abruptly changing volume OF pan cc ccc cee eee cece eee eee e eee eee eeeeeennees 300 Turning automated effects On and Off ccc ccc ccc e cee e ene e eee nee eeeeeneees 300 Making automated frequency changes more natural 00 c cece cece eee eee ees 301 Overriding compress expand ccc
193. ching properties for loops on page 118 114 CHAPTER 7 Configuring track properties From the View menu choose Track Properties to display the Track Properties window The contents of the Track Properties window reflect the currently selected audio or MIDI track Track Properties ACID DJ EXPANDER vPROMO 01 Clip Pool mex amp g Name Used File Double click a ACID DIEXPANDER vPROMOO1 10 C Media Files ACID Loops Acid DJ Expander clip to modify clip ACID DIEXPANDER vVPROMOO2 1 C Media Files 4CID Loops acid DJ Expander pro perties ACID DIEXPANDER vPROMO OS 1 Ci Media Files 4CID Loops 4cid DJ Expanderi If you want to edit media properties and stretching information use the Clip Properties window Audio track properties For audio tracks the Track Properties window displays the Clip Pool The Clip Pool is used to organize each track s media For more information see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips on page 104 MIDI track properties You can use the Output Settings tab to adjust MIDI controllers voices and drum maps You can use the Input Filters tab to set up MIDI message velocity or quantize filters You can use the Clip Pool tab to organize each track s media and enable looped or one shot drawing for MIDI events By right clicking a clip in the Clip Pool you may access the Clip Properties window to use the Piano Roll Editor and List Editor tabs The Piano Roll Editor and List Editor tabs allow you to view an
194. choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch from the menu Automation Recording Tracklcon Description Mode Automation Write Touch Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope points keyframes are unaffected Automation Write Latch y Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click the Play button to start playback Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust During playback adjusting a control will create envelope points or keyframes at the cursor position As long as you re adjusting the control new envelope points keyframes will be created for each change of the play cursor s position Click Stop to end playback and stop recording automation USING AUTOMATION 147 Editing sections of your recorded settings in Touch mode In Touch recording mode envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope points keyframes are unaffected Use Touch mode for touching up sections of your r
195. choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu Deleting keyframes Right click a keyframe and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Rendering surround projects Rendering a surround project creates six mono files AIFF WAV W64 or PCA or a single 5 1 channel file AC 3 WMA and WMV that your authoring application can use to create DVD Video or 5 1 channel music projects With the addition of the Sony 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack you can render AC 3 files using ACID software and burn the resulting files to DVD Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format Some encoders require a specific low pass filter cutoff frequency and rolloff and your encoder may require that no filter be applied before encoding Use the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog to configure a low pass filter For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 236 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears Render As weg Save in O Surround Project x eao My Recent Documents Desktop sy My Documents Ws My Computer amp File name SampleProject v My Network Save as type Wave Microsoft way bd Template 48 000 Hz 16 Bit 5 1 PEM v Custom Description Audio 48 000 Hz 16 Bit 5 1 PCM C Save project as path reference in rendered media C Render loop region only Save pro
196. cks in a surround project are set to provide surround panning but you can assign a track to the LFE channel instead You can assign an individual track to the LFE channel or you can route the track to a Mixing Console control bus soft synth or assignable effect chain and assign the control to the LFE channel To assign audio to the LFE channel right click the surround panner on the track header or Mixing Console control and choose LFE Only from the shortcut menu The track or Mixing Console control is assigned to the LFE channel WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 237 To change a track or Mixing Console control back to surround panning right click the LFE indicator and choose Surround Pan from the shortcut menu Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format with respect to the LFE channel For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 236 Adjusting volume Adjusting track volume for 5 1 surround projects behaves almost identically to stereo projects The fader controls in the track headers can function as trim controls that adjust the overall volume of the track bus or assignable effects chain or they can adjust volume automation settings For more information see Track automation on page 137 Adjusting track volume You can adjust track volume using the Vol fader in the track header the same way you do in stereo projects De
197. click Start You must close the disc before it can be played in an audio CD player Choose Test then burn audio to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns Recording begins after the test if it is successful Choose Test only to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD Choose Close disc to close your disc without adding any audio when you click Start Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed Choose Erase RW disc to erase a rewritable CD when you click Start Select your burning options Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc Select the Erase RW disc before burning check box to erase a rewritable CD before you begin burning Select the Close disc when done burning check box to close the CD after burning Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed Select the Eject disc when done check box to eject the CD automati
198. click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold Ctrl and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event e Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool to erase the entire event 124 CHAPTER 7 Setting a default groove for new tracks If you have a groove that you d like to use to set the overall feel of a project you can set it as a default for your project 1 2 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn t already visible Choose a setting from the Default groove for new tracks drop down list When you add a new loop one shot or MIDI track to your project the selected groove will be applied to the entire track Existing tracks are not affected Applying multiple groove events to a track Groove events allow you to apply grooves to portions of tracks or apply different grooves to various portions of a track The groove is applied where the groove event overlaps the media event The edges of groove events are boundaries for grooves and audio cannot be grooved beyond the event edges 1 2 Select the Groove tool amp on the main ACID toolbar Click the down arrow next to the Groove toolbar button and choose a groove from the menu or double click a groove in the Groove Pool Click and drag over a track to paint groove events in the same way you create other events on the timeline Groove events a
199. click the Faders button in the View pane r Touch WJ Center amp 4 6 0 Arming tracks for recording Select the Arm for Record buttons on the tracks where you want to record Arming a track enables it for recording When a track is armed the track meter displays the track s level If input monitoring is not on the meter displays the level of your input source If input monitoring is turned on the meter shows the level of the input source plus the track effects chain Toggling record input monitoring Click the Input Monitor Mode button gt and choose a command from the menu Note This button is available only when you re using a low latency audio device that supports input monitoring To turn on input monitoring click the Input Monitor Mode button E and choose and then choose Input Monitor Mode On or Input Monitor Mode Auto qm from the menu During recording your signal will be played back with the current track effects chain but a dry unprocessed signal is recorded When Input Monitor Mode On is selected the behavior is similar to Input Monitor Mode Auto mode but you will always hear the input monitor during recording monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording in to a selected event When Input Monitor Mode Auto aq is selected you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording If you re recording into selected events you ll hear the input monitor sig
200. click the Meters button in the View pane Note f the Meters control region is not visible peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region Right click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options Muting or soloing an input bus When the Faders control region is visible each bus displays Mute and Solo buttons To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane Muting a bus When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can click the Mute button to prevent a bus from being played in the mix Click the Mute button on additional busses to add them to the mute group To unmute a bus click the Mute button again When the Automation Settings button is selected the Mute button is displayed as s and you can use the button to edit mute automation on the bus track Soloing a bus Click the Solo button to mute all unselected busses Click the Solo button on additional busses to add them to the solo group To remove a bus from the solo group click its Solo button again Adjusting input bus volume or panning When the Faders control region is visible each input bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader Touch 0 Center 0 0 Tip The Pan slider is displayed only when an input bus is routed to the master bus or an auxiliary bus It is not available when the input bus is routed directly to a h
201. click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected bus The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter 0 0 0 0 Drums Adding or editing input bus insert effects When the Insert FX control region is visible each input bus displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip Insert Fe To show or hide the Insert FX control region click the Insert FX button in the View pane Each effect is displayed as a button You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug in and preset name Tips e When the Insert FX control region isn t visible you can click the Input Bus FX button in the Faders control region to display the Audio Plug In window for the bus effects chain Input bus insert effects are always applied pre fader Adding a plug in Click the ed button and then choose a new plug in from the menu to add a new plug in to the effects chain USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 169 Editing effects settings Click an effect s button to display the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s settings When you right click an effect s button a shortcut a menu is displayed e Choose Show lt Plug In Name gt to open the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s controls e Choose Bypass lt Plug In Name gt to temporarily bypass a plug in When an effect is bypassed its button
202. conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices ACID ACIDized ACIDplanet com ACIDplanet the ACIDplanet logo ACID XMC Artist Integrated the Artist Integrated logo Beatmapper Cinescore CD Architect DVD Architect Jam Trax Perfect Clarity Audio Photo Go Sound Forge Super Duper Music Looper Transparent Technology Vegas Vision Series and Visual Creation Studio are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Creative Software Inc in the United States and other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countries Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries ATRAC ATRAC ATRAC3 ATRAC3 plus ATRAC Advanced Lossless and the ATRAC logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation http www sony net Products ATRAC3 Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dol
203. correct output in the Mixing Console 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Audio Device tab 3 From the Audio device type drop down list choose an audio device type other than Microsoft Sound Mapper such as Windows Classic Wave Driver 4 Choose the playback devices for the six surround channels From the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the front left and right surround channels From the Default Rear playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the rear left and right surround channels e From the Default Center and LFE playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the center and LFE surround channels 5 Click OK Overriding the default device routing By setting up the device routing in the Audio Device tab of the Preferences dialog you have set the defaults for surround routing However you can override the default device routing at any time 1 From the View menu choose Mixing Console to open the Mixing Console window 2 Inthe l O control region click the Output button and choose an output device for the Front channels 3 Repeat step two for the Rear and Center LFE channel pairs Assigning audio to the LFE channel Once the project is in 5 1 surround mode you must decide whether a track will provide the 5 surround panning or the 1 LFE channel in 5 1 surround Initially all tra
204. ction and choose Cut from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl X All selected events are removed from the track view and placed on the clipboard Deleting events Deleting an event a time selection or an event within a time selection removes the data from the track view and discards it Deleted events are not placed on the clipboard and do not replace or interfere with current clipboard content In addition deleted events cannot be pasted back into a project Note Deleted data can only be replaced in a project using the Undo command For more information see Using undo on page 44 1 Select the event data you want to delete or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 38 2 Delete the event data using any of the following methods e Choose Delete from the Edit menu e Right click the selected event and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Press Delete All selected events are removed from the track view and discarded Tip To remove the unused media from your project choose Remove All Unused Clips from the Tools menu To remove unused clips from individual tracks click the Remove Unused Clips button in the Clip Pool window For more information see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips on page 104 Reversing events You can select events in the timeline and reverse their audio and peak data Select an event in the timeline right click and choose Reverse or press U from the shortcut me
205. d The fader and the slider behave differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the volume of the entire track and the slider pans the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has a volume envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader slider will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader slider edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have a volume pan envelope an envelope will be added when you adjust the fader slider If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader slider during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 146 138 CHAPTER 9 Bus automation You can use bus automation envelopes to vary the level of a track sent to a bus Adding bus envelopes A bus envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular bus Before you can add a bus envelope you must add busses to the project For more information see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 1 Select the track to which you want to add the bus envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of t
206. d edit all MIDI data Configuring clip properties 1 Double click a track icon such as E to display the Track Properties window and the clips used on the track Note This section addresses clip properties for non MIDI clips For information on MIDI clip properties see Processing and filtering MIDI events on page 198 2 Double click a clip to open the Clip Properties window Tip You can also display the Clip Properties window using either of the following methods From the View menu choose Clip Properties e Right click a clip in the timeline and choose Clip Properties from the shortcut menu The contents of the Clip Properties window will change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline WORKING WITH TRACKS 115 Clip Properties Mode Pro x Preserve formants when stretching Pitch shift semitones 0 000 Formant shift semitones 0 000 Copyright Attributes Tempo 2001 Donnelly Turek 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo 500 000 000 BPM Size 0 0 MB 153 414 samples Filename ACID DJ EXPANDER vPROMO Location E Loops Acid DJ Expander SSS RSL LE AC TL EL PERE EEE 00 00 01 000 00 00 01 500 00 00 02 000 L 00 00 03 000 00 00 02 500 11 000 i AcID DJ EXPANDER vPROMO 01 E Reload Replace G2 G General Stretch ACID Type Beatmapped v 7s sorte eet Cece
207. d knobs that you map to external control functions you can use the device as an external control device and as a MIDI input device for recording MIDI for example you can use the buttons knobs and sliders on the device for external control and still use the keyboard pitch wheel and modulation wheel for recording MIDI MIDI messages that are mapped to external control functions are filtered when you record MIDI If a note message is assigned to a control surface function both the note on and note off messages will be filtered Item Make these devices available for MIDI track playback Make these devices available for MIDI input Auto MIDI input routing Default All 260 APPENDIX A Description Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to use as a MIDI output for MIDI tracks and generating MIDI clock To load a program map for a hardware synth right click the Device box for your MIDI device and choose Load Device Template from the shortcut menu The selected program map will be used for any track that is routed to the MIDI device The device name will be displayed on the MIDI Output button on the track header and the programs from the device map will be available when you click the Program button ff in the track header To assign an input device to a MIDI output port right click the Device box choose Input from the shortcut menu and then choose an input device from the submenu For example by assi
208. dectues ex erise isre terakt 229 Configuring a generic MIDI controller 0 cece ccc cece cee eee teen eeeees 229 Configuring a Behringer BCF2000 controller ccc ccc ccc cee eee cette eee eeees 229 Working with Vid 0 ccc ccc cece ee eee ee ee eee eset eee e ERa aeS 231 Mondo aie VideO era een a rr ore rere re ee 231 Adding OF replacing video files iias wereandsoarneni eats dawasanewewnswedas eee enwndeeewen 231 Removing the Video track 2 0 ccc ccc eee een ene eee e eee e eee eeeennees 231 Hiding and showing the video track ccc ccc ccc cece ete eee eee ee eennees 231 Synchronizing audio ANd video 1 ccc cece ccc cece eee e eee e eens eeeeneeeeees 231 Removing the video s AUIO 1 ccc ccc ccc eee eee e nee eee eeennes 231 Changing frame NUMDErNG wi lt secoaueere siteki ened EELEE EENAA LEES EAEE AES 231 Editing video events s esoreiesrr 5 ietouscdousequ si PENT IRENTS ENSEN I NEEE NE IIRAS 232 MOVING video EVENTS 2 0 cece eee eee A E E R TE eee ee eeeeees 232 Ting video Event 64 cvlusaevcatacwanaawsstisreed add EEEE ENES EENEN ESAN 232 Slipping and sliding video events snesussuesussussessessessesseseesrrseorsesresee 232 Using the Video Preview windowW ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee ee eeeeeeees 232 Copying aframe to the clipbOard 1 ccc cece cence e eee e eee e AKEE 233 Using toolbar buttons i4s 060ccicsesedessceaneeiarsaiores cee raneeehanaceetnensntsinenes 233 Using
209. ded After you have used the free encodes you must register the plug in to continue rendering MP3s Ogg Vorbis 099 A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology QuickTime Mov QuickTime for Microsoft Windows RealMedia rm The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Perfect Clarity Audio pca A Sony proprietary lossless audio compression format Wave64 w64 A Sony proprietary wave format that does not have a restricted file size unlike Windows standard WAV format which is limited to 2GB Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Windows based computers Wave wav The standard audio file format used on Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Video wmv The Microsoft audio and video format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Note Some plug ins such as MP3 may require registration 48 CHAPTER 2 Creating custom rendering settings The Custom Settings dialog appears when you click Custom in the Save As dialog You can use the Custom Settings dialog to create custom encoding templates for many of the file formats available in the software 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 Choose your preferred file format from the Save as type drop down list If
210. default colors used to display tracks in your project Select a track from the Track drop down list and then click the color swatch to display a color picker You can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls or click the eyedropper to sample a color from your screen When you click OK or Apply all tracks that used the selected color are updated To customize an envelope s color select an envelope from the Envelope type drop down list Click the color button to the right to display the Envelope Color dialog and choose a custom color Use these controls to change the default colors used to display sections in your project Choose a section letter from the Section drop down list and click the color button to the right to display a color picker where you can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls Click the button to switch between RGB and HSL color modes or click the eyedropper to sample a color from your screen For more information see Using sections on page 66 Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the ACID window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it Drag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the ACID window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied Restores all display preferences to the default se
211. der Insert FX the FX chain is affected by the channel s gain When set to Pre Fader Insert FX the FX chain is not affected by the channel s gain fader which is essential on the master bus when using plug ins that dither the audio for final rendering The Pre Post Fader Send button allows you to create cue mixes that are not affected by the gain or mute pan stages of the bus or track e When Pre Fader Insert FX t and Pre Fader Send are selected your audio signal flows as follows bus effects bus send bus pan bus volume e When Pre Fader Insert FX t and Post Fader Send are selected your audio signal flows as follows bus effects bus pan bus volume bus send e When Post Fader Insert FX and Pre Fader Send are selected your audio signal flows as follows bus send bus pan bus volume bus effects e When Post Fader Insert FX and Post Fader Send are selected your audio signal flows as follows bus pan bus volume bus effects bus send Using Input Busses You can use input busses to input process record and mix external audio sources with your ACID project Following are some examples of how you can use input busses in your projects e Use an input bus as a recording input allowing you to apply effects and record a wet signal Use an input bus as a mixer input for an external device such as a synthesizer e Use an input bus as a return for hardware based effects e Usean input
212. dia file 8 Click Save Burning AC 3 files to DVD With the addition of the AC 3 DVD Burner included in the Sony 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack you can burn AC 3 files to a DVD 1 From the Tools menu choose Start AC 3 DVD Burner The AC 3 DVD Burner application starts 2 Follow the instructions for burning a DVD in the AC 3 DVD Burner online help To access online help click Help in the AC 3 DVD Burner screen 246 CHAPTER 14 Appendix A Customizing ACID Software You can customize the software to suit your project needs and working preferences You may change these settings at any time If you use the same settings for all of your projects you may set the ACID application to use your settings as defaults In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize and set the application s preferences Working with ACID windows The software has various windows that allow you to perform specific tasks related to your project or manage your media These windows can float on the workspace or be docked in the window docking area All these windows may be viewed or hidden via the View menu or their respective shortcut keys Window Shortcut keys Description Explorer Alt 1 Allows you to view and access your media files without leaving the work area You may also preview media files and place them in your project from this window Chopper Alt 2 Allows you to select portions of a media file tha
213. dio device 257 Display 263 Editing 261 Envelope colors 263 External Control amp Automation tab 265 General 254 MIDI 260 Other 263 Sync 262 Track colors 263 Pre roll 184 Previewing clips 103 Previewing media Chopper window 95 Explorer window 30 Processing MIDI 198 Program change keyframes 210 Projects Adding media 31 Key 91 Opening 30 Playing 45 Properties 29 Publishing to the Internet 50 Rendering 47 Saving 46 Starting 29 Tempo 90 Time signature 91 Properties Clip 115 212 Event 64 MIDI track 202 MIDI track 174 180 202 Project 29 Track 115 Proxy file 315 Publishing projects 50 Creating personal accounts 50 Uploading 50 Punch in 183 Quantize MIDI 198 Quantizing MIDI In the list editor 221 In the piano roll editor 216 Real time rendering 50 Recording 179 Arming tracks 180 Into atime selection 183 Into an event 183 Into an event with time selection 183 MIDI tracks 189 Specifying storage folder 185 Starting and stopping 182 Using an input bus 184 Redo 44 Series of edits 44 Reference library 75 Sony Sound Series Loops and Samples 75 Regions 87 88 In the Chopper 96 Reloading Media files 122 Removing Audio from a video 231 Video tracks 231 Removing a section label 68 Renaming Tracks 40 Renaming sections 67 Rendering MIDI projects 222 Projects 47 Real time 50 Supported formats 48 Surround projects 245 To new tracks 129 Us
214. ditor drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window Previewing single events When monitoring is enabled the list editor will play events when you select them 1 Inthe list editor click the Monitor button 4 to turn on the event monitor 2 Click anywhere in an event row to play the event Playing MIDI files In list editor you may play your MIDI file by using the buttons on the transport bar Item Loop Playback Play from Start Play Pause Stop Go to Start Go to End Icon Description Click to toggle looped playback mode When the button is selected only the events between the mark in and mark out points will be played Plays the entire MIDI file from the beginning regardless of cursor position Plays from the current cursor position Halts playback The next time you click Play playback will begin with the last event played Halts playback The next time you click Play playback will begin with the first event in the list Moves the cursor to the beginning of the list Moves the cursor to the end of the list WORKING WITH MIDI 217 Setting a loop region When the Loop Playback button is selected you can set a portion of the edit list to play repeatedly The beginning end and length of the loop region are displayed in the Loop boxes in the lower right corner of the List Editor tab 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the Loop Playback button Select the first event you want to play
215. ds are not affected by the mute state in order to facilitate cue mixes Select this check box if you want to configure audio track sends to behave as they did in ACID 6 0 and earlier When the check box is selected you can open projects created with earlier versions of ACID and be assured they will sound the same as they did in earlier versions of ACID Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose the sound that will be used to play the metronome For more information see Using the metronome on page 180 Type a value or use the spinner to change the value that will be used when normalizing clips Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings Using the Audio Device tab Item Audio device type Default Stereo and Front playback device Default Rear playback device Default Center and LFE playback device Playback buffering seconds Enable track buffering Default audio recording device Description Choose a driver type from the drop down list e Microsoft Sound Mapper The default setting Allows the Sound Mapper to choose an appropriate playback device e Direct Sound Surround Mapper Allows the Surround Mapper to choose appropriate playback devices for the front rear and center LFE channels in a 5 1 surround project pg 236 e Windows Classic Wave Driver Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a classic wave driver For stereo projects choose a device from the Default Stereo and F
216. ds of each One Shot to play box and Number of Beatmapped measures to play box to specify how different file types are previewed 2 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog 3 Inthe Explorer select the media you want to preview Hold Shift while clicking to select multiple adjacent files or hold Ctrl while clicking to select multiple nonadjacent files 4 Click the Start Preview button The first selected file in the list is previewed followed by each file in the list A file s icon changes to a Play icon to indicate which file is currently previewing Note To add the currently previewing file to your project press Ctrl Enter Press Enter to add all selected files to your project Using Auto Preview Click the Auto Preview button to toggle automatic playback of media files when you select them in the Explorer If your project is currently playing when you select a new file the new file plays back along with your project This feature allows you to listen to the media file in the context of your project Adding media to the project You must add media files to a project before you can paint arrange and process them When you add a file to a project a new track is created to accommodate it New tracks are added at the current volume of the Preview fader in the Mixing Console window unless you have set a default track volume level For more information see Setting default track properties on page 252 There are se
217. during recording only When countoff is turned on for recording only the button will display a record icon bint Pe One Bar Countoff Sets the number of measures before the cursor position the metronome will count off Two Bar Countoff Note Countoff always uses the tempo at the cursor position Countoff always uses the tempo at the cursor Four Bar Countoff position In the following example if you positioned the cursor at measure three and choose Two Bar Countoff the metronome would count off for two measures at 120 BPM before reaching the cursor position Piin a Fim 4 11 dA Roswell brums 02b Configure Metronome Displays the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog where you can choose a metronome sound For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 Adjusting the metronome s volume If you need to adjust the volume of the metronome drag the Preview fader in the Mixing Console If the Preview fader isn t visible click the Preview Bus button in the Mixing Console View pane For more information on the Mixing Console see Using the Mixing Console on page 151 RECORDING AUDIO 181 Recording You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection The recording is added to the timeline as new clip and is saved to a media file on your hard drive By default the Microsoft Sound Mapper is used to record audio However you can use the Audio Device tab in the Pref
218. e e MIDI track channels display controls for the track automation mode arm for record MIDI input solo mute pan and track gain e Bus channels display controls for the bus automation mode mute solo pan bus gain and pre post fader effects processing e Assignable effects channels display controls for the bus automation mode mute solo pan and bus gain 50 Audio Track 1 Channel Label If the Meter Region is not visible the Fader Region also displays a peak meter Channel Label The Channel Label displays the name of the track or bus Double click to edit the name Adding track assignable FX bus and soft synth channels In its default configuration the Mixing Console displays a channel for each track bus soft synth and assignable effects chain in your project You can use the buttons on the Mixing Console toolbar to add tracks assignable effects chains or busses to your project For more information see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 Using audio and MIDI track channel strips A separate channel strip is displayed for each audio and MIDI track in your project Each channel strip mirrors controls that are displayed in the track header To show or hide audio track channel strips click the Tracks button in the View pane To show or hide MIDI track channel strips click the MIDI Tracks button in the View pane USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 155 Changing a track s name To rename an audio or MI
219. e Rename from the shortcut menu or double click to change the track name 18 CHAPTER 1 Bus assignment Device selection Clicking the Bus Assignment button l and selecting a letter from the menu allows you to assign the corresponding track to the specified output bus However the button is only available in projects containing multiple busses MIDI Input button Clicking the MIDI Input button lt allows you to choose a MIDI input device for recording MIDI For more information see Recording MIDI on page 189 MIDI Output button Clicking the MIDI Output button allows you to select soft synths and MIDI devices and the channel you want to use to play MIDI data on the track For more information see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track on page 190 Gravyboat ft oe Auto All M Pro 53 Xpress 1 ME Attack Tune 100 m Center n 1 MI MIDI Output Pro 53 press Program button Clicking the Program button allows you to change the settings of your soft synth and show hide keyframes For more information see Changing the track voice on page 203 and Adding a program change keyframe on page 210 Invert Track Phase button Clicking the Invert Track Phase button reverses the phase of all events on an audio track Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file it can prevent phase cancellation when mixing or crossfading audio signals Track FX button The Track
220. e Creating selections of a specific musical length on page 97 From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 to toggle all snapping options off 5 Click the Link Arrow to Selection button to toggle the linking option off You can now adjust the selection without changing the increment 6 Drag the middle of the increment arrow to reposition selection length in the Chopper 7 Use the mouse and or keyboard to fine tune the selection The increment arrow does not change 8 Insert the desired selection data in the track view For more information see Inserting selections in the track view on page 99 9 Repeat steps six through eight to insert all desired selections in the track view 100 CHAPTER 6 Chapter 7 Working with Tracks This chapter covers advanced track features including using clips track effect chains track envelopes groove mapping and stereo panning modes You ll also learn more about track types track properties track folders and rendering tracks to new files Using clips with tracks In previous versions of ACID each track in your project corresponded to a single media file If you re comfortable with the track equals media model this version of ACID can behave in much the same way when you add media to your project a new track is created for the media file You can use the Draw _ and Paint tools to create events using the track s media In this v
221. e Help menu or press F1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 15 ACID Pro Online Help Toolbar S B Hide Print Options Glossary Shortcuts Tabs gt contents index Search Favorites Q Introduction jA What s New ACID Pro 2 Using Help Professional Music Workstation 2 Technical Support 2 Legal Notices The ACID Window m D How Do I Using ACID Working with MIDI ACID Pro software is proof that all digital audio workstations are not Customizing ACID Software created equal New multitrack technologies and full MIDI sequencing join 2 Keyboard Shortcuts legendary ACID looping functionality to form an incomparable 9 Signal Flow Diagrams environment for music creation and production ACID Pro software has a A fi Seen 9 comprehensive toolset for composing recording editing and processing Information ing audio and MIDI that will revitalize your entire music making workflow 2 Glossary pane New features Fundamentals Interactive Tutorials External control surface channel tracking Custom labels for ASIO drivers and ports Support for opening and rendering FLAC files Support for opening and rendering AAC files Support for rendering AC 3 files with the Dolby Digital AC 3 Studio plug in SISIKII Mixing and Editing Y Mixing Console window for a traditional hardware style mixer view Context sensitive help To use context sensiti
222. e Insert MIDI Track Tip You can also add a MIDI track by pressing Ctrl Alt Q Adding MIDI files to a project You can add MIDI files to your project just as you would add audio files You can double click a MIDI file to create new tracks and events or you can drag a MIDI file from the Explorer or Media Manager window to an existing track to add a new clip Note When you select a MIDI file in the Explorer window its length tempo type and number of tracks are displayed at the bottom of the window Sam SSP ae e E E MIDI gt AFASTERS MID E Echo Hat waw Cy Basses AFNIK6 MIC l Fast Pan Hats wav canyon AHLFBRSH MID ile n Perc Beat Box D4 wav ectronica SS Beat Box 06 wav j Guitars canyon mid ial canyonmofa acd O keys C Odd Time Project fy Product Information i Stereo ipia IU Explorer Media Manager Groove Pool M MIDI 270 0000 at Multi tempo Type 0 1 Tracks When you right click a MIDI file in the Explorer window you can choose how you want to add it to your project 1 Add to Project Adds the file to the current ACID project and adds tracks to the track list No events are created e For Type 0 MIDI files a separate track is created for each channel in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track e For Type 1 MIDI files a separate track is created for each track in the MIDI file and all tracks are organized within a folder track WORKING WITH
223. e Quick text search check box in the Search pane and type a keyword or keywords in the edit box Tip You can separate search terms using quotation marks and other operators If quotes or wildcard characters are not applied an is automatically added before and after each search term 2 Press Enter The Media Manager tool searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window Any file that contains your keywords in the file name or attributes is displayed tags are not searched as keywords Your search terms are displayed in the yellow bar below the Search Results toolbar E SS p Match all o mg Guitar tag and E B ow Mame Clear Search terms Rating Ebow vibration 01 way Keyword v JEBow T Guitar m pF 2 ra A Ebow vibration 02 waw Guitar H E 2 Audio A Ebow vibration 03 waw Guitar A Ebow vibration D4 waw Guitar LO Keyboards A Ebow Vibration 05 waw Guitar A Ebow vibration 06 waw Guitar x Ebow Vibration OF way Guitar Search results O iy Drum Loops A Ebow vibration 08 waw Guitar ce E Drum One Shots A Ebow vibration 09 waw Guitar E i x A Ebow vibration 10 way Guitar paui A Ebow vibration 11 4ay Guitar Advancet A Ebow vibration 12 way Guitar A Ebow vibration 13 way Guitar 13 items found out of 1 092 total theme Media Manager 3 You can refine the search result
224. e a new setting from the Root Note or Time Signature submenu Reloading files Clicking the Reload button Relead located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window restores all settings from the media file Any setting changes made on the Stretch tab are discarded Clicking this button also updates the Clip Properties window when changes are made to the properties from an external editor Replacing files Clicking the Replace File button EReplace located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window displays the Replace File dialog and allows you to replace the audio file on the current clip with a new audio file This feature only replaces the actual audio All track timing effects and envelopes remain Tip You can also replace a file by dragging an audio file from the Explorer and dropping it on the track name of an existing track 122 CHAPTER 7 Adding a clip to the Groove Pool Click the Add to Groove Pool button amp located on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window to make the selected clip available in the Groove Pool so you can apply its timing to other tracks Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop tracks only Saving file properties When you make changes in the Clip Properties window the changes you have made are saved in the project file but does not alter the original media file To save clip property changes in the media file click the Save File button 4 You can also click
225. e added if either or both of the Audio or Video check boxes are selected 6 Specify whether you want to search for new files or all files Select the New files only radio button if you want to search only for new media files Files that already exist in the media library will be skipped Select the All files radio button if you want to search for all media files in the specified folder New media files will be added and files that already exist in the media library will be searched to determine whether their properties have changed 7 Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For more information about tagging media please see Tagging media files on page 71 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 80 8 Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d loops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved automatically If you need to modify the pattern matching you can edit the AutoTagPatterns xml file which is created in yourMy Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts Note
226. e an output that is longer or shorter than the input Plug ins that generate tails when there is no more input but otherwise operate in place such as reverb and delay are considered in place plug ins Sections of silence between selections that you can create using the Chopper and insert into the track view The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor ina word processor It is where markers or commands may be inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the track view Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long and are stored completely in RAM for playback A marker is an anchored accessible reference point in a file An informational pathway over which MIDI data can travel A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices such as sound cards and CD players If a device has an MCI device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Windows software Files that may be placed within the ACID project After a media file is placed into the project it is referred to as an event A MIDI device specific timing reference MIDI Clock is not absolute time like MIDI timecode MTC instead it is a tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is conveni
227. e associated with ACID and prompts you to restore the file association if necessary When this check box is selected ACID will not attempt to obtain disc information from Gracenote MusiclD when you insert an audio CD Select the check box and enter a number in the box if you want to list your most recently used projects at the bottom of the File menu Restores all general preferences to the default settings Description Enter a lower and upper limit to specify which files will be opened as loops if stretching properties are not saved in the file Files that are shorter than the lower limit will be opened as one shot tracks files longer than the upper limit will the Beatmapper Wizard pg 113 When the check box is selected ACID software will place a rapid fade on the edges of audio events 10 ms by default to soften potentially harsh transitions When the command is not selected edges of new events are not faded fades that were applied before the check box is cleared are not removed Right click an event and select or clear the Quick Fade Edges command to override the default event fade behavior for individual events Note Selecting or clearing the check box will not affect existing quick fades in your project To remove all quick fades from a project enter 0 in the Quick fade time box Enter a time in milliseconds to specify the duration of fades applied to the edges of events Important Changing this setting will aff
228. e commands Description Record Go to using measures beats ticks Go to using current time ruler format Set end of time selection using measures beats and ticks when Time Selection tool is selected Toggle snapping Temporarily suspend snapping Toggle snap to grid Ripple edit mode Draw tool Select next edit tool in list Select previous edit tool in list Mark in point Mark out point for selection Render to new track Insert show hide track pan envelope Insert remove track pan envelope Insert show hide track volume envelope Keys Spacebar Esc Q Shift Spacebar or Ctrl Shift Spacebar when the timeline or track view has focus Shift F12 from any window Ctrl Spacebar when the timeline or track view has focus F12 from any window Enter when the timeline or track view has focus Ctrl F12 from any window Keys Ctrl R Ctrl G Shift G Ctrl Shift G F8 Shift drag Ctrl F8 Ctrl L Ctrl D D Shift D lor Oor Ctrl M P Shift P V Description Record Go to start of project Go to end of project Skip backward Skip forward Description Insert remove track volume envelope Adjust envelope point value in fine increments without changing the point s timeline position Adjust envelope point value in normal increments without changing the point s timeline position Adjust envelope point s timeline position without changing its value Insert region Insert marker standard
229. e eee eee eee eee e eee tenet eeeeneees 239 Using the Surround Panner WINdOW ccc ccc cece eee cette cnet een ee eenees 240 Automating PANNING ccc cece cee cece eee eee e eee e eee e eee eee eeeeenaees 242 Turning on panning keyframes 0 ccc ccc cece eee ence eee e eee e eee ne eeeeeeennes 242 Adding Panning keyframes 6 a c4svei ss dundee aud dani earn ere NEIN EEEN AANEEN 242 Working with keyframes cc ccc cece eee cotre eee REEERE EERE A OON 243 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 Rendering SUrrOUNT Projects ccc ccc ccc ccc cece ee eee eee eee eee ee eeeeeees 245 Buming AC 3 festo DVD ts esacuidasvsneneeddsenawinaeiedbadeeeaanesensaaaeteeadadianess 246 Customizing ACID Software ccc cc cece cece eee eee ee eeeeeeeeneeees 247 Working with ACID windows ccc cece eee eee e eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Docking and floating ACID windows ccc ccc cece cence ene eee e eee eee eeennes 247 Changing the time ruler format 0 ccc cee eee eee cette eee ne eeeeeeeeees 249 Using EM TEV ONSCU ecpedatseccnsacuneeeenr EEEE TENTEN EEEE VEROA EEEE DENET OE EESE 249 Using the project grid scerirsrsireerirresree viene mire itenei biR 14 Katee ee EEES 249 Seting Ine ONG YPE 2ac cacveusarseaniaeskeraeentannceesenadaeins EEA EEN 250 Using TAG TOON seritsit ter ritarren rEr EIE IT Ea or eeen ECEN OEE 250 Hiding and displaying the toolbar sussssusessssesessesesseseseseseesesorsos
230. e from the Template drop down list 1 Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog 2 Click in the Template box and enter a name for the template 3 Click the Save Template button l Tip Your metadata command templates are saved in the cndtemp xm file in the ACID program folder You can edit this file directly to modify your templates 86 CHAPTER 5 Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file command markers can be used to display headlines show captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Several command types are included that you may add to a streaming media file Some command types are exclusive to either the Windows Media or the RealMedia file types Command Player Type Description URL Windows Media Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s Internet browser to change the content being and RealMedia displayed With this command you enter the URL that displays at a specific time during the rendered project s playback TEXT Windows Media Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that displays during playback Note To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9 choose Captions and Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu and then choose On if Available from the submenu WMClosedCaption Windows Media Displays the entered text in the captioning window defined by a
231. e information see Playing double time half time on page 299 Stretching method Stretching properties determine how time compression and expansion is performed on audio events If you hear audio anomalies due to time compression try editing the stretching properties of the track Looping segments is the default stretching method and it works well with most types of material The clip media is divided into sections that are crossfaded and some sections may be looped if necessary to achieve the necessary length Combination beat stretch markers and stretch only markers h represent the divisions in the clip media Choose Nonlooping segments for sustaining material such as synthesizer pads and held notes The clip media is divided into sections that are crossfaded but no sections are looped Combination beat stretch markers and stretch only markers represent the divisions in the clip media Choose Pitch shift segments to shift the pitch of the clip to adjust for increases or decreases in tempo Using this option you can eliminate some of the problems that occur with extreme tempo changes just create new sounds from existing loops For example if you have slowed the project tempo down and hear echo artifacts choosing Pitch shift segments can eliminate these artifacts Combination beat stretch markers and stretch only markers represent the divisions in the clip media Choose Sliced segments for material such as drum loops whe
232. e main ACID toolbar you can use groove maps to adjust the timing of entire tracks or portions of tracks Tips Ifyou want to get really creative try setting a clip s stretching method to Pitch shift segments on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window When a groove adjusts a beat so it plays early the pitch will be raised When a beat is played late its pitch will be lowered Ifa groove map does not seem to work correctly on a loop the beats in the file may not be properly detected Click the Redetect Beats button on the Stretch tab of the Clip Properties window to apply the ACID beat detection algorithm to the loop Note Groove maps are applied nondestructively If you want to change a media files s inherent groove use the Render to new track command to render a new grooved media file Important Grooves cannot be applied to Beatmapped clips Applying a groove to an entire track 1 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn t already visible 2 Drag a groove from the Groove Pool window to a track You can drop the groove in the track list or on the timeline A groove event is displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate that a groove has been applied to the track To toggle the height of the groove strips choose Show Full Size Groove Strips from the View menu Tips e Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event s groove e Right
233. e notes In drum grid mode the Draw and Paint tools both draw fixed length note events Allows you to insert notes of a specific length The Paint tool is different from the Draw tool in that it can cross note row boundaries Use the Paint tool to add a random element to your ACID projects Note In drum grid mode the Draw and Paint tools both draw fixed length note events Using the Paint tool e Click the down arrow next to the Paint tool button and choose a note length from the menu e Click the Paint tool button to select the tool The Paint tool is selected and notes will be painted using the selected note length Note Right click with the Paint tool to erase notes Allows you to remove existing notes 4 Inside an event drag in the row for the pitch you want to create to create a new note or click an existing note with the Erase tool amp toremove it If you draw or paint notes beyond the event edge the event is automatically extended Hold Shift while dragging to override horizontal snapping press Shift after you click Tip n inline MIDI editing mode drag in the top portion of the track to create a new event using the active clip Sa I I I pl Editing note positions 1 Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button E 2 Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll drum grid 3 Select the notes you want to edit by doing either of the following Click a note with the Draw tool
234. e on the track view A dashed rectangular box appears on the track view and all events within and adjacent to it are selected 4 While holding the left mouse button click and release the right mouse button referred to as toggle clicking The selection method changes to vertical and again all events within and adjacent to the selection area are selected 5 Toggle click the mouse once more The selection method changes to horizontal and all events within and adjacent to the selection area are selected Creating time selections You are not limited to selecting events Frequently you may want to select only audio events occurring within a time selection You can do this using the Time Selection tool 1 Click the Time Selection Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the submenu The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor 1 2 Drag the mouse in the track view The selection area is highlighted on the track view 3 Release the mouse button A time selection is created and all events within it are selected Note f the selection area is automatically snapping to the track view s grid lines the ACID snapping feature is turned on You can turn snapping off by pressing F8 GETTING STARTED 39 Creating event selections within time selections You can select specific events within a general time selection This technique is useful for selecting individual instruments from a par
235. e processed by each plug in in its respective order on the chain The events effects processing is cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange the order of plug ins to achieve the desired sound For more information see Arranging plug in chain order on page 109 1 Click the Track FX button in the track header The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Click the Edit Chain button to display the Plug In Chooser dialog Chain area Plug In Chooser O Audio Fx ef Amplitude Modulation P Track EQ All ee Charus a Track Noise Gabe Automatable Fi Distortion fPivibrata O Packaged Chains le Dither G Sony Pi Flange Wah vah Cy Third Party Hi Gapper Snipper 9 Track Optimized oe E VST 3 Graphic Dynamics Ee Graphic EQ Pfi Multi Band Dynamics Hite Multi Tap Delay His Moise Gate iy Paragraphic EQ Hi Parametric EQ R Pitch Shift HE nm PEO EAEE POs 108 CHAPTER 7 3 Select the plug ins that you want to add There are three ways to add a plug in to the chain e Double click the plug in e Drag the plug in to the chain area e Select the plug in and click the Add button 4 Rearrange the order of plug ins as needed by dragging plug ins to different locations in the chain or by selecting a plug in and clicking the Shift Plug In Left and Shift Plug In Right buttons 5 Once you have added all of the plug ins and specified the plug in chain order click on the OK button
236. e separated by five seconds of silence copying and pasting these events results in the five seconds of silence also being pasted into the project ie Original events Pasted events Taking this concept a step further if you select discontinuous events from several tracks copying and pasting these events results in any selected time data being pasted into the project as well This maintains the relative position of events in the project SO oe Original events Pasted events Note You can also paste events across tracks using clips For more information see Copying clips and events across tracks on page 102 EDITING EVENTS 55 Using the Paste command 1 Place the cursor at the desired position on the timeline 2 Paste the clipboard contents using any of the following methods e Click the Paste button on the toolbar e Choose Paste from the Edit menu e Right click the track view and choose Paste from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl V Using Paste Repeat When building projects you often need to paste the contents of the clipboard several times Rather than repeatedly pasting and moving the content the Paste Repeat command allows you to specify the number of times and at what interval the clipboard s contents are pasted on the track view This is a useful way of quickly building a project that uses a repetitive riff or structure For example you can build the backing tracks for a twelve bar blues copy them a
237. e soft synths can tax your computer s processing and disk resources Freezing MIDI tracks allows you to convert each MIDI track to a wav file effectively taking your soft synths offline Freeze your tracks when you re finished editing them After freezing you can adjust track volume and panning only Notes Only tracks that are routed to soft synths can be frozen Track freeze is unavailable for tracks that are routed to MIDI devices or ReWire devices muted or armed for recording Any VSTi parameter envelopes you have applied to a soft synth bus track are also saved into the frozen wav file e The soft synth bus in the Mixing Console window is not frozen You can continue to work with effects volume and panning on the soft synth bus e Ifyou freeze your MIDI tracks and save your project as an ACID project with embedded media acd zip the frozen wav files will be saved with your project You can use this method to archive a MIDI project or share your project with a collaborator who doesn t have all your soft synths Freezing selected tracks Select the tracks you want to freeze Click the Freeze Track button ona selected track or right click a selected track and choose Freeze Track from the shortcut menu The tracks are rendered to wav format Please note that render speed is dependent on the soft synth plug in If you freeze a track that is routed to a multiport VST instrument you ll be prompted to choose which port
238. e the Meters control region click the Meters button in the View pane If the Meters control region is not visible peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region Right click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options Muting or soloing an assignable effects chain When the Faders control region is visible each assignable effects chain displays Mute and Solo I buttons To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane Muting an assignable effects chain When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can click the Mute button to prevent an assignable effects chain bus from being played in the mix Click the Mute button on additional chains to add them to the mute group To unmute a chain click the Mute button again When the Automation Settings button is selected the Mute button is displayed as amp and you can use the button to edit mute automation on the bus track Soloing an assignable effects chain Click the Solo button to mute all unselected assignable effects chains and busses Click the Solo button on additional assignable effects chains or busses to add them to the solo group To remove a chain from the solo group click its Solo button again Adjusting assignable effects panning or volume When the Faders control region is visible each bus displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader To show or hide the
239. e tightly Or to turn off snapping altogether click the Enable Snapping button to toggle it off Specifying a velocity value for notes To enter a specific velocity value right click a note event in the piano roll choose Velocity from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate command from the submenu Command Description Set to Maximum Sets the velocity to 127 Set to Default Sets the velocity to 64 Set to Minimum Sets the velocity to 0 Set to Allows you to enter a custom velocity value 214 CHAPTER 12 Changing velocity data 1 Inthe lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click the drop down arrow and choose Velocity from the menu 2 Inthe area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab drag the top of a velocity bar up or down to change the velocity value You can also drag across multiple bars to change their values at the same time HEA AA 4 F O gt gt ll K H EE Velocity 12 J6 64 32 0 Setting pitch bend 1 Inthe lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click the drop down arrow and choose Pitch Bend from the menu 2 Inthe area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab drag to draw your pitch bend curve To erase a curve right click and drag Pitch Bend 3 191 4 096 o SRP 8 192 4 Col gt gt 1 E HW H 1770 Changing continuous controller information 1 Inthe lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click
240. e to add an automation envelope to the timeline Show Hide If the parameter has an automation envelope Visible or Hidden is displayed Envelope SO Click the down arrow and choose Hide Envelope or Show Envelope to toggle its display Click the Hide all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to hide all envelopes on the bus track Reset All If the parameter has an automation envelope you can click the down arrow and choose Reset All Envelope Points Envelope Points to restore all points to the default value Click the Reset all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to set all points on all envelopes on the bus track to the default value Delete Envelope If the parameter has an automation envelope you can click the down arrow and choose Delete Envelope to remove the envelope and all envelope points from the timeline Click the Remove all Envelopes button at the bottom of the window to delete all parameter envelopes on the bus track 5 Click the down arrow inthe Curve Type box to set the default fade curve for each parameter s automation envelope The new curve type will be applied to all envelope segments You can right click a segment and choose a new fade curve to override the default curve type WORKING WITH MIDI 211 Editing parameter automation envelopes You can edit mute automation settings by adding an envelope to the bus track or by using the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window For more
241. e track plays with no boost or cut from the software Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume Pan This dedicated pan slider controls the position of a track in the stereo field Dragging the slider to the left places the track in the left soeaker more than the right while dragging the slider to the right places the track in the right speaker Because true stereo panning is used you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right Unlike a left right balance control which simply decreases the volume of one channel the default panning mode actually adds the audio from one channel to the other When panning a track adjust the track volume accordingly You can choose among five panning types to determine how a track is panned For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113 FX With the multipurpose slider you can control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable effect chains that you have created Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume Bus With the multipurpose slider you can control the level of the track sent to each of the additional busses that you have created for your project Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging the fader to the right boosts the volume Note When adjusting the mix of your tracks remember to look at the meters on the Mixing Console Because you are addi
242. ece cece tee eee eeeeeeees 97 NS CTEIMICPIN GCVOIMIGIIUS 1 4 s4 ace ce oraacuesuns cere een Semenaienas eaunuarer eeauuu atau arene eaees 98 CT EACING INChCINGNUS 63 4 cenuusednce ce nnceecme yer ee nd outs 4 wee becouse AERA AEEA ARA 98 Creating increments of a specific musical length ccc cee cece eee een ee eee eeees 99 Creating increments of a custom musical length ccc cece cece eee e eee eeenees 99 Inserting selections in the track VIQW cece ccc ccc cece eee teen e eee eeeees 99 Using the Insert Selection button 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee ee eee eeeeees 99 Using CODY and paste esssreridesrreri r td aenienseded nor seuesnedew rene E EEEE 99 Dragomg selections scavesesscrneateseptnrias esses ienese din hate TEIE E SEE 99 Moving the insert position in the track view 1 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eeeenees 99 Saving Chopper selections as new fileS cece cece cece cence eee eee eeeeees 100 Using the Chopper with One shots ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eeeeees 100 WV Or KING WIT PACKS c c4scegasnusan E ibs won Kanne Cen ee eeaweeNesanawecwames 101 USING ClIDS WITH MACKS aerer sau ihaeesdaosweuds austere renee OATS AIEEE NAE EET 101 Adding clips TO tracks 5 0 00 00ccs c6i0dbdtannadin dt dina bbe dd tention eden ee a aA 101 SIA HOS Tha CK 4 4 sano E neous sant ao eee ne tae denen ewetecuaee cue T S 106 Adding envelopes to a DUS track ccc ccc eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 106
243. ecorded automation settings 1 2 Select the Automation Settings button in the track header Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Touch from the menu The icon in the track header is displayed as a Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click the Play button gt to start playback When you re ready to start editing adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust Envelope points keyframes are updated at the cursor position and when you stop adjusting the control the original settings are preserved Click Stop to end playback and stop recording automation Overwriting recorded settings in Latch mode In Latch mode envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes Use Latch mode to overwrite automation settings with new values tL 2 Select the Automation Settings button amp in the track header Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Latch from the menu The icon in the track header is displayed as a if Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click the Play button gt to start playback When you re ready to start editing adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want
244. ect all existing quick fades in your project Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify whether you want to display waveforms in the timeline while recording audio pg 182 Turning off waveform displays can improve performance Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the type of clip that will be created when you record audio pg 34 Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify what happens if you click the Record button when no track is armed New Audio Track Creates a new audio track where you can record New MIDI Track Creates a new MIDI track where you can record Do Nothing The Record button is unavailable unless an audio or MIDI track is armed for recording APPENDIX A 255 Item Include project name when naming recorded media Track prefader sends listen to mute Use legacy track send gain Metronome sound Normalize peak level dB Default All 256 APPENDIX A Description Select this check box if you want to use the project name to identify recorded clips For example if this check box is selected and you re working with My Remix acd recorded files will be named My Remix Track X Recording X wav If this check box is not selected recorded files will be named Track X Recording X wav Select this check box if you want pre volume sends from tracks to busses and assignable effects to respond to the track mute state When the check box is cleared the pre volume sen
245. ect does not contain any MIDI tracks this button is unavailable Click to show or hide channel strips for busses If your project does not contain any busses this button is unavailable Click to show or hide channel strips for soft synths If your project does not contain any soft synths this button is unavailable Click to show or hide channel strips for assignable effects chains If your project does not contain any assignable effects chains this button is unavailable Click to show or hide the channel strip for the Master bus Click to show or hide the channel strip for the Preview bus Click to show or hide the insert effects control region in channel strips Click to show or hide the sends control region in channel strips Click to show or hide the I O control region in channel strips Click to show or hide the peak meters control region in channel strips Click to show or hide the Faders control region in channel strips Drag the slider to adjust the range of all meters in the Mixing Console Tip You can also right click a meter and choose a range from the shortcut menu Click to display narrow default E or wide channel strips Mixing Console 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Weasic Acoustic A sF Acoustic St Elurban Riddim Mlurban Riddim 5 Distorted Farfi eels m Analog Factory 1 Fx1 A Bus A Master Show All Audio Tracks MIDI Tracks Audio Busses Soft Synths Assignable F
246. ect the Draw tool 3 Ifvelocity stems aren t already displayed choose Show Inline MIDI Editing from the View menu and then choose Show Note On Velocities or Show Note Off Velocities from the submenu Tips Press F while inline MIDI editing mode to toggle the display of velocity stems 4 Drag the top of the stem for note on velocity lt or for note off velocity up to increase the note s velocity or drag down to decrease velocity If multiple notes are selected the velocities of all selected notes are adjusted at the same time Sell the Sizzle Tips e Double click the top of a velocity stem to set the note s velocity to the default value 64 e Right click a note and choose Velocity from the shortcut menu You can then choose a command from the submenu to set the note on velocity e f multiple notes are selected you can edit the velocities of all selected notes simultaneously Processing and filtering MIDI events From the Edit menu choose MIDI Processes and Filters to apply destructive editing to MIDI events on the timeline You can quantize data in events edit velocity values change the duration of an event or transpose MIDI data 198 CHAPTER 12 Quantizing MIDI events 1 From the Edit menu choose MIDI Processes and Filters The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed 2 Select the Quantize tab MIDI Processes and Filters Quantize velocity Duration Quantize Start Quantize Release
247. ected you can open projects created with earlier versions of ACID and be assured they will sound the same as they did in earlier versions of ACID For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 Assigning tracks to busses Assigning tracks to busses allows you to apply settings to a series of tracks or route tracks to a hardware output For example if you wanted to apply the same three effects to several tracks you could apply the effects to a bus and assign the tracks to that bus If you wanted to send several tracks to a single hardware output you could assign the tracks to a bus and then route the bus to a hardware output Assigning a track to a bus The bus button in a track header chooses the track s primary output Assigning tracks to busses is especially useful for creating submixes that allow you to adjust the levels of multiple tracks at once or apply an effect to multiple tracks 1 Click the bus button on the track Bass Guitar E Gk O I 6 Clip 2 uk i et Master Master Vol 6 6 dB tit Bus Bus 4 Pan Center ij Buss Bus E Bus Bus C Audio Device Preferences The button is displayed as a when the track is routed to the master bus and the bus letter is displayed A and soon when a track is routed to another bus Select the desired bus from the submenu The Bus button changes to display the selected bus Notes e Ifthe Bus button does not appear on the track then you have not s
248. ection is adjustable to increase or decrease the pre and post roll duration During recording the selected event s edges serve as the punch in and out points You can create multiple punch in and out points by selecting more events within the time selection You may need to split an existing event into three pieces so that you can select a smaller portion of the event to record into For more information see Splitting events on page 58 1 Click the Arm for Record button on the desired track s 2 Select the event to record into Tip You may record into multiple events by pressing Ctrl and making your selections 3 On the marker bar drag a time selection You may adjust the time selection by dragging the selection bar s starting and ending points Make the time selection start before the event for a pre roll 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording If input monitoring is turned on the track s original audio is played until the cursor reaches the selected event When the cursor plays through the selected event you ll hear your recording input and the track s original audio is played again when the cursor moves past the selected event RECORDING AUDIO 183 Using pre roll The previous technique allows you to define the playback region with a time selection and sets the punch in and punch out points in the recording to the event boundaries When you click the Record button playback begi
249. ed before encoding 5 Click OK The track list and Mixing Console window switch to 5 1 surround mode The Master bus becomes the Surround Master bus which contains faders for each of the six surround channels Surround panners appear on tracks and Mixing Console controls Tracks routed to Mixing Console controls busses assignable effects or soft synths do not have surround panners panning for these tracks takes place on the Mixing Console control 236 CHAPTER 14 Track list in 5 1 surround mode Mixing Console in 5 1 surround mode Electric Guitar 03 E e Ok GQ By Master 4 Bus Vol 12 0 dB m 2 Electric Guit s q Surround E anner Microsoft Sound Ma Microsoft Sound Ma Microsoft Sound Ma Surround Ma r Electric Guitar 04 EG Her O p Touch Touch Vol 12 0 dB m i Electric Guit Surround Electric Dulcim El e Ok GQ panners LFE yol 14 0 dB EE electric Dul q Track routed nf Ir ee oe inf to LFE i S a r ial Electric Dulcim A fe ey amp I a ed vol 14 0 dB m a Electric Dul lt Track routed T 27 28 18 27 to Bus 3 24 3 i organ ORTHO a a 100 J Center 1 M MIDI track ai el a routed to a j is soft synth F a1 ba i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Surround Master Bus A a Front L R Rear L R Center LFE Routing to hardware in the Mixing Console You must route the surround audio to the
250. ed by setting a start offset within specific individual events For more information see Changing event properties on page 64 Adding through subtraction You can create dynamics by removing sections of events You can erase sections of events from a project by using the Erase amp tool To demonstrate using subtractive arranging add three or four similar drum loops to a project Use the Erase tool to delete specific sections of each event For example erase all snares from one track all basses from another high hats from the third and so on This results in a tighter more realistic drum sound for your project Experiment with taking this technique a step further and randomly remove sections from each track When doing this remember to keep at least one of the drum tracks playing at all times unless you want the drums to completely drop out of the mix Randomly removing sections of events adds realism to your projects by approximating how a drummer plays with slight variations throughout a song Tweaking dynamics You can use several techniques to adjust the dynamics of your mix Fading in and out of mixes With bus tracks you can use a volume envelope to fade in and out of the entire project 1 Press B to view bus tracks 2 Select the Master bus track and press Shift V to add a volume envelope 3 Add and adjust envelope points to fade into and out of the project For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113
251. edia library Enable Media Manager requires ACID restart Allow snapping for post groove markers Check acd file type association at startup Do not query Gracenote for CD information Recently used project list Default All Using the Audio tab Item Open files as loops between seconds Quick fade edit edges of audio events Quick fade time ms Waveform display while recording ACID type for recorded audio Record action when nothing is armed Description When this check box is selected the Media Manager will save information about media usage so you can perform searches for media relationships You can search for projects that use a media file projects where a media file was previewed media that was rendered with a media file and so on When this check box is selected the Media Manager will start when you start ACID Clear the check box to turn off the Media Manager and prevent it from starting with the application If you re not using the Media Manager you may want to turn it off to conserve processing power or memory When this check box is selected groove markers in the Groove Editor will snap to the current grid spacing if snapping is enabled Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping press Shift after you click Clear the check box if you do not want groove markers to snap to the grid When this check box is selected ACID automatically checks whether acd acd bak and acd zip ar
252. editing mode Move the cursor to the desired timeline location Place the cursor within the track where you want to paste the event eo a Click the Paste button on the toolbar to paste the event into the track Clipboard information is pasted at the cursor s position on the track Existing events or portions of events after the cursor adjust to occur later in the project The amount of adjustment is based on the total length of the information being pasted Pasting single track information in ripple editing mode The information on the clipboard determines how many tracks are affected when you paste If you have copied or cut information from one track only the selected track is affected by the pasted event and time information Clipboard contents Events before paste Events after paste 51 000 atc Ee 31000 __ Existing event adjusts to move later in the project Paste Newly pasted position event Pasting multitrack information in ripple editing mode Multiple events can be pasted as easily as single events Clipboard contents Events before paste Events after paste 9 7 000 13 1 eS eae 51000 _ 8 1 900 51 000 poe he H H These events will be pasted Pasta position Newly pasted event Existing events on the tracks adjust later in the project Note Pasting in ripple editing mode ripples only the events on the tracks that receive the clipboard contents If you wan
253. editing of MIDI events directly on the timeline In this mode you can draw and erase notes in a piano roll or drum grid view Activates the Draw tool to add and edit events Activates the Selection tool to select multiple events Activates the Paint tool to insert events across multiple tracks When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Paint tool can paint an entire one shot MIDI or Beatmapped media file to an event with one click Activates the Erase tool to erase events or parts of events When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Erase tool can erase an entire one shot MIDI track or Beatmapped track event with one click Activates the Envelope tool to select and modify envelope points Activates the Time Selection tool to quickly select all events within range of time Activates the Groove tool to apply a groove to a track You can use grooves to manipulate the timing of tracks by quantizing media to predefined grooves or by applying the feel of one track to another INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 17 Reverses an undo amp Activates the Groove Erase tool to erase grooves or parts of grooves When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Groove Erase tool can erase an entire groove event a Turns the snapping feature on or off With snapping enabled Activates context sensitive help to obtain information about you can decide whether to snap to the grid or to all elements a specific option menu or part of the ACID
254. ee Automation recording modes on page 147 To enable automation recording for audio busses and soft synths use audio bus tracks Use the functions on your control surface to edit your project 268 APPENDIX B Setting up a Mackie Control Universal The Mackie Control is fully supported by ACID software and lends a tactile element to your editing sessions There are many overlays available that you can use to label the Mackie Control buttons and controls with their mapped functions in ACID For more information about Mackie Control overlays please check the Mackie Web site http www mackie com products mcu index html DISPLAY MACKIE MARK Fade to Color r i ue i TP ADER BANKS WINDOWS ADD NEW The overlay identifies the default control mapping You can also customize the buttons and controls on the Mackie control For more information see Configuring or customizing control mappings on page 271 When you use the default mapping the Mackie Control is divided into several functional areas All functionality described in this document refers to the default control mapping Connecting the Mackie Control Universal You can use one Mackie Control Universal with up to four Mackie Control Extenders with ACID Perform the following steps for each device If you re using Mackie Control Extenders you ll need a multiport MIDI interface with MIDI In Out ports for each device 1 Connect the MIDI Out port on your M
255. eee cece e eee e eee e eee e eee ee ee eaenaes 301 Slicing and dicing in the Chopper ccc cece cece eect teen nena eneneenes 302 Chopping new loops for alternate time Signatures cece cece cee nett teen eens 302 Chopping multiple files into a new loop 6 kee cee eee t eee eee eeeeeeeees 302 Creating drumroll Build UPS s 2cscecsrstowdeetesewiaeeesqesaaiawanend ind NECIT ARINA awe 302 Creating drm S nunca edeac dun kitir eCie er EEEE AEO EEEE 303 Creating one track remixes sussessesecsecsecsecsecsessersrssersereesereserseseese 303 Creating pseudo granular Synthesis cece ccc cee eee e eee e eee eneeeeees 303 Building instrument SOIOS 0 cece sesa TKE ETEEN EINEN ECESE 303 ea e e E E E E E E E EEST 303 SHOMCUL COMMANGS 4 10tc0c2bnaneseadcaudenen E EER 305 Keyboard command reference c ciadedit cay srst eden yes Erin es ba bik HAW EC IKES eria 305 GOSS nn ee ee ee err 311 NGO E E E EE E EE E EE TE E EE 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introducing ACID Software Welcome Congratulations on purchasing a revolutionary software application for Microsoft Windows With ACID from Sony Creative Software Inc you can create great music by simply picking painting and playing System requirements The following lists the minimum system requirements for using ACID e Microsoft Windows XP SP 2 or later or Windows Vista 1 8 GHz processor 2 GHz or faster recommended 1 GB
256. eee eee e teen eeeeeenes 75 Opening a Reference Library ccc cece cece eee cence eee e eee eee eee eeeeeeeaes 75 Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library cc cece eee ees 75 Searching for Media fileS 2 0 ccc eee eee eee e nee e eee e ee eeeeenes 75 Searching USING a keyword ec c ccc e eee e eee e eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeaes 76 Searc NNO USING TAGS ctcteaseeesaseteeitecsoddsraseeesansehadeeenensetens shames EEEE 77 Saring Searchresults 55 554 peerage EAEE EERE EE EEEE OEE EEEE OERE ECEE OERE 77 Viewing previous searches esssssssssosseesesseesesorsorsersessorserserserrresee 77 Using advanced search options ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 77 PrEVIEWING MCCA y 5 60 0sanicianisiauddurw iE ENEE TIE IEE aa ASE Eras 78 Adding media to your project cece ccc cece eee nent e eee eee en eenenees 79 Resolving offline Media files 0 ccc cece cece cee eee e eee e eee ee eeeenneeeees 79 Customizing the Media Manager WINdOW cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeaenes 80 Automatically hiding the Search pane ccc cece ccc eee e eee cece eee ee ee eneeeees 80 Docking and undocking the Search pane ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 80 Resin COMMING eeror Gore eideiearodens E E RN EON 80 MOVING COMMING 3o4ancvtouteerdasadendntsdecnneedeuuss E E E ENS 80 Showing or hiding COMMMNNS s essisreressterkerid initte o i ERNEA ACA REENE RRENA EN
257. eel forward or back e Hover over the keyboard and hold Shift while rolling the mouse wheel forward or back Zoom note width Note width is based on the horizontal zoom level of the timeline Use the zoom controls in the lower right corner of the timeline or hover over the timeline and roll the mouse wheel forward or back to zoom in or out Auditioning notes with the keyboard drum grid You can use the keyboard drum grid between the track header and timeline to audition the track s MIDI output or record MIDI When you click the keys the note is played using the appropriate patch at the cursor position These buttons are velocity sensitive clicking toward the right side of a button plays the note with a higher velocity setting than clicking toward the left side G i 2 S il pe the Sizzle AY Bottle Blow E AN Bottle Blow un ty Touch sly ey Touch cod Clicking toward the right side of the keyboard or Clicking toward the left side of the keyboard or drum list plays the note with a higher velocity drum list plays the note with a lower velocity Audio driver latency can limit your ability to preview DLS voices in real time Using low latency drivers will produce the best results Selecting notes selection WORKING WITH MIDI 195 Selecting groups of notes draw three types of selection boxes Free selection The default behavior of the tool Click to select individual notes hold Shift or Ctrl Vertical Hor
258. either the beat ruler or time ruler e Toset the cursor s position based on the beat ruler right click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position Beats from the shortcut menu e To set the cursor s position based on the time ruler right click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position Time from the shortcut menu Once you make your selection from the shortcut menu a box appears for the appropriate time display Enter the cursor s new position and press Enter Tip You can also edit the cursor position directly by double clicking the desired time display value and entering the new cursor position Changing the time display The time display window always reflects the format of the time ruler You may change the ruler settings for the time ruler via the time display window 1 Right click the time display window to display a shortcut menu 2 Choose Time at Cursor Format to display a submenu 3 Choose the desired time format Both the time window and time ruler display the chosen time format Monitoring MIDI timecode You can use the time display to monitor incoming or outgoing MIDI timecode MIDI can be monitored in the following ways e Display MIDI timecode generated from external sources e Display MIDI timecode and MIDI clock information that is generated The time display settings work in conjunction with your project s properties and MIDI setup options 1 Right click the time display window to display a
259. enabled and the Grid Only option is turned off the event s edges automatically align to these designated snap points Cursor position e Grid lines e Markers e Regions start and end points e Loop region time selection in and out points You may turn on snapping for these elements in the project or limit snapping to grid lines Choosing snapping options If the snap function is preventing you from placing an event precisely where you want it you may turn snapping off Turning off snapping prevents events from automatically aligning to the cursor grid lines markers regions and time selections The Options menu allows you to toggle snap functions The button image next to the Enable command indicates when snapping is turned on The button image next to the Grid Only command indicates the type of snapping in use Options Pe HFa Enable FE ja Select to turn all snapping on off Grid Spacing Grid Only ate Select to toggle between snapping to grid lines only and snapping to all elements Tip You can temporarily suspend snapping while dragging by holding down the Shift key Turning snapping on and off You may turn snapping on and off in one of the following ways e Click the Enable Snapping button on the Toolbar e From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Enable from the submenu Press F8 Snapping to grid lines With snapping turned on you may choose to snap only to grid lines From the
260. ent for synchronizing devices that need to perform tempo changes mid song MIDI clock out is supported but MIDI clock in is not A MIDI port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI hardware This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI capable card to output MIDI timecode to an external device or to receive MIDI timecode from an external device MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications MTC is essentially a MIDI representation of SMPTE timecode Multiple bit rate encoding also known as Intelligent Streaming for the Windows Media platform and SureStream for the RealMedia G2 platform allows you to create a single file that contains streams for several bit rates A multiple bit rate file can accommodate users with different Internet connection speeds or these files can automatically change to a different bit rate to compensate for network congestion without interrupting playback To take advantage of multiple bit rate encoding you must publish your media files to a Windows Media server or a RealServerG2 Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI Normalize Nyquist Frequency Offline Media One Shot OPT Plug In Pan Peak Data File Proxy File Pulse Code Modulation PCM Quantization Real Time Streaming Protocol RTSP Redirector File Region Rendering A standard langu
261. ents In addition to editing existing events you can also create new events 1 Click the Insert Event button J The Insert MIDI Event dialog appears Choose an event type from the Event type drop down list Enter a start time in the Start time box e Enter values for the remaining event parameters 4 Click Insert The new event is inserted at the designated start time Quantizing events You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force events to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify 1 To quantize only specific events select the events you want to quantize in the list editor Tip Hold Shift or Ctrl while clicking event rows to select multiple events 2 Click the Quantize button 2 The MIDI Quantize dialog appears H From the Quantize resolution drop down list choose the beat to which you want the selected events to be quantized 4 Choose the appropriate options for quantizing e Select the Start times check box to snap event start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list e Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list e Select the Notes only check box to quantize note events alone When you select this check box the list editor does not quantize after touch control change meta NRPN RPN pitch bend poly pressure and program change events Select the Apply to current selec
262. ents with the Draw or Paint tool Copying clips and events across tracks In previous versions of ACID you could only copy and paste events within the same track Now you can use clips to copy events between tracks Tips e You canalso use the Cut Copy andPaste buttons in the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window to cut copy and paste clips across tracks Hold Ctrl while dragging an event to a different track to copy the event and clip to the destination track 1 Select the events you want to copy Tip Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple events You can select multiple events that use different clips 2 Click to position the cursor where you want to paste the events 3 Click the track header of the track where you want to paste the contents of the clipboard 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste Events are added at the cursor position and clips are added to the track for the pasted events as needed Drone Am prone ambient 001 e O YP fa Drone Am drone ambient 001 Hee H O Vol 6 0dB 1 Pan Center 1 2 en TS Vol 6 0dB jl Pan Center Gl Envelope Beato2 Bey HO GB Envelope Beato2 H OC vol 6 0dB iil Pan Center Vol 6 0dB m Pan Center j S H Fx ambient 03 k amp O E Fx ambient 03 By H SO Vol 6 0dB i Pan Center 2 Vol 6 0dB _ Pan Center D
263. epresents a segment of your project When you drag a section header to a new location of the timeline all events envelopes regions markers and commands within the section follow Intro Vere 1 Chorus Meret 3 F eee a Hyperfuzz 01 os 5 os rala raia Hype a Hyperfuzz 02 Sor hake 66 CHAPTER 3 Inserting a section 1 Create atime selection that includes the portion of the timeline that you want to use as a section 2 From the Insert menu choose Section or press Shift S A section label is added above the marker bar 3 Typeaname to identify the section and press Enter Adjusting a section s length 1 Hover over the end of a section label The mouse pointer is displayed as a je 2 Drag the end of the section to extend or shorten it Tips e Hold Shift to override snapping As you drag the edge between two adjacent sections both will be adjusted simultaneously Renaming a section 1 Right click the section label and choose Rename from the shortcut menu The section label changes to an edit box Tip Press F2 to rename the selected section 2 Type anew name in the edit box 3 Press Enter Changing a section s color 1 Right click the section label and choose Color from the shortcut menu 2 Choose a color from the menu The color of the section header is updated but event colors do not change Moving shuffling sections Shuf
264. er When you delete a folder only the folder is deleted The plug ins remain on your system Only user created folders can be deleted Click the down arrow next to the Views button and choose a command from the menu to change the way the plug ins are displayed Tree View Displays all of the available folders on the left side of the window Details Displays detailed information about each plug in Organizing plug ins with folders The Audio FX ReWire Devices and Soft Synths folders contain subfolders to help you organize your plug ins Several folders are displayed by default and you can add your own folders Each plug in can be assigned to multiple folders but audio plug ins and soft synths can be assigned to only one category If you want to create a folder to group your plug ins select a folder and click the New Folder button on the toolbar or right click a folder and choose New Folder from the shortcut menu To add a plug in to a folder perform either of the following actions e Drag the plug in from the right hand pane to a folder e Right click a plug in in the right hand pane choose Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu and then choose a folder from the menu All user created group folders are displayed in the menu and a check mark is displayed next to each folder the plug in is associated with The Folder Assignments menu is available only after you ve created folders for your plug ins Note Subfolders act as f
265. er window by double clicking a surround panner on a track header or mixer control Once the Surround Panner window is open you can dock it in the ACID workspace For more information see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 247 Tip You can also choose Surround Panner from the View menu to display the Surround Panner window Once the Surround Panner window is displayed double click the surround panner for a track or mixer control to view its pan settings Toggle options for constraining pan point movement Surround Panner Electric Guitar 03 Trim Assign track bus to LFE channel A ee i Pan point ee ee ee V EE E A E EA Muted channel if Active included channel ee eee eee ee ee eer K Add Channels 0 dB Center oh Center mj Pan type indicator 1 Click the speaker icons to mute or include channels Muting a channel ensures that no audio bleeds through a channel For example you might want to mute all but the center channel when you re panning dialogue to the center channel Tip Ctrl click a speaker icon to solo the channel 2 Drag the pan point to position the sound within the sound field For more information see Moving the pan point on page 241 240 CHAPTER 14 3 Click the center speaker icon to include the center channel and drag the Center fader to apply a gain to the center channel Applying a gain to the center channel may make dialogue more pre
266. ered copyright information when a user selects About this Presentation from the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files copyright information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected command marker Deleting command markers To delete a command marker right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Working with regions Regions are useful tools that allow you to subdivide your project into time sections by designating in and out points along the timeline Regions can function as permanent time selections for playback and editing purposes Like markers regions can serve as reference points and may be moved named and provide snap points for the cursor and events When you place regions they are automatically numbered in the order that you place them
267. erences dialog to specify a different recording device For more information see Using the Audio Device tab on page 257 Notes e Recorded files are in the folder specified on the Folders tab of the Preference dialog by default If you want to choose a project specific folder you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 e You can use the ACID type for recorded audio drop down list on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to indicate whether you want to create Beatmapped clips of one shots when recording audio e Use the Record action when nothing is armed drop down list on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to indicate whether you want to create an audio track a MIDI track or do nothing if you click the Record button when no tracks are armed Recording into an empty track 1 Select a track Alternately to record to a new track choose Audio Track from the Insert menu Place the cursor on the timeline where you want to begin recording Arm the track by clicking the Arm for Record button on the track o E Start recording by clicking the Record button on the transport bar Depending on the recording selection a waveform is created along the timeline as you record into the armed track s Bass Guitar B gt El G ob Q gt gt ll m iH gt ware iE Pe it Pi In ee C lg Recorded waveform alee
268. erences to display the Preferences dialog Select the External Control amp Automation tab Double click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog To add or change a function do the following a Choose a setting from the View function group drop down list b Select the Learn check box c Select an command in the Host Command list and activate the control on your control surface d You can click the Edit button to fine tune the MIDI message settings Repeat step 4 for each command you want to make available on your control surface To remove a function select an item in the Host Command list and click the Reset button To remove all functions click the Reset All button Click the Save As button to save your updated configuration file APPENDIX B 285 Loading a control mapping file PANON From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog Select the External Control amp Automation tab in the Preferences dialog Double click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog Click the Open button and browse to the mapping file you want to use Click OK to apply your changes and return to the Preferences dialog Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Example of how you can set up MIDI keyboard as a generic control surface If you have a MIDI device that has knobs faders
269. ers control region is visible each track displays controls you can use to adjust track panning volume and muting The controls can adjust static trim or automation levels Touch 7 ie Touch Use the Automation Settings button at the top of the Faders control region to choose the iS iS automation mode and turn automation on or off came amier To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane To 35 change a track s automation recording mode click the down arrow next to the Automation Settings button and choose a setting from the menu Click the button so the Automation Settings button is not selected if you want the Fader control region controls to function as trim controls Adjusting a trim control affects the entire track When the Automation Settings button is selected you can use the buttons to edit pan volume and mute automation for the track 0 0 99 Audio track MIDI track 158 CHAPTER 10 Muting or soloing a track When the Faders control region is visible each track displays Mute amp and Solo buttons To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane WJ Muting a track Center When the Automation Settings button amp is not selected you can click the Mute button to prevent a track from amp being played in the mix Click the Mute button on additional tracks to add them to the mute group To unmute a i track click the Mute but
270. ers for output busses 6 ccc cee cece eee eee eee eees 164 Using audio bus channel strips ccc ccc ccc ccc cc cc cece eee eeeeeeeeneeeees 164 SING MDT DUSSCS 2 1c na E E spa deena neapae E T ee taus 168 Adding or deleting input busses cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeenees 168 Using input bus Channel Strips ccc cc cc ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Using input busses with hardware based effects ccc cc ccc cee ence ene eee eennees 172 Using input busses with hardware based synthesizers 0c cece cece nee eee ee eees 174 Monitoring an external source without mixing it with your project ccc eee 175 Using FX send assignable effects channel StripS 0 cece eee cece eee eeeees 175 Changing an assignable effect chain s name 1 cece eect eee nett eee eee eens 176 Adding or editing effects 6 iiciacdisicdiadediaeentiswedtedddinweestadediadiddiade cde daaeds 176 Adjusting assignable effects input levels ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 177 Changing an effects chain s output device ccc cee ec cee eee eee eet eeeeees 177 Monitoring output levels 2 0 ccc ccc cece eee ee ARTAIR eee eee e teen eeeeeeees 177 Muting or soloing an assignable effects Chain cece eee ccc eee e eee eee eeeeees 177 Adjusting assignable effects panning or VOIUME ccc cece cece e eee eeeeeeeeeees 177 RECOMING AUCIOs c02cc004acnstawseaaseeeuerendes eunead
271. ersion of ACID you can now add multiple media files or clips to one track Think of clips as the palette you can dip your paintbrush in when you paint on the timeline For example if you want to use one track for all the guitar loops in your project you can create a single guitar track and add each guitar loop as a separate clip When a track has multiple clips the Draw and Paint tools create events using the active clip A single audio track can contain any combination of loops one shots or Beatmapped clips MIDI tracks can contain only MIDI clips For more information see Understanding clip types on page 34 nn On atrack with a single clip events are always created using the track s media On a track with multiple clips each event can point to a different media file In this example each ga 03 H event represents one of the track s three clips The banner at the top of each event i e Bongo 01 Bongo 02 and Bongo 03 displays the name of the event s source clip Adding clips to tracks Drag a file from the Windows Explorer Explorer Window or Media Manager window to an existing track in the timeline to add a clip to the track and add an event where you drop the clip The new clip is set as the active clip for creating events with the Draw orPaint tool EM Bongo o1 iby amp O r Wol 6 0 de Ill ree ed You can also record into a track to create a new clip Notes You can drag
272. erties click the Save button i to embed ACID information in the file Notes To save to a different file click the Save File As button Ifyou save stretching properties to a new file the changes will also be applied to the current clip and saved with the ACID project the changes are not saved to the original file Ifyou edit a file in another audio editing program it is possible that the ACID data will be removed Simply edit the settings on the Stretch tab to optimize the file again Support for multitempo clips is available for clips that are recorded or rendered in ACID or by adding Beatmap markers on the Clip Properties dialog The ruler on the General tab is fixed and the ruler on the Stretch tab is stretched to represent measures of varying lengths WORKING WITH TRACKS 121 The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for Beatmapped clips Item Description Initial root note Choose a note from the drop down list to set the first root note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key choose Don t transpose Initial tempo Displays the starting tempo of the clip as determined by the Beatmapper Wizard Enter a value in the box or use the spin control to adjust the tempo Initial time signature Choose settings from the Beats per measure and Beat value controls to set the starting time signature of your clip Time signatu
273. es on page 142 e MIDI track envelopes using the controls in the track header For more information see MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes on page 208 e Audio track effect parameters for automatable effects using the controls in Audio Plug In window For more information see Adding effect automation envelopes on page 140 e Bus soft synth and assignable effects output and panning levels using the controls in the Mixing Console window or bus track header e VSTi parameters using the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window e Surround panning keyframes For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240 Tips e Ifyou want to record MIDI controller envelopes into a track using a hardware controller you can use MIDI merge recording to record the envelopes Ifyou want to thin envelope points after recording automation you can select the Smooth and thin automation data after recording or drawing check box on the External Control amp Automation tab of the Preferences dialog or right click the envelope and choose Thin All Points or Thin Selected Points from the shortcut menu Recording automation settings 1 Add an envelope or automatable keyframeable effect to a track For automatable audio track effects you must add and effect automation envelope for each parameter you want to automate Select the Automation Settings button in the track header Click the Automation Settings button and
274. es to the default settings Description Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the boxes to specify the minimum and maximum tempo available in the ACID project Changing this option affects the resolution of the Project Tempo slider Choose a setting from the drop down list to change the timing resolution ACID uses to interpolate tempo curves For more information see Using a tempo curve to change tempo between markers on page 92 Enter the name of each editor you want to display in the track list shortcut menu Right click a track in the track list and choose Edit in editor name to edit the media file associated with a track You can specify any editing tool you want to use however this feature was designed for use with destructive audio MIDI editors Click Browse and select the exe file for each editor you want to have available in the track list shortcut menu Enter the name that you want to use to identify each editor The name is displayed in the track list shortcut menu and the Tools menu Removes the specified editor from the Editing tab When you select this check box the software automatically searches for the latest available Sony editors on your computer If one is located it appears as an available editor in the Editing Application X box Restores all editing preferences to the default settings APPENDIX A 261 Using the Sync tab Setting sync preferences Generate MIDI Timecode settings Outp
275. esaaueau ene dey ece 44 ITOO ni ettedatt atdettacid econ aden twat oh eadieted te chan dacentatateeteeedad deans 44 Clearing The UNGO Nto x46 sian eG cero tka Kriti EE eave deen e tae e ORs aay ieee eee kweer ae 44 Paving Te pro CC erea E bade EE EEEN ERATEN ER 45 Using the tansport Dal ewsivesaceesnaess A EA odes A E A AAA 45 USING playback options serrer sre en EEE ESEE AEREE EEEE EE OEE EEE 45 Saving rendering and delivering projects ccc ccc cece cece e teen tense eeeees 46 SAVING DIO CO cccaaencaes souerwacauuneians E tape uss E E sarees eanenetaeadane 46 Rendena DIOlECls a urawaensssecwat AREE A E asa eee oder ad eae eter 47 Rendering in real time 2 0 00 ccc ccc cece ee eee eee ne ee nee eee eee eee eee e ee eeenes 50 Publishing tothe Mermet occ cascsisuxdaeadsediws vee edoweies PIRETRO REISE E ENARE SAREE 50 WNO TOD ean EE EE E E A E ENE EEEE EEEE EE EE 51 Understanding track at once and disc at once ssesssserssessresressersrerrreeres 51 EGUNO EY GING Sou c ctcagc oqeraa4 eed caesar eGo aes R E E E EEEE cows 55 COD VYING CV GINS cote esa be se etn aeons EE E E E E tween wecisaeeds 55 Pasting EVENTS sarni rn E een peru Aerob an E EEE E dimen Met pate apart 55 usma Paste MeDCAL avcaaucwwkisdcuwauiasen hoa gesrrenen Genser EREE EER EE EREE ADERENTE 56 USING Paste INSET ssriserrirrrera tiA A R ER AATE EEA 56 CIS GINS eere ea cee Ee A r a Rea 57 WEIETING E VEN esae raar EE E ENET EEEE TEE AE A 57 Reversing CV CIN Gy sc rere
276. esired For more information see Removing plug ins from chains on page 110 In addition you can use effect plug ins in the Mixing Console window by applying effect chains to busses or soft synths or by creating assignable effect chains and routing tracks to them For more information see Using the Mixing Console on page 151 Important Be aware that using non in place plug ins such as Time Stretch Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings will cause audio to play out of synchronization with the waveform display in the timeline and with other tracks If an effects chain includes non in place plug ins the effects chain icon will be displayed asa When using ACID as a ReWire device any effects chain that includes non in place plug ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent synchronization problems with the ReWire mixer application The effects chain icon will be displayed as a Apply the plug ins within the ReWire mixer application Creating or adding to track plug in chains A plug in chain can contain one or more plug ins When you add multiple plug ins you may set the processing sequence that the track s events go through when the project is played back Moreover the plug ins that you add to the chain may be added more than once For example a plug in chain could look something like this Track EQ Track Compressor Track EQ and Track Noise Gate After you create a plug in chain the track s events ar
277. essage parameter to open the Edit Event dialog Edit the values in the dialog For more information see Event parameters on page 219 4 Click OK The event updates to the new values Tip You can edit individual parameters in columns other than Message by double clicking the parameter and entering a new value 218 CHAPTER 12 Event parameters The table below describes the editable event parameters for different event types Event type Editable parameter Description After Touch Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Pressure Amount of vibrato 0 127 you want to apply to each voice on the channel Control Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Change Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Controller Change Displays the number of the current controller change type Choose a Number controller change type from the drop down list to the right of the Event type drop down Controller Change Value Controller value Note Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Note Numeric value of the note you want to play For more information see MIDI notes and frequencies on page 220 On Velocity Speed of the note s attack 0 127 Low values produce a soft attack high values produce a strong attack
278. et the markers to their last saved positions 120 CHAPTER 7 Beat anchors and markers for loop clips Beat anchors correspond to musical beats on the ruler at the top of the waveform display Beat markers P correspond to points in time on the ruler at the bottom of the waveform display Each beat marker corresponds to a combination beat stretch marker on the timeline If you want to convert a combination beat stretch marker to a stretch only marker double click the marker or right click the marker and choose Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu Beat anchors and markers are used only when a groove is applied to a track Offsets between beat anchors and beat markers indicate that the beat represented by an anchor is actually played at the marker position which may occur before or after the beat This mapping represents the difference required to remove an existing groove from a media file and return the media to straight machine time so that grooves can be applied accurately If you want to hear the results of editing beat anchors and markers select the Play Quantized button at the bottom of the Clip Properties window and use the Clip Properties transport controls to preview the loop Playing the clip in Play Quantized mode demonstrates how the clip sounds when the Quantize to Straight groove is applied In most cases you won t need to edit beat anchors Tip Use the Zoom In Time and Zoom Out Time
279. etween 1 and 127 and note off velocities are bound between 0 and 127 206 CHAPTER 12 Setting up MIDI quantize input filters Track Properties al Stephanie Output Settings Input Filters clip Pool Enable Quantize Start C Quantize Release L Preserve Duration Huantize grid od J a dd C Tuplet in time of a F Offset by iks Options Swing 0 Z Strength 100 Use the Input Filters tab to force notes from a track s input port to align with musical beats during recording 1 Select the track where you want to apply the filter 2 Inthe Track Properties dialog click the Input Filters tab 3 Choose Quantize from the drop down list at the top of the page 4 Select the Enable check box 5 Select your quantization options Item Description Quantize start Select this check box to force the beginning note on messages of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the grid Quantize release Select this check box to force the end note off messages of MIDI events to a specified resolution on the grid Preserve duration If you select Quantize start or Quantize release you can select this check box to maintain the lengths of notes Quantize grid Click an icon to select the resolution of the quantize grid Tuplet Select this check box to set irregular beat boundaries for the quantize grid For example to quantize to triplet beat boundaries in 4 4 time select the Tuplet check box and choose 3 in ti
280. event s clip 103 Changing the track color 40 Channel strip adding editing track effects 156 adjusting bus assignable effects send levels 157 Channel strips changing a track s name 156 FX Send Assignable Effects 175 Choosing a drum map for a track 226 Chopper 23 95 100 Grid 95 Inserting increments 98 Inserting selections from 99 Keyboard shortcuts 96 Markers and regions 96 Saving selections as new files 100 Selecting audio 96 Snapping options 95 Tips and tricks 302 Using with one shots 100 Window 95 Clearing all events from a section 68 Clip properties Adjusting for MIDI tracks 123 Changing clip types 117 Clip Properties window 115 212 Clips Adding to tracks 101 Changing pitch 93 changing settings 104 Clip Pool 104 Copying across tracks 102 Copying across tracks without copying events 103 Loops 34 One shots 34 Previewing 103 Setting the active clip and creating events 102 Stretching properties 121 Types 34 Cloning loops 100 302 Command markers 85 Configuring input filters 205 Connecting a control surface 267 Connecting a Mackie Control Universal 269 Constant power panning model 113 241 Context sensitive help 16 Control surface knobs 293 Control surface setup 265 Control surfaces 267 Behringer BCF2000 288 292 Frontier TranzPort 283 Generic MIDI controller 285 ii INDEX Mackie Control Universal 269 Controller envelopes 208 Copying Events 55 Tracks 41 Copyin
281. events are painted in every grid space the Paint tool contacts 3 Release the mouse button to stop adding events Click the Play from Start button l on the transport bar All new events play back Tip With the Paint tool selected you can use Ctrl click to paint an entire event for one shot Beatmapped and MIDI tracks Inserting events at the play cursor You can also insert events at the cursor during playback You can use this feature to create rhythms on one shot tracks while listening to the track you re editing in the context of the rest of your project When you re done creating events you can use the Render to New Track command on the Edit menu to save the rhythm to a new track or you can copy and paste your new events across the timeline 1 Create atime selection in the portion of the project you want to edit Select the Loop Playback button Click the Play button to start playback Click a track header in the track list to set the focus track se a Press Y to add an event at the play cursor during playback the edit cursor remains fixed and the play cursor follows playback If snapping is enabled events are created at the next snap point You can use snapping to quantize your events Repeat step 5 as needed You can press the up and down arrow keys to change the focus track Click the Stop button when you re finished creating events es SS Edit event positions as necessary Tip f you
282. fects processor In the I O control region of the bus s channel strip click the Output button and choose the output that is connected to your effects processor s input LineOut 1 LineOut 2 for this example This auxiliary bus provides a signal path to your effects processor s input Ai Bus O Master lineGut DineOut 2 MainOwe IL j Master MainOut 1L MainOut 2R MainOut 1L MainOut 2R el LineOut 1 LineOut 2 LineOut 5L LineOut 6R SpdifOut L SpdifOut R E E io Bus A Master 172 CHAPTER 10 Add an input bus to your project This input bus will receive the signal from your effects processor For more information see Adding a bus on page 168 Configure your input bus to take its input from the effects processor and send its output to your main mix a Inthe I O control region of the input bus s channel strip click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input that is connected to your effects processor s output Inst 1 for this example b Click the Output button and choose the output where you want to send your processed signal We ll send this signal to the master bus so it is included with your main mix and will be included when performing a real time render For more information see Rendering in real time on page 50 aX Input This input bus provides a signal path from your Inst 1 effects processor s output to your project Master fe Touch 0 0 MyPhaser Send your trac
283. fling sections allows you to move all events envelopes regions commands and markers within a section in a single operation For more information see Ripple editing on page 61 1 Drag a section label to a new position on the timeline A I is displayed to indicate where the section will be moved 2 When you drop the section events are split at each end of the section and all events within the section are moved to the position where you dropped the section Downstream events ripple to make room for or fill the space of the section you dragged 3 k F 105 1 113 1 ilzi l Wes Notes Hold Ctrl or Shift to select and shuffle multiple selections e When shuffling envelope points the shape of the envelope is copied to the new location and additional points are created at each end of the section if necessary The tempo time signature and key of the section will be preserved during shuffling and tempo time signature and key markers will be created if necessary EDITING EVENTS 67 Copying a section Copying sections lets you copy all events within a section in a single operation For more information see Ripple editing on page 61 1 Hold Ctrl and drag a section header or multiple section headers to a new position on the timeline A I is displayed to indicate where the section will be copied 2 When you drop the section it is copied to the position where you dropped it Note Hold Ctrl or Shift to select and copy m
284. for audio clips Add to Groove Makes the selected clip available in the Groove Pool so you can apply its timing to other tracks Pool Notes Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop tracks only This command is available only for audio clips Invert Phase Reverses the phase of the sound data Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file it can prevent phase cancellation when mixing or crossfading audio signals Note This command is available only for audio clips Normalize Maximizes a clip s volume without clipping The Normalize peak level setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog sets the level to which the largest peak in the clip will be normalized Note This command is available only for audio clips Channels Specifies how to treat the channels in a clip Both Treats the clip as a normal stereo file Left Only Creates a mono clip using only the left channel of your media file Right Only Creates a mono clip using only the right channel of your media file Combine Creates a mono clip by mixing the channels of your media file After mixing the channels the amplitude is divided by two to prevent clipping Swap Exchanges the right and left channels in a stereo file Note This command is available only for audio clips Clip List Displays the track s available clips Choose a clip from the menu to set the event s clip Next Clip Updates the event s contents to use the next clip
285. frame s settings are maintained until the next keyframe Panning is interpolated in a linear path Panning is interpolated in a fast logarithmic path Panning is interpolated in a slow logarithmic path Panning is interpolated along a smooth natural curve Adjusting the Smoothness slider O gt The Smoothness slider controls the perceived motion of sound within the sound field among three or more keyframes When you drag the Smoothness slider to 0 the changes are interpolated between keyframes along a linear path As you increase the smoothness value the path between keyframes grows more curved and smooth 1 Double click a keyframe The Surround Panner window appears Surround Panner T Electric Guitar 03 Automation 752 ae Add Channels 0 dB Center LD Center eI 33 1 dB Smoothness 100 g Smoothness slider 2 Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the spatial interpolation path leading up to this keyframe Three keyframes with and the same three keyframes smoothness 100 with smoothness 0 F nf at Er nf at ee e e e e e e e a l Locking keyframes to events If you want keyframes to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline choose Lock Envelopes to Events from the Options menu 244 CHAPTER 14 Hiding keyframes 1 2 Select the track for which you want to hide keyframes From the View menu choose Show Envelopes and
286. from the Explorer window or Media Manager window to the Groove Pool 126 CHAPTER 7 Exporting a groove Grooves are stored with your ACID project Exporting a groove allows you to save a groove in a file that you can use in other projects or share with other ACID users 1 Select a groove in the Groove Pool window 2 Click the Export Selected Grooves button The Export Groove to File dialog is displayed 3 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your groove Note By default grooves will be saved in the folder specified in the Default groove folder box on the Folders tab of the Preferences dialog Grooves in this folder will be available in the Groove Pool window when you create a new ACID project 4 Typeaname in the File name box or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing groove 5 Click the Save button to save your groove Creating a new groove 1 Click the New Groove button 6 Anew groove is added to the Groove Pool window 2 Type a name for your groove in the edit box and then press Enter Use the Groove Editor at the bottom of the Groove Pool window to adjust the length and feel of your groove For more information about editing grooves please see below Editing grooves You can use the bottom portion of the Groove Pool window to edit grooves Your edits are saved with your project If you want to use the
287. from the drop down list to specify how many stretch markers or will be displayed along the bottom of the waveform display Audio that contains rapid notes such as drum rolls will benefit from setting the divisions at a smaller fraction of a beat Slower paced material however may actually suffer from high resolution Redetect Beats Click to automatically detect the beats in the current file Use this button to apply the ACID beat detection algorithm to existing media Adjusting stretch markers for loop clips Stretch markers correspond to subdivisions of beats in the audio file These markers tell ACID where to divide the audio when performing time stretching to match tempo Accurately detecting these beats is the key to making the time compression process sound good Marker Description Indicates a stretch only marker that was detected by the software or added manually Indicates a combination beat stretch marker Each beat marker p on the beat ruler corresponds to a combination beat stretch marker on the timeline If you want to convert a combination beat stretch marker to a stretch only marker double click the marker or right click the marker and choose Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu Indicates an inactive stretch marker When Sliced segments is selected from the Stretching method drop down list beat markers J represent the points where silence will be inserted to accomplish stretching Stre
288. g every envelope point by 3 dB To adjust the size of the Sends control region you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible Bus sends are pre volume and pre mute by default To change to post volume and post mute click the Pre Post button to switch to Post Volume Send mode USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 157 Change a track s input or output device When the I O control region is visible each track audio and MIDI displays controls you can use to set the track s input device for recording and output device To show or hide the I O control region click the I O button in the View pane Tia To choose the recording input for the track click the Input Source button and choose a port from the menu To route an audio track to a bus click the Output button and choose a bus from the menu To route a MIDI track to a soft synth device click the Output button and choose a soft synth from the menu Monitoring track levels When the Meters control region is visible each audio and MIDI track displays meters you can use to monitor track levels To show or hide the Meters control region click the Meters button in the View pane 13 2 13 1 Note f the Meters control region is not visible peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region Right click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options Changing a track s automation mode When the Fad
289. g rendering templates 49 Copying sections 68 Creating drum maps 225 Creating patch maps 224 Cursor 37 40 252 Customizing names for ASIO ports 259 Cutting Events 57 In ripple mode 61 Tracks 41 Deleting Audio from a video 231 Envelope points 143 Events 37 57 In ripple mode 62 Tracks 41 Video 231 Deleting notes 196 Deleting sections 68 Detuning tracks 297 Digital multitrack setup 180 Display preferences 263 DLS sets Routing tracks to 222 Docking windows 248 Drawing events 35 Drum grid 194 Drum map 194 Drum maps 225 Duplicating tracks 41 DVD burning 246 Editing clip properties 115 Editing drum maps 225 Editing frozen MIDI tracks 189 Editing MIDI 193 Editing MIDI events 37 Editing patch maps 224 Editing preferences tab 261 Effects Automating 112 146 Saving presets 109 Track 108 110 Envelopes 142 145 Adding points 142 Adjusting 142 Changing fade curves 144 Color preferences 263 Deleting points 143 Drawing points 143 Envelope tool 144 Event 65 Flipping 144 Thinning points 143 Track 112 146 Track envelopes 142 145 Volume track 142 Equipment setup for recording 179 180 Basic 179 Mixer 179 With digital multitrack 180 With MIDI option 180 Erasing events 37 299 Event takes Recording audio as new 182 Events Automatic crossfades 60 Changing aclip 103 Changing length 36 Changing pitch 93 Copying 55 Copying across tracks 102 Cutting 57 61 Dele
290. g scanning These plug ins cannot be used in ACID The Ignored folder contains plug ins that you want to prevent ACID from using without uninstalling the plug in You can right click a plug in and choose Ignore from the shortcut menu or drag it to the Ignored folder The Unavailable folder contains plug ins that you have uninstalled since running ACID ACID preserves information about uninstalled plug ins so settings can be restored if the plug ins are reinstalled The Soft Synths folder also contains subfolders you can use to organize and categorize your plug ins by instrument type and vendor For more information see Organizing Plug Ins and ReWire Devices on page 131 The toolbar at the top of the window helps you navigate the Plug In Manager window and adjust its display Item Name E ravort Address Bar avorites vv E Pho ins Tree View Audio Rewir Soft 5 Contents Pane Up Refresh New Folder Delete Views Description Displays the current folder You can choose a folder from this drop down list or click a folder in the tree view to navigate the Plug In Manager Displays all of the folder that you can use to organize your plug in Displays the contents of the selected folder Opens the folder one level above the selected folder Refreshes the contents of the active folder Adds a new folder where you can drag plug ins Deletes a user created folder or removes the selected plug in from a user created fold
291. g the Clip Pool tab you can save the selected clip to a new folder or with a new file name When you export a MIDI file the MIDI tracks in your project are saved to a standard MIDI file Track names track device names and track voices are saved in the exported file Saving MIDI clips for export You may now export multiple MIDI tracks and individual clips to standard MIDI files To export files 1 Select Paint Clip Selector from the track header 2 Choose Clip Pool to open the Track Properties dialog box 3 Right click on the clip you want to save and select Save As 4 Name the file and choose Save Notes Files are saved in the MIDI Export folder but they can be saved to any location e Files are saved as standard MIDI files mid All MIDI clips are exported as MIDI file type 0 The MIDI File Type box is greyed out e File resolution is set at 960 pulses per quarter note Resolution can be set between 24 and 960 pulses per quarter note All sequencers players can read in any arbitrary resolution Exporting the project to a standard MIDI file 1 From the File menu choose Export MIDI 2 From the Export Project as Standard MIDI File screen choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your file 3 Type a name in the File name box or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing file Choose a setting from the MIDI file type dr
292. ge 142 4 Ifyou want to change controller settings by recording automation click the Automation Settings button in the track header The slider handles are displayed as in automation mode Tip Ifyou want to record MIDI controller envelopes into a track using a hardware controller you can use MIDI merge recording to record the envelopes For more information see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192 WORKING WITH MIDI 209 5 Drag a slider to edit automation settings at the cursor position The track header controls behave differently depending on the track s automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the controls adjust the level of the entire track In this mode the automation envelope is bypassed and the control does nothing e When the track has a controller envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the control will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the control edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelope an envelope will be added when you adjust the control If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted For more information see Recording automation settings on page 147 Configuring MIDI track controller automation You can use the Output Settings tab in the MIDI Track Properties dialog to configure which controllers can be automa
293. gging a file from the Explorer to the track name of an existing track allows you to replace the original file with the new file while all events remain in place e Right click and drag a file to the track view or track list to specify the type of track to be created When you drop the file a shortcut menu appears that allows you to choose whether to treat the file as a loop one shot Beatmapped track or as an autodetected type Adding MIDI files from the Explorer window You can add MIDI files to your project just as you would add audio files You can right click a MIDI in the Explorer window you can choose how you want to add it to your project e Add to Project e Add to Project with Events e Add to Project with Events Rippled e Open as New Project For more information see Adding MIDI files to a project on page 187 Adding media files from the Media Manager window If you have ACID you can use the powerful Media Manager feature to locate catalog and add media files to your ACID projects Within the Media Manager window you can build media libraries of your media that include file attributes ACID metadata and tags that you can assign to classify your media You can also search for purchase and access reference libraries from outside sources to build your media file base Display the Media Manager if needed by choosing Media Manager from the View menu or by pressing Alt 5 For more information on the Media Manager feature
294. ghted material Current proposals include some form of certificates that validate copyright ownership and restrict unauthorized redistribution A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed A set of Application Program Interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia development A DirectX plug in such as the Sony Noise Reduction DirectX Plug In uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services DMSS API Because DMSS is a standard API a DirectX plug in can be used in any application that supports DMSS This term is used in the Beatmapper to refer to the first beat of the first measure A DLS file stores a custom sound set that you can load into your soft synth giving you another set of voices for MIDI pla
295. ginal Tempo from the shortcut menu 90 CHAPTER 5 Changing project time signature Click the Project Time Signature control and select a time signature from the menu to adjust a project s time signature Select Other from the menu to enter a custom time signature Changing project key Click the Project Key control and select a key from the menu to adjust a project s key i 17614 4 T y BPM 4 ae Mone Project Key control E This feature makes it possible to use media that are in different keys in the same project each loop that has a specified root note is transposed to the key indicated by the Project Key control For example if three loops have root notes of A B and C and your Project Key control is set to D the loops are pitch shifted by five three and two semitones respectively Note f the root note for a track is set to Don t Transpose in the Clip Properties window the track does not pitch shift with the rest of the project Working with tempo key time signature change markers Tempo key time signature change markers allow you to make changes to the tempo key and or time signature at specified points in your project Note Time signature changes must occur on the first beat of a measure Adding tempo key time signature change markers 1 Position the cursor where you want the change to occur 2 From the Insert menu choose Tempo Key Time Signature Change The Tempo i Tempo Key
296. gning an input device you can choose which controller you want to use to play a MIDI device When you assign an input device to a MIDI output port the device name is displayed in the Device column in the appropriate row in the Make these devices available for MIDI input list If you want an output device to receive MIDI thru data from an input device right click the MIDI Thru From column and choose a device from the shortcut menu When you choose a MIDI Thru From device the device name is displayed in the Device column in the MIDI Thru To column in the Make these devices available for MIDI input list Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to be available for recording MIDI pg 189 and controlling soft synths pg 222 To assign an output port to an input device right click the Device box choose Output from the shortcut menu and then choose an output device from the submenu If you want a MIDI input device to echo its MIDI data to an output device right click the MIDI Thru To column and choose a device from the shortcut menu You can select multiple devices to send MIDI thru data When this check box is selected the focus track will accept input from any MIDI input device When multiple tracks are selected the focus track displays a blinking indicator in its track number The Solo Listen to MIDI Input button in the Soft Synth Properties window is unavailable when this check box is selected Re
297. gt Preview JUNKYA JUNKYA JUNKYA JUNKYA JUNKYA Explorer Media Manager Groove Pool Aa M CIF r 44 1 022 MB Record Time 2 channels 45 16 35 4 The toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features in ACID oF Opens a new project You will be prompted to save any changes to the current project Displays the Open File dialog From this window you can browse all of the available drives to select an ACID project or audio file to open Saves any changes to the current project The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears Opens the Publish wizard so you can share your ACID creation on the Web Opens a dialog where you can download media from the Internet Clears the selected items from the track view and places them on the ACID clipboard You can then paste them to a new location Creates a copy of the selected items from the track view on the ACID clipboard You can then paste them to a new location Inserts the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current cursor position The pasted items cover any existing events To make room for pasted events choose Paste Insert from the Edit menu Reverses the last action performed ACID supports unlimited undos allowing you to restore the project to any state since the last save A Locks envelope points so they move with an event when itis moved along the timeline Allows
298. h Erase tool S Numeric keypad Description Join selected events Create fades Reverse event Trim events to selection length This command has no effect if there is no selected data Trimming does not copy data onto the clipboard Available only when the Time Selection tool is active Slip Trim moves the media with the edge as it is trimmed Slip move media within event without moving the event Slide move event while leaving the underlying media in place Create fades Copy selection Pitch up one semitone Pitch down 4 semitones Pitch up 4 semitones Pitch down one octave Pitch up one octave Reset pitch Change an event s gain setting Change an event s gain setting by 10 Change an event s gain setting by 25 Set an event s gain to 0 0 dB Set an event s gain to silence Render to new track Chop to new clip if the Chopper window has focus Keys U Ctrl T Alt drag edge of event Alt drag inside the event Ctrl Alt drag event F Ctrl C Numeric keypad Shift Numeric keypad Shift Shiftt Numeric keypad Shift Ctrlt Numeric keypad Ctrl Numeric keypad Ctrl Shift Numeric keypad or Ctrl Shift Keypad or Shift Keypad or Ctrl Keypad or Shift Ctrl Keypad Shift Ctrl Keypad Ctrl M Playback commands Description Start stop playback Stop playback Toggle looped playback Play from start Play from cursor Pause resume playback Timelin
299. h CtriRm Left and CtriRm Right If your lead vocal microphone is connected to Mic Inst 1 you could name the port LeadVocal and a harmony microphone connected to Mic Inst 1 could be labeled Harmony 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Audio Device tab 2 Choose your ASIO audio interface from the Audio device type drop down list and then click Apply 3 Click the Advanced button to display the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog 4 If you want to edit the name of an input or output port click the label in the Name column and then press F2 You can then type a new name in the edit box Item Description Name The name of the port as it will be displayed in ACID Default naming Name O Internal Name Channel om MicfInstin 1 Mic InstIn 2 In Mic InstIn 1 Mic InstIn 2 Multi Mono Input pawa and outputs can be mono or multiple ene Mic Instin 1 In Mic InstIn 1 Mono stereo Mic Instin 2 In Mic InstIn 2 Mono e Mono A single channel input or output e Stereo A pair of two mono inputs or outputs For example you might connect the right and left outputs of a stereo device to a stereo input e Multi mono A grouping of two monaural channels as a multichannel port The content in the channels is from distinct monaural sources and not intended to be mixed as a stereo signal For example you might connect two microphones to separate inputs to record harmony vocals After renaming the multiple mono port Mic I
300. hain New effects are displayed with a Press the next V Pot to the right to add the effect Press to adjust track or bus settings using the F1 through F6 buttons e F1 Hold the button and turn the V Pot to change the automation recording mode for each track and bus track e F2 Hold the button and turn the V Pot to change the current panning mode e F3 Hold the button and press the V Pot to change the track phase e F4 Hold the button and turn the V Pot to change record input monitoring settings when you re using an ASIO audio device e F5 When the Pan button is selected press the Settings button and then hold F5 while pressing the V Pot to change the bus or assignable effects output fader to Pre FX or Post FX When the Sends button is selected press the Settings button and hold F5 while pressing the V Pot to change a track s bus or assignable effects send level to Pre Volume or Post Volume Press the Sends button to scroll through the available bus and effects sends e F6 Press the Settings button and hold F6 while pressing the V Pot on a channel to return the channel s settings to the track defaults APPENDIX B 275 Fader Banks buttons The Fader Banks buttons control the behavior of the channel section controls Item 1 Bank 2 Channel 3 Flip Display buttons Description Press the left or right arrow button to scroll the channels 8 units at a time For example if tracks 1 8 are currently displayed press
301. he following ways e From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose the bus for which you want to add an envelope from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate bus from the submenu A purple line representing the envelope appears across the track s Adjusting bus automation levels 1 Select the Automation Settings button The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose a bus from the menu F walking a Sh 7 vol 31 4 dB ci a Touch Pan 25 L oo aA Hyper 3 Drag the fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have created Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the send level of the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelo
302. he left slows the tempo while dragging it to the right speeds the tempo Tip Double click the tempo value next to the Project Tempo slider to enter an exact value Press Enter when you are finished As you drag the Project Tempo slider a colored bar appears under each track s name to represent the amount a track is being stretched to match the project tempo The mark in the center of the bar represents the original tempo of a file When the bar appears to the right of the mark the project tempo is faster than the original file when the bar appears to the left of the mark the project tempo is slower than the original file The amount of change also displays as a percentage at the right end of the bar As you drag the slider a colored bar appears for each track H Riffage O Project tempo is faster than j TED GE a file tempo vol 13 1 dB ii Pam Center LL at SM Hyperfuzz T bd o SAOI Project tempo is slower a 4 1 than file tempo vol 6 0dB il Pan 15 L g Hyperfuzz 02 EAE C O r FF MH Vol 6 0dB m Pan Center i 105 982 4 pp aN BPM 4 d Project Tempo slider Changing project tempo to match file tempo Each track s shortcut menu contains the option Use Original Tempo The original tempo of the file used on the track appears to the right of this option in the shortcut menu To change the project s tempo to match the original file tempo simply choose Use Ori
303. he size of the Sends control region you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible Bus sends are post volume and post mute by default To change to pre volume and pre mute click the Pre Post button to switch to Pre Volume Send mode Changing an input bus s input or output port When the I O control region is visible each bus displays controls you can use to set the bus s input and output device To show or hide the I O control region click the I O button in the View pane Choosing an input device To choose an output device click the Input button and choose a port from the menu Choosing an output device To choose an output device click the Output button and choose a bus or hardware output from the menu or choose Output Off Setting the output to Output Off is useful when you re using an input bus as a recording input and want to monitor the bus through the track or when using an input bus as a talkback mic When you route busses to hardware outputs the outputs from those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your project If you want to use an input bus as a track input click the Record Input button on the track header choose Input Busses from the menu and choose an input bus from the submenu Monitoring bus levels When the Meters control region is visible each bus displays meters you can use to monitor output levels 170 CHAPTER 10 To show or hide the Meters control region
304. he slider to 100 If you set the slider to 50 a note that would be shifted 4 ticks is moved only 20 ticks 4 Select the tracks or events you want to quantize e Select a track to quantize all events on the track Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking a track header to select multiple tracks e Ifyou want to quantize multiple events on multiple tracks hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them and then select the tracks e Ifa selected event has note events selected only the selected notes will be quantized Note Muted tracks will not be quantized 5 Click the Apply button WORKING WITH MIDI 199 Editing velocity 1 From the Edit menu choose MIDI Processes and Filters The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed 2 Select the Velocity tab MIDI Processes and Filters Quantize velocity Duration Change Start Velocity Change Release Velocity Change type E Invert Set to Add Scale by ee Limit Change over time ep 3 Select a check box to indicate whether you want to edit note on or note off velocities Item Description Change Start Velocity Select this check box to edit note on velocities Change Release Velocity Select this check box to edit note off velocities 4 Select a radio button to indicate how you want to change velocity Item Invert Set to Add Scale by Limit Change over time Description Select this radio b
305. he track is panned Note When applying stereo pan types a monaural track is interpreted as a stereo track with the same data in both channels 1 Click the pan slider label and choose a pan type from the submenu The Add Channels pan type is most useful for panning stereo source material This pan type makes the stereo image appear to move as a unit between the speakers As the fader is moved from the center to a side more and more of the signal from the opposite side is folded into the side you are panning towards until at the extreme both channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This pan type uses a linear panning curve The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the right and left channels in stereo source material In this pan type moving from the center to a side the opposite side starts at a base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level The signal in the side you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either 0 dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to 0 dB When the stereo source is panned fully to one side that side plays at 0 dB while the other side provides no signal at all This pan type uses a linear panning curve The Constant Power pan type is most useful for panning mono source material As you move the fader from side to side this pan type creates the illusion of the source moving around the listener from one side to the other in a
306. help you avoid getting lost in a maze of envelopes when you re using track envelopes to control MIDI controllers For more information see Using the Display tab on page 263 208 CHAPTER 12 Adding a mute envelope 1 Select a MIDI track 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu 3 From the submenu choose Mute A check mark is displayed next to the command and an envelope is added to the timeline Mute automation is either on or off with no fade between the on and off states If you want to use fades apply volume automation 4 Ifyou want to change the track s mute state throughout the track edit the envelope in the timeline For more information see Adjusting envelopes on page 142 in the 5 If you want to change the track s mute state by recording automation settings select the Automation Settings button js track header 6 Click the Mute button in the track header to change the track s mute automation state at the cursor position The button behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the button mutes the entire track e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the button changes state to reflect the envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automatio
307. hift while dragging to bypass snapping c Double click a beat anchor or groove marker to reset the marker to the beat anchor position Tip Hover over a beat anchor or groove marker to display a ToolTip that explains the effect of groove marker adjustments Using folder tracks You can use the folder track feature to help organize your track list and timeline by grouping tracks so they can be quickly and easily minimized or expanded When the folder track is minimized you can perform edit operations on clustered events in the group but you cannot create events with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge trimming Expand the folder track to edit individual events Tip You can also use folder tracks to maintain alternate mixes of a project For example create two distinct drum parts and move the tracks to separate folder tracks Mute one of the drum folder tracks to choose which beat is used when you play or render your project Creating a folder track From the Insert menu choose Folder Track A folder track is added below the currently selected track You can create nested folder tracks by dragging a folder track to an existing folder track 5 L vocals GT LON O Ge 70 out 5440 42 36 3 i 50d i 6 R 1 i Min 00 gt F O ou 5440 42 36 3 24 18 12 i 50d ll 21 R Si Adding existing tracks to a folder track To add an existing track to a folder track drag the track to the folder track When the folder track i
308. hoose Drum Kits from the menu A submenu displays the available drum kits e If your track is routed to a MIDI device or a VSTi soft synth choose Drum Maps from the menu and then choose Select Drum Map from the submenu The Output Settings page of the Track Properties dialog is displayed 3 Choose the drum map or kit you want to use Displaying the piano roll If your track is routed to a MIDI device or VSTi soft synth you can switch from a drum grid view to a piano roll view Click the Program button Fl choose Drum Maps and then choose None Navigating the piano roll or drum grid In inline MIDI editing mode adjusting the height of the track will allow you to see more or less of the piano roll or drum grid After you set the height of the track you can use the following methods to navigate 194 CHAPTER 12 Scroll vertically Perform any of the following actions to scroll vertically within a track e Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to scroll up or down Free Fingers Low Bongo High Bongo Ride Gwm Wibra Slap Crash Cy Cowbell Splash Cy Tambourine Fide Bell e Hold Ctrl while dragging the keyboard drum list up or down e Hover over the keyboard drum list and roll the mouse wheel forward or back Zoom note height Perform either of the following actions to zoom note height e With the Draw or Selection z tool hover over the timeline and hold Ctrl Alt while rolling the mouse wh
309. hoose Save e Press Ctrl S From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and directory where the file will be saved Enter a name for the project in the File name box From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired ACID project file type ae E If you want to save a copy of each of the project s media files to the same location as your project file select the Copy all media with project check box This is available when saving as an ACID project file 46 CHAPTER 2 6 Click Save The project is saved Tip Once the project is saved you can use the Save As command from the File menu to create a copy of the project with anew name or save to a different ACID project file format Rendering projects Rendering refers to the process of converting the ACID project into a file that is formatted for a specific playback method Possible playback methods include media player applications Internet streaming media CD ROM and CD audio When an ACID project is rendered it is not overwritten deleted or altered and you are able to return to the original project to make changes and re render 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved 3 Enter a new name for the project in the File name box 4 From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired file format 5 If the selected file type supports
310. hop to New Track dialog appears Tip You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list 5 Complete the information in the Chop to New Track dialog and click Save The selection is saved and the file is added as a 3 4 loop to a new track in the project For more information see Saving Chopper selections as new files on page 100 Chopping multiple files into a new loop Want to combine short segments of several loops into a new loop You can use the Chopper to chop segments from several files into new loops and then combine the new loops into a single loop 1 Place a file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 97 2 Select audio in the Chopper and press Ctrl M to chop the audio to a new loop 3 Repeat steps one and two for as many loop segments as you want 4 Draw events on the new tracks to create a new melodic or rhythmic pattern 5 Select the new tracks and from the Tools menu choose Render to New Track to render the tracks to a single track The Render to New Track dialog appears 6 Complete the information in the Render to New Track dialog and click Save For more information see Mixing multiple tracks to a single track on page 129 The new composite loop is saved and adds it to your project as a new track Creating drum roll build ups Place a file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 97 Create a one measure selection Fo
311. hould perform troubleshooting to determine the cause of the problem Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time that timecode can be lost before the free wheel playback time starts A longer time is more tolerant of breaks in the incoming timecode Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time that playback continues after the free wheel slack time has been exceeded Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time it takes for the software to synchronize itself to incoming timecode On slower computers this time should be set to approximately two seconds On faster computers it may be set lower Setting this value too low can sometimes result in audible pitch shifting at the start of playback If ACID is consistently behind or ahead of your MTC generator enter a value in the box to adjust a synchronization offset with quarter frame accuracy If the software is behind set this value to a negative number A setting of 4 is a common offset If the software is ahead set this value to a positive number A setting of 4 is a common offset although it is rare that the application will sync ahead Select a radio button to determine when full frame timecode messages are sent while Generate MIDI Timecode is active Full frame messages are used by some external synchronizable audio devices to seek to a proper location prior
312. ht e Click Minimize amp to minimize a track vertically e Click Maximize to zoom in vertically so a bus track fills the lower portion of the timeline e After minimizing or maximizing a bus track click the Minimize or Maximize button again to return a bus track to its previous height e Press Ctrl Shift Up Down Arrow when the bus track area has focus to resize all bus tracks at once WORKING WITH TRACKS 107 Using track effects ACID allows you to use DirectX and VST plug ins at the track level Track level plug ins process everything on the selected track You can create plug in chains adjust the order of plug ins on a chain bypass plug ins remove plug ins and save frequently used chains as presets Tips Ifthe VST plug in you want to use isn t displayed in the Plug In Chooser you can use the VST Effects tab in the Preferences dialog to add the plug in s folder and then click the Refresh button to scan for plug ins For more information see Using the Video tab on page 261 Ifthe DirectX plug in you want to use isn t displayed in the Plug In Chooser hold Ctrl Shift while restarting ACID and then select the Delete all cached application data check box to reset your preferences and rescan for DirectX plug ins Using track effects The Sony Track EQ plug in effect is assigned to all tracks by default however it does not use CPU power or affect the sound until you adjust its settings You can remove the EQ plug in if d
313. ich you want to apply pressure Pressure Pressure 0 127 you want to apply to the note Most devices will apply more vibrato to a note as the pressure increases Program Start Time Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Change Channel MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Patch Number of the new patch you want to play Packed nonregistered parameter numbers NRPN are used to adjust settings such as vibrato and filtering but are not part of the General MIDI specification Refer to your MIDI device s documentation for more information about the required parameters Packed registered parameter numbers RPN are used to adjust common settings such as pitch wheel range WORKING WITH MIDI 219 MIDI notes and frequencies The following table shows the musical pitch and frequency associated with each MIDI note A5 is 440 Hz and middle C is C5 at 261 63 Hz These values can differ often by one octave from values used by other manufacturers The following frequencies are based on equal temperament tuning Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitch MIDI Key Frequency co 0 8 176 G3 43 97 998 D7 86 1174 7 CHO 1 8662 G amp B 44 103 82 D 7 87 1244 5 DO 2 9 177 A3 4 110 00 E7 88 1318 5 D 0 3 9 723 A 3 46 116 54 F7 89 1396 9 EO 4 10 301 B3 47 123 47 F 7 90 1480 0 Fo 5 10 913 C4 48 130 81 G7 91 1568 0 F 0 6 11 562 C 4 49 138 59 G 7 92 1661 2 GO 7 12 250 D4 50 146 83 A7 93 1760 0 G 0
314. ick one of the clips to open the Clip Properties dialog The contents of the Clip Properties window will change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline You can use the Clip Properties window to edit MIDI data using the list editor or piano roll Tip When the Clip Properties window is undocked you can double click its title bar to toggle its size especially handy when you re using the piano roll For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 Editing a MIDI clip with the Piano Roll The piano roll editor is a OPT plug in that you can use to create and edit note events within the ACID Clip Properties window for a MIDI track For more information see Using the piano roll editor on page 213 Editing a MIDI clip with the List Editor The List Editor tab is an OPT plug in that you can use to perform detailed filtering and editing within the Clip Properties window for a MIDI track For more information see Using the list editor on page 216 Merging controller data from a MIDI clip If you use MIDI clips that contain MIDI controller data the controller data will not be displayed in the timeline by default Right click the event on the timeline and choose Merge Envelope Data from the shortcut menu to represent MIDI controllers as envelopes on the timeline Note The Merge Envelope Data command is not available in inline MIDI editing mode For more information see Editing MIDI on the timeline
315. ick the Media Library Actions button ail and choose Open Media Library from the menu The Open Media Library dialog is displayed Choose the folder where the library you want to open is stored e Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop down list or e _ Use the bar on the left side of the window to browse to a folder Select a library from the list Click the Open button to open the selected library The name of the current library is displayed in the upper right corner of the Search Results pane Search Results OO gt gle a ai ai Mame Rating Comments ACID Type 29 MY Dance Pro Pro Loop 30 NY Dance Pro Pro Loop 31 A MY Dance Fro Fro Loop a2 NY DANCE sPROM gt Loop 33 pa Ni DANCE sPROM Loop E Me eee l a z i USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 69 Adding media files to a library Before you can search or organize your media files you ll need to add them to a media library When the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is installed and set as the active reference library in the Media Manager Options dialog tags and custom properties from the reference library will be applied to media from existing Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples or Loops for ACID collections when you add media to your library For more information on Media Manager options see Setting Media Manager options on page 81 Note The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library
316. iew menu choose Show Bus Tracks to view the bus track at the bottom of the track view Turning on panning keyframes Before adding individual keyframes you must first turn on the panning keyframes for the track or bus track 1 Select the track or bus track for which you want to automate panning 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu An additional row appears below the track with a single keyframe positioned at the beginning of the project This single keyframe represents the current panning settings for the track da Electric Guitar Electric Guta Eley r Q vol 12 0 dB eElectricGu A Keyframe Adding panning keyframes With panning keyframes turned on you can add keyframes at any location along the track or bus track 1 Position the cursor where you want to begin panning the track 2 Select the Automation Settings button on the track you want to pan 242 CHAPTER 14 3 Double click the surround panner to display the Surround Panner window 4 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240 Note You cannot automate muting including channels 5 Close the Surround Panner window A keyframe with the pan settings you created appears below the track at the cursor position Tip You can also add keyframes by double clicking the keyframe row or by right clicking the row and ch
317. il icon 2 Place the Draw Tool at the left edge of any track containing a media file 3 Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Draw tool to the right A waveform representing the event appears on the timeline as you drag the mouse Notice that if you are placing a loop file on the timeline small indentations appear along the top and bottom edges of the event indicating the start and end points of each individual loop Tip Events can be also be drawn from right end to left beginning 4 Release the mouse button to end the event 5 Click the Play from Start button l on the transport bar The event plays back GETTING STARTED 35 Painting events with the Paint tool Unlike the Draw tool the Paint tool allows you to quickly paint multiple events across several tracks This can be useful when you need to quickly add several seemingly random events to a project The Paint tool is also best used for painting multiple one shot events that will be evenly spaced on the grid lines When painting MIDI or one shot clips you can click the down arrow next to the Paint tool to set the length of events that will be created when you drag with the Paint tool 1 Click the Paint Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Paint from the submenu The mouse pointer displays as a brush icon 2 Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Paint tool randomly across the several tracks Notice that
318. ill record the new audio You must also select the recording settings for the tracks You have the additional options of using a metronome or turning off playback during recording You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection You can also record multiple takes for an event so you can maintain multiple versions of an event that you may play back and edit Arming the track for recording Whether recording into an existing track an empty track a selected event or a time selection you must prepare a track for recording You can arm multiple tracks prior to recording Click the Arm for Record button in the track list Once a track is armed a record meter appears in the track list Depending on your hardware a record gain fader may also appear Using the metronome A built in metronome marks time to help with the timing and tempo when recording a performance The metronome s sound is not mixed in the final rendering of the project Turning the metronome on or off From the Options menu choose Metronome or click the Metronome button By on the transport bar to turn the metronome on or off When you start recording or playing your project the metronome will start playing the project tempo and will follow any tempo or time signature changes For example if you start recording at measure 20 and your project tempo changes at that measure is 160 BPM the metronome will pl
319. ilters on parent level folders if you create a folder named Dynamics and add the Wave Hammer and Wave Hammer Surround plug ins to that folder you ll see both plug ins when you select the Dynamics folder Next create subfolders named Stereo and 5 1 Surround and drag Wave Hammer to the Stereo folder and Wave Hammer Surround to the 5 1 Surround folder e When you select the Dynamics folder no plug ins are displayed the contents are filtered by the Stereo and 5 1 Surround folders e When you select the Stereo folder only the Wave Hammer plug in is displayed e When you select the 5 1 Surround folder only the Wave Hammer Surround plug in is displayed To remove a plug in from a folder perform either of the following actions Navigate to the folder select the plug in and click the Delete button on the toolbar e Right click a plug in in the right hand pane choose Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu and then choose a folder from the menu to clear the check mark ORGANIZING PLUG INS AND REWIRE DEVICES 133 Viewing a plug in s folder assignments You can see a plug in s folder assignments by right clicking the plug in and choosing Folder Assignments from the shortcut menu A submenu displays all available folders Select a folder from the submenu to change a plug in s folder assignments or choose Remove from All Folders to clear all folder assignments Displaying audio plug in folders in the Mixing Console windo
320. im volume of the track You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button amp is selected the Volume fader handle is displayed as a P and you can use it to edit volume automation Note The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 161 Using output busses You can use busses to group and mix tracks The most common uses of busses are for routing tracks and effects outputs to specific hardware outputs or simply to use a bus as a master control for a set of tracks For example if you wanted to control the master level of all your drum tracks to a relative level you could create a bus and assign all drum tracks to that bus After your drums are mixed you can adjust the overall volume of the drum tracks by adjusting the bus volume Adding or deleting output busses From the Insert menu choose Bus or click the Insert Bus button a in the Mixing Console window to add a bus to your project The number of busses in your project will be determined by several factors such as the number of outputs that your hardware contains or how you will be using and applying effects throughout your project Note You ca
321. ime panel automation To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers The file created when a media file is opened for the first time This file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost instantaneous This file is stored in the directory where the audio file resides and has a sfk extension If this file is not in the same directory as the audio file or is deleted it is recalculated the next time you open the file Working with certain types of media files with particular audio compression schemes can be inefficient and slow To compensate for this audio proxy files are created for these formats to dramatically increase speed and performance The file is saved as a proprietary sfap0 file with the same name as the original media file and the same characteristics as the original audio stream The conversion happens automatically and does not result in a loss of quality or synchronization You can safely delete audio proxy files at any time since these files are recreated as needed PCM is the most common representation of uncompressed audio signals This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage PCM is the standard format for WAV and AIFF files The correction of rhythms to align with selected note lengths or beats in a MIDI sequence A proposed standard for controlling broadcast of streaming media RTSP was s
322. in Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch mode The fader can also adjust settings for the following items when you select other buttons in the Channel section e Audio track panning Adjusts audio track panning when the Pan and Flip buttons are selected Bus send levels Adjusts bus send levels when the Sends and Flip buttons are selected The fader is touch sensitive so if you re recording automation parameters recording will begin when you touch the fader and stop when you release it The current setting is displayed in the Mackie Control display Footswitches not shown The Mackie Control has two switched inputs labeled User Switch A and User Switch B that you can use to connect footswitches By default footswitch A toggles playback and footswitch B starts and stops recording You can customize the footswitches in the Configure Mackie Control dialog Double click Mackie Control in the Active control devices list on the External Control amp Automation tab of the Preferences dialog to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog For more information see Configuring or customizing control mappings on page 271 Control buttons The buttons in the Control section determine the operation of the V Pots and faders in the channel section of your Mackie Control In every mode the fader adjusts track volume and the V Pot adjusts the selected control mode You can press the Flip button to reverse the V Pot and fader functio
323. in the clip list Tip Select an event and press C to switch to the next clip quickly Previous Clip Updates the event s contents to use the previous clip in the clip list Tip Select an event and press Shift C to switch to the previous clip quickly WORKING WITH TRACKS 105 Using bus tracks From the View menu choose Show Bus Tracks to toggle the display of bus tracks at the bottom of the track view A bus track exists for each bus input bus assignable effects chain and soft synth in your project You can use bus tracks to automate volume panning and effect parameters using envelopes If a bus track has envelopes applied its icon will include a fader in the bus track and in the Mixing Console window For example if you wanted to adjust the volume of all tracks in your project you could apply a volume envelope to the Master bus track instead of adjusting each track individually Adding envelopes to a bus track Adding volume panning and effect automation envelopes to a bus track is just like adding an envelope to a standard track For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 142 Adding effects to a bus track 1 Click the Bus FX button sf in the bus track header to add or edit bus effects If there are no effects on the bus the button is displayed in gray and clicking this button displays the Plug In Chooser If a bus already has effects assigned clicking this button displays the Audio Plug In window
324. information see Adding or removing track effect automation on page 140 Using audio bus channel strips A separate channel strip is displayed for each bus in your project To show or hide channel strips for busses click the Busses button in the View pane 164 CHAPTER 10 Changing a bus s name To rename a bus double click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected bus The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter tex Touch ad ter 1 W Center QJ Ti 0 0 Headphone Mix Adding or editing bus insert effects When the Insert FX control region is visible each bus displays its effects chain at the top of the channel strip To show or hide the Insert FX control region click the Insert FX button in the View pane Insert Fe Track Noise Gate Each effect is displayed as a button You can hover over the button to see a ToolTip that displays the full plug in and preset name Tip When the Insert FX control region isn t visible you can click the Bus FX button t in the Faders control region to display the Audio Plug In window for the bus effects chain USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 165 Adding a plug in Clickthe _ button and then choose a new plug in from the menu to add a new plug in to the effects chain Editing effects settings Click an effect s button to display the Audio Plug In window where y
325. information see Soft Synth Properties on page 23 1 Select the Automation Settings button 2 Click to position the cursor in the timeline where you want to edit a parameter 3 You can adjust automated parameters by editing the envelopes in the timeline or by recording automation with the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window For more information see Adjusting envelopes on page 142 The controls in the Soft Synth Properties window behave differently if the track has automation envelopes and when you change the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the controls in the Soft Synth Properties window affect the entire bus track and all tracks routed to the soft synth e When the track has automation envelopes and the track automation mode is set to Read the Soft Synth Properties controls change state to reflect the envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted When the track has automation envelopes and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the Soft Synth Properties controls edit the envelope setting at the cursor position For more information see Track automation on page 137 Editing MIDI clip properties From the View menu choose Clip Properties or Ctrl Alt 3 to display the Clip Properties window You can also get to the Clip Properties window by double clicking the track icon E and selecting the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window Double cl
326. ing Click the Cut button 35 on the toolbar e Choose Cut from the Edit menu e Right click the track header and choose Cut Track from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl X Tracks that are copied or cut to the clipboard can be pasted back into the current project or into a different project an unlimited number of times This is a useful way to share tracks between different compositions You can paste a track in one of the following ways Click the Paste button on the toolbar e Choose Paste from the Edit menu e Right click the track view and choose Paste Track from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl V Adjusting the mix You can adjust the mix of a specific track in the track header Volume and pan each have dedicated sliders to make adjustments Assignable effects and busses share a multipurpose slider Click the multipurpose slider to choose what you want to adjust g Sound Fx G db S il uk td 48 47 36 30 24 18 12 gt Microsoft Sound Mapper E Master vol 7 8dB wk Touch f Pan Center f E TWINE BUI Multipurpose slider mode F 2 0 3 dB a F Post Multipurpose slider GETTING STARTED 41 Once you have chosen what you want to adjust drag the slider to adjust the level You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple tracks and move the sliders together as a group Function Description Volume This dedicated volume slider controls how loud a track is in the mix A value of 0 dB means that th
327. ing but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Gracenote CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Services supplied and or device manufactured under license for following Open Globe Inc United States Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype MusiclD and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Macromedia Flash Macromedia and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macromedia Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft DirectX programming interface Portions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media Technologies Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media technologies Copyright 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved PCRE LI
328. ing Mackie Control Extender units you can control eight additional channels with each Extender For more information see Configuring channel mappings for Mackie Control Extenders on page 270 5 3 4 6 2G ee SSSI a a 7 Item Description 1 V Pot Adjusts values for panning volume when Flip button is selected and effect parameter values e Audio track volume Adjusts track volume when the Pan or Sends button is selected and the Flip button is selected e Audio track panning Adjusts audio track panning when the Pan button is selected Bus send levels Adjusts bus send levels when the Sends button is selected Effect parameters Adjusts effect parameters when the Inserts button is selected The V Pot is velocity sensitive so rotating quickly changes values quickly and you can press the button to choose a selection When the Pan or Sends button is selected press the V Pot to edit the track or bus effects chain 2 Rec Ready Arms audio tracks for recording Button 3 SignalLED Indicates whether an audio track or bus is outputting a signal 4 Solo Button Press to solo a track or remove it from the solo group 5 Mute Button Press to mute or unmute a track 6 Select Press to select a track Button APPENDIX B 273 Item 7 Fader Description Adjusts the track or bus level unless the Flip button is selected When the Automation button is selected the fader adjusts the automation envelope if the track is
329. ing custom settings 49 Reordering tracks 40 Replacing Media files 122 Resetting MIDI ports 222 Resizing Tracks 40 Windows 248 Reversing events 57 Ripping tracks from CD 32 Ripple editing 61 Cutting events 61 Deleting events 62 Pasting events 63 Ruler offset 249 Sample rate 29 Saving Projects 46 Track properties to media files 123 Scoring video 234 Search pane Autohiding 80 Automatically hiding 80 Searching for media files By keyword 76 Media Manager 75 Using tags 77 Sections Adjusting length 67 Adjusting the length 67 Arranging a project 66 Changing color 67 Clearing all events 68 Copying 68 Deleting 68 Inserting 67 Moving shuffling 67 Moving a label 68 Removing a label 68 Renaming 67 Trimming 67 Selecting events 38 40 Selecting notes 195 Setting the active clip and creating events 102 Setting up a control surface 267 Setting up a Mackie Control Universal 269 INDEX vii Shortcut keys 305 Signal flow Audio 25 26 MIDI 27 28 Sliding Events 64 Video events 232 Slipping Events 64 Video events 232 Slip trimming Events 64 Video events 232 Snapping 89 In the Chopper window 95 To scale 216 Soft Synth Properties window 23 Soloing Tracks 43 Splitting events 58 At the cursor position 58 Multiple events 59 One event 59 Within a time selection 60 Start offset 64 Streaming media commands 85 Stretching properties 114 121 Loops 118 Subtags
330. ing the right arrow will change to tracks 9 16 Press the left or right arrow button to scroll the channels 1 unit at a time For example if tracks 1 8 are currently displayed pressing the right arrow will change to tracks 2 9 Hold the Option button while pressing either Channel button to change track order For example if track two is selected and you press Option lt Channel track two becomes track one Conversely if track one is selected and you press Option Channel gt track one becomes track two Press to exchange the behavior of the fader and V Pot when allowed The Display buttons control the behavior of the channel section controls Item 1 Meters Values 2 Time Fmt Zero 276 APPENDIX B Description When you re working with audio tracks or busses press to display meters or numeric values Even in Meters mode numeric values are displayed when you edit a value Hold the Shift button in the Modifiers section while pressing the Meters Values button to toggle control of tracks busses or tracks and busses e Press once to show audio and MIDI tracks e Press again to show audio tracks e Press again to show MIDI tracks e Press again to show busses e Press again to show all tracks and busses Press and hold to display the current time format Turn V Pot 8 while holding the button to change the format Markers buttons The Markers buttons control additional track and channel settings
331. input bus channel strips Soft Synth Busses Shows or hides soft synth bus channel strips Assignable FX Busses Shows or hides assignable FX channel strips e Master Bus Shows or hides the Master bus channel strip e Preview Bus Shows or hides the Preview bus channel strip Show Control Choose a command to configure which portions of the channel strips are Regions displayed in the Mixing Console window e Show All Control Regions Displays all control regions e Insert FX Control Region Shows or hides the Insert FX control region e Sends Control Region Shows or hides the Sends control region 1 O Control Region Shows or hides the I O control region e Peak Meters Control Region Shows or hides Peak Meters Faders Control Region Shows or hides volume faders Show Control Choose this command to show or hide control region labels in channel Region Labels Strips Show Fader Ticks Choose this command to show or hide the fader ticks next to the faders Channel Width Choose a setting to indicate whether you want to view narrow medium default or wide channel strips in the Mixing Console window Meter Layout Choose Meter Defaults and then choose a command from the submenu to reset clip indicators set the display range or display labels peaks or valleys in the channel meters ban Downmix Output Downmixes your audio from 5 1 surround to stereo or from stereo to mono so you can ensure your mix will sound the way you intended
332. ion shortcut menu allows you to create increments that correspond to the specified musical length 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 4 is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black 2 Right click the increment arrow and choose the desired musical value from the shortcut menu The increment length is automatically configured to the selected value in both the Chopper and the track view Creating increments of a custom musical length 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 4 is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black Right click the increment arrow and choose Custom from the shortcut menu The Custom Length dialog appears Choose the desired increment format from the drop down menu of Enter an appropriate value in the adjacent box and click OK The increment length is automatically configured to the selected value in both the Chopper and the track view Note t is possible to set an increment value that results in the increment arrow extending beyond the scope of the Chopper If this occurs an accurate depiction of the increment still appears in the track view Inserting selections in the track view You can add selections from the Chopper to your project in several ways Using the Insert Selection button After you create the desired selection and increment you can insert the selection in the project at the track view s cursor position by clicking the Insert Selec
333. ip Events within the MIDI file are displayed in a table Each event occupies one row and the rows are sorted in chronological order The columns in the List Editor tab display the contents of the events Viewing the list editor 1 Double click the MIDI icon H on the track header to open the Track Properties window 2 Select the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties dialog 3 Double click one of the listed clips to open the Clip Properties dialog 4 Click the List Editor tab The list editor appears 216 CHAPTER 12 Clip Properties E Free Fingers 1100 8 Y xX Fr TI 7 Toolbar Track H M iS F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 00 00 0000 00 03 1 k k k k k k LE 1 1 1 1 MLB T Channel Message 1 000 Sequencer Specific 1 000 Sequencer Specific 1 000 Channel Prefix 1 000 iz Sequence Mame 1 000 Instrument Mame 1 000 Time Signature 44 1 000 key Signature Z Major Events 1 000 iz SMPTE OFFset 32 00 00 00 00 1 000 iz Tempo 125 000 BPM 1 000 36 C3 c3 On Velocity 108 1 006 42 F 3 F 3 On Velocity 118 1 193 4 F 3 F 3 On Velocity 57 hi iiij gt gt w I HK H 11 000 11 000 11 000 Transport bar Previewing MIDI Loop boxes You can preview individual events or the MIDI file as a whole within the list editor Tip To control volume during playback in the list e
334. is not installed by default but you can install it from the ACID CD or download it from the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site http www sonycreativesoftware com reference After installing the library go to the Media Manager Options dialog and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop down list Tip f the Save media usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the ACID Preferences dialog you can add individual files to a library by previewing the files in the ACID Explorer window 1 Click the Add Files to Media Library button E The Add Files to Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose the folders that will be searched for media a Ifitisn t displayed automatically click the Add Folder button 1 to display the Browse for Folder dialog b Select the folder you want to search c Click OK Tips f you want to change an item in the folder list select it and click the Browse button in the Folders column If you want to remove a folder from the list select it and click the Remove Folder button 3 Repeat step 2 for each folder you want to search 4 Select the Include subfolders check box if you want to search folders within the selected folders 5 Select the Audio Video Images or MIDI check boxes to indicate the types of media you want to add Clear a check box to exclude that type of media file Files that contain audio and video streams will b
335. it you can choose an encoding template from the Template drop down list or click Custom to create a new template For more information see Creating custom rendering settings on page 49 6 Select or clear the following check boxes as needed e Select the Save project as path reference in rendered media check box if you want to save the project path f GY Render As Savein Sony ACID Pro 7 0 Projects Pe Er I Name Date modified Type Size Tags a No items match your search Recent Places Desktop y Pfeiffer Stephanie Computer File name SampleProject v A Save as type Wave Microsoft wav z Template Project Settings z Description Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo PCM A Save project as path reference in rendered media Render loop region only v Save project markers with media file Save sections as regions with media file Save each track as a separate file information with the rendered file to easily return to your source project if you use your rendered file in another project Note f you modify the project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the loop region The loop region does not need to be active
336. iting MIDI on the timeline on page 193 Editing a drum map 1 From the Tools menu choose Drum Map Editor to display the Drum Map Editor dialog 2 Choose the drum map you want to edit Select a drum map in the MIDI Drum Map Template list e Click the Open button EF to browse to an XML drum mapping file Tip Drum maps that belong to the GM2 kits are displayed witha amp and cannot be edited 3 If you want to edit the name of the drum map double click the name in the MIDI Drum Map Template column and type a new name in the box WORKING WITH MIDI 225 4 Ifyou want to associate the drum map with a MIDI device double click the Device box and type the name of a MIDI device When you associate a drum map with a MIDI device the drum maps will be displayed automatically on the Output Settings tab of the Track Properties window when you choose Drum Map from the drop down list at the top of the page For more information see Editing duration on page 201 Note Be sure to type the device name identically in the Drum Map Editor and the Patch Map Editor For more information see Creating or editing program maps on page 223 5 If you want to change the description of the map edit the text in the Drum Map Description box 6 Add keys as needed a Click the Insert Key button MN toadda key to the drum map Ifa key is selected the next available key will be inserted For example if you select C5 and click Insert Key C 5 wi
337. ividual projects 1 From the File menu choose Properties The Project Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Audio tab to display the project s audio properties 3 Click the Browse button next to the Recorded files folder box 4 Browse for the location where you want to save recorded files 5 Click OK RECORDING AUDIO 185 Monitoring audio levels While you re recording a responsive meter is provided in the track header to monitor the Seana eE Ge C incoming signal level of the selected recording device It is important that you record T 0 with the highest signal possible without clipping Out amp li 6 A reading of 0 dB is the maximum for a digital signal Clipping occurs when the incoming j _ i signal is too high to be represented as a digital value The result is distortion in the recording A clipped signal will be indicated by a red indicator warning at the end of the meters Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters Using record input monitoring If you re using a low latency audio device and you want to hear your recording signal with real time track effects you can turn on input monitoring To turn on input monitoring click the Record Device Selector button and choose Input Monitor Mode Auto or Input Monitor Mode On from the menu During recording your signal will be played back with the current track effects chain but a dry unprocessed sig
338. izontal to select multiple notes Drag to draw a rectangular region that begins where you start drawing and ends where you release the mouse button All notes inside the region will be selected This method is good for selecting a group of notes that are close together Can be used to easily select all notes that occur within a time range The vertical selection box automatically selects all of the notes between your first mouse click and where you draw the selection box even notes that are not visible at the current magnification are selected Can be used to easily select all notes on a single or multiple adjacent rows The horizontal selection box automatically selects all notes on a row that is touched by the selection box even notes that are not visible at the current magnification are selected To change the type of selection box you are using right click the mouse while holding down the left mouse button Clicking the right mouse button will toggle through the three types of selection boxes Adding or deleting notes 1 Click the Enable Inline MIDI Editing button 2 Use the scroll buttons at the left edge of the track to navigate the piano roll drum grid a Tip Drag the bottom border of the track header to increase the height of the track 3 Select an editing tool Tool Draw Paint Erase 196 CHAPTER 12 Icon Description P F Allows you to insert edit select and mov
339. ject markers with media file C Save sections as regions with media file 2 From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved 3 Enter a new name for the project in the File name box A separate file will be created for each channel using this name as a base For example if you type My Project in the File name box and render your project using wave files the following files would be created My Project Left wav My Project Right wav My Project Center wav My Project LFE wav My Project Left Surround wav and My Project Right Surround wav 4 From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired file format If you have the Sony AC 3 Encoder you can choose AC 3 from the list 5 Choose 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM from the Template drop down list if you want to render six mono files or choose an appropriate 5 1 channel template if the selected file type supports it 6 Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the Loop Region Loop Playback does not need to be selected for this option to work WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 245 7 Ifthe selected file type supports it you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers regions and time markers in the rendered media file If the information cannot be saved to your media file an sfl file will be created using the same base name as your me
340. ject to a single track stereo event If your project includes any muted tracks however those events are not mixed into the new track The original tracks and their events are unaffected when you mix to a single track Typically you would use this feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them to conserve processing power Also when you mix multiple tracks to a single stereo track any envelope or track effects that you applied are rendered into the newly mixed down track You can also use this feature to downmix 5 1 surround projects to stereo This option also allows you to destructively process any track effect plug ins 1 Solo the tracks you want to mix To mix down the whole project skip to step two 2 From the Tools menu choose Render to New Track or press Ctrl M The Render to New Track dialog appears x Render to New Track Save in l Stereo Projects O Surround Projects My Recent Documents My Documents P My Computer File name New Track 1 wav D My Network Save as type Wave Microsoft wav Template Project Settings Description Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo PCM _ Render loop region only Save project markers with media file C Save sections as regions with media file C Save each track as a separate file WORKING WITH TRACKS 129 3 Complete the Render to New Track dialog e From the Save in drop down list choose the location where you want t
341. k FX ags j e 5 2 Track FX off Downshift Edit Turns automation mode on or off Downshift Exit Turns the Downmix Output on or off in the Mixing Console window Output Displays the tracks with their associated busses in the BCFview virtual display In the example below the Master bus is shown BLvh 1 FFv ESv FDNBv SSSv BOSv ESv SF v Master Master Master Master Master Master Master Master Note Turning the knobs displays all busses in your project For more information see Knobs on page 293 Output Store Displays the effects for each track Output Edit Removes the bus or FX information from the BCFview virtual display 292 APPENDIX B Push buttons Knobs Top row of push buttons Bottom row of push buttons Items Push buttons top row Upshift push button top row Push button bottom row Upshift push button bottom row Downshift push button bottom row Assignable buttons itil ili i CUR ULLLL 1 khk h i eE Encoder Groups buttons Description Turns mute on or off for each track Turns the solo on or off for each track Selects the track Arms the track for recording Adds an audio track to your project Assignable button 1 Assignable button 2 Assignable button 3 Assignable button 4 OSESMIDCOuTROCLCEA Items Assignable button 1 Assignable button 2 Assignable button 3 Assignable button 4 Upshift assignable button 1 Upshift assignable button
342. k box if your project requirements do not change or you want settings consistent settings for future projects Opening existing projects 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop down list 3 Selecta file in the browse window or type a name in the File name box Detailed information about the selected file appears at the bottom of the dialog box Choose a file type from the Files of type drop down list to limit the files displayed in the dialog box 5 Click Open Note f one of the media files cannot be located when you open an ACID project you can choose to leave the media offline and continue to edit events on the track The events point to the location of the source media file If you restore the source media file at a later time the project opens normally Opening ACID projects with embedded media When you open an acd zip project the project file and all media files are copied to the temporary files folder Note You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog on page 253 Any changes you make to the project are saved to the files in this temporary folder until you save the acd zip file again For more information see Saving projects on page 46 Getting media files Now that you ve created a new project or opened an existing project the next
343. k to the effects processor Click the bus button on the track header and choose the bus you created in step 2 H Clean Gtr 5 ef EP The bus button on the track header ara ae ee ee ee eae a lets you send the track s audio to your effects processor A MyPhaser Left O Bue A ts Vo 6 0 d E tr Sonali Pan Center 1 2 ENB BusA Inf Pre Click Play je When you play your project the track is sent to your auxiliary bus into the effects processor out of the effects processor into the input bus and out to the master bus When you re ready to render your project you can use real time rendering to include the output from your effects processor with your project For more information see Rendering in real time on page 50 USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 173 Using input busses with hardware based synthesizers If you d like to use your vintage synth with your ACID project this topic will show you how to use input busses to send a MIDI track to a hardware synthesizer 1 2 3 5 Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your synthesizer Connect the audio output of your synthesizer to an input on your sound card for this example we ll use Inst 1 Add an input bus to your project This input bus will receive the audio signal from your synthesizer For more information see Adding or deleting input busses on page 168 Configure your input bus to take its input from the s
344. l events from a section sususesusuesesusrereseserrerrsreresrrrrrrereresee 68 Using the Media Manager cc ccc cece cece cece eee e eee e cece cece eeeeeeneeees 69 Creating anew Media library ccc ccc cee eee cence eee eee e eee e eee eeeeees 69 Openinga MCOIANIDIAlY 1 nese 0o0st o5oass seus RENEE EEES EE ee cuentas 69 Adding media files to a library ccc ccc cece cee een eee eee eeeenen teenies 70 Removing media files from a library cece ccc cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 71 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 ae GO Media WIGS earar inr inr rE nieuwe eee newed sewen suena sceuniees ieee wewes 71 TN a 1d erT IAEN EEA CETAN ENES onion IEE sa EAA enews 71 Applying a tag to a media file ccc ccc ccc cece eee n nen e eee et eee eeeennees 72 Removing a tag from a Media file 0 ccc cece eee eee nnn eee eeeeenenaes 72 Deleting a tag from alibrary ccc ccc ccc cee eee e eee e ene e eee E E 73 WET CING SUDTAOS oe eens yest douse nu tunis eonnuedaa ne tietue di seuseeseedeserursdeeemaviad est 73 Arranging tags in the tag tree cece cece E EPRE EAEE EANES EEEa 73 Editing tag NAMES OF IMAGES 6 cece cc cece eee eee ee eee eee eee eee teen eee eees 73 Viewing or creating palettes ccc ccc cence eee e eee e cesses esses eeeeeeeeeeeees 73 Saving tags and properties to media files 0 cece cece cece eee e nent eeeees 74 Backing up your Media libraries cece cc cece
345. l notice that the Channel MIDI Message and MIDI Data columns are updated 12 Click OK to close the Configure Generic Control dialog and then click OK to close the Preferences dialog 13 From the Options menu choose External Control to enable your controller You re ready to start using your controller Turn each knob on your controller and notice that turning knob 1 adjusts the volume trim of track 1 turning knob 2 adjusts the volume of track 2 and so on Press the button that you assigned to scroll the channel bank down in step 8 Turn each knob on your controller and notice that turning knob 1 now adjusts the volume trim of track 9 turning knob 2 adjusts the volume of track 10 and so on Press the button that you assigned to scroll the channel bank up in step 8 so you can control tracks 1 8 again Press the button that you assigned to toggle automation mode in step 11 Select the Automation Settings button on each track to enable automation recording Start playback and turn each knob on your controller and notice that turning knob 1 records volume automation on track 1 turning knob 2 records automation on track 2 and so on For more information see Automation recording modes on page 147 Press the automation mode toggle button once more and you can use the knobs to adjust track trim levels again APPENDIX B 287 The Behringer BCF2000 control surface Encoder groups buttons baaben f gt FADER BCF
346. l while dragging a fader to move it in fine increments 154 CHAPTER 10 Audi Insert Fx Item Description Insert FX T Insert FX Control The Insert FX control region displays the insert effects chain for a track or Control Region i Region bus D Note MIDI tracks do not have this region on the channel strip Sends Sends Control The Sends control region displays controls for routing tracks to busses or T E Contig Region assignable effects chains For assignable effects chains the Send Region Te Inf ee also displays an input fader and meter Ta I O Control Note MIDI tracks do not have this region on the channel strip Region I O Control Region The I O control region allows you to choose the recording input for a track or route a channel to a bus or hardware output Peak Meters Control The Peak Meters control region displays peak meters you can use to Region monitor instantaneous levels during playback and determine the loudest Peak Meters l level in your audio signal Control Region y g Note To change the range of all meters in the Mixing console drag the Meter Range slider in the View pane or right click a meter and choose a range from the shortcut menu Faders Control The Faders control region allows you to control a channel s gain Region Audio track channels display controls for the track automation mode Padere Control arm for record input monitor mode mute solo pan track gain and Region phas
347. layback the corresponding track remains audible and all other tracks are muted Clicking the Solo button a second time returns all tracks to their original levels in the mix Toggle soloing a track is an effective method of configuring and previewing isolated track effects against how they sound in the project You can also press X to solo a track or group of tracks Tip Press Ctrl and click the Solo button to solo only the selected track and restore any other soloed tracks If the selected track is already soloed press Ctrl and click the Solo button to restore all tracks Choosing a track s input recording device The Record Device Selector button in a track header chooses the audio input that will be used to record to a track You can click the Record Device Selector button to turn input monitoring on or off and choose a recording device BASS TASTER sPROMOOZ Ea me Oy A bas TASTI 26 Se o Input Monitor Mode OFF vol 6 6 dB mf E Input Monitor Mode On Pan Center i I Input Monitor Mode Suto ASTIO4ALL 2 F Input Busses d For more information see Recording Audio on page 179 Monitoring track output levels During playback a responsive meter is displayed in the track header to monitor the track s output TEE B Horizontal meter Out i E 7 0 vol 6 6 d on ty Touch z Pan Center aj aI BASS TAST Bass Guitar Gde amp 7 20 Vertical meter SoundMAx Digital Audio 1 5 B Bus B ee Right
348. laying back For example by moving a fader you can add points to a volume envelope Note For more information about envelopes see the full ACID User Manual available on the application disc or the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site or check the online help from the ACID Help menu choose Contents and Index APPENDIX B 295 Fader automation Another question that comes up often is Why aren t the faders following the envelopes There are two quick answers to this question 1 The Behringer BCF2000 is not in automation mode To enable automation press Downshift Edit For more information see Encoder Groups buttons on page 292 2 On the track header Automation Off has been selected To enable automation choose Automation Read Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch Bey amp RS 1 o 6 806 ll 43 L Sutomation CFF Automation disabled on the track header 296 APPENDIX B W of l 12d Center Automation OFF 12 6 o Automation Read vol 10d 11 e Automation Write Touch Pan 43 R Automation Write Latch Automation enabled on the track header Appendix C ACID Tips and Tricks The following sections contain some time saving tips and creative suggestions for building ACID projects Adding long media files quickly You can paint an entire CD track or MIDI file on an ACID track with a single click 1 Add along file such as a
349. le menu choose Export Loops to create new loops using the original loop media files in your ACID project A new loop file is created for every tempo change in the project which can result in multiple loop files being created from a single loop media file 1 From the File menu choose Export Loops The Export Loops dialog appears From the Save in drop down list choose the drive or folder to which the new files will be saved From the Save as type drop down list choose the file format From the Template drop down list choose an audio format or click Custom to create custom rendering settings A oe Click Save A progress dialog appears for each track as it is rendered to a file Tempo information is included in the file name of each loop file created e g bass 120 000 BPM wav 130 CHAPTER 7 devices Chapter 8 Organizing Plug Ins and ReWire Devices You can use the Plug In Manager to organize your DirectX and VST plug ins VST effects and instruments and ReWire From the View menu choose Plug In Manager to toggle the display of the Plug In Manager window With this window you can access effects and effects packages and apply them to tracks busses assignable effects chains and soft synth busses You can also rename and reorganize plug ins For information about adding effects to your project see Working with Tracks on page 101 Tip To add an effect quickly drag a plug in from the Plug In Manager window to a track
350. lect events created from a clip e Right click an event in the timeline and choose Select Events Using This Event s Clip from the shortcut menu to select all events on the track that use the same clip as the selected event e Right click the timeline choose Select Events Using Clip and then choose a clip from the submenu to select all events on the track that use the specified clip e Right click a clip in the Clip Pool window and choose Select Timeline Events from the shortcut menu Selecting events using the Select All command Choosing Select All from the Edit menu selects all events in a project Selecting multiple events using the Selection tool You can drag the Selection tool across the track view to select events across multiple tracks This tool allows you to select events using three methods vertical horizontal and free selection Method Description Displays as Vertical Allows you to select all events on all Parallel dashed line spanning the tracks within an interval of time vertical length of the project Horizontal Allows you to select all events ona track Parallel dashed line spanning the or several adjacent tracks horizontal length of the project Free selection Allows you to select a group of adjacent Dashed line box events on adjacent tracks This is the default selection method 2 Place the pointer on the track view The pointer displays as an arrow with an adjacent dotted box Ch 3 Drag the mous
351. lection in the right side of the PC pane 4 You re now ready to extract tracks Editing and submitting CD information 1 Insert a CD in your drive 2 Selecta track and click the CD Info button in the Extract Audio from CD dialog or browse to the CD and click the button in the Explorer window The Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog is displayed For more information see Extracting media files from CD on page 32 For more information see Explorer window on page 22 3 Use the Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog to edit information about the CD For help on submitting CD information click the Help Guidelines button in this dialog 4 When you are finished entering the information click the OK button to submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database Understanding clip types When you add media to a project a new track is created for the file Depending on the type of media you add one of four clip types is created to accommodate it loop one shot Beatmapped or MIDI You can identify a track s type by looking at the paint clip selector icon in the track header For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 Loops ii Loops are small chunks of audio that are designed to create a continuous beat or pattern when played repeatedly They are usually one to four measures long Loops are the type of file that you will use most frequently One shots One shots are chunks of audio that are not de
352. lick the External MIDI Input Port button and select the MIDI input device from the menu Soloing MIDI device inputs External MIDI devices can be routed to multiple soft synths or MIDI thru devices Soloing a MIDI device input prevents your device from playing through other soft synths and MIDI thru devices soloing the input through the selected soft synth control You can solo MIDI input on more than one soft synth control if desired 1 Double click the soft synth icon on a control 4 The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Click the Solo Listen to MIDI Input button Creating or editing program maps From the Tools menu choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog You can use the Program Map Editor dialog to create or edit program maps for external MIDI devices A program map allows you to view program names in the track header and on the Output Settings tab of the Track Properties window when a MIDI track is routed to a hardware synth Program Map Editor MIDI Device Native Instruments B4 p 3 5 Program Group All Groups 11 2 x Program Name Group Prog MSB LSB iP Rock and Roll None 1 0 0 None o oo oO Program Map Description WORKING WITH MIDI 223 Creating program maps 1 From the Tools menu choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog 2 Click the New button to create a new program map You ll be prompted to choose a file na
353. licking a track header to select multiple tracks e Ifyou want to edit multiple events on multiple tracks hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them and then select the tracks e Ifa selected event has note events selected only the selected notes will be edited Note Muted tracks will not be edited 5 Click the Apply button WORKING WITH MIDI 201 Editing MIDI track properties From the View menu choose Track Properties to display the Track Properties window The contents of the Track Properties window reflect the currently selected track Track Properties Output Settings Input Filters Clip Pool Controllers ka For MIDI tracks you can use the Output Settings tab to adjust MIDI controllers voices and drum maps You can use the Input Filters tab set up MIDI message velocity or quantize filters You can use the Clip Pool tab to organize each track s media and enable looped or one shot drawing for MIDI events For more information see Audio track properties on page 115 Configuring MIDI track output settings You can use the Output Settings tab on the configure which controllers can be automated add remove or hide envelopes set default values and set each envelope s default fade curve Controller automation 1 From the View menu choose Track Properties The Track Properties dialog is displayed Track Properties Output Settings Input Filters Clip Pool Controllers v
354. line Working with multiple recorded clips Clicking the Loop Playback button on the transport bar enables you to continually create clips during recording The last clip recorded is set as the track s active clip You can use clips as different versions of a recorded event that you can quickly switch between to choose the best one During recording with loop playback enabled the time selection continually repeats and starts recording a new clip until you stop recording You can preview select rename and delete clips in the Clip Pool pane of the Track Properties window to manage the clips For more information see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips on page 104 The Clip Properties window will display region markers to represent the selected event s clip in the waveform For more information see Configuring clip properties on page 115 Specifying where recordings are stored Recorded files are saved in the folder specified on the Folders tab of the Preferences dialog is used by default If you want to choose a project specific recorded files folder you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog Changing where recorded files are stored for new projects 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Folders tab 3 Choose a setting from the Record drop down list or click the Browse button to choose a folder 4 Click OK Changing where recorded files are stored for ind
355. lip Pool 104 Using the Mackie Control Universal 273 Video 231 234 Adding 231 Editing events 232 Frame numbering 231 Hiding showing 231 Removing 231 Removing associated audio 231 Scoring 234 Synchronizing with audio 231 Video Preview window 23 Video window 232 Volume Adjusting for input bus 171 Automation 138 Event 66 Track 41 Track envelopes 142 Volume automation Editing 42 W Wall of sound 299 Window docking area 22 Windows Audio Plug In 108 110 Audio plug in 23 Chopper 23 95 Docking floating 247 Explorer 22 30 32 Groove Pool 24 Hiding showing 247 Main 16 Media Manager 23 Plug In Manager 24 Soft Synth Properties 23 Surround Panner 23 240 Track Properties 23 115 123 Video Preview 23 Working with tracks 40 Writing to CD 51 Understanding track at once and disc at once 51 Zoom controls Chopper window 95 Main window 22 INDEX ix x INDEX
356. lip Properties from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Stretch tab 3 From the Stretching method drop down list choose Pitch shift segments The clip s pitch will change in relation to the tempo of the project While this may seem like just a way of producing old school effects it actually has practical applications as well For example specifying Pitch shift segments can actually improve the fidelity of drum loops recorded at a tempo near the project tempo In addition overriding the compress expand feature allows you to create great bass grooves by slowing drum loops APPENDIX C 301 Slicing and dicing in the Chopper You can use the Chopper to add creative slice and dice effects to your ACID project Chopping new loops for alternate time signatures The Chopper makes it easy to clone a new loop from a song or sample This feature can be particularly handy when you want to create a loop for a different time signature In this example you ll create a 3 4 pattern from a 4 4 loop 1 Set the project time signature to 3 4 For more information see Changing project time signature on page 91 2 Place a 4 4 loop file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 97 3 Select athree beat section of audio to be used for the new loop Use the Chopper s transport bar to preview the new loop 4 Right click the selection and choose Chop to New Track from the shortcut menu Alternately press Ctrl M The C
357. lip is handled Track Type Description Loop When Loop is selected the clip is transposed to the project key and stretches to fit the project tempo Loops can be drawn across the track and will repeat end to end One Shot When One Shot is selected the clip is streamed from the hard disk rather than being stored in RAM One shot files do not change tempo with the rest of the loops and are not transposed to the project key The Stretch tab is not available when One Shot is selected Beatmapped When a file that is longer than 30 seconds is added to a project the Beatmapper Wizard starts to allow you to add tempo information to the file You cannot choose Beatmapped for very short media files A file must be at least one measure long at 300 BPM to be Beatmapped Use the Open files as loops if between seconds setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to determine the file length Adjusting pitch shift Enter a value in the Pitch shift box or use the spinner control to adjust the pitch of all events that use the same clip Note Track pitch shifting is not saved to the media file when you click the Save button Adjusting time stretching Beatmapped tracks only ACID provides two time stretching methods for Beatmapped tracks Classic and lastique Classic is the standard time stretch method used by ACID 1 Select the Preserve pitch when stretching check box if you want your track to maintain its pitch when your pr
358. ll be added if it does not exist in the current drum map If C 5 D5 and D 5 already exist E5 will be added b Double click the name in the Instrument column and type the name of the instrument associated with the selected key 7 Select a key in the table on the right side of the dialog and click the Delete Key button X to remove it from the drum map 8 Ifyou want to copy key assignments from other drum maps perform the following steps a Inthe MIDI Drum Map Template list select the drum map that contains the keys you want to copy Select the keys you want to copy Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple keys Click the Copy Selected Keys button GL In the MIDI Drum Map Template list select the drum map that you want to edit oan FS Click the Paste Copied Keys into Map button Fr Select the keys you want to copy Hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple keys If a key is selected the next available key will be inserted For example if you select C5 and click Insert Key C 5 will be added if it does not exist in the current drum map If C 5 D5 and D 5 already exist E5 will be added f Double click the name in the Instrument column and type the name of the instrument associated with the selected key 9 Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes Choosing a drum map for a track Tracks that are routed to a VSTi soft synth or a MIDI device can display a piano roll or a drum grid Tracks that are routed to the DLS soft synth will
359. ll events and or portions of events within the region are highlighted 5 Press Delete to delete the event s Deleting time selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection When information is deleted it is not placed on the clipboard Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Existing events adjust to occur sooner in the project Deleting time and event selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection When information is deleted it is not placed on the clipboard Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Existing events on the top track adjust to occur sooner in the project 62 CHAPTER 3 Pasting events in ripple editing mode Once information is copied to the clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items into tracks For more information see Pasting events on page 55 The following procedures explain pasting information in ripple editing mode Note Events are always pasted into their own tracks at the cursor position From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple
360. lor from the submenu Renaming tracks To rename a track right click the track name and choose Rename from the shortcut menu or double click the track name Renaming a track applies to the project only and does not change the file associated with the track 40 CHAPTER 2 Duplicating tracks To duplicate a track right click it and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu An exact copy of the track is created and its events and adds it below the original track in the project The words Copy of appear before the name of the duplicate track to identify it in the track list For creative ways to use duplicate tracks see Playing with duplicate tracks on page 297 Deleting tracks You can delete unnecessary tracks from a project by selecting the track and using any of the following methods e Choose Delete from the Edit menu e Right click a track and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu Press Delete Copying cutting and pasting tracks Copying a track places an exact copy of the selected track on the clipboard but leaves the track view unchanged To copy a track select the track and do one of the following Click the Copy button on the toolbar e Choose Copy from the Edit menu e Right click the track header and choose Copy Track from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl C Cutting a track removes it from the track view and places it on the clipboard To cut a track select it and do one of the follow
361. ly tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d loops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved automatically If you need to modify the pattern matching you can edit the AutoTagPatterns xml file which is created in yourMy Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts 7 Click the OK button to close the dialog USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 81 82 CHAPTER 4 Chapter 5 Working in the Track View This chapter introduces you to several ACID features that increase your productivity such as markers regions and snapping options You ll also learn about the different ways to change a project s tempo key and time signature Finally you ll learn several options for adjusting the project timeline Using project markers and regions ACID markers and regions identify areas of your project and provide navigational cues for quickly finding those areas After you insert markers and regions you may adjust their position along the project s timeline and label them with meaningful names for your reference Marker type Description Marker standard wthisisamarker LU This is a marker Markers identify specific reference points in your project Points that you may want to identify are intr
362. m being edited on the timeline Notes e Locked events cannot be dragged on the timeline e When adding events to the timeline you cannot draw or paint past a locked event Erasing in the timeline will not erase a locked event e Event envelopes cannot be modified for locked events Ripple edits and automatic crossfades will not be applied to locked events 1 Select the events you want to lock 2 Right click a selected event choose Switches from the shortcut menu and then choose Lock from the submenu If you want to unlock an event choose Lock again Using event envelopes You can use envelopes on individual events Envelopes give you the ability to control each event s fade in fade out and overall volume Envelopes are useful for transitional effects between events by subtly fading out one event s volume while another fades in These envelopes are different than track envelopes because they affect only the event whereas track envelopes can affect multiple events on the track For more information see Using track automation envelopes on page 112 The event s volume level and fade curves are represented by a line on the event EDITING EVENTS 65 Setting an event s volume envelope You can control an event s overall volume by setting an envelope at the desired decibel dB level 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event The envelope cursor Ep appears 2 Drag the volume line to the desired level As you dr
363. m the cursor position is used as a Static setting and the envelope keyframe is dimmed to indicate that it is unavailable Read The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control reflects the envelope keyframe settings at the cursor position Adjustments to the control are not recorded Automation Write Touch ste The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control follows the envelope keyframe settings during playback and when you position the cursor Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope points keyframes are unaffected Automation Write Latch y The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control follows the envelope keyframe settings during playback and when you position the cursor Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s last setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes USING AUTOMATION 149 150 CHAPTER 9 Chapter 10 Using the Mixing Console The Mixing Console provides an integrated view of all tracks and busses in your project using the appearance of a traditional hardware based mixer You can use the Mixing Console to mix your project in much the same way you work with a hardware b
364. markers on page 91 10 Repeat steps six through nine to synchronize the rest of your video 234 CHAPTER 13 Chapter 14 Working with 5 1 Surround You can create 5 1 channel mixes to wrap a listener in your remixes or prepare audio for cinema DVD Video DVD Audio or DTS 5 1 Music projects Note ACID plays mixes and renders uncompressed 5 1 channel audio Authoring software such as Sony DVD Architect software is required to burn the audio to DVD What is 5 1 surround 5 1 surround is a standard format consisting of three speakers across the front and two speakers in the rear The 1 is a sixth channel called low frequency effects LFE that enhances the bass levels in the mix 5 1 surround includes five main channels and a sixth channel for low frequency effects Center LFE v a z Left Right Surround Surround The LFE channel is commonly used in motion pictures to enhance low audio frequencies for effects such as explosions or crashes Audio in this channel is commonly limited to a range from about 25 Hz to 120 Hz Unlike the five primary channels the LFE channel adds no directional information Depending on the speaker setup and audio levels the sound assigned to the LFE channel may be routed among the five main speakers or to an additional subwoofer WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 235 Setting up surround hardware Before you create surround projects you should set up your system to provide 5 1 surround pla
365. mation see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 146 Volume or pan automation You can change a track s volume or position in the stereo field throughout a project using automation envelopes Adding volume or pan envelopes 1 2 Select the track to which you want to add the envelope You may select multiple tracks Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of following ways From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose Volume or Pan from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose Volume or Pan from the submenu e Press Shift V volume envelope or Shift P pan envelope A blue line appears across the track s for a volume envelope and a red line appears across the track s for a pan envelope Envelope line Note Because the default panning mode is additive you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right Choose an appropriate pan type and adjust the track volume accordingly For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113 Adjusting volume or pan automation settings 1 If you want to change volume or pan settings by recording automation select the Automation Settings button The fader slider handle is displayed as a in automation mode Drag the Vol fader to control how loud a track is in the mix or drag the Pan slider to control the position of the track in the stereo fiel
366. mation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB Changing input bus pre post routing Insert effects on input busses are always pre fader the FX chain is not affected by the channel s gain fader The Pre Post Fader Send button allows you to create cue mixes that are not affected by the gain or mute pan stages of the bus or track e When Pre Fader Send is selected your audio signal flows as follows bus effects bus send bus pan bus volume e _ When Post Fader Send is selected your audio signal flows as follows bus effects bus pan bus volume bus send Using input busses with hardware based effects Plug ins are great but there are times when you may want the sound of a specific piece of hardware for your tracks This topic will show you how to use auxiliary busses and input busses to send a track to an external processor 1 Connect your effects processor to your audio interface a Connect the input of your effects processor to an output from your sound card for this example we ll use LineOut 1 b Connect the output of your effects processor to an input on your sound card for this example we ll use Inst 1 2 Add an audio bus to your project This bus will be used as a destination to send a track to your effects processor 3 Configure your bus to send its output to your ef
367. mber of points on an envelope while retaining the envelope s overall settings Right click an envelope and choose Thin All Points from the shortcut menu to thin the entire envelope To apply thinning to a section of the envelope create a time selection right click the envelope and then choose Thin Selected Points from the shortcut menu Note Thinning is intended to reduce the number of envelope points created through automation recording and will have little or no effect if you create envelopes by adding and editing points manually Deleting envelope points You can delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu If you want to delete all envelope points right click a point and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu Adjusting individual envelope points You can set the level of each envelope point by dragging it up or down As you move an envelope point a tooltip displays both the point s occurrence on the timeline and its level Other ways to set the level include e Right click an envelope point and choose a setting from the shortcut menu e Choose Select All from the shortcut menu to raise or lower all points on the envelope e Right click an envelope point and choose Set To from the shortcut menu This displays a box in which you can specify a setting You can adjust an envelope point s location on the timeline by dragging it right or left If snapping is enabled the envelope point s
368. me and location where you want to save the new map Tip Ifyou want to create a program map based on an existing map load a program map and then click the Save As button GH to save a copy of the program map with a new name 3 Click the Add New Program F or Add New Drum Program amp button to add a program to the table in the first available slot Note fa group is selected from the Voice Group drop down list the table lists only programs that belong to the selected group Any programs you add will automatically be associated with the selected group 4 Typea description of the program in the Program box You can double click an existing name to edit it 5 Ifyou want to assign the program to a group right click the Group box and choose a group from the shortcut menu If you want to create a new group choose Add New Group and type a name in the box 6 Double click the Prog MSB and LSB values to edit them and type the values that correspond to the appropriate program Please refer to your device or its documentation to determine the correct values for each program Notes e Within ACID MIDI values range from 0 127 If your device uses 1 128 subtract 1 when editing the program e Devices that use Sysex messages to change programs are limited to 128 programs 7 Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes Editing program maps 1 From the Tools menu choose Program Map Editor to display the Program Map Editor dialog 2 Lo
369. me by clicking the Play button on the Chopper s transport bar or pressing Space Increment arrow lomono i me L434 Pe es i 0 2 000 Start End Length Note n addition an increment arrow appears on the track view above the selected block For more information see Inserting increments on page 98 As you make a selection in the Chopper a colored block appears in the track view This block indicates where the selection will be placed on the track view when you insert it from the Chopper Creating selections of a specific musical length You may want to create a selection with a length corresponding to a musical value You can easily do this in the software using the Chopper s selection shortcut menu 1 Create a selection or place the cursor in the Chopper For more information see Creating selections on page 97 2 Right click and choose the desired musical length from the shortcut menu A selection is created equal to the specified musical length USING THE CHOPPER 97 Inserting increments In addition to creating selections the Chopper feature allows you to configure the sections of silence between selections painted ona track When you click the Link Arrow to Selection button the increment arrow length is incremented with the selection length This forces the increment and selection lengths to remain equal thereby allowing you to insert selections seamlessly end to end in the pr
370. me of 4 Offset by Select the check box and type a value in the box to offset the quantize grid by the specified number of ticks You can type negative values to shift the grid backward Swing Drag the slider to add a swing to the quantize grid When you set this slider to 0 notes are quantized directly to the grid Increasing the setting shifts every other grid boundary forward set to 300 to shift every other grid boundary to the next grid division Strength Drag the slider to adjust how strictly you want to quantize For example to quantize directly to the grid set the slider to 100 If you set the slider to 50 a note that would be shifted 4 ticks is moved only 20 ticks WORKING WITH MIDI 207 Using the clip pool You can use the Clip Pool to organize each track s media and enable looped or one shot drawing for MID events Track Properties Stephanie Output Settings Input Filters Clip Pool aux Mame Used Loop Time Sig Length 4 Full of Tuts 1 None 24 000 1 Select a track 2 From the View menu choose Track Properties The Track Properties dialog is displayed 3 Select the Clip Pool tab Tips You can also access the clip pool by doing the following e Double click the MIDI track icon to open Track Properties dialog Click the Clip Pool tab from the drop down menu e Click the Paint Clip Selector button and then choose Clip Pool For more information see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips o
371. meline is quick and intuitive it is not always precise For example you may want the beginning of a guitar solo to coincide with a snare drum hit or background vocals to enter exactly 3 minutes and 24 seconds into a song For these reasons you can also position the cursor using your keyboard For more information see Cursor placement loop region and time selection commands on page 307 GETTING STARTED 37 Positioning the cursor with the Go To command The Go To command is used to place the cursor at a specific location in the ACID project e Press Ctrl G to position the cursor based on the position displayed on the beat ruler Specify a position in measures beats ticks format in the box that appears in the time display and press Enter 00 01 26 649 15 1 000 Press Shift G to position the cursor based on the time displayed on the time ruler Specify a time in the box that appears in the time display and press Enter 00 01 26 649 15 1 000 Tip You can also open the boxes in the time display by double clicking the desired value Making selections You must select events before you can move or edit them Selecting an event 1 Click the Draw Tool button 2 Click an event The event is highlighted ee event Selecting multiple events You have several methods of selecting multiple events e Press Ctrl or Shift while clicking events Use the Select All on Track command Use the Select Events to End comm
372. menu in Sound Forge to save the note as a new WAV file with a unique name Finally add the file to the ACID project and use pitch shifting to create all remaining notes in the scale APPENDIX C 303 304 APPENDIX C Appendix D Shortcut commands Keyboard command reference The ACID keyboard commands are shortcuts that you can use while working on your project Important Some keyboard commands listed below are associated with features that are not available in all versions of ACID For information on a specific feature and its availability please refer to the description of the feature in this manual General commands Description Keys Display online help F1 Display context sensitive help Shift F1 and click an item Refresh screen F5 Shortcut menu Shift F10 Temporarily suspend snapping Shift drag Project file commands Description Keys Create new project Ctrl N Create new project and bypass the Ctrl Shift N Project Properties dialog Open existing project or media file Ctrl O Description Save project Open project properties Close the current project Keys Ctrl S Alt Enter Ctrl F4 APPENDIX D 305 Magnification and view commands Description Keys Show Explorer window Alt 1 Show Chopper window Alt 2 Show Mixing Console window Alt 3 Show Video Video Preview Alt 4 window Show Media Manager window Alt 5 Show Track Properties window Alt 6 Show Surround Panner window Alt 7 Show Soft Synth P
373. mmiss ff track number minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 75 fps Using the ruler offset The ruler offset allows you to change the project ruler to start at a specific time Typically this feature is used in conjunction with SMPTE and MIDI projects when their timelines are the main reference Basically the ruler offset allows you to set the ACID time ruler based on another project s timeline for reference purposes i e the SMPTE or MIDI timelines When you enter a new value along the timeline the ruler s time units are adjusted at the cursor position and at the start of the timeline For example if the cursor is positioned at the 2 00 minute mark and you enter 15 00 minutes the start of the project will begin at 13 00 minutes The ruler offset feature works the same for all time formats 1 Position the cursor anywhere along the timeline 2 Right click the time ruler to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Set Time at Cursor A box opens at the cursor position 00 00 45 4 Enter atime value 5 Press Enter to set the cursor position s time value The value that you enter at the cursor position affects all time values that precede and follow it Using the project grid The project grid appears on the track view and is mainly used to align the events in your project The grid divides your project into equal units based on the setting that you choose The grid setting can be based on the pr
374. move all unused clips from the track Tip To remove the unused media from your project choose Remove All Unused Clips from the Tools menu Click the Open button to display the Open dialog where you can browse to clips you want to add to the track Select a clip in the Clip Pool and click the Delete button Only clips with a Use Count of 0 can be deleted You can use the Cut Copy amp and Paste buttons in the Clip Pool window to cut copy and paste clips across tracks Selecting events that use a specified clip Right click an event and choose Select Events Using This Event s Clip from the shortcut menu to select all events on the track that use the same clip as the selected event Right click the timeline choose Select Events Using Clip and then choose a clip from the submenu to select all events on the track that use the specified clip Changing an event s clip settings To change settings for an event s clip right click an event in the timeline choose Event Clip from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu Tip Editing a clip affects all events on the track that use the clip Command Description Rename Allows you to type a new name for the selected event s clip The new name is displayed in the Clip Pool and in the event when Event Information is selected on the View menu Color Choose a color from the submenu to change the color used to draw a clip s events Loop Select this command if you wan
375. multipurpose slider and choose an assignable effects chain from the menu Grassy Knoll of Se vo ood i Torch f Pan Center il 0 Hyperfuzz 03 Bus A 0 6 dB i 3 Drag the FX fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have created The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the send level of the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelope one will be created when you adjust the fader If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 146 Adding or removing track effect automation Ifa plug in supports automation you can dynamically adjust effect parameters over time Adding effect automation envelopes Ifa plug in support
376. n Item 1 Output 2 Input 3 Pan 4 Sends 274 APPENDIX B AUAU NS K A E E E E ee a x gt vu dere Ages neruis Cashes Taa Description Press the Output button to set the output device for each track or bus Turn the V Pot in the channel section to choose an output device and press the V Pot to select it Press to set the recording input device for each track Turn the V Pot in the channel section to choose an input device and press the V Pot to select it Press to adjust track panning using the V Pot in the channel section In 5 1 surround projects pressing the Pan button toggles left to right panning front to rear panning and center channel level adjustment using the V Pot Press to adjust bus and assignable effects send levels Press the Sends button to scroll through the available busses and assignable effects chains and then turn the V Pot to adjust the send level Item 5 Inserts 6 Settings Description Press to adjust effects settings Press the button once to display PL in the Mackie Control Assignment display The Mackie Control LCD displays the effects that are assigned to each track or bus The following example shows a three track project Audi Aud2 Aud3 Master TrNsGt TrcCmp TrcEQ None Turn the V Pot to scroll through the effects and press the V Pot to edit the current effect In editing mode PE is displayed in the Assignment display The following example shows the settings for the Noise
377. n ACID software you are ready to begin learning the techniques needed to pick paint and play in ACID projects In this chapter you will learn the skills that will allow you to create music from locating media files to writing the finished project to CD Starting projects Double clicking the ACID icon on the desktop starts the software You can immediately begin building your ACID project using the application s default project properties However you may prefer to customize the project properties prior to beginning the project Setting project properties ACID allows you to configure project properties and add summary information prior to beginning a project Choosing New from the File menu displays the New Project dialog This dialog contains two tabs Summary and Audio Selecting the Start all new projects with these settings check box configures the software to use the parameters and information in both tabs as defaults when starting all subsequent projects Note You can edit project audio properties and summary information at any time Choose Properties from the File menu to display the Project Properties dialog which contains the identical tabs and parameters as the New Project dialog Using the Summary tab This tab allows you to enter information about the project These boxes may be left blank or if information exists you may change it at any time Item Description Title Enter the name or title of the project Artist Enter
378. n HTML layout file WMTextBodyText Windows Media Displays the entered text in the text window defined by an HTML layout page WMTextHeadline Windows Media Displays the entered text in the headline window defined by an HTML layout file Title RealMedia Displays the entered text on the player s title bar Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Author RealMedia Displays the entered text author s name when a user selects About this Presentation from the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files author information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Copyright RealMedia Displays the ent
379. n add up to 26 busses and you can change the number of busses at any time By default all busses are assigned to the Master bus In this configuration you can use them for creating subgroups of tracks for example you could route all your drum tracks to a bus so you can adjust their levels together without changing their relative levels However you can also route busses to hardware outputs so you can use busses for sending tracks to external effects processors or for mixing on an external mixer For more information see Routing a bus to a hardware output on page 163 Adding a bus From the Insert menu choose Bus to add a bus to your project Tip f the Mixing Console Window is visible click the Insert Bus button me Renaming a bus To rename a bus double click the label at the bottom of the channel strip and type a new name in the box or press F2 to rename the selected bus The channel strip in the Mixing Console is updated when you press Enter er Touch ter 1 1 Center i i t 0 0 Delete all characters in a custom bus name to reset a custom bus name to its default Deleting a bus Right click a bus channel strip and choose Delete from the shortcut menu or select a bus channel strip in the Mixing Console window and press the Delete key Note When you remove a bus from a project any tracks assigned to that bus will be reassigned to the Master bus 162 CHAPTER 10 Routing busses You can create up to 26 plu
380. n envelope without deleting its settings click the Insert Hide Envelope button ibe You can also remove continuous controller envelopes on the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties dialog Removing effect automation envelopes 1 Click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose FX Automation from the menu The FX Automation Chooser appears 2 Click the plug in whose automation envelopes you want to remove The parameters for the effect appear in the dialog ag Clear the check boxes for the envelopes to be removed 4 Click OK Tip You can bypass effect automation without removing envelopes For more information see Bypassing effect automation on page 110 Automating 5 1 surround projects In a 5 1 surround project you can automate the center channel s volume and surround panning using keyframes For more information see Automating panning on page 242 146 CHAPTER 9 Automation recording modes Automation recording allows you to edit envelope and keyframe settings by using the controls in the ACID interface When combined with a control surface you can create fades and adjust control parameters with a level of control that only a tangible control can provide For more information see Connecting a control surface on page 267 Automation recording is available for the following settings e Audio track envelopes using the controls in the track header For more information see Working with track envelop
381. n mode is set to Touch or Latch the button edits the envelope setting at the cursor position Notes When you apply mute automation to a track it s possible to have a track that is muted and soloed simultaneously if you use the Mute andSolo buttons in the track header The mute state overrides the solo state e Ifa track s Solo button is selected the track is included in the solo group but it will be muted whenever the mute automation is set to mute the track Ifthe track s Mute button is selected the track is muted regardless of the mute automation settings For more information see Track automation on page 137 Adding a MIDI controller envelope Select the track where you want to add or remove the envelope 2 Perform one of the following actions e Click the Insert Hide Envelope button F next to the controller s slider in the track header From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and then choose a controller type e Right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and then choose a controller type If the controller you want to adjust is not displayed in the menu choose Configure Controllers from the menu You can use the Output Settings tab of the Track Properties window to configure which controllers are available on the track 3 Ifyou want to change the controller setting throughout the track edit the envelope in the timeline For more information see Adjusting envelopes on pa
382. n page 104 Toggling looped or one shot painting for a MIDI clip Select the Loop button on the Clip Pool if you want a MIDI clip to repeat when painted on the timeline Loop clips are displayed with a icon in the track list Deselect the Loop button if you want a MIDI clip to be treated as a one shot One shot clips are displayed with a icon Editing a MIDI clip s time signature To change a MIDI clip s time signature right click a clip on the Clip Pool tab choose Time Signature from the shortcut menu and then choose a time signature from the submenu The time signature you choose will be used to display the grid on the piano roll editor and to display M B T measure beat tick values on the list editor For more information see Using the piano roll editor on page 213 For more information see Using the list editor on page 216 MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes With MIDI track envelopes you can adjust volume panning controller parameters program changes or Sysex commands dynamically over the duration of a track You can automate VSTi parameters using envelopes on the soft synth bus track To record track automation using the controls in the track header select the Automation Settings button i When the button is not selected the controls adjust static trim levels Tips You can use the Display tab in the Preferences dialog to change the colors used to draw track envelopes Using custom envelope colors can
383. n to open the MIDI Step Record dialog where you can record by specifying the interval between MIDI messages Step recording allows you to record notes with very precise timing 1 Connect a MIDI controller to your computer If you don t have a MIDI controller you can use the keyboard in the track view when in MIDI timeline editing mode or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window Note Not all VSTi plug ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window 2 Select the Arm for Record buttons on the tracks where you want to record Arming a track enables it for recording If you don t arm a track for recording a new MIDI track will be created when you click the MIDI Step Record button 3 Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track For more information see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track on page 190 If you re recording using the keyboard in the track view or the Soft Synth Properties window choose Auto Input Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you want to echo notes from the MIDI controller to the track s MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring 4 Setup any desired MIDI message velocity or quantize filters for your armed tracks For more information see Configuring MIDI input filters on page 205 5 Position the cursor where you want to start recording 6 Click the MIDI Step Record button
384. n while pressing the Record button to render the current selection to a new track APPENDIX B 281 Arrow buttons The arrow buttons allow you to navigate the timeline and preview your project Item 1 Left Right 2 Up Down 282 APPENDIX B Press to zoom in or out be Vo 4 EN I l 4 E o O e e k elas ee E O MASTER KIEZ EINA E A lt 4 gt Press the left or right arrow button to move left or right 1 32 note Hold Ctrl while pressing the left or right arrow button to go to the beginning or end of the project Hold Alt while pressing the left or right arrow button to go to the beginning of the next or previous measure Jog dial The jog dial allows you to navigate the timeline and trim events ERS a ae z ee E EE E E EE TE a T na ea A ee2oeeee Navigating the timeline When playback is paused and the Scrub button is not selected the jog dial performs the following functions e Turn the dial clockwise or counterclockwise to navigate the timeline by 1 32 note e Hold Alt and turn the dial to go to the beginning of the next or previous measure Scrubbing the timeline During playback turning the jog dial increases or decreases the playback rate When playback is paused and the Scrub button is selected turning the jog dial scrubs the timeline Using a Frontier TranzPort Using a Frontier Tra
385. nal MIDI ports must be rerouted to internal DLS sets or VST instruments VSTi to be included in the rendered mix For more information see Rendering projects with MIDI tracks on page 222 Saving projects An ACID project file acd is the default file format for saving a new project and should be used for saving unfinished projects There are two ACID project file types Format Extension Description ACID Project File acd Contains all information regarding the project including track layout envelope settings and effects parameters However this type of file does not contain actual audio only references to the audio files ACID Project with acd zip Contains all information regarding the project including track layout envelope settings and effects Embedded Media parameters In addition all audio files used in the project are embedded into the project file If you save a project in acd zip format the project file and all media files are copied to a temporary files folder If you continue to work on your project after saving the acd zip file your changes are saved to the files in this temporary folder You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog on page 253 1 To save a file display the Save As dialog using any of the following options e Click the Save button l on the toolbar e From the Edit menu c
386. nal is recorded When Input Monitor Mode Auto iD is selected you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording If you re recording into selected events you ll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected events When Input Monitor Mode On is selected the behavior is similar to Input Monitor Mode Auto but you will always hear the input monitor during recording monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording in to a selected event Note Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer s performance Effect automation envelopes are bypassed during record monitoring 186 CHAPTER 11 Chapter 12 Working with MIDI ACID software allows you to record MIDI tracks and edit MIDI in your projects The software provides two plug ins the piano roll editor and the list editor You can also render projects with MIDI tracks play MIDI from an external device and synchronize to MIDI timecode MTC Adding MIDI tracks and files You can add MIDI files to your project or create new MIDI files from scratch You can use MIDI tracks to record and play back data from synthesizers and other MIDI compliant equipment MIDI tracks can use mid smf wav and rmi files Adding MIDI tracks To add a new blank MIDI track to your project do one of the following e From the Insert menu choose MIDI Track By e Right click in the timeline and choos
387. nal only when the cursor passes over the selected events Important Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependent on your computer s performance Effect automation envelopes are bypassed during record monitoring Adjusting track panning or volume When the Faders control region is visible each track displays a Pan slider and a Volume fader 160 CHAPTER 10 To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane r Touch W enter 0 a 2 6 0 Adjusting panning When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Pan slider to control the position of the track in the stereo field dragging to the left will place the track in the left soeaker more than the right and dragging to the right will place the track in the right speaker You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Pan slider handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit pan automation Note The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved but with an offset applied For example setting the trim control to 9 left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9 to the left Adjusting volume When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall tr
388. naps to time divisions as you drag Hold Shift while dragging to override snapping press Shift after you click For more information see Using snapping on page 89 USING AUTOMATION 143 Flipping envelopes You can flip an envelope to invert the envelope around its center 1 Right click an envelope A shortcut menu appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Flip All Points Tip f you want to flip only particular points on an envelope select the points using the Envelope tool right click and choose Flip Selected Points from the shortcut menu For more information on the Envelope tool see Using the Envelope tool on page 144 Changing envelope fade curves You may set the type of fade curve that occurs between envelope points linear fast slow smooth sharp or hold To change the fade curve right click an envelope between two envelope points and choose the appropriate fade curve from the shortcut menu Locking envelope points to an event From the Options menu choose Lock Envelopes to Events if you want envelope points to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline Using the Envelope tool The Envelope tool lt s is designed to manipulate multiple envelope points Use the Envelope tool when you want to edit envelope points but do not want to change other elements of the project With the Envelope tool selected events cannot be moved or edited Selecting and moving envelope points To select multiple envel
389. nd Using audio plug ins When viewing plug ins in the Audio FX folders the following icons are used to represent your plug ins Icon Description oe Represents a DirectX audio plug in pik Represents a DirectX audio plug in that supports automation aja Represents a VST audio plug in wi 4 Represents a locked VST plug in a When you use a VST plug in in your project ACID will lock it for the remainder of your ACID session A lock is displayed to indicate that the plug in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application To add plug ins to your project you can drag them from folders in the Plug In Manager window to tracks or channel strips in the Mixing Console window For more information see Channel strips on page 154 Using ReWire devices When viewing ReWire devices in the ReWire Devices folders the following icons are used to represent your plug ins Icon Description Represents a ReWire device that is not currently in use Represents a ReWire device that is currently in use by a soft synth bus a Ena When you select a ReWire device its outputs are displayed on the right side of the Plug In Manager window This icon represents an unused ReWire output EJ Represents a ReWire output that is in use To add a ReWire device to your project select a ReWire device s in the left hand pane to display its outputs You can then right click an output and choose Insert Rewire Device Bus from the sh
390. nd use Paste Repeat to paste several copies of it in the project Click the Time Selection Tool button E Drag the mouse in the track view to create a time selection spanning several events and copy it to the clipboard Click the Go To End button on the transport bar or press Ctrl End to send the cursor to the end of the project 1 2 3 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste Repeat or press Ctrl B The Paste Repeat dialog appears 5 Enter a number in the Number of times to paste box 6 Select the End to end radio button and click OK The events are pasted end to end the number of times specified in step five starting at the cursor position Using Paste Insert To insert the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current cursor position and force existing events to move in time to accommodate the pasted events choose Paste Insert from the Edit menu If the cursor is in the middle of an event the event splits at the cursor position where the new events are pasted For more information see Splitting events on page 58 Pasting events at the play cursor You can also paste the contents of the clipboard at the cursor during playback You can use this feature to create rhythms on one shot tracks while listening to the track you re editing in the context of the rest of your project When you re done creating events you can use the Render to New Track command on the Edit menu to save the rhythm to a new track or you can copy and paste
391. ne it hides automatically Docking and undocking the Search pane You can undock the Search pane from its location in the Media Manager window to float it over the ACID window or you can change the docking position of the pane within the Media Manager window To undock and move the Search pane drag its title bar to the desired location Resizing columns You can resize the columns in the Search Results pane by dragging the splitter between columns to the desired size To resize a column automatically double click a splitter Mame Rati K ACIE MUSIC 5 sPROMG O4 pca Moving columns To move a column in the Search Results pane to a different location drag the column header to the desired location A red indicator shows where the column will be dropped ACID Type Beat Count Tempo Rara oop 16 100 000 D3 oop a 65 000 E3 Showing or hiding columns 1 Right click the column headings and choose Column Chooser from the shortcut menu 2 Drag the columns you want to see from the Column Chooser dialog to the Search Results pane 3 To hide a column right click a column heading and choose Remove this Column from the shortcut menu Adding custom columns You can add custom columns to the Search Results pane to store additional information about media files When you add custom columns they are added to the current library only For example if you wanted to keep track of which removable hard drive contained a media file you could cre
392. ng high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear a low frequency rumble To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate ASIO Audio Stream In Out is a low latency driver model developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG ASF Stream Redirector file See Redirector File The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack A decrease in the level of a signal The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Microsoft Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress WAV files An audio file format devel
393. ng the volumes of all the tracks together it is easy to clip the audio output Make sure that the meters never display the red clip indicator during playback Muting or unmuting tracks Each track has a Mute button 9 Clicking this button renders the corresponding track inaudible during playback and shades it to indicate that it is muted Toggle muting a track is an effective way of determining whether a track contributes to the overall sound of a project Note Muting a track mutes its main output and post fader sends only unless the Track prefader sends listen to mute check box on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog is selected For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 1 Deselect the Automation Settings button to toggle trim mode 2 Click the Mute button or press Z Repeat this step on additional tracks to add them to the mute group if desired Tip Press Ctrl and click the Mute button to mute only the selected track and restore any other muted tracks If the selected track is already muted press Ctrl and click the Mute button to restore all tracks Adjusting mute automation 8 When you select the Automation Settings button the Mute button is displayed as a s and you can use the control to edit volume automation 42 CHAPTER 2 Soloing tracks Located next to the Mute button the Solo button allows you isolate tracks in a project during playback When you click this button during p
394. ngers Low Bongo High Bongo Ride Gwm Wibra Slap Crash Oye Cowbell Splash Cy Tambourine Ride Bell Y a a A piano roll allows you to edit MIDI notes for A drum grid allows you to edit MIDI notes for soft most patches synths that have drum maps defined WORKING WITH MIDI 193 When you edit a MIDI event all events that use the same clip will be updated For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 Tips Hold Ctrl Shift while double clicking a MIDI event to enter inline editing mode e While in inline editing mode drag over a blank area of the timeline with the Draw tool p to create anew clip and draw an empty event e While in inline MIDI editing mode you can hover over a note or velocity stem to view its value in the bottom right corner of the timeline OO r If you want to edit a single event right click the event and choose Copy to New Clip from the shortcut menu Choosing a drum map or kit for a track MIDI tracks can display a piano roll or a drum grid For more information see Creating or editing drum maps on page 225 Tracks that are routed to the DLS soft synth will display a drum grid only if a drum map exists for the current patch You cannot edit drum maps for GM2 drum kits Choosing a drum map or kit 1 Click the Program button on the track header 2 Perform one of the following actions e If your track is routed to the DLS soft synth c
395. nique on the time rulers in the Chopper and Track Properties windows The following table describes the available time formats Time format Description Samples Displays the time ruler in samples Time Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds milliseconds Seconds Displays the time ruler in seconds Time amp Frames Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate equal to that of your video Absolute Frames Displays the time ruler in total frames from the beginning of the project Feet amp Frames 16 mm Displays the time ruler in feet frames at a rate of 40 frames per foot Feet amp Frames 35 mm Displays the time ruler in feet frames at a rate of 16 frames per foot SMPTE Film Sync Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 24 frames per 24 fps second for synchronizing with film SMPTE EBU 25 fps Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 25 frames per second for European Broadcasting Union SMPTE Non Drop Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 29 97 frames per 29 97 fps second SMPTE Drop Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 29 97 frames per 29 97 fps second using dropped frame numbers SMPTE 30 30 fps Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 30 frames per second Audio CD Time Displays the time ruler in tt
396. no roll editor on page 213 For more information see Using the list editor on page 216 24 CHAPTER 1 Audio signal flow Audio Media Record Monitor Bit Depth Conversion Time Stretch Pitch Shift Input Monitor On or Auto Channel Conversion Recording Into an Event Resampling Event Gain ASR Processing Normalize Event Invert Track Invert Event ASR Track FX Input Monitor On or Auto Recording Into an Event Track Volume amp Mute Pre Post Post Pre Link to Main Track Pan Bus Send Level Assignable FX Send Level Bus Master From FX FX Volume FX Chain Prefader FX Post Fader FX FX Chain FX Chain I I I I I I I Prevolume Send Send Volume Hardware Master Output Master Bus FX Chain FX Chain Hardware Output Link to Main Track Pan Hardware Input Pre Fader Send Post Fader Send Master e Hardware Output Bus From Bus INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 25 Notes on audio signal flow e This diagram describes non MIDI audio events For MIDI events see MIDI signal flow on page 27 e In 5 1 surround projects tracks routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Tracks routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information e Assignable effect chain panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In
397. not have default settings and will retain their last set values when you turn automation off When the check box is cleared controls will retain their last set values when you turn automation off Available devices Choose a device from the drop down list and click Add to choose the control surfaces that will be available to ACID software Adding a device loads its default profile For information about configuring specific MIDI controllers see Setting up a Mackie Control Universal on page 269 Using a Frontier TranzPort on page 283 or Configuring a generic MIDI controller on page 285 Active control devices Lists the control devices that you ve added Double click a device name to customize its behavior Default all Restores all control surface preferences to the default settings Note You can connect one Mackie Control Universal with up to four Mackie Control Universal Extenders one Frontier TranzPort and up to five generic MIDI controllers Customizing keyboard shortcuts From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the ACID interface The Keyboard mapping box displays the currently assigned shortcut keys Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to choose which shortcuts you want to see Editing or creating new shortcuts 1 Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to indicate the type of command you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut 2 Selecta command in the list Ti
398. ns at the beginning of the time selection The event is then filled with the newly recorded material The audio file that is recorded to your hard disk is the full duration of the time selection The event only contains a portion of the full recorded performance and can therefore be trimmed both shorter and longer and repositioned within the event Time selection bar cS 02 718 148 3 229 F defines the recorded i audio file s duration i Guitar EF amp 4 o amp 1 clip 1 q 2 a 315 i M N a i 6 I zo i Center Reo T T Pre roll Post roll Punch in Punch out Recording using an input bus When you use an input bus to record audio you can include input bus effects with the recorded signal For example imagine that you need to record an electric guitar with an amplifier modeling plug in Scenario 1 Plug your guitar into your sound card s instrument input and choose that input as your recording input In this scenario you could then add your amplifier modeling plug in as a track effect and record with input monitoring on Your guitar would be recorded directly without the plug in and the plug in would be processed each time you play or render your project This method allows you to adjust the plug in settings as you work on your project Scenario 2 Set up an input bus that uses your amplifier modeling plug in as an insert effect and choose that input bus as your recording input In this scenario y
399. ns on page 83 These markers and regions are saved with the project when it is saved They can also be saved back to the original media file by clicking the Save File button Wl in the Track Properties window For more information see Saving file properties on page 123 Creating selections in the Chopper After you place a file in the Chopper you can use the toolbar transport bar and mouse or their keyboard equivalents to create and preview selections within the file When have made the selection you want you can insert the selection into the track view 96 CHAPTER 6 Placing files in the Chopper To place a file in the Chopper do any of the following Select a track in the track list e Select an event Right click an event and choose Select in Chopper from the shortcut menu Note f you choose Select in Chopper on an event that contains only a portion of a file the entire contents of the file are placed in the Chopper The part of the waveform selected however matches the contents of the selected event This allows you to see the event in the context of the entire media file Creating selections To create a selection drag the mouse or hold Shift while pressing the arrow keys A shaded region appears in the Chopper to indicate the current selection and its start point end point and length display at the bottom right corner of the window in measures beats ticks format You can preview the selection at any ti
400. nstIn 1 Mic Name I O Internal Name Channel j i Guitar gt ji 1Micji InstIn 2 to Guitar the port is switched to stereo and the left Guitar In Mic Instin 1 MicjInstin 2 Stereo i l i Guitar Left In Mic Instin 1 Left and right channels are renamed Guitar Left and Guitar Right Guitar Right In Mic InstIn 2 Right If you rename either of a stereo port s channels the port is 2 ea aaa switched to a multiple mono channel and labels are updated Guitar Direct FX Return 1 In Micfinstin 1 Mic InstIn 2 Multi Mono accordin gly Guitar Direct In Mic InstIn 1 Mono FX Return 1 In Mic InstIn 2 Mono 3 If you want to switch back to a stereo channel you can rename the Multi Mono channel Notes ASIO port names are not saved per project In stereo pairs odd numbered ports represent the left channel even numbered ports represent the right channel e Stereo pairs must consist of sequential channels You cannot make stereo pairs from arbitrary channels Ifyou want to restore a port s default name delete the label in the Name column and the Internal Name is restored e Ifyou want to restore all port names click the Reset Names button or press Alt N I O Indicates whether the port is an input or output port Internal Name The default name of the port Channel Indicates whether a port is a stereo mono or multiple mono APPENDIX A 259 Using the MIDI tab Note f you have a MIDI controller that includes buttons an
401. nstrates how the track sounds when the Quantize to Straight groove is applied Click the Play button to hear the original loop 118 CHAPTER 7 After you have edited a clip s properties click the Save button fe to embed ACID information in the file Notes To save to a different file click the Save File As button Ifyou save stretching properties to a new file the changes will also be applied to the current clip and saved with the ACID project the changes are not saved to the original file e Ifyou edit a file in another audio editing program it is possible that the ACID data will be removed Simply edit the settings on the Stretch tab to optimize the file again The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for loop files Item Description Root note Choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for loops that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a clip transposed to the project key a clip that contains a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose Number of beats Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the length of the original file Selecting a value that does not match the actual file causes the loop to play at a different speed For example specifying a length of 8 beats for a 4 beat loop causes the loop to play at half speed at any given tempo You can misinform the software regarding the beat length of a loop for creative ends For mor
402. nt CD to a single file 04 48 65 08 17 23 03 28 33 Sa 08 17 23 11 05 13 02 47 65 e Choose Read by range and enter a starting time and ending 11 0513 1341 60 0236 47 time or a starting time and length The time range is Ea o See extracted to a new track in your project oe oe ace eee i 2459 00 27 36 53 02 37 53 Click Play to preview your selection In order to preview your CD S23E63 ASEO DAAD drive s audio output must be connected to your sound card or 30 18 60 3300 08 0241 23 IIIf you can connect headphones to the front of the CD drive 5 Click the MusiclD button if you want to obtain CD information Drive F HL DT ST DVD ROM GOR81628 0015 using Gracenote MusicID Speed If CD information is not available you can click the CD Info button Selected length 00 00 00 to display a dialog box where you can edit the CD information and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For more information see Obtaining or editing CD information using Gracenote on page 33 6 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to extract audio Click OK The Save As dialog appears 8 Enter a file name and choose a location for the new file s Tip Extracted tracks can be automatically named for you From the Options menu choose Preferences and on the General tab select the Autoname extracted CD tracks check box For more information see From the Options menu choose Preferences to displa
403. ntributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE PNG file format Copyright 2008 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 20021231 Propellerhead Software ReWire is a trademark of Propellerhead Software Real RealMedia RealAudio and RealVideo a
404. nu An arrow appears on the event in the timeline to indicate that it has been reversed Trimming events Whereas deleting allows you to select event data to be removed from the project trimming allows you to select the data that remains Trimming is performed by creating a time selection or selecting an event within a time selection and subsequently deleting all unselected data 1 Create a time selection or select specific events within a time selection For more information see Creating time selections on page 39 2 Press Ctrl T to trim the data within the selection All unselected event data is removed from the track view and discarded EDITING EVENTS 57 Splitting events Splitting is a quick way to create independently functioning events from a single one You might consider splitting an event if you want to adjust a small part of the track For example you may want to apply pitch shift to a guitar track for a few measures and then return the track to its original setting Splitting occurs at the cursor position or at the in and out points of a time selection When you split an event a new ending point is created for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event When you split an event the newly created events abut each other If Quick fade edges to prevent clicks is selected in the Event Properties dialog fades are added at the split point For more information see Changing event properties on p
405. nzPort you can control ACID wirelessly For more information see Connecting a control surface on page 267 Viewing the control mappings The map for the TranzPort assigns the controls as follows Control Function Shift Function Track Focus to previous track or Insert audio track aj mixer control Track Focus to next track or mixer Insert MIDI track P control Rec Arm track for record Mute Mute track Solo Solo track Undo Undo Redo In Set loop start APPENDIX B 283 Control Function Shift Function Out Set loop end Punch Toggle metronome Toggle MIDI merge recording when displaying volume or panning for a MIDI track e Press Track or Track to select a MIDI track e Press Shift Loop until volume or panning information is displayed on the TranzPort e Hold Shift and press Punch For more information see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192 Loop Toggle looped playback Toggle jog wheel control of volume panning input or output device for tracks or mixer controls e Press Track or Track to select the track you want to adjust e Press Shift Loop until the item you want to edit is displayed on the TranzPort e Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust the selected control Shift Toggle alternate functions Markers Move to previous marker Prev Markers Insert marker at cursor Add Markers Move to next cursor Next Jog Wheel Scroll cursor Adjust volume or pan for current track 44 Rewind G
406. o Technology Instruments VSTi are two types of soft synths You add a soft synth control in the Mixing Console window for each software synthesizer you want to use in a project A method of data transfer in which a file is played while it is downloading Streaming technologies allow Internet users to receive data as a steady continuous stream after a brief buffering period Without streaming users must download files completely before playback Tempo Threshold Time Format Track Track List Track View Law Undo Redo Virtual MIDI Router VMR VST Instrument VSTi WAV Waveform Waveform Display Windows Media Format Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in beats per minute BPM A threshold determines the level at which the signal processor begins acting on the signal During normalization levels above this threshold are attenuated cut The format by which the time ruler and selection times are displayed These can include time seconds frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates A discrete timeline for audio data Audio events sit on tracks and determine when a sound starts and stops Multiple audio tracks are played together to give you a composite sound that you hear through your speakers The track list contains the master controls for each track From here you can adjust the mix select playback devices and reorder tracks The majority of the track view i
407. o from the shortcut menu Tip You may also navigate between regions in your project by pressing Ctrl left right arrow key or the number key not on the numeric keypad corresponding to the region number Selecting regions You may use the region s start and end tags to make a time selection across all tracks in your project The information within the time selection can then be used for playback or editing To select a region right click a region tag and choose Select Region from the shortcut menu The loop bar appears between the region tags and the tracks are highlighted Deleting regions You may remove regions from the project at any time Because regions are automatically numbered when they are placed the existing regions are not renumbered when one is removed Rather the existing regions retain their numbers However if you add regions later numbering begins to fill the sequence gap that exists For example if you have six regions in your project and delete regions four and five the remaining regions are listed as one two three and six When you add regions again the regions are numbered as four and five To remove a region from a project right click the region tag marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu 88 CHAPTER 5 Using snapping Snapping helps you to align events in your project with other items Event edges are preset to snap to the project s grid lines as you drag an event along the track If snapping is
408. o locate the file or choose a replacement For more information see Resolving offline media files below Resolving offline media files An offline media file is a file that is no longer available to the Media Manager Media may be classified as offline if you eject removable storage after adding a file to your library or change a file s name or location 1 Add media to your project or preview media files If any of the files are not accessible the Resolve Offline Media dialog is displayed with a listing of offline files and their status Icon Status Description amp Offline The file listed in the Offline File column cannot be found The status will be Offline if you did not search or browse for a replacement file of Probable The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement Match File column A status of Probable Match indicates that the Media Manager tool found a likely replacement file when you clicked Smart Search y Found The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement File column A status of Found indicates that you chose the file you want to use after clicking the Browse button 2 Select the files you want to resolve e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consec
409. o save the new media file Enter a name for the track in the File name box From the Save as type drop down list choose a file format From the Template drop down list choose an audio format from the template list or click Custom to create custom rendering settings Note f you want to downmix a 5 1 surround project choose a stereo rendering format e Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to render only the loop region to the new mixed down track Clear the check box to render the full length of the project 4 Click Save The time selection or project is mixed down to a new track and a copy of the file is saved in the folder specified As the tracks are being mixed down a status bar appears in the lower left corner of the ACID window Tip You may cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button on the l gt N E status bar Chopper lt Explorer EE Rendering New track 2 way t Cancel button After the new track is mixed down it appears at the bottom of the track view If you mixed down the entire project you may delete or mute the other tracks from the project as they are all contained on the new track 5 Usethe Draw tool to paint the waveform on the new track Note MIDI tracks must be routed to DLS or VSTi soft synths to be included in the rendered output For more information see Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft synths on page 222 Exporting loops From the Fi
410. o to start H Fast forward Go to end Stop playback or recording Play pause m Punch in or start recording Adjusting track or bus volume 1 Press Track or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust 2 Press Shift Loop until the TranzPort displays volume 3 Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust the volume of the selected track or mixer control Adjusting track or bus panning 1 Press Track 4 or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust 2 Press Shift Loop until the TranzPort displays panning Note Not all mixer controls allow panning adjustment 3 Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to adjust panning for the selected track or mixer control 284 APPENDIX B Editing a track s input device Press Track or Track to select the track you want to adjust Press Shift Loop until the TranzPort displays the track s input device Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to scroll through the available inputs When you change the input device an asterisk is displayed before the device name on the TranzPort Press Shift Punch to set the input device Editing a track or mixer control s output device Press Track or Track to select the track or mixer control you want to adjust Press Shift Loop until the TranzPort displays the track s output device Hold Shift while rotating the jog wheel to scroll through the available output devices When you change the o
411. ocgentanceseceniiuaons quienes 274 COMPO DUU ONE oes ar nee A EEEE E E nun E EEEE AAAA 274 Fader Banks DUTIONS chur cuvatnctutiesevaueatwnenwuwbensenwawer ben EREET EREE 276 Display DUON e ees eeren erre E EEE EEE EE EAA EEA E A EEEE 276 Markers DUNONG sirsirr siter irera E EEEREN EE EET E ANRT 277 Ada New DUTIONS name p4 eee encore sti es eaiedsaenni eens REEERE E NERE E TEER S IRE RECEPERAT 277 Windows DUTCONS rieri rirerisas tinrin nan E eee eeeeaen eeeas 278 VOW DON ONE 245 e aea E E E E EE E E E E E E EA 278 M difiers DUONS sirsrrrrrererederivioierr iere heinn T r i nn RRAS REIRE EI RDR 279 Audio Video buttons sccedcckueeadanasseasteadeavesaedeyeseeeaqsadeuanienneeaseondaneians 279 PEOC DUO ae r E A E E A E EE E EAEE AN 280 Timeline BUTONS 45st caceahorrtine econ ord ER a E EER naw EEEE 280 Tran DOr DUONS sicrseri eedt ariran ee dena ENAN EE NETA ETE EO EIENEN 281 ARON DURLONGS e E E ES A E E E E E E E E E E E ER 282 JO ee ee E E EA EA AA A EEA 283 UsingaFrontier IranzPO tseesrsioeisrsniirrens eean EN EEN a are 283 Viewing the control MAPPINGS ccc ccc eect nett eee eee eee eee eee ennees 283 Adjusting track or DUS volume cece ccc ccc cece eee e eee e sees senses eeeeeeeeeeeaes 284 Adj sting track Or DUS DaNNING serri issn ueaeudsdieed eth daate dienes CANONES EVEEN E S ERNSTA 284 Editing a track s input device 2 ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee tenet eeeeennes 285 Editing a track or mixer control s output device 6 ccc c
412. oductions bridges refrains choruses or 9 1 i whatever you choose Time marker e aaa Time markers are fixed to the time ruler and mark absolute time in your project They are very useful when scoring video Command marker Command markers indicate when an instruction or function occurs in a d TEXT This is a command marker ee streaming media file i pa Region Regions subdivide your project into time segments Regions have in and out EJ This is a region marker 3 i i i points which allow them to function as permanent time selections Working with standard markers Markers are tools that can make creating music easier by identifying specific points along the project s timeline They can be named moved and serve as snap and navigational points for the cursor and events When you place markers they are automatically numbered up to 99 in the order that you place them Placing markers Markers are placed at the cursor position You may place a marker in one of the following ways From the Insert menu choose Marker Right click the marker bar choose Markers Regions from the shortcut menu and choose Insert Marker from the submenu Press M You may use this method to place a marker while the project is playing Marker Marker bar _ Moving markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be moved The hand cursor d appears 2 Drag the marker to the desired position WORKING IN THE
413. oeeeso 250 Reordering toolbar DUON S cserisscrririiedss de Enr NTETE TLIN ETENE EETA 250 Adding buttons to the toolbar ssssssssssssnssessessessesorsorsersesseesoreseseese 251 Removing buttons from the toolbar ccc ccc cece cece eee eee nent ee eennnees 251 USING TNE UME display x 240944404tancwehas genes eae coun cates cetecwenee ress Seuss eens 252 Changing cursor position o 4o405 cnu c evarereneciwecsesenkstweurncneaeieoteeuriekuunsaceus 252 Changing the time display snnnsnnsusnesesuesesesersesesesersesorsesorsesoreesese 252 Monitoring MIDI timecode ccc ccc ccc cc eee eee eee eee NOTEI ri ERNE 252 Setting default track properties 0 ccc ccc cece een eens nent eeeeeees 252 Setting ACID preferen CS itr os at eee ee i eee UNETE EEEE AE 253 Using the General tab os vias s eenwd via datuews EnA es shea da estes en EANN E 254 Using The Audio TAD sesrrgerki rier IE rnEeE NEREO DENE ECEE E EEEE EEEE EE eoLouneiyeat 255 Using the Audio Device tab cc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee een nent een a 257 Using the VIO TAW cca discecesuas slaceoseewsiieseassowsslasetauencuine ad acwletnees edu res 260 Using the Video tab ssrisiciecrrsriniotedierri wie seaiduasw roinne TITER i atowawnsones 261 Using the Editing tab 4a catecssneudeniceataansdasechateudemensbeataaneaeaeasesenaiaased cscs 261 USING Ne SYNCLAD santv A E E A E E EEE E ware aamee eens 262 Using the Display tab snnnssusususesususnesesorseseresoeesesoesese
414. often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time A sound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this manual we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording The act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it The sample rate also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates See Bit Depth The sample value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample In 16 bit audio these values range from 32768 to 32767 In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 dB The Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI is a consortium of recording industry and technol
415. ogy companies organized to develop standards for the secure distribution of digital music The SDMI specification was created to answer consumer demand for convenient accessibility to quality digital music enable copyright protection for artists work and enable technology and music companies to build successful businesses A context sensitive menu that appears when you right click certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being right clicked as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can choose an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently for quick access to many commands The signal to noise ratio SNR is a measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio the ratio is 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices The timecode is formatted as hours minutes second frames where frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SMPTE timecode are 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second A soft synth is a software based synthesizer Downloadable Sounds DLS and Virtual Studi
416. oject Selection and increment length linked Chopper selection inserted end to end three times When the Link Arrow to Selection button is toggled off the increment arrow is displayed in black and you are able to establish a increment length that is independent of the selection length The increment arrow can be set by dragging either end of the arrow or by using the increment shortcut menu When the increment length is greater than the length of the selection an appropriate amount of silence is inserted following the selection when you insert it in the track view This affects the track s insert position and allows you to paint selections separated by the specified increment Increment greater than selection Selection inserted with specified increment three times When the increment length is less than the length of the selection the selections are overlapped as you insert them in the track view S558 Increment less than selection Selection overlaps when inserted three times Creating increments 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black 2 Drag the point of the arrow to configure an increment of the desired length Tip While dragging the increment arrow the Chopper s middle status value temporarily displays the length of the increment 98 CHAPTER 6 Creating increments of a specific musical length The increment shortcut menu like the select
417. oject tempo changes When the check box is cleared the clip s pitch will raise and lower with tempo changes When the check box is cleared you cannot change the pitch of a Beatmapped event 2 Choose a setting from the Method drop down list to determine the time stretch method to use e Classic is the standard time stretch method used by ACID e The lastique method uses technology from zplane development and provides enhanced real time time stretching and pitch shifting capabilities The lastique method also allows you to preserve and shift a clip s formants which are the characteristic resonant frequencies of a sound Note f you experience gapping during playback while using the lastique stretching methods you may need to switch to the Classic time stretch method 3 Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose the stretching method best suited to your media Tip The lastique Pro mode provides the highest quality stretching but requires more RAM usage and CPU power The lastique Efficient mode uses fewer resources while still producing great time stretching quality for polyphonic audio The Soloist Monophonic and Soloist Speech provide good quality for monophonic audio with little effect on system resources 4 Select the Preserve formants when stretching check box if you want your track to maintain its characteristic resonance when your project tempo changes Formant preservation is most often used to avoid
418. oject type or how you prefer to work It is important to remember that in some cases the grid lines and the ruler divisions do not match This is because they are two independent functions However you may set the grid to align to the ruler which is the default setting APPENDIX A 249 The grid can use the following formats Ruler Marks 16th Notes Measures 16th Note Triplets Half Notes 32 Notes Quarter Notes 32nd Note Triplets Quarter Note Triplets 64th Notes 8th Notes 8th Note Triplets 64th Note Triplets Setting the grid type You may change the grid type at any time and apply it to your project There are two ways to set the grid type for your project e From the Options menu choose Grid Spacing and choose the type of grid you want from the submenu e Right click the marker bar choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu and choose the type of grid that you want from the submenu Using the toolbar The toolbar is set to display below the menu bar However you may hide and customize the toolbar to suit your preferences The settings that you apply to the toolbar remain set until you change them again Hiding and displaying the toolbar If you prefer to use shortcut keys when working with your project you may hide the toolbar to create more workspace Choose Toolbar from the View menu to hide it The check mark next to the command is removed and the toolbar disappears The toolbar remains hidden until you choose Tool
419. olume For more information see Adjusting the mix on page 41 Pan slider This dedicated pan slider controls the position of a track in the stereo field Dragging the slider to the left places the track in the left speaker more than the right while dragging the slider to the right places the track in the right speaker You can choose among five panning types to determine how a track is panned For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 113 Multipurpose slider This multipurpose slider allows you to control the following e The level of the track s signal being routed to each of the project s busses e The level of the track s signal being routed to an assignable effect control Each track s slider position is independent from the others however you can move sliders simultaneously by selecting multiple tracks before making your adjustment If you do not see this slider expand the track For MIDI tracks four multipurpose sliders are displayed to allow you to adjust MIDI controller data For more information see Controller automation on page 202 You may choose what the slider controls by clicking the slider label Changing the slider type for one track changes it for all tracks so you can compare levels of the same control across the project For more information see Adjusting the mix on page 41 Paint Clip Selector button Clicking the Paint Clip Selector button displays all the clips available for the track
420. on MIDI merge data is recorded in real time and you can add more notes each time recording passes through the loop region 1 Connect a MIDI controller to your computer If you don t have a MIDI controller you can use the keyboard in the track view when in MIDI timeline editing mode or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window Note Not all VSTi plug ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window 2 Select the Arm for Record buttons on the tracks where you want to record Arming a track enables it for recording If you don t arm a track for recording a new MIDI track will be created when you click the MIDI Step Record button 3 Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track For more information see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track on page 190 4 Setup any desired MIDI message velocity or quantize filters for your armed tracks For more information see Processing and filtering MIDI events on page 198 Click and drag in the marker bar or a blank area of the timeline to create a loop region Select the Loop Playback button Select the MIDI Merge Record button Position the cursor at the start of the loop region If you want to record with pre roll you can position the cursor before the loop region Sa E 192 CHAPTER 12 9 Clickthe Record button on the transport bar to start recording MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play them
421. on page 193 Tip When Lock Envelopes to Events is selected from the Options menu envelope points will move with an event as you move it along the timeline When Lock Envelopes to Events is not selected you can move events and envelopes independently 212 CHAPTER 12 Using the piano roll editor The piano roll editor is an OPT plug in that you can use to create and edit note events within the Clip Properties window for a MIDI clip The top pane of the piano roll editor displays note information like a sequencer or a roll from a player piano Each note is represented by a rectangular note event of a certain length and pitch The piano keys along the left side of the window indicate the pitch of a note event The beat ruler across the top of the window shows the length and location of a note event The lower pane of the piano roll editor displays velocity information for each note event A transport bar for previewing MIDI appears at the bottom of the window Viewing the piano roll editor 1 Double click the MIDI icon fj on the track header to open the Track Properties window 2 Select the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties dialog 3 Double click one of the listed clips to open the Clip Properties dialog 4 Click the Piano Roll Editor tab The piano roll editor appears Clip Properties X T Hip U S Rebels a ml Z P e P r LC c i aT Oo oO oO o o oO oO Cc Pitch and length a 0 iid
422. onadjacent mixer Ctrl Up Down Arrow controls Delete the selected bus or assignable FX control Shift Up Down Arrow Move the fader of the selected mixer control for assignable effect controls moves the Out fader Shift Left Right Arrow Keys Description Ctrl Alt Q Trigger from MIDI Timecode F7 Reset all MIDI ports Shift F7 Show velocity information in MIDI events Ctrl Shift C Toggle inline MIDI editing mode For more information see Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands on page 96 Surround Panner commands For more information see Moving the pan point on page 241 Mouse scroll wheel shortcuts Description Zoom in on timeline Vertical scroll Horizontal scroll Auto scrolling Move the cursor in grid increments Move the cursor in video frames Adjust slider fader Adjust slider fader in fine increments 310 APPENDIX D Keys Rotate mouse wheel forward or back Ctrl wheel Shift wheel Press mouse wheel and move the mouse in the desired direction Ctrl Shift wheel Ctrl Alt Shift wheel Wheel up or down while hovering over slider fader handle Ctrl wheel up or down while hovering over slider fader handle Keys Ctrl M B Ctrl Alt F Ctrl Q Keys Ctrl Left Right Arrow Delete Up Down Arrow Keys Ctrl F7 Ctrl Alt F7 F G Appendix E Glossary acd zip Activation Code Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM Advanced Streaming Format ASF Aliasing ASIO
423. ons orecriireiiiceereistid Irisan deed seedeendewiayedeedseeeeweusen ineds 39 Creating event selections within time selections cece cece eee eeeees 40 WOKO WII TRACKS 6 osnueesnutoseebosostoseuceeubsnons coerdtenscooeucooeeaccouacers 40 RECIGEMING TACKS sepia dadesvedd oiecbesiee ee dialeee eee ehaets ahi AEE tate Aeneas 40 Era TACKS autnaneatanuvatavdeweageresuieieaodar eu nuieueos me E E E 40 Changing WAC COONS 400s 2iuk ctor einanis oeoueunntiactuveuswacendesetsanecaes te eee useow ses 40 RENAMING UldCKS sergas sereni TEEF NENE EE NE EEA A ENEA Er SA 40 Beaia ke e E E E E E E E EE E E keane 41 Deleting HACKS nent d ceded avenis E E E A AA NA 41 Copying Cutting and pasting tracks cece ccc cece eee eee eee eee e eee eeees 41 Adjusting the MiX rrsrsristrcenr irion EEEREN angele A ARAETA aE Eara 41 Muting or unmuting tracks 2 0 ccc ccc cece ee ene e teen eee eenes 42 SOIOING MACKS E EA T E due ste en omen beet siaecun E E 43 Choosing a track s input recording device ccc ccc een neeeeee eee eee eneeeees 43 Monitoring track Output levels 0 ccc ccc eee ee ee eee eee e eee eee Visi eeenes 43 Working with groups Of tracks cece ccc cc eee cette eee een eee eeeeeeeneeeeees 43 Using Undo ANG TEdO 4 cscs seuss soeegndnreneeene bush eeaetwensd NEEE NEE ie eae ce tis 43 USING WINGO g445 ican pew aescen E AIER reese aioe ens en ot renee en eadeeateecae EANAN 44 UNGGING GUNS gerere r ie e enone sheen E E heme deren peor
424. ontrol maps 285 Loading control maps 286 Setting up a generic control surface 286 Glossary 311 Go to 38 Gracenote Obtaining or editing CD information 33 Grid 249 Groove Pool window 24 Hardware INDEX iii Playing MIDI from 222 Routing MIDI tracks to 222 Routing surround to 237 Routing video to 234 Setting up for surround 236 Help 15 16 Hiding showing Toolbar 250 Track envelopes 145 Video tracks 231 Windows 247 Icons Color intensity preferences 263 Tinting preferences 263 Increments Creating 98 Creating a custom musical length 99 Creating a specific musical length 99 Inline MIDI editing 193 Input bus Adjusting volume or panning 171 Muting or soloing 171 Recording with 184 Input busses 168 Adding 168 Channel strips in Mixing Console 169 Deleting 169 Monitoring external sources 175 Renaming 168 Using with hardware based effects 172 Using with hardware based synthesizers 174 Input filters 205 Inserting sections 67 Inserting time 93 Installation 15 Joining events 60 Key changes Clips 93 Event 64 93 Marker 91 Project 91 Keyboard shortcuts Chopper window 96 General 305 Keyframes 242 245 Knobs Control surface 293 LFE channel 235 237 List editor 216 iv INDEX M Creating MIDI events 221 Deleting MIDI events 221 Editing MIDI events 218 Filtering MIDI events 218 MIDI event parameters 219 MIDI notes and frequencies 220 Previewing MID
425. oosing Add Keyframe from the shortcut menu Once you ve added the keyframe double click it to adjust panning settings in the Surround Panner window As you add keyframes to a track or bus track the Surround Panner window shows the path of the panning keyframes The Smoothness slider controls the smoothness of the interpolation path between the keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 244 we a Inf Inf 0 0 o gt o o 7 o o fod rth wy Add Channels 0 dB Center mg y Add Channels 0 dB Center H a Add Channels 0 dB Center a Working with keyframes After you add keyframes you can work with them in much the same way as envelope points For more information see Using track automation envelopes on page 112 Moving keyframes Drag a keyframe to a new position below its track Duplicating keyframes Hold Ctrl and drag a keyframe to a new position below its track Editing keyframes 1 Double click a keyframe to open the Surround Panner window 2 Adjust the panning settings as desired and close the window WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 243 Changing keyframe interpolation curves To control how the pan is interpolated between keyframes right click a keyframe and choose an interpolation curve type from the shortcut menu Keyframe interpolation curves control how the pan occurs over time Keyframe Interpolation curve Description amp Hold No interpolation takes place The key
426. op down list to indicate the type of file you want to save e Choose Standard MIDI File Type 1 to preserve tracks when exporting This mode preserves the MIDI data in your ACID project Choose Standard MIDI File Type 0 to save your project as a single track multichannel MIDI file For more information see Adding MIDI files to a project on page 187 Note When you add a Type 0 MIDI file to your project a separate track will be created for each channel in the file If you have tracks routed to separate soft synths or MIDI devices they will be preserved as separate tracks only if their MIDI outputs use different channels For more information see Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft synths on page 222 228 CHAPTER 12 5 Type a value in the Resolution box to set the resolution of file The default is 960 but you can specify any value between 24 and 960 Important Not all MIDI devices can read arbitrary resolutions 6 Click the Save button Configuring a Mackie Control Universal The Mackie Control Universal is fully supported by ACID An overlay is available from Mackie that you can use to label the buttons and controls with their mapped functions in ACID For more information see Using the Mackie Control Universal on page 273 Configuring a Frontier TranzPort Using a Frontier TranzPort you can control ACID wirelessly For more information see Using a Frontier TranzPort on page 283 Configuring a generic MIDI controller
427. ope points using the Envelope tool click the track that contains the envelope and drag your cursor in the track view to select the points you want to move Selected points display in an alternate color Click any selected point and drag it to the new position all selected points will follow To deselect the points click anywhere outside the selection Cutting copying and pasting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and choose Envelope from the submenu e Click the Envelope Tool button lt on the toolbar Click within a track to select it Drag along the timeline to select envelope points From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy Position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points across a track oe i From the Edit menu choose Paste Copying envelopes to another track 1 Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and choose Envelope from the submenu e Click the Envelope Tool button on the toolbar Click within a track to select it From the Edit menu choose Select All From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy APY Click within a track to select it 144 CHAPTER 9 6 Click the Go to Start button I if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original track or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start
428. oped by Apple See Proxy File When discussing audio equalization each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth affects a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth When discussing network connections refers to the rate of signals transmitted the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time stated in bits second a 56 Kbps network connection is capable of receiving 56 000 bits of data per second A file that has tempo information added to it as a result of going through the Beatmapper Wizard APPENDIX E 311 Beats Per Minute BPM Bit Bit Depth Buffer Bus Byte Clipboard Clipping Codec Compression Ratio audio Compression Ratio file size Computer ID Crossfade DC Offset 312 APPENDIX E The tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat occurs once every second The most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples The number of bits used
429. opes P Frequency Resonance N Filter Type Cancel Filter Order Bypass Select All Wet Dry Select None 5 Click OK to close the FX Automation Chooser 140 CHAPTER 9 Envelopes display on the track for parameters that you selected in the FX Automation Chooser To control which effect parameter envelope displays on the track click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose an envelope from the menu A Guitar i G vol 1 5 dB _ I Track EQ Band 1 Frequency Pan Center LL al Show All Fs Automation Envelopes Hide All Fe Automation Envelopes Fa Aukomation Tip Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes Adjusting effect automation settings You can adjust automated effect parameters by editing the envelopes in the timeline or by recording automation with the controls in the Audio Plug In Window If you ve enabled the Bypass parameter for a plug in you can click the Bypass button in the plug in s banner to toggle the Bypass envelope at the cursor position SONY F Note When you automate an effect s frequency parameter such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies This is because frequency scales in track EQ and other plug ins use a logarithmic scale but effect automation uses linear interpolation To make the
430. or more information see Cutting copying and pasting envelope points on page 144 Turning automated effects on and off You can use effect automation envelopes to change effect settings over time but you can create a simple dramatic effect by simply automating whether the effect is processed on or bypassed off 1 Add an automatable effect to a track and adjust the effect s parameters to your liking For more information see Using track effects on page 108 2 Inthe Audio Plug In window click the FX Automation button i to display the FX Automation Chooser 3 Click the automatable plug in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser A list of the effect s automatable parameters appears 300 APPENDIX C 4 Select the Bypass check box and click OK An envelope for the Bypass parameter of the effect appears on the track yi Add multiple points to the envelope For more information see Adding envelope points on page 142 6 Adjust the envelope points to alternate between bypassing the effect Bypass True and processing the effect Bypass False For more information see Adjusting individual envelope points on page 143 Preview the effect The track alternates cleanly between processing the effect and bypassing the effect You can repeat the pattern by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly For more information see Cutting copying and pasting envelope points on page 144 Making automated frequency changes mo
431. ore sophisticated microphone you would typically want to use a preamplifier for input to the sound card Sound card out Sound card in Setup with mixer This setup includes a mixer where the speaker and microphone connect The mixer is then connected to the computer s sound card Mixers usually have preamps built into them This diagram does not show you an instrument or a physical preamplifier such as a rack mounted component The reason for this omission is because these types of setups vary widely based on your mixer instrument and pre amp type Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Mixer out Sound card out Sound card in D i Mixer in RECORDING AUDIO 179 Setup with digital multitrack This setup includes a digital multitrack recorder with an optional MIDI synchronization component Usually you would have a mixer a microphone etc connected to these components Your particular setup will vary depending on your equipment Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Digital out Digital card Digital in ri MIDI card A pan Sync o t Z gaii At Pl Digital he Sync in multitrack The dashed line indicated an ae M option if you are synching ACID software to tape via a MIDI timecode MTC converter Preparing to record Before you record you must arm the tracks into which you w
432. oring video on page 234 Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match marker to cursor from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so the time marker matches the cursor position You can also align the marker and cursor by holding Alt while dragging the marker For example hold Alt while dragging a time marker to a location on the beat ruler The project tempo adjusts so the time at the marker occurs on a specific beat For example if you place a time marker at 10 seconds on the time ruler and hold Alt while dragging the marker to 5 1 on the beat ruler the project s tempo is adjusted so the first beat of measure five occurs at ten seconds Working with command markers Command markers add interactivity to a multimedia presentation streamed over the Internet As your media plays any number of other actions can be programmed to execute These commands are a part of the Windows Media and RealMedia streaming formats Most frequently these actions add text or open a related Web site The specific commands available vary depending on the final format of your project Note Streaming media files can be played back from a hard drive or CD ROM but in order to stream properly across the Internet the file must be on a streaming media server Check with your internet service provider for details and availability of this service Placing command markers Command markers appear on the command ruler which i
433. orizontal line appears on the track list to indicate where the track will be placed 2 Release the mouse button The track is dropped in the new location and the entire track list track view adjusts accordingly Tip You can reorder multiple tracks by holding Ctrl or Shift while selecting tracks and dragging the tracks as a group Resizing tracks You can change the height of a track thereby affecting how many tracks display in the track view This is especially useful when building a project with a large number of tracks In addition you can decrease the track s height until only the multipurpose slider Track FX button Mute button and Solo button are visible 1 Drag the bottom edge of a track up or down in the track list The pointer displays as a vertical stretch icon 2 Release the mouse button to establish the track s new height Tip You can set the default height for all new tracks by right clicking the newly resized track in the track list and choosing Set Default Track Properties from the shortcut menu For more information see Setting default track properties on page 252 Changing track colors As mentioned previously tracks are automatically created to accommodate new media files These tracks are assigned a default color However you can change track colors to organize the tracks in your project To change the color right click the track in the track list choose Color from the shortcut menu and choose the desired co
434. ortcut menu to add a soft synth bus to the Mixing Console window ORGANIZING PLUG INS AND REWIRE DEVICES 135 Using soft synths When viewing soft synths in the Soft Synths folders the following icons are used to represent your plug ins Icon Description my Represents a soft synth ye Represents a locked VSTi plug in a When you use a VSTi plug in in your project ACID will lock it for the remainder of your ACID session A lock is displayed to indicate that the plug in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application To add a soft synth to your project right click a soft synth If in the right hand pane and choose Insert Soft Synth from the shortcut menu A soft synth bus is added to the Mixing Console window 136 CHAPTER 8 Chapter 9 Using Automation Automation allows you to control audio and video levels panning and effect parameter automation over time You can create fades apply stereo panning and vary effect parameters throughout your project Automation is represented on the ACID timeline as an envelope or set of keyframes You can create automation by adding envelopes or keyframes to your tracks including bus tracks or you can record automation parameters by adjusting controls in the ACID interface or on a control surface during playback For more information see Connecting a control surface on page 267 Showing or hiding automation controls The controls in the track list can function
435. ot find your tagged media a m Audio i 0 amp Mocals n O amp Kevboards If you add all three tags to your media file a search for Audio Drum One Shots or Snare would find your tagged media even if the tag tree had been rearranged though this behavior is not always desirable 7 if a High Torn a mj Floor Tom R Removing a tag from a media file You remove tags from media by dragging a tag from the tag list to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Remove Tag Mode button l is selected 1 Select media files in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 2 Click the Remove Tag Mode button 7 in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s The tag is removed from the file s 72 CHAPTER 4 Deleting a tag from a library Deleting the selected tag s affects the current library only 1 Inthe Search pane select the tag s to be removed e To select a single tag click the tag or e To select multiple consecutive tags click the first tag hold the Shift key and then click the last tag or e To select multiple tags that are not consecutive hold
436. ou can adjust the plug in s settings When you right click an effect s button a shortcut a menu is displayed e Choose Show lt Plug In Name gt to open the Audio Plug In window where you can adjust the plug in s controls e Choose Bypass lt Plug In Name gt to temporarily bypass a plug in When an effect is bypassed its button is displayed in red text e Choose Remove lt Plug In Name gt to remove a plug in from the effects chain e Choose Presets and then choose a setting from the submenu to load a new preset e To replace the current plug in right click the effect s button and then choose a new plug in from the menu Plug ins are organized in submenus by type EQ Dynamics Reverbs etc Adjusting bus send levels When the Sends control region is visible each bus displays controls you can use to route the bus to assignable effects chains or to busses that are routed to hardware outputs To show or hide the Sends control region click the Sends button in the View pane When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is not selected click the Channel Send button and choose a bus or assignable effects chain from the menu and then drag the fader to adjust the send level When the Automation Settings button in the Faders control region is selected the fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit send volume automation on the bus track Notes e The trim level is added to the automation
437. ou can move events along the timeline either individually or as a group In addition you can stack events on top of one another A longer event placed over a smaller event conceals the smaller event and makes it inaudible A smaller event placed over a larger event is audible and renders the section of the longer event it covers inaudible 1 Click the Draw Tool button 2 Click the event to be moved The event is highlighted to indicate that it is selected Tip You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple events 3 Drag the event to a new location on the track Note Multiple selected events move in relation to the event being dragged Editing MIDI events You can use the inline MIDI editing mode to edit MIDI events directly in the timeline In this mode you can draw and erase notes ina piano roll or drum grid view For more information see Editing MIDI on the timeline on page 193 Using the cursor The ACID cursor is a flashing vertical line that spans the track view of the entire project The cursor position determines where events split where playback recording starts and where clipboard contents are pasted In addition the positioning of the cursor is essential to the creation of time selections Positioning the cursor with the mouse 1 Click the Draw Tool button 2 Click in the track view to position the cursor Positioning the cursor with the keyboard While using the mouse to position the cursor in the ti
438. ou click the Switch to Media Reference Library button in the upper left corner of the Search Results pane For more information about using reference libraries see Opening a Reference Library on page 75 3 Inthe Search results limit box type the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Note ncreasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high 4 Select the Double click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box if you want to add files to the current project by double clicking a file in the Search Results pane 5 Select the Shut down database service on exit check box if you want to stop the database service when you close ACID Note Stopping the service can conserve system resources when you aren t using any applications that use the Media Manager tool However the application will take longer to start when the check box is selected 6 Set your options for adding media to a library a Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For more information about tagging media see Tagging media files on page 71 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 80 b Select the Use file and folder names to app
439. ou want to delete a media file that is currently in use by the project When you select this check box you can edit files in external editors while the files are contained in events in ACID Select this check box if you want to close ACID audio and MIDI ports when you switch to another application Clear the check box if you want to leave ports open For example if you have a MIDI keyboard routed to an ACID soft synth clearing the check box allows you to continue to hear the soft synth while you work with a sequencer Note When you edit a clip in an external editor audio MIDI and external control hardware is released regardless of the Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not the active application check box setting The ports are re enabled when focus is restored to ACID When you select this check box you can use a multimedia keyboard to control playback of a project The WAV format is limited by a maximum file size of 2GB When you select this check box you can render larger files as Sony Wave 4 files When you select this check box a box appears so you can name markers and regions as you place them When you select this check box a backup of project files is made when you open them Backup files are stored in the same folder as your project and use the same file name with the extension acd bak You can use backup project files to revert to a project s previous state Select the check box if you want to maintain the
440. ou want to record or exclude For more information see Setting up MIDI message input filters on page 205 You can also use an external MIDI controller or the keyboard drum list between the track header and timeline to record MIDI into your ACID project For more information see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192 MIDI program change automation You can use keyframes to change the track voice throughout your project For more information see Adding a program change keyframe on page 210 Working with track envelopes Envelopes represent volume audio panning bus send levels effect send levels MIDI controllers and effect parameter automation settings in the timeline Envelope type Description Color Volume Controls track volume Blue Bus send volume Controls track level sent to bus Lilac Assignable effects send Controls track level sent to assignable effects control Green volume Pan Controls the position of a track in the stereo field pan Red MIDI controller Adjusts MIDI controller values Various Adjusting envelopes To adjust the overall level of an envelope simply drag the envelope line up or down A tooltip displays the amount of the adjustment as you drag You can adjust envelopes in real time You can also change the level of an envelope over time by adjusting individual envelope points that you place along the envelope line Tip f you have multiple envelopes on a track hover over an envelope to display a
441. ouch Pan Center 1 gt MIDI Clip e Auto Input 45 Uses automatic input routing The focus track will accept input from any MIDI device Input Off Turns off MIDI input to the track e Hardware Input Port List amp amp Displays the devices that are selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI input list on the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog Choose the specific device you want to use to send MIDI to the track Note You must choose a specific input port to use MIDI input filters For more information see Configuring MIDI input filters on page 205 Soft Synth Input Port List s Displays the available soft synths in your project Choose the soft synth you want to use to send MIDI to the track Choose Soft Synth sh from the Insert menu and select a soft synth for your project from the Soft Synth Chooser dialog You can also select Insert Soft Synth from the Mixing Console window 3 Choose a MIDI input channel e Click the MIDI Input button on the track header Choose MIDI Channel from the menu and choose the MIDI channel you want to send data to the track or choose All if you want the track to listen to all channels Tip f you want to select multiple input channels hold Ctrl and select additional channels from the MIDI Channel submenu 4 Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you want to echo notes from the MIDI cont
442. our amplifier modeling plug in is cooked into the recorded signal This method allows you to record your processed signal but doesn t allow you to change your amplifier settings without rerecording the guitar part 1 Add an input bus to your project For more information see Adding or deleting input busses on page 168 2 Setup your input bus a Click the Add New Insert FX button Lid in the Insert FX control region of the input bus channel strip to add plug ins to your input bus For more information about input bus channel strips see Using input bus channel strips on page 169 b Inthe I O control region of the input bus channel strip click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input you want to record c Click the Output button in the I O control region of the input bus channel strip and choose Off The bus output is left off so we can monitor the input through the track 3 Set your track to record from your input bus a Click the Record Input button on the track header choose Input Busses from the menu and choose your input bus b Click the Record Input button and choose Input Monitor Mode On or Input Monitor Mode Auto so you can hear your input signal during recording eWhen Auto cg is selected you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording If you re recording into selected events you ll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected events eWhen
443. ove Decreasing the setting will remove beat anchors and groove markers from the file increasing the setting will add anchors and markers WORKING WITH TRACKS 127 4 Addor remove markers as needed e If you want to add a marker press M or double click the beat ruler A beat anchor and groove marker are added to the nearest division on the beat ruler e Ifyou want to delete a marker right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Tip Use a single beat anchor groove marker to adjust all beats forward or back equally This produces an effect similar to slipping an event 5 Adjust beat anchors and groove markers as necessary Adjusting anchors and markers during looped playback helps you hear the results of your edits a Drag a beat anchor or insert a new one to indicate which beat you want to adjust If snapping is enabled beat anchors snap to the current grid spacing Hold Shift while dragging to bypass snapping press Shift after you click b Drag a groove marker i to adjust when the beat will be played Drag to the left if you want a beat to be played early or drag left if you want it to be played late You cannot drag groove markers past each other but multiple markers can exist at the same point in time When the Allow snapping for Post Groove Markers check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog groove markers will snap to the current grid spacing if snapping is enabled Hold S
444. oving the Search pane 80 Options 81 Resizing columns 80 Resolving offline media 79 Searching for media files 75 Showing hiding columns 80 Media Manager window 23 Merging controller data from MIDI clips 212 Metronome 180 Adjusting volume 181 MIDI 187 223 228 Adding notes 196 Adding tracks 187 Assigning patch maps 225 Automating VSTi parameters 211 Choosing a drum map for a track 226 Configuring input filters 205 Controller automation 141 Controller envelopes 208 Creating patch maps 224 Deleting controller envelopes 146 Deleting notes 196 DLS sets 222 Drum maps 194 225 Editing drum maps 225 Editing events 37 editing frozen tracks 189 Editing patch maps 224 Exporting files 228 Filtering events 198 Freeze track 19 Inline editing 193 List editor 216 MIDI merge recording 192 Notes and frequencies 220 Panic button 222 Patch maps 223 Piano roll editor 213 Playback devices 222 Playing from external devices 222 Preferences 260 Processing events 198 Program change automation 142 Program change keyframe 210 Quantizing 216 221 Recording 189 Rendering 222 Resetting ports 222 Routing to hardware 222 Selecting notes 195 Signal flow 27 28 Step recording 191 Sysex keyframes 211 Timecode synchronization 226 228 Track envelopes and keyframes 208 Track Properties 202 Track properties 202 Tracks 35 Unfreezing tracks 189 MIDI Clip Properties window 212 MIDI control surface
445. p You can type a word in the Show commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain the word you typed 3 Click the Shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command 4 Click the Add button to assign the key combination in the Shortcut keys box to the selected command APPENDIX A 265 Saving a keyboard mapping Click the Save as button and type a name to save your current keyboard shortcuts to an ini file in the C Documents and Settings user name Local Settings Application Data Sony ACID Pro 7 0 folder C Users user name AppData Local Sony ACID Pro 7 0 on Windows Vista Tip The Application Data folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel You can use this file as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other ACID users Deleting a keyboard mapping Choose a mapping from the Keyboard mapping drop down list and click the Delete button to remove the selected keyboard mapping Tip You cannot delete the default ACID keyboard mapping Importing a keyboard mapping Copy an ACID keyboard mapping ini file to the C Documents and Settings user name Local Settings Application Data Sony ACID Pro 7 0 folder C Users user name AppData Local Sony ACID Pro 7 0 on Windows Vista Tip The Application Data folder is not visible unless the
446. pan tyPES ccc ccc cc ccc eee eee e teen eee eee eeeeeeeeenenees 113 Using the BeatMapper ccc cc ccc ccc ccc cc cee eee eee eee eee eeeeees 113 Understanding stretching properties ccc ccc ccc ccc cc ccc eee e eee eeeees 114 Configuring track properties 2 0 cc ccc ccc eee e eee ee een ene eeeeeeees 115 Audio track properties voc pccuenaentauticuereerieu cee aa acre eeieerabnawnres oreneuees 115 MIDI rack DIO Dees reseter iaai errn dands ties ucdiowsdsaceondonwecasacudens cts euesbeneeter 115 Configuring clip PropertieS ccc ccc eee eee een eens eee eaeeeees 115 Managing a track s CDS sats cbesontuciondaworincesheesonteawsenusnte chy hor heeeoneshawhe 116 Adjusting general clip properties 2 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee een e eee eee eeeeeenaneees 116 Adjusting stretching properties for lOOPS ccc ccc cece eee e ene eee eeeeeees 118 RelOACING Wes errena p tu anata saan es E uh eae eh sus E A ENEA 122 Renang WES dcaeectetrttc ae naciaeiiea EAN AE EANA ewe tea cones a ede ates eed ae oe 122 Adding a clip to the Groove POOl cece eee cece cence eee e eee e eens eeeeeeeeaaees 123 SAVING Tle PIOPEIES 6 05 2 360t0cceGanethdatehtened that ded edad aneddd a a 123 Adjusting clip properties for MIDI tracks 0 ccc ccc cece eect eee eee ee eeeeeneeees 123 Working WIth QlOOVCS 4 2460staserseeantueineerencseeneerisneedceeeinnedanaacinenees 123 Applying or removing grooves s ssssssesessesesoesesessesrseseeseso
447. pe one will be created when you adjust the fader If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 146 Assignable effects automation You can use assignable effects automation to vary the level of a track sent to an assignable effects chain Adding assignable effect envelopes An assignable effect envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular assignable effect chain Before you can add an assignable effect envelope you must add an assignable effect chain to the project 1 Select the track to which you want to add the assignable effect envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of following ways e From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose the assignable effect chain for which you want to add an envelope from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate assignable effect chain from the submenu A green line representing the envelope appears across the track s USING AUTOMATION 139 Adjusting assignable effects automation levels 1 Select the Automation Settings button The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Click the label on the
448. pears with the current project length displayed in the New length box 2 Enter the new project length in the New length box The length is always entered in time format regardless of the format used on the time ruler 3 Click OK The dialog closes and the tempo is adjusted to alter the project s length 94 CHAPTER 5 Chapter 6 Using the Chopper The Chopper feature in ACID allows you to quickly create slice and dice effects For creative ways to use the Chopper see Slicing and dicing in the Chopper on page 302 Working in the Chopper window Selecting an event loads its clip in the Chopper zl le Feje E 4 Toolbar chopper Hyperfuzz 01 jms Insert ia i i 1 1 000 A 1 1 2324 12 000 12 384 1 3 000 I 1 3 84 14 384 ae lt Beat ruler vy i o0 00 00 000 oo 00 00 500 oo 00 01 000 booots00 oo a Time ruler os Dail Fell e gt w i 1 1 000 Transport bar Viewing the Chopper To display the Chopper choose Chopper from the View menu or press Alt 2 Changing the Chopper grid The Chopper s grid uses the same increments available on the track view To change the grid display right click the waveform area of the Chopper choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu and choose the desired display from the submenu Changing Chopper snapping options The sn
449. pecified more than one bus in your project settings For more information see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 If you want to send a track to multiple outputs for creating cue mixes or effects sends you can use the multipurpose fader to control the level of the track sent to each bus or assignable effects chain Bus sends are pre volume by default In Post Volume mode the following settings are applied to the track before it is sent to the bus track volume track volume envelopes track panning and track panning envelopes To change to post volume right click the fader handle and choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu WORKING WITH TRACKS 111 Adjusting a bus send level 1 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose the desired bus from the menu The label changes to reflect the name of the bus Bass Guitar aGakt I Out 54 48 Je SoundMA Digital Audio 1 50 Bus B Vol 6 6 dB m Touch Fan Center i GI BASS TAST Bus B 4 5 dB al t Pre Fx 1 Inf Fx 2 0 0 dB Fx 3 Inf Bus 4 InF a Bus B 4 5 dE Bus C Inf Tip f you can t see the multipurpose slider drag the bottom edge of the track header to increase its height 2 Drag the fader to adjust the level of the track sent to the bus You can also use the Sends control region in the Mixing console window to configure bus sends For more information see Using audio and MIDI track channel strips on page 155 Tips
450. pitch of Beatmapped tracks when the project tempo changes Select the check box if you want to start the Beatmapper Wizard when you add a file that is longer than 30 seconds to your project Select this check box if you want to update the ACID audio engine more slowly Selecting this option can prevent unwanted artifacts during timeline editing Select this check box to create a temporary project file that can aid in crash recovery Your project information is autosaved every five minutes without overwriting your project file Select this check box if you want to use SPTI SCSI Pass Through Interface to communicate with your CD burning drive Select this check box if you want file names to be automatically assigned to tracks that you extract from CDs File names include the CD s ID number and track number Select this check box if you want effects to remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power When this check box is selected a message box will appear asking if you want to delete a groove that is currently in use by the project When this check box is selected the ACID window will inherit the appearance of the current theme when using Windows XP When the check box is cleared user interface elements will maintain the classic Windows operating system appearance Item Save media usage relationships in active m
451. place The tempo settings will be p maintained until the next tempo change marker gt Linear Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a linear path on H Br Fast Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a fast logarithmic A path o Slow Tempo change parameters are interpolated in a slow o p logarithmic path o Smooth Tempo change parameters are interpolated along a smooth om i natural curve o gt Sharp Tempo change parameters are interpolated along a sharp p curve e 92 CHAPTER 5 Changing a clip s key You can change the key of a clip on a track without affecting the project s key For creative ways to use track key changes see Detuning paired tracks on page 297 1 Right click the track and choose Properties from the shortcut menu The Track Properties window appears 2 Double click the event you want to edit 3 On the General tab of the Clip Properties window enter the number of semitones by which to adjust the key in the Pitch Shift box or use the spinner control Use the minus key for negative values 4 Close the Track Properties window The pitch shift displays in the event i Rittage oe tox A 7 Ao Pushing Rif OLM nN 230 0 Ho vol 13 1 dE u Pan Center Ij amp pHa iC basai Pitch a display Tip Another way to change the key of the track is to select the track in the track list and press plus or minus on the numeric keypad Changing an event s key
452. playback options e Playing the entire project e Playing from the cursor position e Playing in looped playback Playing the entire project To begin playback from the beginning of the project click the transport bar s Play From Start button l or press Shift Space To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button or press Space Playing from the cursor position To begin playback from the current cursor position click the transport bar s Play button or press Space To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button W or press Space Playing in looped playback You can also limit playback to a specific loop region on the track view This playback method uses the transport bar s Loop Playback button and allows you to fine tune mixes and effects while continually listening to the selected area For more information see Transport bar on page 21 1 Drag the handles of the loop bar to create the desired loop region Handle Loop bar 2 Click the Loop Playback button to turn on looped playback 3 Click the transport bar s Play button or press Space Playback of the selected area begins To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button E or press Space GETTING STARTED 45 Bypassing audio effects during playback If you want to hear your project without your applied audio effects track bus and assignable effects you can quickly bypass these effects du
453. pper Wizard every time Note f the information cannot be saved to your media file an sfl file will be created using the same base name as your media file to store tempo information If you move your media file you should also move its associated sfl file 7 Click Finish to close the Beatmapper Wizard Notes To paint the entire track select the Paint tool and Ctrl click in the track Ifa track has an intro before its downbeat the intro will not be included when you draw or paint events Drag the left edge of the event to expose the intro Understanding stretching properties All loops on the ACID installation disc as well as all loop collection CD ROMs contain stretching properties This means that tempo and key information is stored in the loops allowing the application to accurately perform its time stretching compressing and pitch shifting functions on these loops when placed in a project Keep in mind that you do not need to designate stretching properties for loops that you create for ACID projects The application typically makes an accurate estimate regarding the loop file s tempo In addition you can temporarily assign a root note to the file to allow it to be transposed to the project s key However when creating custom loops for use in multiple projects you should define stretching properties You can set the stretching properties for loops and Beatmapped clips For more information see Adjusting stret
454. pplications 2008 RealNetworks Inc Patents Pending All rights reserved Real Real Media RealAudio RealVideo and the Real logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of RealNetworks Inc in the United States and other countries Steinberg Media Technologies Cubase VST and Nuendo are registered trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH ASIO is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http mp3licensing com Sony Creative Software Inc 1617 Sherman Avenue M
455. pying events Copying an event a time selection or event within a time selection places an exact copy of the selected event s on the clipboard but leaves the track view unchanged Events copied to the clipboard can be pasted in the project an unlimited number of times In addition clipboard content remains on the clipboard until replaced by new content 1 Select the event data you want to copy or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 38 2 Copy the event data using any of the following methods Click the Copy button amp 5 on the toolbar e Choose Copy from the Edit menu e Right click the selection and choose Copy from the shortcut menu e Press Ctrl C Pasting events The clipboard s contents can be pasted in a project an unlimited number of times However an event is always pasted in the track it was copied cut from In addition pasting the contents of the clipboard over an existing event results in the pasted event overlapping the existing event To avoid pasting over existing events you have two options Use the Paste Insert command For more information see Using Paste Insert on page 56 e Turn on ripple editing For more information see Ripple editing on page 61 When events are cut copied to the clipboard and subsequently pasted into a project the time data inherent in the cut copied events is maintained and pasted For example if you select two events on the same track that ar
456. r thereby allowing you to freely experiment with radical pitch shifting This technique typically works best when tuning the duplicate track to a lower octave than the original track but you can also experiment with raising the pitch of the duplicate track Panning in conjunction with detuning Few things are as uninteresting as a series of tracks panned down the middle of a stereo image Particularly after detuning a paired track you should experiment with spatially positioning the tracks using the panning control on the multipurpose slider or a pan envelope Panning each track to a specific channel produces a nice wide aural effect If you are looking for something a little more dynamic position the original track anywhere in the stereo image and use a pan envelope to sweep the duplicate track from the left channel to the right channel of the mix For more information see Using track automation envelopes on page 112 APPENDIX C 297 Duplicating with offset Another way to add interesting dynamics to a project is to duplicate tracks and add an offset to one of the pair This trick works well with most instrument loops and allows you to create different levels of effect For example e Configuring a slight offset between duplicate tracks creates a natural chorus effect e Configuring small offsets creates various reverb effects e Configuring larger offsets creates interesting echoes 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track f
457. r accessible Be aware that this folder is cleared when you close the software However the temporary files are not cleared if the software closes inappropriately This value displays the amount of space available in the folder specified in the Temporary files folder box Using the External Control amp Automation tab Use the External Control amp Automation tab to set up and customize control surfaces From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog Click the External Control amp Automation tab For more information see Configuring a Mackie Control Universal on page 229 Note From the Options menu choose External Control to enable your selected control surfaces Preference Description Smooth and thin automation When recording automation or drawing envelope curves ACID software creates as data after recording or drawing many envelope points or keyframes as possible to represent your control movements Select this check box if you want to reduce the number of envelope points keyframes after recording or drawing is finished For more information see Recording automation settings on page 147 For more information see Adding effect automation envelopes on page 140 Set controls to default values Select this check box if you want controls to return to their default values when set when automation is turned off the track s automation recording mode to Automation Off Automated effect parameters do
458. r hide the track list in the timeline N Modifiers buttons The Modifiers buttons extend the functionality of other buttons on the Mackie Control oy N r m ja n x E 1 a cen 2 ec e 3 Item Description 1 Shift Hold the Shift button while pressing a button labeled with inverse text to perform the shift function For example hold Shift while pressing the Undo Redo button to reverse an undo action 2 Option Track Hold the Option Track Order button while pressing a button in the Settings Add New or Windows group for Order alternative functions Hold the Option Track Order button while pressing a the Channel lt or Channel gt button to change track order Hold the Option Track Order button while pressing F1 to F16 to perform custom functions you can define For more information see Configuring or customizing control mappings on page 271 3 Ctrl Hold the Ctrl button while using a control for alternative functions 4 Alt Hold the Alt button while using a control for alternative functions Audio Video buttons The Audio Video buttons control various audio and video settings for your project ve a E ie e iF a Te SS E a E r Item Description 1 Automation Press to place the controls on the Mackie Control in automation mode The controls in the channel section of the Mackie Control will affect the automation parameters on the track or bus if Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch
459. r more information see Creating selections of a specific musical length on page 97 Click the Insert Selection button elinsert once The selection is pasted to the track view N OO W BR WN N a ot gt a L v lt D N D D A O gt oO Cc ot ot O gt c gt Q g9 A Ea D Ww Wn g9 Vn ot gt a Wn D 4 A ot D Q O O ct O gt O gt ot gt 4 Ww lt D O 3 oO lt gt Ww Continue to double the number of inserts after each halving of the selection until you achieve the desired drum roll effect 302 APPENDIX C Creating drum fills 1 Place a file in the Chopper Create an eighth note or other length selection of a drum track in the Chopper Click the Insert Selection button einsett Use the Shift Selection Left and Shift Selection Right buttons to move the selection randomly through the drum track clicking the Insert Selection button insert to insert drum hits oo Creating one track remixes 1 Place a Beatmapped track in the Chopper For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 113 Create a selection in the Chopper Click the Insert Selection button Winsert twice Use the Shift Selection Right button to move through the track clicking the Insert Selection button jeJinsert as desired to insert events a Creating pseudo granular synthesis 1 Create a sixty fourth note or shorter
460. ram Change Tip You can MIDI merge recording to record MIDI controller values from a MIDI device For more information see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192 Setting the track voice You can set the voice used to play the entire track or you can add keyframes to add program changes 1 Right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelopes and then choose Configure Controllers from the menu The Track Properties dialog is displayed 2 On the Output Settings tab choose Voices from the drop down menu Track Properties stephanie Output Settings Input Filters Clip Pool Voices ka Voice Group Plano w Patch Group Prog MSE LSB A HF Piano 1 Piano 0 i 0 F Piano 1 Piano 0 5 0 F Piano id Piano 0 i6 0 B F Piano 2 Piano 1 T 0 3 Choose the voice you want to use Note You can also set the track voice by doing the following e Double click the MIDI track icon to open Track Properties dialog On the Output Setting tab choose Voices from the drop down menu e Click the Program button choose Select Program Change and then choose Voices from the drop down menu Changing the track voice 1 Click the Program button M 2 Choose a program from the menu or choose Select Program Change to display the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties window where you can select a patch WORKING WITH MIDI 203 If the track does not contain program change keyframes the selected patch is used
461. rary contains information about media from an outside source or vendor You can also use a reference library to search media files that you aren t part of your collection For example if you re unable to find the perfect loop for an ACID project in your own collection you could use the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library to search the entire Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples catalog and purchase a new loop library You can use the Media Reference Library drop down list in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine which library is opened when you click the Switch to Media Reference Library button Hi 1 Click the Switch to Media Reference Library button Hi The reference library specified in the Media Manager Options dialog is opened Media in a reference library is displayed in gray text to indicate that the files are not available on your computer 2 Find the media you re looking for with a standard or advanced search a Tag media from the reference library as needed For more information on tagging see Tagging media files on page 71 4 When you select a file in a reference library the Product Information pane displays information about the selected file and a link you can use to purchase the media Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library If you have the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media media from existing Sony
462. re automatically numbered up to 99 when they are placed the remaining markers are not renumbered when one is deleted Rather the remaining markers retain their numbers However if you add markers later numbering begins to fill the sequence gap For example if you have five markers in your project and delete markers three and four the remaining markers are listed as one two and five When you add markers again the markers are numbered as three and four 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be deleted The hand cursor dy appears 2 Right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu The marker is removed from the project Working with time markers Unlike standard markers time markers are tied to absolute time within your project They are added differently than standard markers and appear on the time ruler at the bottom of the track view Otherwise time markers can be manipulated just like other markers 84 CHAPTER 5 Placing time markers Time markers are placed at the cursor position You may place a time marker in one of the following ways e From the Insert menu choose Time Marker e Press H You may use this method to place a time marker while the project is playing back 00 00 08 00 00 10 Time marker Note Time markers are not numbered Adjusting tempo to match marker to cursor Using this function with time markers is particularly useful when scoring video For more information see Sc
463. re changes in the clip will be marked by Beatmap markers Ignore root note Select this check box if you do not want to transpose the Beatmapped clip when stretching changes When the check box is cleared pitch shifting will be applied so the clip will conform to your project key Beatmapper Wizard Click the Beatmapper Wizard button to adjust a track s tempo information For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 113 The waveform display shows tempo changes and measures using markers Marker Description F Represents the first downbeat F Indicates a tempo change These markers can be added manually or are added by ACID when recording or rendering P Represent measures You can adjust tempo by dragging measure or Beatmap markers e Dragging a measure marker that occurs before the first Beatmap marker sets the clip s initial tempo e Measure markers between Beatmap markers cannot be moved e Dragging a Beatmap marker adjusts the tempo of the Beatmap marker you drag and the previous marker The length of the measures between the Beatmap markers is adjusted as you drag e Dragging a measure marker that occurs after the last Beatmap marker sets the clip s final tempo You can add Beatmap markers to signal a tempo change just double click a measure marker or a blank area of the Beatmap marker bar to add a marker To remove a Beatmap marker double click an existing marker To edit a Beatmap marker right click it and choos
464. re displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate where a groove will be applied Repeat steps 2 and 3 to paint groove events as needed To toggle the height of the groove strips choose Show Full Size Groove Strips from the View menu Tips Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event s groove e Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to a space between two groove events to create a new groove event to fill the space between the events Hold Ctrl while clicking the space between two groove events to create a new groove event to fill the space between the events e Right click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold Ctrl and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool to erase the entire event Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events The markers represent the amount and direction of offset applied to beats Erasing groove events 1 2 Select the Groove Erase tool amp on the main ACID toolbar Click and drag the Groove Erase tool to erase a groove or hold Ctrl while clicking a groove event to erase the entire event Tips e Right click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold Ctrl and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event Hold Ctrl and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool
465. re is no right or wrong way to order plug ins although some plug ins work better when they follow another However the plug in order in the chain is strictly based on your preferences and desired output 1 Click the Track FX button The Audio Plug In window appears 2 There are three ways to arrange plug ins in your chain e Drag the plug in to a new location in the chain e Right click the plug in and choose Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu Click the plug in and then click the Shift Plug In Left and Shift Plug In Right buttons 3 Click the Close button E to close the Audio Plug In window Bypassing plug ins in a chain You can bypass a plug in without removing it from the chain by clearing the check box for the plug in Alternately right click the plug in and choose Bypass from the shortcut menu c Graphic EG Tip To bypass or re enable all plug ins in a chain right click the Track FX button and choose Bypass All or Enable All WORKING WITH TRACKS 109 Bypassing effect automation For plug in chains that include effect automation using envelopes you can bypass automation by clicking the Bypass FX Automation button 44 on the Audio Plug In window This does not remove any effect automation envelopes from the track but rather temporarily bypasses processing of the effect automation You can toggle this button on and off to hear the difference between the plug in chain as a standard
466. re natural When you automate an effect s frequency parameters such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent moving through the lower frequencies than the higher frequencies Without getting too technical frequency scales in track EQ and other plug ins use a logarithmic scale instead of a linear scale Since effect automation uses linear interpolation an effect s automated frequency parameter will sound as if it sweeps through the lower frequencies faster than the high frequencies You can visualize this if you watch the plug in settings in the Audio Plug In window during automated effect playback To make automated frequency changes sound more natural use envelope fade curves to change the rate at which interpolation happens between two envelope points For a high to low frequency sweep use a fast fade curve between points and for a low to high frequency sweep use a slow curve Although the fast and slow curves are not logarithmic curves they are similar enough to make the frequency transitions sound more even For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 144 Overriding compress expand One of the most powerful features of the software is its ability to compress or expand a loop while maintaining the loop s original pitch However you can override this feature in order to produce specific effects in your projects 1 Right click an event and choose C
467. re silence exists between notes Instead of crossfading the segments silence is added between beats to reduce warbling or other artifacts When you set the stretching method to Sliced segments beat markers P represent divisions in the clip media where silence will be inserted to accomplish stretching Stretch only markers d are not used in this mode and are displayed in gray Transient sensitivity Type a value in the box or use the spinner control to adjust the sensitivity for beat detection Higher settings increase sensitivity and lower settings decrease sensitivity When you set the control to 100 beat markers P stretch markers or d and beat anchors p are created for every transient As you decrease the setting markers are created for only strong transients Increasing this setting can be advantageous when working with audio that has complex rhythms Lower settings are more suitable for synthesizer pads and other basic material WORKING WITH TRACKS 119 Item Description Timing tightness Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the resolution for beat anchors For example if you wanted to quantize beat anchors to sixteenth notes choose Sixteenth Notes from the drop down list Quantized beat anchors are displayed as If the you choose a resolution from the Timing tightness drop down list that is too coarse you ll notice that not all beat markers will be quantized Stretch spacing Choose a setting
468. re using this feature to tap rhythms with one shot tracks try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm For more information see Working with grooves on page 123 Changing the length of events After an event is painted on the track view you may discover that it is too long or not long enough however it is easy to change the length of an event You may find it helpful to turn snapping options on by choosing Snapping from the Options menu and choosing Enable from the submenu To alter an event s length click the Draw Tool button and drag either end of the event When you drag the event past the end of the file looped files repeat but one shot and Beatmapped tracks draw silence Original event Drag the end of to increase its length the event 36 CHAPTER 2 Erasing sections of events Occasionally you may need to delete only specific sections of an event and leave the rest of it intact The easiest method of deleting a section of an event is to use the Erase tool 1 Click the Erase Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Erase from the submenu The pointer displays as an eraser icon 2 Drag in the track view to delete event data Tip With the Erase tool you can delete an entire one shot Beatmapped or MIDI event Just hold Ctrl while you click the event Moving events The position of the left edge of an event indicates when the event becomes audible during playback Y
469. reate accounts at Web sites where you can publish your song files Each Web site that offers publishing directly through ACID software will guide you through its own account creation process If you haven t created an account and you attempt to publish a song you will be directed to complete the Publish Setup utility 1 From the File menu choose Publish The Publish Setup dialog displays 2 Follow the on screen instructions to create an account At any time you can go back and create another account at a different Web site The Web site you are currently logged into in the Publish Setup utility is where your song is published when you choose Publish from the File menu Uploading a project Publishing a project file copies your media to the Web so you can share it with other Web users The following procedure assumes you already have an account set up with a publish provider If not you will first be redirected to set up an account After successfully creating an account you will be directed back to the Publish feature 1 From the File menu choose Publish The Publish Setup dialog displays 2 Log into your publishing account or follow the on screen instructions to create one 50 CHAPTER 2 3 Select the appropriate radio button to specify whether the song to be published is the current ACID song or a different song e To publish your current ACID song choose a streaming format and bit rate To publish a different song enter the pa
470. reshold for every 1 dB of increase in the output For example with a ratio of 3 1 the input level must increase by three decibels to produce a one decibel output level increase Threshold 10 dB Compression Ratio 3 1 Input 7 dB Output 9 dB Because the input is 3 dB louder than the threshold and the compression ratio is 3 1 the resulting signal is 1 dB louder than the threshold The ratio of the size of the original noncompressed file to the compressed contents For example a 3 1 compression ratio means that the compressed file is one third the size of the original Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate Sony creates an activation number based on that number Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have the ACID application installed on the computer where you will be using it The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you complete the installation process The Computer ID is used for registration purposes only It doesn t give Sony access to any personal information and can t be used for any purpose other than for generating a unique activation number for you to use the software Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in DC offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current results in a recorded wave that is not centered around the zero baseline Glitches
471. ress B to view bus tracks 3 Right click the bus track for the assignable effect control choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose Pan from the submenu A pan envelope appears on the bus track 4 Drag the envelope down to 100 right 5 Use the multipurpose slider on the track to which you want to apply the effect to make three changes e Pan the track 100 left e Set the assignable effect send to approximately the same volume as the track e Set the assignable effect send to Pre Volume Preview the effect The dry signal is panned to the left and the wet signal with the chorus or reverb effect is panned to the right Pan the track hard left match the assignable effect and set the assignable effect send to send level to the track volume Pre Volume 5g Guitar E Gh I g Guitar of Sy g Guitar off Ss l vo 00d o ek Touch vo 31de ic fife Touch vo side 1 J Touch Fan 100 L k Aper Fan 100 Lh dype Pan 100 Lajh mince Fx1i 44d E Fx 1 4 4dB he Fai 33 0 dE 47l e Post volume 298 APPENDIX C Playing double time half time You can also produce interesting effects by misinforming ACID regarding the number of beats in a file Configuring a file with half its actual number of beats results in double time playback This is an easy way to add speed metal drum tracks to your project This technique is also useful for adding
472. ring playback From the Options menu choose Bypass All Audio FX This option can also conserve processing power to avoid playback problems Note When effects are bypassed you can choose whether bypassed effects remain open When the Keep bypassed FX running check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is selected effects remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power Saving rendering and delivering projects Though you are provided with the tools to quickly build impressive musical projects you may find yourself building elaborate projects over a period of weeks or even months While you are working on a project you should save it in the ACID native format the ACID project file acd Important f you save a project originally created in an earlier version of ACID software in ACID version 7 0 it will be unusable in earlier versions of the software Use the Save As dialog to save the project with anew name after editing it in version 7 0 When you are finished building a project you can render projects in a variety of formats You should determine the project s final format or formats based on how you will deliver the media For example you would render your project to a streaming media format if you plan to publish it to the Internet Note Be aware that projects containing MIDI files that are routed to exter
473. roller to the track s MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring 5 Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose MIDI Input Filters from the menu to open the Track Properties window Use the Input Filters tab to specify which MIDI messages you want to record or exclude For more information see Configuring MIDI input filters on page 205 Recording MIDI in real time With real time recording you can record MIDI in real time while your project plays back 1 Connect a MIDI controller to your computer If you don t have a MIDI controller you can use the keyboard in the track view when in MIDI timeline editing mode or the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window For more information see Soft Synth Properties on page 23 Note Not all VSTi plug ins can record using the keyboard in the Soft Synth Properties window 2 Select the Arm for Record buttons on the tracks where you want to record Arming a track enables it for recording 3 Choose a MIDI input device and channel for each armed track For more information see Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track on page 190 If you re recording using the keyboard in the track view or the Soft Synth Properties window choose Auto Input Click the MIDI Input button on the track header and choose Send MIDI Input Thru to MIDI Output from the menu if you want to echo notes from the MIDI controller to the track s MIDI device or soft synth for monitoring 4 Set
474. rom the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list 2 Hold Alt while dragging the waveform of the duplicate track Notice that the waveform moves within the event which retains its size and position on the timeline 3 Experiment with different offsets between the duplicate tracks Tip As with most tricks this method can be combined with pan and volume envelopes to produce an unlimited range of effects Creating ping pong pan effects You can use a pair of tracks to ping pong audio from one speaker to another 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list 2 Use the multipurpose slider to pan the original track 100 right and the duplicate track 100 left 3 Use the Erase tool to erase every other beat alternating between the original and duplicate track Tip You can also use a pan envelope on a single track to create the same effect For more information see Volume or pan automation on page 138 Adding depth with assignable effects You can add depth to your mix by panning a dry signal no effects to one side and a wet signal with effects such as chorus or reverb to the other You can pan the dry and wet signals by adding an assignable effects chain to your project 1 Add an assignable effects chain containing an effect such as chorus or reverb to your project For more information see The Mixing Console toolbar on page 151 2 P
475. rone m ctl tt Envelope es er Fx Ambier Fx Ambier If you copy an event from track 1 and paste it into track the same track a new event is created on the same track No clips are created 9 prone ambient 001 Hey H O I WN Drone ambient 001 O vol 6 0d8 nw Pan Center G ee Vol 6 0dB jil Pan Center j Sg Envelope beto Ber H O F envelope Beato2 H O Vol 6 0dB jl Pan Center 2 vol 6 0 dB NO Pan Center Mm Fx ambient Volume sliderbge O Fx Ambient 03 k amp O Vol 6 0dB m Pan Center J Vol 6 0dB m Pan Center JJ Drone m If you copy an event from track 1 and paste it into track 2 the event from track 1 is added to track 2 and a new clip is created for the new event 102 CHAPTER 7 Drone ambient 001 O Yol 6 0dB il Pan Center lg Envelope BeatO2 M Yol 6 0dB il Pan Center 5 FX Ambient 03 ky H O Vol 6 0dB _l Pan Center i BD Drone ambient 001 Bey O vol 6 0 dB iy Pan Center J GB Envelope seto H O Vol 6 0dB i Pan Center LI SE Fx Ambient 03 k amp O Vol 6 0dB li Pan Center Si OI Vol 6 0dB 1 Pan Center 1 i Cd If you copy events from tracks 1
476. ront playback device drop down list For 5 1 surround projects choose devices from the Default Stereo and Front playback device Default Rear playback device and Default Center and LFE playback device drop down lists e ASIO Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a low latency ASIO driver For stereo projects choose a device from the Default Stereo and Front playback device from the drop down list For 5 1 surround projects choose devices from the Default Stereo and Front playback device Default Rear playback device and Default Center and LFE playback device drop down lists e ReWire Device Driver Allows you to use ACID software as ReWire device in a ReWire mixer application If a ReWire mixer application starts ACID software that ACID window will start in ReWire mode and cannot be switched from ReWire mode If a ReWire mixer connects to an existing ACID window that window will run in ReWire mode and you can switch out of ReWire mode if necessary If you exit that instance of the software and start ACID software again the new instance will start ReWire mode and you can switch out of ReWire mode if necessary by choosing a different audio device type Choose the device that you want to use for playing stereo sound data Ina 5 1 surround project this device plays the right and left channels Selecting a device such as the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows Windows to select an appropriate device to use for the current sound data
477. roperties Alt 8 window Show Audio Plug In window Alt 9 Show Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 1 Show Groove Pool window Ctrl Alt 2 Show Clip Properties window Ctrl Alt 3 Shift focus forward through open F6 ACID windows Shift focus backward through open Shift F6 ACID windows Shift focus forward clockwise Tab through track list timeline bus track timeline and bus track list when track view or timeline has focus Shift focus backward Shift Tab counterclockwise through track list bus track list bus track timeline and timeline when track view or timeline has focus Explorer window commands Description Keys Add all selected files to the track Enter list 306 APPENDIX D Description Restore project magnification to the default settings Restore track height to a level where all track list controls are displayed Reduce timeline magnification so the entire length of the project and as many tracks as possible are displayed Zoom time in out small increments when timeline has focus Zoom time in out large increments when timeline has focus Zoom in time until each video thumbnail represents one frame Zoom track height in out when timeline has focus Change track height for all tracks Minimize restore track height for all tracks Return all tracks to the default height Minimize restore the window docking area Show hide Event Information Minimize restore timeline vertically and
478. rseseseroesese 124 Ce OrOOV ES errer r i Ern L AANEEN ETE ERAEN NE AE EA EENE TS 126 EJUN OrOOVES sporis itir enren APRE rE EEEE 127 WS WAG OLT a K rer E EEE E EEEE E A E E 128 Creaung atolder TaK wanaina wie skireis ENEE ENEE EEEE AEA 128 Adding existing tracks to a folder track cece cc ccc cence eee e een eeeeeeeneees 128 Removing tracks from a folder track ccc ccc ccc cece eect n eee e eee ee eeeennees 129 MINING a TOlGEr ACK occ aivctanorestienadyodenseunaawereedueuuenosanienanetienisenenes 129 SOIOING 2 folder Td CK eicnrettowrsaveanddoengeennett aeniuedesdwbentuudieawietiasweiuatonda 129 Editing events Ih a folder tack oi istveceinestadivcsiusivaiwesaiuateesinennrs iaaaeiead danets 129 Mixing multiple tracks to a single track ccc ccc ccc ec eee erence ee ee eee eeeannes 129 EXOOIMING LOODS a erre scons eusred ence or ucsen Tecan EEE snd beeen oousanees ions anes 130 Organizing Plug Ins and ReWire DeVICES 0 ccc cece teen neeeees 131 Scanning your computer for PIUG INS cc cece eee cee cnet eee eeeeeenas 131 Viewing PIUG INS 0 cece e ence eee e eens scenes eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 132 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS Organizing plug ins with folders cece ccc cece eee e eee e eee e eee eeennes 133 Viewing a plug in s folder assignments cc ccc cece eect teen eee e eee eeeennees 134 Displaying audio plug in folders in the Mixing Console WiINdOW 0ccceeeeeeeeees 134 Classifying a
479. s Display the Explorer by choosing Explorer from the View menu or pressing Alt 1 22 CHAPTER 1 Chopper The Chopper isolates audio events so that you can dissect them and reinsert them into a project to produce elaborate slice n dice effects with minimal effort Display the Chopper by choosing Chopper from the View menu or pressing Alt 2 For more information see Using the Chopper on page 95 Mixing Console The Mixing Console provides an integrated view of all tracks and busses in your project using the appearance of a traditional hardware based mixer Display the Mixing Console window by choosing Mixing Console from the View menu or pressing Alt 3 For more information see Using the Mixing Console on page 151 Video Preview This window displays prerendered video files that can be imported and synchronized with an ACID project The video file displays during project playback and can be rendered with the project to an appropriate format Display the Video Preview window by choosing Video Preview from the View menu or pressing Alt 4 For more information see Using the Video Preview window on page 232 Media Manager This window displays the Media Manager which you can use to search for manage and tag your media files Display the Media Manager window by choosing Media Manager from the View menu or pressing Alt 5 For more information see Using the Media Manager on page 69 Track Properties This window allows you to change
480. s 34 ie SMOUG oss A desea teen A vader E on Gana e ran aae aware eemensaueeteraewens 34 DEQUMADDEO gameccawe tebe se ceases cies eaea dtueaee E eee en eeuanecweeteesmneneeaes 34 MIDI soccer a ae otis rk hd aap ee iw de ek ap de Os Oe ad ee aoe 35 POISED ACG acc ndeutesoessueueb ness bones bids yckee eh Vee TE ET 35 Adding and editing events ccc ccc cece cece e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 Poll CVClINS stan udcacverscandwaned oaene Geant renga Geeineenestadeenneenensdoaseresannesaee 35 Changing the length of events as ccincwswnwsardunwwsdenwatnwenaiawsee news ieomseveseesawans 36 Erasing sections Of events 45404 cssada0edds daeeiaee bee 144s Chee deaweawaws dees sd aeeneatesue ws 37 MOVING OVE 4 vtantecuiceaa tendancy ENESE E ETE EANET EEEE TA 37 Editino WIOLCVENINS lt i ren re ee E EE E E A E E E EOE 37 Jano CMe CU O orreen EESE E E EEA EEE EEEE 37 Positioning the cursor with the mouse ssssussessesessessessersoeressesseseesseseese 37 Positioning the cursor with the keyboard susesusnsesussesesosorsesesssoesesorsosore 37 Positioning the cursor with the Go To command cece cc ccc cee eee e ee eeeeee ees 38 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Making SCICCTONG bh0n 32 00n accu noseun eed eneseut ass these erecsorecsureuiwees ter ceue 38 SCICCHNG aN EVEN gatos pratese deR oT ar ANE cede beeen nades needa eeees tease ed 38 Selecting Multiple events 2 ccc ccc eee nent eee e nent eee eee ee eenes 38 Creating time selecti
481. s above the marker bar URL command marker UAL http ai sony com mediasoftware Command ruler Marker bar 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the command marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Command WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 85 3 Complete the Command Properties dialog e From the Template drop down list choose a custom template For more information see Saving command properties as a custom template on page 86 e From the Command drop down list choose the type of command For more information see Defining streaming media commands on page 87 e Enter parameters in the Parameter box to define the behavior of the command Enter your own notes or comments in the Comment box e Specify the timing of the command in the Position box Command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position unless you change this value 4 Click OK The new command marker appears on the command bar After you create a command marker you can move the marker by dragging it to a new location Editing command marker properties Double click any command marker to open the Command Properties dialog and edit its contents You can also right click a command marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu Saving command properties as a custom template If you plan to use a command more than once you can save command properties as a template You can then reuse the command properties by selecting the templat
482. s automation you can use envelopes to adjust effect parameters over time The appearance of the plug in in the Plug In Chooser window indicates whether the plug in supports automation Plug ins with this icon support automation while plug ins with this icon y do not In addition you can quickly locate plug ins that support automation in the Automatable subfolder For creative ways to use effect automation envelopes see Creating wah wah effects with automated Track EQ on page 300 and Turning automated effects on and off on page 300 1 Click the Track FX button on a track to open the Audio Plug In window If no track effects exist clicking the Track FX button displays the Plug In Chooser Use the Plug In Chooser to create an effect chain including an automatable plug in For more information see Creating or adding to track plug in chains on page 108 2 Click the Configure FX Automation button 3 on the Audio Plug In window to display the FX Automation Chooser 3 Clicka plug in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser A list of the effect s automatable parameters appears 4 Select the check box for each parameter that you want to control with an envelope You can use the Select All and Select None buttons to quickly change your selections to all or none of the parameters FX Automation Chooser BASS TASTER S5obPROMO 01 o Track EQ Resonant Filter 2 Select the plugin parameters that you want to automate using track envel
483. s expanded you can specify the location of the track by dragging it to the desired position When the folder track is minimized dragging the track to the folder track header places the track at the top of the list within the folder track 128 CHAPTER 7 Removing tracks from a folder track To remove a track from the folder track expand the folder track and drag the track to another location in the track list Muting a folder track To mute all tracks in a folder track click the Mute button amp on the folder track s header To unmute the folder track click the Mute button again Soloing a folder track To solo only the tracks in a folder track click the Solo button on the folder track s header To unsolo the folder track click the Solo button again Editing events in a folder track When the folder track is minimized you can also perform edit operations on clustered events in the group The following edit operations will affect clustered events e Pitch shifting events Dragging events e Cutting copying pasting and deleting events Click to select a clustered group of events or hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple clusters of events Selected events are displayed in a darker color than unselected events Events that overlap are treated as a single event when the folder track is minimized Mixing multiple tracks to a single track You can mix a selected group of tracks or an entire pro
484. s made up of the space where you draw events on each track u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines u Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state or reapply changes after you have undone them A software only router for MIDI data between programs The VMR is used to receive MIDI timecode and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC A Virtual Studio Technology instrument VSTi is software synthesizer plug in technology for outputting MIDI developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG A digital audio file format developed by Microsoft and IBM One minute of uncompressed audio requires 10 MB of storage A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform Each event shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range is 32 76
485. s the Master virtual busses that you can route to hardware attached to your computer or to other busses By default all busses are assigned to the Master bus In this configuration you can use them for creating subgroups of tracks for example you could route all your drum tracks to a bus so you can adjust their levels together without changing their relative levels When you assign busses to hardware outputs you can use busses for sending tracks to external effects processors or for mixing on an external mixer Important When you route busses to hardware outputs those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your project Routing a bus to another bus Using bus track headers 1 Add busses to your project For more information see Adding a bus on page 162 2 If bus tracks aren t already visible choose Show Bus Tracks from the View menu 3 Click the Playback Device Selector button on the audio bus track and choose a bus from the menu e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to the master bus e The bus letter is displayed A B andso on when a bus is routed to another bus e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to a hardware output not available for soft synth bus controls Note To prevent feedback you cannot perform circular routing For example if your project has two busses and bus A is routed to B bus B can only be routed to the Master bus Using the Mixing Console window
486. s the background color of the Video Preview window to the default color Black Background Sets the background color of the Video Preview window to black White Background Sets the background color of the Video Preview window to white External Monitor Sends the preview to an external monitor Display Square Pixels Compensates for any spatial distortions due to non square pixel aspect ratios Display at Media Size Displays video at the native resolution clipping if necessary Show Toolbar Toggles the display of the Video Preview window toolbar Show Status Bar Toggles the display of the Video Preview window status bar Viewing the status bar Right click the Video Preview window and choose Show Status Bar from the shortcut menu to view the status bar The status bar shows the video s frame size frame rate and display size WORKING WITH VIDEO 233 Previewing on external monitors You can use your system s external monitor for previewing video playback You must have an OHCI IEEE 1394 adapter and a device to convert the DV signal to video such as a DV camcorder deck or media converter To specify an external monitor click the External Monitor button JExt Monitor on the Video Preview window or choose Preferences from the Options menu and click the Video tab Other settings for the external monitor can also be found on the Video tab For more information see Using the Video tab on page 261 Scoring video ACID has tools
487. s using any of the following methods e Select tag check boxes e Use the Advanced search controls For more information see Using advanced search options on page 77 e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow OR the Guitar tag e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display only media that matches all of your keyword tag and advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow AND the Guitar tag 76 CHAPTER 4 Searching using tags In the Search pane select the check box for each tag you want to find The Media Library searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display all media that contains any keyword tag or advanced search criteria In the example to the right the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the tag High Tom OR the tag Floor Tom Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that includes all keyword tag and adv
488. se refer to your device or its documentation to determine the correct values for each program Notes e Within ACID MIDI values range from 0 127 If your device uses 1 128 subtract 1 when editing the program e Devices that use Sysex messages to change programs are limited to 128 programs 9 Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes Assigning a patch map to a MIDI device 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the MIDI tab 3 Inthe Make these devices available for MIDI track playback section of the dialog verify the check box is selected for your MIDI device 4 Right click the Device value for your MIDI device and choose Load Device Template from the shortcut menu 5 Browse to the patch map you want to use and click Open The selected patch map will be used for any track that is routed to the MIDI device Creating or editing drum maps From the Tools menu choose Drum Map Editor to display the Drum Map Editor dialog You can use the Drum Map Editor dialog to create or edit drum maps When a drum map is defined for a soft synth you can use the drum grid in the timeline to edit MIDI data A piano roll allows you to edit MIDI notes for most patches Free Fingers Low Bonga High Bongo Ride Cym Wibra Slap Crash Cyan Cowbell Splash Cy Tambourine Ride Bell A drum grid allows you to edit MIDI notes for soft synths that have drum maps defined For more information see Ed
489. seedsaacsteseeee tages 179 Setting UP your equipment 0 ce cece eect eee teen nee n eee esses eeenees 179 Basit SOUD narrer reni cece ru cab ewe ene senor ate EE EEE EEEE EENT 179 SECU WIC EN as eset E EE E EE EEEE EE ETE EEEE EA 179 Setup with digital multitrack i csrcissrerreririis reri ri idt arar EEEN E 180 Preparing tO TECOM 6004060e26nesnngseaeeetndwewedeesene eds bodes ENTREE EEEREN EGA 180 Arming the track for recording ccc cc ccc cece eee cette eee e eee eee eeeneennennees 180 USING TNE INGTIONOIMG se6ieesiesco4 ciaiosse dan Eran EEIE EAEE weaken end eiatewdiaddsaban 180 RECON v0 0 g es nde eared vd eul esos eee bhesetey sree reuse pe dun E ta seaete leer 182 Recording into an empty track ccc ccc ccc eee e eee e nee eee eeenenes 182 Recording into atime selection ccc ccc ccc ccc cece nee eee dronin ireann 183 Recording Into an EVENT 6 isusisave des teetod vawee E E E EE EEE EEE 183 Recording into an event with a time selection sussusssssesussusseesersesersseseees 183 Recording USING aN INPUT DUS s4c0s csiwadsoeed rtin e dna E EENEN EEN EVEA oud sta EANES EENES 184 Working with multiple recorded Clips 0 0 0 ccc cece eee cece ee eee ee eeeeees 185 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Specifying where recordings are stored ccc cece cece eee eee e ene e ee eenees 185 Changing where recorded files are stored for new projects ccc cece cece eens 185 Changing where recorded files are
490. select the Automation Settings button in the track header if you want to adjust trim levels GM Electric cuta El ey amp O Yol 12 0 dB il G Electric Gu Track header in trim mode Select the Automation Settings button if you want to adjust volume automation The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode H Electric Guita E offe kolk oI Yol 6 0dB j H Electric Gu Track header in automation mode Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels You can adjust send levels for busses or assignable effects chains using the multipurpose fader in the track header Click the fader label and choose an assignable effects chain or bus from the menu The fader in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall send level of the track or it can adjust send level automation settings Deselect the Automation Settings button if you want to adjust trim levels Select the Automation Settings button if you want to adjust volume automation The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode Adjusting channel levels Use the Master bus control in the Mixing Console window to adjust the individual levels of the 5 1 channels The faders in the track bus control can function as trim controls that adjust the overall level of each channel or you can automate the master volume of the Master bus individual channel levels cannot be automated Click the A
491. semi circle This pan type uses the constant power panning curve The Film pan type allows you to pan between pairs of adjacent speakers using a constant power model This mode is optimized for theater style soeaker placement In stereo projects Film mode functions identically to Constant Power As you drag the pan point to the center speaker the sound becomes diffused through the front and rear speakers When the track is panned fully to the center speaker there is no output from the front and rear speakers Dragging the pan point to the center of the surround panner sends the signal to all speakers You can choose a pan type as a default for all new tracks you create For more information see Setting default track properties on page 252 Using the Beatmapper When a long file is added to a project the Beatmapper Wizard starts to allow you to add tempo information to the file Notes The Beatmapper Wizard is started by default for files longer than 30 seconds Use the Open files as loops if between seconds setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to determine the file length e Support for multitempo clips is available for clips that are recorded or rendered in ACID or by adding Beatmap markers on the Clip Properties dialog 1 Perform either of the following actions to start the Beatmapper Wizard Add a long file to your project If tempo information is not detected in the file the Beatmapper Wizard starts Select the
492. sent in the mix Note When automating panning using keyframes you cannot automate the gain applied using the Center fader For more information see Automating panning on page 242 4 Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the interpolation path between panning keyframes The smoothness setting appears only when you are automating panning using keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 244 Moving the pan point You have a variety of methods to help you position the pan point in the Surround Panner window Method E Double click Ctrl drag Shift drag Alt drag Shift Alt drag Arrow keys Ctrl Arrow keys Page Up Page Down Shift Page Up Page Down Numeric keypad 1 9 Ctrl Numeric keypad 1 3 7 9 Mouse wheel Shift mouse wheel Ctrl mouse wheel Ctrl Shift mouse wheel Choosing pan types Description Click to toggle through three options for constraining pan point motion as you drag Move Freely Move Left Right Only E and Move Front Back Only Double clicking the pan point resets it to the center front of the surround panner Double clicking in the Surround Panner window moves the pan point to the double click location Makes fine adjustments Constrains motion to vertical horizontal or diagonal motion at 45 degree increments Constrains motion to a constant radius from the center of the surround panner Constrains motion to the maximally inscri
493. settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 aB e To adjust the size of the Sends control region you can drag the bottom divider to make more or fewer sends visible Bus sends are post volume and post mute by default To change to pre volume and pre mute click the Pre Post button to switch to Pre Volume Send mode Changing a bus s output device When the I O control region is visible each bus displays controls you can use to set the bus s output device To show or hide the I O control region click the I O button in the View pane To choose an output device click the Output button and choose a bus or hardware output from the menu Important When you route busses to hardware outputs the outputs from those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your project Monitoring bus levels When the Meters control region is visible each bus displays meters you can use to monitor output levels To show or hide the Meters control region click the Meters button in the View pane If the Meters control region is not visible peak meters are displayed in the Faders control region Right click the meter and choose a setting from the shortcut menu to change the resolution and display options 166 CHAPTER 10 Muting or soloing a bus When the Faders control region is visible each bus displays Mute
494. setup 229 283 285 MIDI merge recording 192 MIDI merging controller data 212 MIDI track envelopes and keyframes 208 MIDI tracks Adjusting clip properties for 123 Device selection 19 Freezing 188 Mixer setup external 179 Mixing Console 23 adding assignable FX 155 adding busses 155 adding tracks 155 adding editing effects 176 adding editing track effects 156 adjusting assignable effects input levels 177 adjusting assignable effects panning or volume 177 adjusting bus panning volume 167 adjusting bus assignable effects send levels 157 adjusting track panning volume 160 bus channel strips 164 change a bus s output device 166 changing a bus s name 165 changing a track s automation mode 158 changing assignable effect chain s name 176 changing effects chain s output device 177 changing pre post routing for busses 168 changing track s input output device 158 Channel List pane 153 Channel Strips 154 INDEX v Channel strips 155 FX Send Assignable Effects channel strips 175 Input bus channel strips 169 inverting track s phase 159 monitoring bus levels 166 monitoring output levels 177 muting or soloing a bus 167 muting or soloing a track 159 muting soloing an assignable effects chain 177 Routing surround through 237 toolbar 151 View pane 153 window 151 Mixing to a single track 129 Monitor for video editing 234 Monitoring external sources 175 Moving Events 37 Tracks 40 Moving a
495. signed to loop and they are streamed from the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they are longer than three seconds Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Unlike loops one shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project Beatmapped When you add a file that is longer than thirty seconds to a project the Beatmapper Wizard starts allowing you to add tempo information to the file As a result these clips respond to tempo and key changes just like loops For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 113 Tip You can change the length of the file that starts the Beatmapper in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 255 34 CHAPTER 2 MIDI amp A MIDI clip is automatically created when you open a MID SMF or RMI file You can use MIDI clips to record data from and play back through synthesizers and other MIDI compliant equipment For more information see Working with MIDI on page 187 Folder tracks Folder tracks can contain any combination of tracks Use folder tracks to group related tracks or sections of a project so they can be easily expanded or minimized For example if you have many drum tracks in your project you can add a folder track to consolidate drum tracks and minimize their vertical space in the track list When the folder track is minimized you can also perform edit operations on clustered events
496. sition the window s outline in the docking area where you want it and release the mouse Floating windows You may float a window so that it does not appear in the docking area 1 Grab the window by its handle the border along the left side and drag the window to the workspace As you drag the window the window s outline appears 2 Position the window anywhere in the workspace and release the mouse You can move the floating window by dragging it to a new position or docking it again If desired you can create a floating dock with multiple windows by repeating steps 1 and 2 Preventing windows from docking Press Ctrl while dragging a window to prevent it from docking in the workspace Resizing the window docking area You can resize the track list track view and docking area sections of the ACID workspace by dragging the dividers between them Tip You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11 248 APPENDIX A Changing the time ruler format You may specify a time format for the ACID time ruler to display The ruler located below the track view displays real time in several formats You may change the ruler format in one of the following ways e From the View menu choose Time Ruler and choose the desired format from the submenu e Right click the time ruler and choose the desired format from the shortcut menu In addition to right clicking the time ruler in the track view you can use this tech
497. sorsereesesosoreeso 263 Jonghe Other la eisrean ENEE onde EAEE A A eaddaad 263 Using the Folders taD erica N E E E E E E EE E 264 Using the External Control amp Automation tab ccc ccc cece cece e eee e eee eeeeeeees 265 Customizing keyboard Shortcuts ccc cece cece eee eee e eee e eee ee ee eeeees 265 Using Control Surfaces with ACID ccc ccc cece ence eee e eee eeeeees 267 Connecting a COMUONSUN AC Gs cn cicauwendsc eden acunnamans owen iiras EELE Enee i 267 Configuring ACID to use your control surface s sssussssssssresesesesesoreresesees 268 Configuring or customizing your control surface ccc cece cece ent ee nee tenes 268 Using your control surface 2 ccc eee eee eee e eee e ene e eee E 268 Setting up a Mackie Control Universal cece ccc cece cece eee ene eeeeneees 269 Connecting the Mackie Control Universal ccc cece cece cece eee eeeeeees 269 Configuring the software to use the Mackie Control Universal c cece eee e eens 270 Configuring channel mappings for Mackie Control Extenders 0c cece cece eee eees 270 Configuring or customizing control MAPPINGS cece cece eee nett eee e eee ees 271 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS Using the Mackie Control Universal ccc ccc ccc cece eect eeeeeenenes 273 CANNGCLSECHOM asus auaniawoue dnc aaene eden wean N TENE E AEA E EA TO 273 Footswitches not shown 15002 5 lt 0cedensatangencosoataneet
498. stom wave template available for the AJones user account copy the appropriate sft2 file from this folder C Documents and Settings JSmith Application Data Sony Render Templates ACID 7 0 wave to this folder C Documents and Settings AJones Application Data Sony Render Templates ACID 7 0 wave Note f you re copying templates from an older Sony Creative Software application templates are saved as sft files in the following folder C Documents and Settings lt username gt Application Data Sony File Templates lt plug in name gt lt plug in GUID gt GETTING STARTED 49 Rendering in real time Real time rendering is a playback mode that renders your project to wav or w64 format Real time rendering allows you to include the output from an external input source such as a hardware synth or effects processor with your project For more information see Using input busses with hardware based effects on page 172 or Using input busses with hardware based synthesizers on page 174 Notes e When you start real time rendering any track that is armed for recording will be unarmed You cannot arm a track for recording or start recording in real time rendering mode For more information see Arming the track for recording on page 180 e When rendering a project that does not use external audio hardware real time rendering and normal rendering will produce the same output Real time rendering will take longer to complete allowing you to
499. stored for individual projects cece eee e eee ee 185 Monitoring audio levels 6 ii ce ws trka 6 044604 40 s490 960 64 O0ESRe ure EEEIEE REAS ESTEKAN EEA a 186 Using record input Monitoring ccc eee ee nee e eee eee eee teen eeennes 186 Working WIth VID ces ceoteugassd 24 eoreceetsonecingensieeaeen eeoeu sae eesuncaunaeds 187 Adding MIDI Tacks and MCSii024 0v00 ctensciaesaseosessetinees tice baw sekdewnes denna ds 187 Adding MIDI tracks sccadustadnaeateuseccaceuteniiss wadhbeedcacansddoneaeeeadoidee EAR 187 Adding MIDI fil s 16 4 Project sscunensueedecatwincesccerderaansanewedaswadade a aa 187 Freezing MIDI ackS lt inrvawudcesdw ne awaddunsl E E E EREE 188 RECOKING NID oeer EEE E E Ea 189 Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track ccc cece eect cece e eee eenee 190 Recording MIDI in real ti Me ccc ccc eee ccc een eee eee ee eee e ee eennaes 190 Using MIDI step TECORGING 250wexd sec baduwacaueedhaewe need adieu sends decane VEEE 191 Using MIDI merge recording 440 0 ndeccuteuewndesnuneoiiens seme ewaraecounerecrneseraeswexs 192 Editing MIDI on the timeline 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee Irenu eT 193 Choosing a drum map or kit for a track 2 0 ccc cece cece eee e ete eee eeenneneees 194 Navigating the piano roll Or drum grid 6 ccc ccc ccc cece eect e eee ee eee eeeees 194 Auditioning notes with the keyboard drum grid ccc ccc cece cece ence eee eeennees 195 ee aa aE E
500. stores all MIDI preferences to the default settings Using the Video tab Item Device Details If project format is invalid for DV output conform to the following Sync offset frames Record engage delay frames Default All Using the Editing tab Item Project tempo range Tempo curve segmentation Editing Application X Browse Name Clear Check for latest versions of Sony editors Default All Description Choose a DV output device from the drop down list This is the interface to which your video device is connected Displays information about the device selected in the External monitor device drop down list If your source media does not conform to DV standards choose a setting from the drop down list The video is adjusted to display properly on your external monitor If your audio is not synchronized with your external monitor you can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the slider to synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor Audio and video synchronization in your ACID project is unaffected Drag the slider to specify the number of frames it takes your camcorder or deck to switch from Record Pause to Record mode If you re missing frames from the beginning of your file after printing to tape increase the setting If you see duplicated frames at the beginning of your video decrease the setting Restores all video preferenc
501. t a MIDI clip to repeat when painted on the timeline When the command is not selected the MIDI clip will be treated as a one shot For more information about ACID types please see Understanding clip types on page 34 Note This command is available only for MIDI clips Use Original Sets the project tempo to match the clip s original tempo Tempo 104 CHAPTER 7 Command Description Edit in Audio Opens the clip s media in your selected audio editor Editor After you have edited and saved the file ACID automatically detects the updated file and updates the events in the project However if you change the media file s name or location by using Save As you must import the edited new file into your project Note When you edit a clip in an external editor audio MIDI and external control hardware is released regardless of the Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not the active application check box setting for more information see Using the General tab on page 254 The ports are re enabled when focus is restored to ACID Edit Source If a clip s media was created from an ACID project and rendered with the project path reference in the file this command Project opens the source project in a new ACID window If you render the edited file using the same file name and location as the track s original media your project will automatically be updated to use the latest rendered media file Note This command is available only
502. t can be placed into tracks as events Mixing Console Alt 3 Allows you to work with busses assignable effect chains and soft synth controls Video Preview Alt 4 Displays a project s video output at the current cursor position in the timeline Media Manager Alt 5 Displays the Media Manager which you can use to search for manage and tag your media files Track Properties Alt 6 Allows you to view and edit track attributes For MIDI tracks allows you to edit MIDI using the piano roll editor list editor or other OPT plug ins Surround Alt 7 Allows you to control panning in a 5 1 surround project Panner Soft Synth Alt 8 Allows you to change the attributes of soft synth controls in the Mixing Properties Console window Audio Plug In Alt 9 Allows you to view and edit settings for assignable bus soft synth and track effect chains Plug In Ctrl Alt 1 Allows you to view and choose effects plug ins to be added to a track Manager bus or assignable effects chain Groove Pool Ctrl Alt 2 Allows you to view and edit grooves in your project Clip Properties Ctrl Alt 3 For audio non MIDI clips allows you to change clip types loop one shot and Beatmapped and adjust time stretching pitch root notes tempo and downbeat For MIDI clips allows you to edit data using the list editor or piano roll Docking and floating ACID windows The window docking area allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way
503. t so that it does not end on a loop point you can introduce an audible click at the edges prevent clicks of the event Select the Quick fade edges to prevent clicks check box and a quick fade in or fade out is performed on the event edges To adjust a quick fade zoom into the event and hover over the upper left or upper right corner of an event until the cursor is displayed as Drag the edge of the fade to adjust its duration For more information see Setting an event s fade in and out envelope curve on page 66 Reverse Select the Reverse check box to reverse the event s audio and peak data An arrow appears on the event in the timeline to indicate that it has been reversed Muting and locking events Right click an event choose Switches from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu to mute or lock the selected event Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking to select multiple events Muting events Muting an event excludes it from playback while preserving its position on the timeline 1 Select the events you want to mute 2 Right click a selected event choose Switches from the shortcut menu and then choose Mute from the submenu If you want to unmute an event choose Mute again Muted events are dimmed on the timeline a da BASS TASTER sPROMO Oz 7 BASS TASTER sPROMO 04 Muted event 7 BASS TASTER sPROMO 04 a BASS TAST Locking events Locking an event prevents it fro
504. t to be redone Notice that all subsequently undone edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to be redone is indicated at the bottom of the drop down list 3 Click the edit to be redone The project is restored to the state it was in prior to the selected undone edit Tip Clicking the desktop outside the drop down list cancels the redo operation Clearing the undo history You can clear the undo and redo histories without closing the project or exiting the application After the histories are cleared new ones are created as you continue building the project 1 From the Edit menu choose Clear Undo History A confirmation dialog appears alerting you that this action permanently deletes the current edit histories 2 Click Yes to clear the edit histories or No to retain the current edit histories 44 CHAPTER 2 Playing the project You have several methods for playing your projects Using the transport bar All buttons required to play your project are located on the transport bar The transport bar should look somewhat familiar to you as it contains buttons found on most home CD and cassette players For more information see Transport bar on page 21 Using playback options As you build a project you will likely have different playback needs For example you may want to hear the project in its entirety when checking the final mix but not when you are working on the ending Because of this you have three
505. t to join creating an event selection range After you join the events a single event appears Joining events is similar to dragging the edge of an existing event Automatic crossfades From the Options menu choose Automatic Crossfades if you want to automatically create crossfades when you overlap two audio events Note Event crossfades are not available for MIDI events Creating crossfades You can easily create crossfades between events by simply dragging an event 1 From the Options menu choose Automatic Crossfades to turn on automatic crossfades 2 Drag and event so that it overlaps another event on the same track A crossfade is automatically added to transition smoothly between the two events 60 CHAPTER 3 Changing fade types You can change a crossfade to use one of many combinations of fast slow linear smooth and sharp fade curves 1 Right click the overlapping area to display a shortcut menu 2 Choose Fade Out Type from the shortcut menu and choose a fade curve from the submenu to set the curve for the first event s fade out 3 Choose Fade In Type from the shortcut menu and choose a fade curve from the submenu to set the curve for the first event s fade in Ripple editing ACID includes a ripple editing feature This feature allows you to cut delete and paste events or portions of events within a time selection and simultaneously adjust the position of all later events on a selected track The
506. t to ripple all tracks at the paste position use the Paste Insert command from the Edit menu Slipping and sliding events To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timeline but the event moves in the direction you drag EDITING EVENTS 63 Original loop event Slipping the event two measures to the right Slip trimming the event two measures to the right Sliding the event two measures to the right Shifting the contents of slipping events Hold Alt while dragging an event The slip cursor appears i As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but want the to event play a different section of the source media file For creative ways to use event slipping see Duplicating with offset on page 298 Slip trimming events Hold Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears As you dr
507. tag and property information in your media file s 1 Inthe Search Results pane select media files for which you want to save tags and properties e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 2 Click the Save Tags and Properties to File s button al in the top right corner of the Search Results pane Tags and other information from the Search Results pane is saved for the selected file s 74 CHAPTER 4 Backing up your media libraries Media Manager software automatically saves your library as you make changes so you don t need to tell the application explicitly to save your library as you re working However you can create a backup of the current library as a restore point or as a template to create new libraries 1 Click the Media Library Actions button i and choose Back Up Media Library from the menu The Back Up Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your backup 3 Inthe File name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 4 Click the Save button To restore the backup at a later time open the backup file Opening a Reference Library A reference lib
508. tch only markers are not used in this mode and are displayed in gray Tip Use the Zoom In Time Up and Zoom Out Time Down buttons to change the magnification of the waveform As a general rule markers that are excessively close to each other may cause clicks in the audio However markers should not be more than one second apart or pitch and echo artifacts may result You can add move and delete stretch markers on the Stretch tab If snapping is enabled markers will snap to the current grid spacing Moving stretch markers You can drag any marker to a new location If you move a combination stretch beat marker its associated beat marker P will also be moved Adding stretch markers Double click the marker bar at the bottom of the waveform display to create a new marker It is advantageous to add new markers if the software does not detect any quick subdivisions in beats The biggest cause of audio artifacts due to time compression is a lack of beat detection Make sure that you add markers anywhere the application fails to put one on a pronounced beat Deleting markers You can remove a user defined marker by right clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu or by double clicking a disabled marker Double click a combination stretch beat marker to remove the beat marker P or double click a stretch marker to delete it Resetting stretch markers Click the Reload button eFelsad to res
509. ted add remove or hide envelopes set default values and set each envelope s default fade curve For more information see Configuring MIDI track output settings on page 202 Resetting a MIDI controller envelope s points Perform either of the following actions to reset an envelope s points to their default values e Click the down arrow next to the Insert Hide Envelope button F next to the controller s slider in the track header and choose Reset All Envelope Points e Right click the envelope and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu You can set the default value for each continuous controller on the Output Settings tab in the Track Properties dialog For more information see Editing MIDI track properties on page 202 Deleting a MIDI controller envelope Click the down arrow next to the Insert Hide Envelope button F next to the controller s slider in the track header and choose Delete Envelope Adding a program change keyframe If you want to show or hide an envelope without deleting its settings click the Insert Hide Envelope button J To add a program change keyframe 1 Click the Program button If and choose Insert Program Change Keyframe The program change keyframe row is displayed at the bottom of the track 2 Using the Draw or Envelope d tool double click in the track s keyframe row to add a keyframe Program Change 3 To edit a keyframe double click it to display the Output Settings
510. ted to the master bus e The bus letter is displayed A B and soon when a bus is routed to another bus The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to a hardware output not available for soft synth bus controls Using the Mixing Console window 1 Add busses to your project For more information see Adding a bus on page 162 2 Ifthe window isn t already visible choose Mixing Console from the View menu 3 Ifthe I O control region isn t already visible click the I O button in the View pane 4 To choose an output device click the Output button and choose an ouput device from the menu Ai Bus Bus Bus Tc Ta Ta eo Master Lefk Right Front Bus B Left Right Front Bus fLeftRight Front Lefh Right Front hs Centeri LFE Lefti Fight Rear Assigning tracks to output busses Assigning tracks to busses allows you to apply settings to a series of tracks or route tracks to a hardware output For more information see Assigning tracks to busses on page 111 Adding or editing output bus effects You can add effects to a bus using the bus tracks header in the track list or the bus channel strips in the Mixing Console For more information see Adding effects to a bus track on page 106 or Adding or editing track insert effects on page 156 Automating effect parameters for output busses If a plug in supports automation you can add envelopes to a bus track to automatically adjust effect parameters over time For more
511. teen eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 64 SIROT VEM 24540 c0n unwise ET tas EEE bos cea AE E EEA AEEA EE 64 Changing event properties cece eee cece cette eee e eee e eee e teen ee eeeeeennes 64 Muting and locking events cc ccc cece si cece eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeenaes 65 MUUNG EVENTS ti cces od ttnan EEEE EAEE EEA AEE e ra ae eae eee eaa ee eyneaamewnees 65 POCKING CVEN aqeucecyand aes AE tenet ease E cee E eee dal EEEE evan 65 Using event ENvelOPeS ccc ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eeeeeeenes 65 Setting an event s volume envelope cece eee eect teen eee e eee eee eeeeeees 66 Setting an event s fade in and out envelope curve cece cece cece nee e eee eeeeees 66 USING SECON eee EE ESEE ress put scnedsse canned case a AA EEAS EIA AEA 66 Inserting a section ssssnessssssssosssssserosessssosoeeseresoseoeesessoeoeersessero 67 Adj sting a SECTION s length esisesrccireerseredur ients EEE EAEEREN EAS SE EEEE 67 Roron a SECUOM re r rE E E EEE EE EE EE aaeeeunees 67 Changing a section S CoOlor seriiereissreriisrtts sidari ir Poda NEn TETIERE R EANET R RES IERRA 67 MOVING shuffling SECHONS s rireicrerericercererer a ea A a 67 CODVING A E OR aee a E a E E E E E 68 Deleting a SEON rire tenean EEEN ENEA TO EERE 68 Moving a section label seeresssirerrrcveicenes kit oretent tirin REEE EEEE EREEREER OEE 68 Removing a section label nunnnnnsunsnnsessessesseseesorsorserserreserssessesersrese 68 Clearing al
512. ters a thread will be created for each logical processor When the check box is cleared a single processing thread is used to render audio from tracks and busses Choose the device that you want to use for recording sound data Selecting the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows the operating system to select an appropriate device to use for the current sound data APPENDIX A 257 Automatically detect and offset for Select the check box to automatically compensate for offset between the time you hardware recording latency Advanced Default All initiate recording and when your sound card starts recording Click this button to open the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings Setting Advanced audio preferences from the Audio Device tab Item Audio devices Interpolate position Position bias Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Audio buffers Buffer size samples Priority 258 APPENDIX A Description This list displays all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer Selecting a device allows you to set the options for that device When you select this check box the software attempts to compensate for inaccurate devices by interpolating the playback or recording position If you notice that your playback cursor is offset from what you are hearing select this option for the playback device If the position of playback or record does not
513. th to the song or click Browse to locate the file This song must already be in a streaming format 4 Click Next If you are publishing the current ACID song it is rendered in the format and bit rate you specified A window appears from the publish provider with directions for completing the publishing process 5 Follow the instructions provided by the publish provider The file begins uploading to the provider A progress dialog informs you when the upload is finished 6 Click OK The publish provider provides a link to the song on their Web site however this may vary depending on provider Writing to CD You can burn your projects to CD using supported CD R CD RW drives You can burn CDs for multiple or single track projects and build audio CD layouts automatically or manually You can also create video CDs that can be played in many home DVD players and on computers with a CD ROM drive and VCD player software and multimedia CDs that can be played in any computer with the appropriate player Understanding track at once and disc at once ACID provides two ways to record audio to a CD R disc track at once and disc at once Track at once Track at once writing records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However the CD R disc remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once writing is that you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting
514. the Ctrl key and click each tag Click the Delete Selected Tag button to delete the tag from the current library A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected tags from the library Merging subtags Merging tags combines a selected tag with its subtags and removes the subtags from your library permanently To merge a tag with its subtags right click the tag and choose Merge Subtags into Selected Tag from the shortcut menu All subtags are combined with the main tag and the subtags are removed from the library All media formerly associated with the subtags is associated with the main tag Arranging tags in the tag tree Tags are displayed in a tree view in the Media Manager window You can organize tags hierarchically click the Expand button in the Search pane to expand a list or click the Collapse button E in the Search pane to hide an expanded list You can drag copy and paste tags within the list to arrange them and create parent and child tags You can also display tags in a palette view by clicking the Change Tags View button E Editing tag names or images Double click a tag or right click a tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog 2 Inthe Tag name box type the name you want to display for the tag 3 Select a thumbnail image to choose the icon that will be displayed for the tag in the Search pane and in the Search Results pane when the tag is added to
515. the Gracenote Media Database Note Using Gracenote MusiclD requires an active Internet connection For more information on using Gracenote MusiclD refer to www gracenote com GETTING STARTED 33 Obtaining CD information 1 Insert a CD in your drive 2 Click the MusiclD button in the in the Extract Audio from CD dialog or browse to the CD and click the F button in the Explorer window For more information see Extracting media files from CD on page 32 For more information see Explorer window on page 22 Gracenote MusiclD attempts to obtain matching CD information and displays artist album and track data e Ifthe service locates an exact match this information is automatically displayed No additional action is necessary If the service locates multiple possible matches the Match dialog is displayed Proceed to step 2 3 Choose a method for completing the CD information e If none of the possible matches is appropriate click the Submit New button The Gracenote CDDB Disc Information dialog is displayed allowing you to complete information for the CD and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For help on submitting CD information click the Help Guidelines button in this dialog When you are finished typing information click the OK button to submit your data e Select the appropriate match from the list and click the Accept Match button The artist album and track information is displayed based on your se
516. the Save File As button to save the changes to a new file The media is saved with the modified track properties to a new file and renames the track in the track list to reflect the change All the information in the Clip Properties window is saved to your file except for any pitch shifting you have applied Any regions or markers you have created in the Chopper are also saved For more information see Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper on page 96 Adjusting clip properties for MIDI tracks From the View menu choose Clip Properties to display the Clip Properties window The contents of the Clip Properties window will change to display properties for the currently selected clip in the timeline You can use the Clip Properties window to edit MIDI data using the OPT list editor or piano roll For more information see MIDI Track Envelopes and Keyframes on page 208 For more information see Editing duration on page 201 Working with grooves From the View menu choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window The top portion of the Groove Pool window displays the available groove maps in your project The bottom portion shows the selected groove map so you can edit it Groove Pool E 5 Ge GH E X 2 Default groove for new tracks Available groove imal 16th Note Swing ial Conga Groove O2 tal Funk o3 maps imlJBlues 01 ialjEarly And tal Hard Swing _ Bounce ial Funk 01 ial Hip Hop 01 ial conga Groove D1 tal
517. the drop down arrow choose All Continuous Controllers from the menu and choose a controller from the submenu 2 Inthe area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab drag to draw your controller information 9 Controller 127 J6 O gt gt g H a9 Selecting note events With the Draw tool selected you can select individual note events by clicking them You can also use one of several methods to select multiple events e With the Draw tool selected press Ctrl or Shift while clicking note events Pressing Shift allows you to select the first and last note events of a range in order to select all notes in between while pressing Ctrl allows you to select non contiguous note events Press Ctrl A to select all note events on a track Moving note events After you select note events you can drag them to new positions Tip Press Alt while dragging note events to restrict your movement to vertical change pitch or horizontal change location in time WORKING WITH MIDI 215 Using cut copy and paste byl After you select note events you can click the Cut or Copy buttons to cut or copy the events You can then position the cursor in a new location and click the Paste button to paste the events Note events are always pasted at the same pitch as the Original note event Toggling note snapping Click the Enable Snapping Notes to Specified Scale button to toggle snapping If the b
518. the name of the narrator band or artist s being recorded into the project Engineer Enter the name s of the people who mixed and edited the project Copyright Enter the date and ownership rights of the project Comments Enter information that identifies and describes the project Universal Product Code Media Enter the Universal Product Code UPC and the Media Catalog Number MCN Catalog Number to be written to your CD for identification purposes Start all new projects with these Select this check box if your projects requirements do not change or you want settings consistent settings for future projects Using the Audio tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the audio Item Description Master bus mode Choose either Stereo for a standard audio project or 5 1 Surround for a surround project Number of additional stereo Enter the number of stereo busses that you want in your project You may add up to busses 26 busses The busses appear in the Mixing Console window For more information see Using audio bus channel strips on page 164 Sample rate Choose a sample rate from the drop down list or enter your own rate The sample rate range is 2 000 Hz to 192 000 Hz Higher sample rates result in better quality sound but also mean larger audio files Bit depth Choose a bit depth from the drop down list A higher bit depth results in better quality sound but also means larger audio files
519. the punch in and out points that are used for recording Recording into an event allows you to establish a pre roll before recording which gives you time to prepare before recording starts Because the entire recording is saved to the media file not just the material between the edges of the take you are not limited to the recorded material contained in the length of the new clip You can adjust the edges of the event or slip the contents of the event if necessary For more information see Shifting the contents of slipping events on page 64 The existing event that you record into is not affected or deleted Instead the event now contains two media files each listed as a separate clip in the track s Clip Pool For more information see Using the Clip Pool to manage clips on page 104 1 Place the cursor before the event to allow for pre roll 2 Press Ctrl and click the event to select it Tip You can record into multiple events by pressing Ctrl and making selections 3 Click the Arm for Record button on the event s track When recording into multiple selected events arm their respective tracks at this time 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording 5 Click the Record button again or the Stop button E on the transport bar to stop recording Recording into an event with a time selection Recording into a time selection allows for a pre and post roll during recording The time sel
520. the time display and choose MIDI Timecode Out from the shortcut menu to display outgoing MTC time 00 00 00 000 1 1 000 Edit Cursor Position Beats Chrl 6 Edit Cursor Position Time ShiFk Time at Cursor Format Time at Cursor MIDI Timecode Out MIDI Clock Gut MIDI Timecode In Generate MIDI Timecode F7 3 Generate MIDI Clock Shift F7 pe Trigger From MIDI Timecode Chrl FF Triggering from MIDI timecode You can trigger ACID playback using MTC This means that the software initiates playback by receiving timecode from another device 1 Connect a word clock signal between your computer and triggering device to lock synchronization Note f the MIDI trigger device can output MIDI timecode a timecode converter is not necessary you can connect the trigger device directly to your computer 2 Configure your triggering device to send MTC to your computer 3 From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Sync tab to configure the application to receive MTC From the Input device drop down list choose the port through which you receive MTC e From the Frame rate drop down list choose the frame rate that your trigger device uses to send MTC to ACID 4 From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu When an incoming MTC signal is received playback begins from the position indicated by the timecode If MTC is not being received you can play and edit normally
521. ticular section of a song For example you may want to copy all percussion events from a song s bridge and re use them in the coda 1 Click the Time Selection Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the submenu The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor f1 2 Drag the mouse in the track view The selection area is highlighted on the track view a Release the mouse button A selection is created and all events within it are selected 4 Hold Ctrl and click any event that extends beyond the time selection The entire event appears highlighted however only the section of the event contained within the time selection is actually selected Tip You can select additional events within the time selection by continuing to hold Ctrl while clicking events In addition holding Shift allows you to select the events of multiple adjacent tracks within a selection Working with tracks The following sections explain several basic track functions and features For more in depth information on tracks see Working with Tracks on page 101 Reordering tracks When building an ACID project you may want to reorder the tracks to place similar instruments in proximity to one another For example placing all drum loops together in the track view makes it easier for you to fine tune the mix of the song s overall drum sound 1 Drag the track header to a new location in the track list A heavy black h
522. tify to stay informed about Sony products Create undos for FX parameter changes Confirm media file deletion when still in use Close media files when ACID is not the active application Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not the active application Enable multimedia keyboard support Automatically render large Wave files as Wave64 Prompt for region and marker names if not playing Create project file backups on save acd bak Preserve pitch for new Beatmapped tracks when tempo changes Automatically start the Beatmapper Wizard for long files Use slower updates to prevent playback clicks during editing Enable autosave Use SPTI for CD burning Autoname extracted CD tracks Keep bypassed FX running to avoid pause on bypass enable Confirm groove deletion when still in use Enable Windows XP Theme support 254 APPENDIX A Description Select this check box if you want to reopen the project that was open the last time the software was closed When you clear this check box the software starts with a blank project Select this box if you want the ACID logo splash screen to display upon startup When you select this check box information is periodically displayed from Sony at startup Clear the check box to bypass the Net Notify dialog Select this check box if you want Undos to be created when you change a plug in parameter When you select this check box a message box appears asking if y
523. ting 57 62 Editing in ripple mode 61 Envelopes 65 Erasing 37 Fading edges for offsets 65 Fading in and out 66 Inserting at the play cursor 36 Joining 60 Locking 65 MIDI editing 37 Moving 37 Muting 65 Painting 35 Pasting 55 63 Pitch shifting 64 Properties 64 Recording into 183 Reversing 57 Sections 66 Selecting 38 40 Shifting the contents of 64 Sliding 64 Slipping 64 Slip trimming 64 Snapping 89 Splitting 58 Start offset 64 Trimming 57 Volume 66 Explorer window 30 32 Exporting loops 130 Exporting MIDI 228 External Control amp Automation Preferences 265 External devices Playing MIDI from 222 Routing MIDI tracks to 222 Routing video to 234 External monitor 234 Extracting media from CD 32 Fading edges of events 65 Fading in out Events 66 Tracks 112 146 Film panning model 242 Filtering MIDI 198 Filtering MIDI events In the list editor 218 Fitting to time 94 Flipping envelopes 144 Floating windows 248 Folder tracks 35 128 Adding tracks 128 Creating 128 Editing events 129 Muting 129 Removing tracks 129 Soloing 129 Frame numbering 231 Freeze Track 19 Freezing MIDI tracks 188 Frontier TranzPort 267 Adjusting panning 284 Adjusting volume 284 Editing input device 285 Editing output device 285 Viewing control maps 283 General preferences tab 254 Generic control surface setup 229 283 285 Generic controller 267 Generic MIDI controller Custom c
524. ting video if you open another video file Tip You can also add a still image such as a BMP JPEG PSD GIF PNG or TGA file to the video track Removing the video track Right click anywhere in the video track and choose Remove Video from the shortcut menu Hiding and showing the video track By default video displays in the track view when you add it to a project You can hide or show the video track at any time by choosing Show Video Track from the View menu A check mark next to the command indicates that the video track displays Synchronizing audio and video Editing the audio associated with a video file can cause it to become out of sync with the video To resynchronize the audio and video right click the audio file and choose Synchronize with Video from the shortcut menu Note This does not work if you have changed the audio track to a loop Removing the video s audio Right click the audio track in the track list and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu The audio track is removed but the video remains Changing frame numbering Each frame is numbered in the video track You can change the numbering format or turn off frame numbering altogether 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Video tab 3 Choose a setting from the Show source frame numbers on video thumbnails as drop down list WORKING WITH VIDEO 231 Editing video events You have several
525. tion button jeinsert After the Chopper inserts the audio the cursor moves to the end of the increment e If the increment length is equal to the selection length selections are painted end to end If the increment length is greater than the selection length an appropriate amount of silence is painted prior to the next insert position e Ifthe increment length is less than the selection length selections overlap Using copy and paste You can right click the selection in the Chopper and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the current selection to the clipboard You can then use the Paste command to insert the selection in the track view After the event is pasted the cursor advances to the end of the pasted event Note When you paste a selection from the Chopper to the track view the increment setting is ignored Dragging selections You can drag a Chopper selection from the Chopper to the track view Release the mouse at the location where you want to insert the selection Moving the insert position in the track view Click the Move Track View Cursor Left button 4 and the Move Track View Cursor Right button I to move the current insert position in the track view left right by the increment length USING THE CHOPPER 99 Saving Chopper selections as new files You can quickly create a new loop by making a selection in the Chopper and saving the selection as a new file The file is added to your project
526. tion only check box to quantize only the selected events Clear the check box to quantize all events within the list 5 Click Apply Deleting events Click an event row and click the Delete button Undoing and redoing You can easily undo and redo actions in the list editor by using keyboard shortcuts Press Ctrl Z to undo an action and press Ctrl Shift Z to redo an action WORKING WITH MIDI 221 Routing tracks to MIDI devices or soft synths Each MIDI track can be played through any external MIDI port or any DLS VSTi or ReWire 2 0 soft synth bus control in the Mixing Console window For more information see Adding track assignable FX bus and soft synth channels on page 155 1 Click the MIDI Output button A list of all the available MIDI devices and software synthesizers is displayed e Ifthe soft synth you want to use does not appear in the menu choose Insert Soft Synth to add a soft synth bus control to the project and route the track to the new synth Click one of the following links for more information about DLS sets VST instruments or ReWire device applications Ifa MIDI device does not appear in the menu choose External MIDI Device Preferences to open the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog and verify that the check box for the device is selected If a device is selected for generating MIDI timecode on the Sync Preferences tab it will be unavailable as a playback device T Stephanie Q I TA Auto All
527. to actually starting synchronization Tape based recorders especially benefit from seeking to full frame messages because of the time it takes to move the transport to the proper location However full frame messages are ignored by some devices and may actually cause unexpected behavior in other devices Refer to your hardware documentation to find out if your hardware supports full frame messages MTC Input Send Start instead of Continue when beginning playback Song Position Pointer generation Using the Display tab Item Track colors Envelope colors Section colors Icon color saturation Icon color tint Default All Using the Other tab Item Enable multiple selection preview in Explorer window Select this check box if you want a Start command rather than a Continue command to be sent when Generate MIDI Clock is activated When the check box is cleared a Continue command is sent as this type of command allows the chasing device to start from a specific time However some older sequencers that support MIDI Clock chase do not support the Continue command and must start playback from the beginning every time Select a radio button to determine when Song Position Pointer messages are sent while Generate MIDI Clock is active Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to seek to a proper location prior to starting synchronization Description Use these controls to change the
528. to add them to the solo group To remove a track from the solo group click its Solo button again Hold Ctrl while clicking a Solo button to solo a single track and remove all other tracks from the solo group 106 CHAPTER 7 Monitoring bus track output levels During playback a responsive meter is displayed in the bus track header to monitor the bus s output Master s tops Horizontal meters out E ell 02 Vol 0 0 dB Touch x Vol 0 0 dB m amp Master II aa Vertical meters Left Right Front Right click and yol 0 0dB choose Use Vertical we umy wy Touch Meters from the vol 0 0 dG m shortcut menu When clipping is detected the peak meter displays a red Clip indicator Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters This shortcut menu allows you to reset clip indicators choose a display scale toggle vertical display or turn output meters off Automating VSTi parameters in soft synth bus tracks You can use the soft synth bus track to control parameter automation for VST instruments using envelopes For more information see Automating VSTi parameters on page 211 Resizing bus tracks You can drag the horizontal splitter between the track list and bus tracks to increase or decrease the space allocated to bus tracks Perform any of the following actions to resize individual bus tracks e Drag a bus track s bottom border to set its heig
529. to adjust Envelope points keyframes are updated at the cursor position until you stop playback Click Stop E to end playback and stop recording automation Editing individual envelope points or keyframes Editing individual envelope points or keyframes gives you fine control over your recorded settings 1 2 3 Select the Automation Settings button on the track you want to edit Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch from the menu Select the parameter you want to edit For a track envelope select the envelope tool 4 and click the envelope point you want to edit You can right click a point and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to display an effect s property page e Fora keyframe double click a keyframe to open its property page Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust The selected envelope point keyframe is edited and all others are unaffected For track envelopes you can also edit the envelope directly in the timeline 148 CHAPTER 9 Setting the automation recording mode for a track 1 Select the Automation Settings button in the track header 2 Click the Automation Settings button and choose a command from the menu to choose the automation mode Mode Track lcon Description Off amp Automated parameters are ignored during playback When you switch to Off mode the control setting fro
530. to close the Plug In Chooser and return to the Audio Plug In window 6 Adjust the settings for the effects For more information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button 1 Tips You can save an effect s parameters as a preset to be used in other projects To save a preset enter a name in the Preset box and click the Save Preset m button You can also use the Insert FX control region in the Mixing Console window to add remove or configure track effects For more information see Adding or editing track insert effects on page 156 7 Click the Close button E to close the Audio Plug In window You can use a track effect chain as a default for all new tracks you create For more information see Setting default track properties on page 252 Automating plug in parameters You can automate the parameters of certain plug ins by adding envelopes to the track For more information see Adding or removing track effect automation on page 140 Arranging plug in chain order The plug ins are cumulative during playback For example when the track s signal passes through the EQ it carries the EQ s settings as it passes through the compression plug in then the signal carries both those plug in settings to the next plug in Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange plug ins in a certain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next plug in on the chain The
531. to play the entire track If the track contains keyframes the selected patch is assigned to the keyframe that occurs before the current cursor position Note You can also select drum maps by doing either of the following e Double click the MIDI track icon to open Track Properties dialog On the Output Setting tab choose Drum Map from the drop down menu e Click the Program button choose Drum Maps and then Select Drum Map Changing the patch for a hardware synth If your track is routed to a hardware synth there are several ways to change patches e Click the Program button I and choose Synth Control of Patch if you want to change patches using the synth s controls e Click the Program button IF and choose Use Program Change and Bank if you want to change patches by specifying the program MSB and LSB values Double click the values in the track header to edit them al Stephanie ter Q I aA Auto Al VB4e 01 M 4 0 0 100 ii Center Ij hg M Ifyou ve created a patch map for your device click the Program button F and choose Use Device Patch Map to return to the device s patch map You can then choose a patch by clicking the Program button and choosing a patch from the menu For more information about creating patch maps and assigning them to hardware devices click here Selecting a drum map for a track 1 Right click the track header choose Insert Remove Envelopes and then choose Configure Controllers from
532. to record only notes C5 to C9 If you assign track 1 to a plucked string bass soft synth and track 2 to a grand piano synth the low notes you play on your keyboard will be recorded only on track 1 and will be voiced by the bass The high notes you play will be recorded only on track 2 and will be voiced by the piano Filtering continuous controller messages allows you to control exactly which continuous controllers are recorded For example if you wanted to make sure you didn t accidentally record modulation automation by bumping your keyboard s modulation wheel you could select the Record unselected items radio button choose Continuous Controllers from the MIDI Message Type drop down list and then select the Modulation check box e Excluding system exclusive messages during recording can improve performance during real time recording and when using MIDI thru WORKING WITH MIDI 205 Setting up MIDI velocity input filters Track Properties T Stephanie Output Settings Input Filters clip Pool Velocity Enable Message Filter Velocity Quantize b L Change Release Velocity Change type Invert C Set to Add O Scale by ee Limit e ha Use the Input Filters tab to modify or limit note on and note off velocity from a track s MIDI input device during recording 1 2 3 4 5 Select the track where you want to apply the filter In the Track Properties dialog click the Input Filters
533. to represent a single sample For example 8 or 16 bit are common sample sizes While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 bit samples Memory used as an intermediate repository in which data is temporarily held while waiting to be transferred between two locations A buffer ensures an uninterrupted flow of data between computers Media players may need to rebuffer when there is network congestion A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed A bus s output can be a physical audio device in the computer from which the signal is heard Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store The clipboard is the location where data cut or copied from ACID is stored You can then paste the data back into the software at a different location Occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort Coder decoder refers to any technology for compressing and decompressing data The term codec can refer to software hardware or a combination of both technologies A compression ratio controls the ratio of input to output levels above a specific threshold This ratio determines how much a signal has to rise above the th
534. tomation Settings button is selected the Pan slider handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit pan automation on the bus track The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your panning envelope is preserved but with an offset applied For example setting the trim control to 9 left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9 to the left Adjusting volume When the Automation Settings button is not selected you can drag the Volume fader to control the overall trim volume of the bus You can hold Ctrl while dragging the slider to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the slider to return it to 0 When the Automation Settings button is selected the Volume fader handle is displayed as a and you can use it to edit volume automation on the bus track Note The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 167 Changing pre post routing The Pre Post Fader Send button in the Sends control region and the Pre Post Fader Insert FX button in the Faders control region work together to determine the signal flow for your busses The Pre Post Fader Insert FX button allows you to indicate whether the insert FX chain is affected by the channel s gain fader When set to Post Fa
535. ton again Ci When the Automation Settings button is selected the Mute button is displayed as Ss and you can use the button to edit mute automation Soloing a track Click the Solo button to mute all unselected tracks Click the Solo button on additional tracks to add them to the T solo group To remove a track from the solo group click its Solo button again Inverting a track s phase Note MIDI tracks do not have a phase button When the Faders control region is visible each track displays an Invert Track Phase button To show or hide the Faders control region click the Faders button in the View pane Click the Invert Track Phase button sj to reverse the phase of all events on an audio track Touch Although inverting data does not make an audible difference in a single file it can prevent phase cancellation when U mixing or crossfading audio signals YA Select multiple tracks to invert several tracks simultaneously Y 7 Note f the Invert event switch is selected inverting the phase of the track will return the event to its original phase sai ae Arming a track for recording or toggling input monitoring When the Faders control region is visible each track displays an Arm for Record button and an Input Monitor Mode button E you can use to turn record input monitoring on or off a Note MIDI tracks do not have an Input Monitor Mode button USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 159 To show or hide the Faders control region
536. tput from your synthesizer with your project For more information see Rendering in real time on page 50 174 CHAPTER 10 Monitoring an external source without mixing it with your project You may not want every signal that goes through the Mixing Console to be mixed with your project For example you could set up a cue talkback microphone to communicate between the control room and recording booth This topic will show you how to use an input bus to set up a cue microphone 1 Add an input bus to your project For more information see Adding or deleting input busses on page 168 2 Connect a microphone to an input on your sound card for this example we ll use Mic Inst 1 3 Inthe recording booth connect a pair of powered speakers or a headphone amplifier to an output on your sound card for this example we ll use LineOut 3L LineOut 4R 4 Setup your input bus a Inthel O control region of the input bus channel strip click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input where your cue microphone is connected EY input KET DB Master vo ae vo Mic instin 1 Master b Click the Output button and choose the sound card output where your speaker or headphone amplifier is connected FAN Input AU Bus D Master Output None LineOut SL LineOut 6R l l 18 L 15 When you speak into the cue microphone its output is sent to the recording booth without being mixed into your project output Using F
537. track attributes Display the Track Properties window by double clicking a track s icon or by pressing Alt 6 For more information see Configuring track properties on page 115 Surround Panner This window allows you to control panning in a 5 1 surround project Display the Surround Panner window by double clicking the surround panner on a track or by pressing Alt 7 For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 235 Soft Synth Properties This window allows you to route soft synths to DLS soft synths VST instruments or ReWire 2 0 devices and you can configure soft synths for external input from a MIDI controller Display the Soft Synth Properties window by double clicking a soft synth control s icon or by pressing Alt 8 Audio Plug In This window displays plug ins and settings for track assignable bus and soft synth effects chains Display the Audio Plug In window by clicking a track s Track FX button i by choosing Audio Plug In from the View menu or by pressing Alt 9 For more information see Using clips with tracks on page 101 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 23 Plug In Manager This window allows you to view and choose effects plug ins to be added to a track bus or assignable effects chain Display the Plug In Manager window by choosing Plug In Manager from the View menu or by pressing Ctrl Alt 1 For more information see Organizing Plug Ins and ReWire Devices on page 131 Tips To addan effect quickl
538. tracks that are routed to external MIDI devices are not included in the rendered file For more information see Rendering projects on page 47 Playing MIDI from external devices You can receive MIDI input from an external device such as a MIDI keyboard You can then use a soft synth control with its DLS set or VST instrument or external MIDI device to output the sound from the external device Adding external devices as MIDI inputs 1 Verify that the Enable Real Time MIDI command is selected in the Options menu 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 222 CHAPTER 12 3 Click the MIDI tab 4 Select a device in the Make these devices available for MIDI input pane 5 To enable MIDI thru for the selected input right click the entry in the MIDI Thru column and choose a MIDI thru device from the shortcut menu Note The MIDI thru device must be selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback pane in order to appear in the menu You can choose more than one MIDI device for MIDI thru output if desired 6 Click OK Assigning MIDI inputs to soft synth controls You can route MIDI input from an external device to any soft synth control in your project Note You can assign both individual tracks and external MIDI devices to a single soft synth 1 Inthe Mixing Console window double click the soft synth icon on a control 2 The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 C
539. tree USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 71 Applying a tag to a media file You tag media by dragging a tag from the tag tree to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Add Tag Mode button 2 is selected 1 Select media files to tag in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file or e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the Shift key and then click the last item or e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 2 Click the Add Tag Mode button in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s 3 4 Bass O4 wav 3 4 Bass OS way Tip You can also right click a selection in the Search Results pane and choose Add Tag from the shortcut menu to add a tag to all selected media The Tag Chooser dialog will be displayed Select the tag you want to add and then click the OK button When you add a subtag to a media file the tag s hierarchical position in the tag tree is applied Sa implicitly Match Al In this example adding the Snare tag to a media file would mean that a search for Audio Drum One Shots or Snare would find your tagged media If the user rearranged the tag tree so that the Snare tag did not appear below the Audio and Drum One Shots tags searching for Audio or Drum One Shots would n
540. ttings Description Select this check box if you want to preview multiple selected files in the Explorer Enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop Seconds of each One Shot to play and Number of Beatmapped measures to play boxes to specify how different file types are previewed APPENDIX A 263 Using the Folders tab Item Default project folder Use a single default folder for project media saves Use separate defaults for each type of project media save Default groove folder Temporary files folder Free storage space in selected folder 264 APPENDIX A Description This box displays the path to the folder that will be used for creating new projects Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Select this radio button if you want to save all project media in a single folder Select this radio button if you want to choose where to save each type of project media The following boxes display the location where each type of media file will be saved Record This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you record new audio or MIDI tracks Click the Browse button to choose a different folder The folder you specify here is used by default for new projects but if you want to choose a project specific recorded files folder you can use the Recorded files folder box on the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog Extract from CD This box displays the path to the folder
541. ubmitted by a body of companies including RealNetworks and Netscape A metafile that provides information to a media player about streaming media files To start a streaming media presentation a Web page includes a link to a redirector file Linking to a redirector file allows a file to stream if you link to the media file it downloads before playback Windows Media redirector files use the asx or wax extension RealMedia redirector files use the ram rpm or smi extension A region is a section of time used to subdivide your project into segments The process in which the project is saved to a specific file format like WMA or MP3 APPENDIX E 315 Resample Sample Sample Rate Sample Size Sample Value Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI Shortcut Menu Signal to Noise Ratio Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE Soft Synth Streaming 316 APPENDIX E The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If a sample is resampled at a lower rate sample points are removed from the sound file decreasing its size but also decreasing its available frequency range Resampling to a higher sample rate extra sample points are interpolated in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When down sampling one must be aware of aliasing The word sample is used in many different and
542. udio plug ins and soft synths with categories ccc cece eee ee ees 134 Renaming a DUG IM i c cnsndtasaaee aad ao tne ac tiaacennenteweue wees EEEE EN EE 135 ignoring a DIUGEIN 44 veds buses tritare rer rar INP PENERE EE EE E 135 Using audio PIU INS nc on dcatadootedacn since beak E E EE EEEE OEE 135 Using REWIre devices g56i309 500ues aeodhaeece evade EEEE E EEN EEE 135 Uee SYAUINS EE E EEE EEE E E ee ehenainnaner ches 136 Using AMOMO sa lt cokakennea EEEE E EEE RER REE R 137 Showing or hiding automation CONTrOIS cece cece eee e teen eee eeaaes 137 TACK AULOMALION lt 5664ceesutar trian ewewencw neue hanes bveeheveshatwebesewe steed nace 137 Mute GUOMAION cc tccanccuscesaddadusneensienactenceadesrerencuascasncenocadsamereseuadeas 137 Volume or pan automation ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eee ee eeeeeneeeeeeees 138 BUSSUM UOR cneccecteatatenes cece esas seen eee E ed eake eee cecee EEE A A 139 Assignable effects automation vias deuce as sovaeeadewes deta cad eeeeswedesvaessawenesadeaedos 139 Adding or removing track effect automation ccc e eee ee eee eee eeeennees 140 MIDI controller automation ccc cc cee eee nee eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeneeeees 141 MIDI program change automation cece ccc cece eee eeeeeees 142 Working with track envelopes cece eee cece eee eee e eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeees 142 Adjusting ENVEIOPES 6 ccc ccc cc ccc cece eee a a 142 USING THE Envelope TO
543. ug In Manager window The Plug In Configuration dialog is displayed The dialog displays a list of folders where ACID looks for VST plug ins 3 Indicate where your plug ins are installed e Ifyou want to add a new folder click the Add button and then browse to the folder where your plug in is in stalled e Ifyou want to edit an existing folder path select a folder in the Search Folder column click the Edit button and then browse to the folder where your plug in is installed e Ifyou want to remove an existing folder select a folder in the Search Folder column and click the Remove button 4 Click the Scan button to start scanning your folders for plug ins ORGANIZING PLUG INS AND REWIRE DEVICES 131 Viewing plug ins When you open the Plug In Manager window an Explorer view is displayed with separate folders for your plug ins Folder Audio FX ReWire Devices Soft Synths 132 CHAPTER 8 Description Displays all your DirectX and VST audio plug ins You can drag plug ins to tracks or Mixing Console channel strips to add effects to your project Select the All folder to display all audio plug ins e The Failed folder contains plug ins that did not scan correctly or timed out during scanning These plug ins cannot be used in ACID You can right click a plug in and choose Rescan from the shortcut menu to attempt to rescan the plug in for use in ACID e The Ignored folder contains plug ins that you want to prevent A
544. ultiple selections Deleting a section Deleting a section removes the section and all events are removed from the timeline Right click a section label and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Events are split at each end of the section and all events envelope points regions commands and markers within the section are deleted Downstream events ripple to fill the space of the section you deleted For more information see Splitting events on page 58 Moving a section label Hold Alt while dragging a section label to move the selected labels without affecting the contents of the timeline Hold Ctrl Alt while dragging a section label to create copies of the selected labels without affecting the contents of the timeline Removing a section label Removing a section label removes the section label from the timeline without affecting the section s events Right click a section label and choose Remove Label from the shortcut menu Clearing all events from a section Clearing events removes the events from a section while leaving the section label intact Right click a section label and choose Clear Events from the shortcut menu Events are split at each end of the section and all events within the section are deleted For more information see Splitting events on page 58 68 CHAPTER 3 Chapter 4 Using the Media Manager This chapter covers the management and tagging of your media files in ACID using the Media Manager feature
545. until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire project as a single track Disc at once Single Session or Red Book Disc at once writing is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Burning single tracks track at once Note The entire project length is written to a CD track If your project has events on muted tracks that extend beyond the end of the audible material the muted events burn as silence at the end of your CD track To burn just a portion of a project create a loop region and select the Burn loop region only check box Insert a blank CD in a supported CD R CD RW drive 2 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD Notice that the Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog indicates the amount of time that the current project will fill on the CD as well as the total amount of time remaining on the CD If the Time needed for audio value exceeds the Time available on disc value you are not allowed to write the track to the CD Note f there is no CD in the CD R CD RW drive only the Cancel button is available in this dialog GETTING STARTED 51 Choose a setting from the Action drop down list Choose Burn audio to begin recording audio to your CD when you
546. up any desired MIDI message velocity or quantize filters for your armed tracks For more information see Configuring MIDI input filters on page 205 5 Position the cursor where you want to start recording 190 CHAPTER 12 6 Clickthe Record button on the transport bar to start recording MIDI messages from your controller are recorded as you play them e Notes are added to an event in the timeline e MIDI controller adjustments such as pitch wheel and modulation wheel movements are recorded as track envelopes For more information see MIDI controller automation on page 141 MIDI controllers are recorded in latch mode envelope points are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points Note Envelope points are not thinned when recording MIDI controllers from a hardware device 7 To stop recording click the Record button again or click the Stop button on the transport bar A new clip is created for the recorded MIDI data on each armed track You can use the Clip Pool tab in the Track Properties window to manage clips Note You can also record into time selections punch into MIDI events or record multiple clips when recording into a selection with Loop Playback selected in the same way you record audio Using MIDI step recording Click the MIDI Step Record butto
547. ut device Frame rate Generate MIDI Clock settings Output device Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI timecode is sent to this device The MTC slave should also be set to this device This device will not be available for MIDI playback Choose a frame rate from the drop down list This frame rate is used to generate the MIDI timecode The MTC slave must be set to the same frame rate Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI clock is sent to this device The MIDI clock slave should also be set to this device Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings Input device Frame rate Advanced Default All Setting advanced sync preferences MTC Input Free wheel for timecode loss Free wheel slack time Free wheel playback time Synchronization delay time Offset adjust MTC Output Full frame message generation MIDI Clock Output 262 APPENDIX A Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI timecode is received from this device The MTC master should also be set to this device Choose a frame rate from the drop down list This value specifies the frame rate at which the MTC master sends timecode to ACID Click to open the Advanced Sync Preferences dialog Restores all sync preferences to the default settings Select this check box if you want to continue to play if timecode is lost Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent losses in timecode If you frequently lose timecode you s
548. utive hold the Ctrl key and click each file 3 Specify how you want to resolve the selected files e Click the Smart Search button to search quickly and allow the Media Manager tool to suggest the replacement file e Click the Browse button to choose a specific replacement file e Click the Leave Offline button to leave the file offline The file will not be added to your project e Click the Remove button to remove the file from the media library The file will not be added to your project The original media file is not deleted 4 Repeat step 3 for each file in the list 5 Click the OK button to preview the files or add the files to your project and update the media library with the replacement files USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 79 Customizing the Media Manager window Much of what you see in the Media Manager window can be customized to suit your preferences Automatically hiding the Search pane Click the push pin button JEJ in the title bar of the Search pane if you want to save space in the Media Manager window by automatically hiding the search pane The push pin is displayed as a IEJ when the Search pane is anchored in the Media Manager window The push pin is displayed as a when the Search pane is set to hide automatically When the Search pane is set to hide automatically you can hover over the Search tab on the left edge of the Media Manager window to show the pane When you move your mouse away from the Search pa
549. utomation Settings button in the bus control or bus track and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want to adjust trim levels or select Show Automation Controls if you want to adjust volume automation 238 CHAPTER 14 Panning audio You can pan audio in a 5 1 surround project in two ways e Pan tracks individually using the Surround Panner window e Route tracks to mixer controls busses assignable effect chains or soft synths and pan the mixer controls using the Surround Panner window Note You cannot pan audio on tracks or busses that are routed to hardware outputs in a 5 1 surround project Panning tracks 1 Deselect the Automation Settings button on the track you want to pan 2 Double click the surround panner on the track you wish to pan The Surround Panner window appears Electric Guitar 03 E e Gr GY l Surround Panner Vol 12 0 dB mj d Electric Guit Double click to display Electric Guitar 03 Trim Electric Guitar 04 El e7 k Q a Panner Pa WInagdow i Vol 12 0 dB m ci Electric Guit s Electric Dulcim Eley amp k O Vol 14 0 dB m Electric Bul F Electric Dulcim A Hes A A Vol 14 0 dB m d Electric Dul E organ Okt 100 m Center o ML LFE K Add Channels 0 dB Center y Center mj Inf 3 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 240 4 Close the Surround
550. utput device an asterisk is displayed before the device name on the TranzPort Press Shift Punch to set the output device Configuring a generic MIDI controller You can configure up to five generic MIDI control surfaces to work with the ACID interface For information about your specific device please refer to the manufacturer s documentation Notes If you have a MIDI controller that includes buttons and knobs or faders you can use the device as an external control device and as a MIDI input device for recording MIDI for example you can use the buttons knobs and sliders on the device for external control and still use the keyboard pitch wheel and modulation wheel for recording MIDI For more information see Recording MIDI on page 189 MIDI messages that are mapped to external control functions are filtered when you record MIDI If a note message is assigned to a control surface function both the note on and note off messages will be filtered Effects parameters cannot be adjusted with a generic controller Important A generic control surface can control either trim or automation settings In order to control automation settings you must assign a button to place the control surface in automation mode and the Automation Settings button on the track or bus you want to edit must be set to Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch Customizing your control mappings i oe From the Options menu choose Pref
551. utton is selected you can only draw or drag notes within the selected scale Hold Alt while drawing or dragging notes to override snapping Click the down arrow next to the button to choose a root note and scale Quantizing note events You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force notes to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify Select the notes you want to quantize For more information see Selecting note events on page 215 Click the Quantize button 2 The MIDI Quantize dialog appears From the Quantize resolution drop down list choose the beat to which you want the selected notes to be quantized 1 2 3 4 Select the Start times check box to snap start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list 5 Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list 6 Click Apply Deleting note events Use the Erase tool to erase events in the piano roll Alternately you can select events and press Delete For more information see Selecting note events on page 215 Undoing and redoing You can easily undo and redo actions in the piano roll editor by using keyboard shortcuts Press Ctrl Z to undo an action and press Ctrl Shift Z to redo an action Using the list editor The List Editor tab is an OPT plug in that you can use to perform detailed filtering and editing within the Clip Properties window for a MIDI cl
552. utton to invert selected note velocities When you invert a velocity it is subtracted from 127 negative values are forced to positive so a note with a velocity of 127 will be 0 after inversion a velocity of 10 will be 117 and so on Select this radio button and drag the slider to change note velocities to a specific value Select this radio button and drag the slider to add or subtract a constant offset to selected note velocities Select this radio button and drag the slider to multiply selected note velocities by a percentage For example setting this slider to 50 would reduce all note on or note off velocities by half Select this radio button and type values in the Min and Max boxes to restrict selected note velocities to the specified range For example if you type 40 in the Min box and 90 in the Max box velocities below 40 will be set to 40 velocities greater than 90 will be set to 90 and velocities between 40 and 90 will be unaffected Select this radio button and type values in the From and To boxes to change velocity values gradually over time The velocity for the first note in the selection is set to the From value and the velocity for the last note in the selection is set to the To value Select the By percentage check box to change velocity over time based on the current values For example to fade a selection in select the By percentage check box and type 1 in the From box and 100 in the To box To fade a selection out t
553. ve help in a dialog box click the question mark button Ef in the upper right corner of the dialog box Help on the Web Additional ACID information is available on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web and choose the desired location from the submenu The software starts your system s Web browser and attempts to connect to the appropriate page on the Web site Overview of ACID software ACID software is designed to be powerful and flexible yet easy to use Many of the ACID operations menu items and shortcut keys are common to other Sony Creative Software Inc applications The following sections provide a tour of the ACID work area Main window The ACID workspace includes three main areas the track list the track view or timeline and the window docking area The other parts of the interface are tools and features used while creating and working with your project You can resize the track list track view and window docking area by dragging the dividers between them 16 CHAPTER 1 Track list Window docking area Toolbar Divider Timeline GY Junkyard Rhythms Rhythm Worker acd Sony File Edit View Insert Tools Enga 00 00 09 287 CID Pro 7 0 Options Help Yv A2 Tia 33 1 mM Zt O J A INKARD RHYTHMS ra ot EEEE ee i as OHGe amp S8 Illa JUNE Out ERE
554. veral methods of adding media files to a project Notes Proxy files may be created for media whose compression scheme may cause working with them to be inefficient and slow For more information see Proxy File on page 315 e Before using long Beatmapped or long one shot files from CDs or shared network folders copy the media to your local drive for the best possible performance ACID temporary files When you add a media file to a project from a removable device a copy of the media file is stored in the temporary files folder This keeps the media file available for use even if the source of the media is no longer accessible Be aware that the temporary files folder is cleared when you close the ACID application However files are not cleared from the folder if the software closes inappropriately Note You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog on page 253 GETTING STARTED 31 Adding media files from the Explorer window You can use the Explorer window which operates similarly to the Windows Explorer to locate media files for use in projects Display the Explorer if needed by choosing Explorer from the View menu or by pressing Alt 1 There are three ways to add media files from the Explorer window e Double click the desired file e Drag the file from the Explorer to the track view or track list Dra
555. video editing options to help you score your video Moving video events Drag the event to a new location along the video track Trimming video events Drag either end of the video event The video event stays in place but the beginning or end of the video moves You cannot trim the beginning or end of the event past the event s original end You cannot trim an event earlier than its starting point unless the event has been trimmed previously Slipping and sliding video events To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timeline but the event moves in the direction you drag Shifting the contents of video events slipping Hold Alt while dragging the video event to move the position of the video within the event The event itself does not move Slip trimming video events Hold Alt while dragging the beginning or end of a video event The video moves with the event edge and the opposite edge of the event remains fixed Sliding video events Hold Ctrl Alt
556. w You can use folders and categories to organize plug ins in the Mixing Console window When you click the Insert FX button in the Mixing Console plug ins are grouped into submenus If you want to use folders and categories to organize plug ins in the Mixing Console window right click a folder in the Plug In Manager and choose Show in Insert FX Submenu from the shortcut menu If you want to remove a folder or category from the Mixing Console window right click a folder in the Plug In Manager and choose Show in Insert FX Submenu from the shortcut menu to deselect the Show in Insert FX Submenu command E Audio Audio Insert FX Insert FX Track EQ see Tr Equalizer Dynamics Reverb Echo Delay Flanger and Phaser Modulation Chorus Amp Simulator Noise Reduction Mastering Pitch and Time Shift 1 Filters and FX Channel Strips a r F F r F F F r F r F r z Classifying audio plug ins and soft synths with categories Categories help you organize your plug ins by type The Audio FX folder contains several default categories and the Soft Synths folder contains an Instruments folder with default instrument categories You can also create your own categories to help you organize your plug ins Each plug in can be assigned to only one category If you want to create a new category select the Categories or Instruments folder and click the New Folder button F on the toolbar To add a plug in to a category perform either of the following
557. while dragging the video event to move the event while leaving the video in place The relative position of the video changes as when you slip an event Using the Video Preview window The Video Preview window is used to view the video as it plays or to view the frame at the cursor position To display the Video Preview window choose Video Preview from the View menu or press Alt 4 232 CHAPTER 13 ideo Preview icefield GH copy Frame C Ext Monitor Toolbar buttons GL Copy Frame Shortcut menu ee d y a Default Background ackground _ _ g a h Black Background White Background oO External Monitor Simulate Device Aspect Ratio Display at Media Size Show Toolbar Show Status Bar Status bar ideo 320x240 15 00 fps Display se0x240 Copying a frame to the clipboard The Copy Frame toolbar button in the Video Preview window allows you to copy the current frame to the Windows clipboard Using toolbar buttons The toolbar allows you to access two commonly used functions of the Video Preview window Button Description Gh copy Frame Copies the current frame to the Windows clipboard ext monitor Sends the preview to an external monitor Using the shortcut menu Right click anywhere in the Video Preview window to display a shortcut menu with Video Preview window options Item Description Copy Frame Copies the current frame to the Windows clipboard Default Background Set
558. while you are working with a project You can dock windows either in a single stack soanning the width of the screen or divide the window docking area into sections e g right middle and left and create several stacks You can also create floating docks by dragging several windows to the same area on your screen Windows that are not currently visible in a stack display a tab that you can click to display it You can also expand restore or close a window using the buttons in the window s upper left corner Windows are displayed in fixed positions in the lower portion of the window APPENDIX A 247 Close window hs Expand restore window Drag handle TETE TE Chopper BASS TASTER sPROMO 02 1 000 11 384 A 12 000 4 112384 23 000 13 384 stint me mf apn he ee EE Puede ae oe TET aan Lae 00 00 00 000 Tho 00 00 500 Tho 00 01 000 Tho 00 01 500 lt O gt E K Chopper Explorer Media Manager Groove Pool Tabs Note When the last window in the docking area is closed or removed the docking area minimizes automatically When the docking area is minimized dragging a dockable window over the bottom of the ACID window causes the docking area to open again Docking windows 1 If the window is floating on the workspace grab the window by its title bar and drag it to the window docking area anywhere below the track list or track view As you drag the window the window s outline appears 2 Po
559. x Master Bus Preview Bus m Sends 10 Meters Faders USING THE MIXING CONSOLE 153 Channel strips Tracks busses soft synths and assignable effects chains are displayed as channel strips in the Mixing Console When a control surface is enabled an indicator is displayed in the Mixing Console to indicate which channels are under external control Multiple bars are displayed if a channel is under the control of multiple devices For more information about using control surfaces please see Using Control Surfaces with ACID on page 267 In the Mixing Console the horizontal bars at the top of WE aud EE au BE as E au mn Z BE suds channels 1 4 indicate which Mic Instin 1 MicfInestiin 1 Mic Tnstin 1 Mic Instin 1 Mic Instin 1 MiciInstin L channels are under pile Master Master Master Horns Horns Horns er Touch er Touch ter Touch er Touch er Touch te Touch 0 U U 0 U 0 Center Center Center Center Center Center e e 1 T 1 E o EE o E EE m EE En ES E o ork j LoT j 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 Tips If you want to change the order in which channels are displayed you can click the channel label and drag a channel strip to anew location Hover over a fader and roll your mouse wheel to change its setting To edit a fader value quickly you can double click the displayed value to type a new value Hold Ctr
560. y drag a plug in from the Plug In Manager window to a track bus assignable effects chain or soft synth bus Ifthe VST plug in you want to use isn t displayed in the list you can use the VST Effects tab in the Preferences dialog to add the plug in s folder and then click the Refresh button to scan for plug ins For more information see Using the Video tab on page 261 Ifthe DirectX plug in you want to use isn t displayed in the list hold Ctrl Shift while restarting ACID and then select the Delete all cached application data check box to reset your preferences and rescan for DirectX plug ins Groove Pool This window allows you to view and edit the grooves in your project Display the Groove Pool by choosing Groove Pool from the View menu or by pressing Ctrl Alt 2 The upper half of the Groove Pool window shows all of the groove maps currently in your project The lower half of the window displays the selected groove map in the Groove Editor which allows you to make changes For more information see Working with grooves on page 123 Clip Properties For audio non MID clips this window allows the user to change clip types loop one shot and Beatmapped and adjust time stretching pitch root notes tempo and downbeat For more information see Configuring clip properties on page 115 For MIDI clips you can use the Clip Properties window to edit data using the OPT list editor or piano roll For more information see Using the pia
561. y the Preferences dialog on page 253 9 Click Save to start extracting audio CD data extraction begins and a progress meter is displayed If the file is longer than 30 seconds the Beatmapper Wizard appears 10 Use the Beatmapper Wizard or choose to open the file as a one shot The extracted file is added to a track For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 113 You can also double click a CDA file in the Explorer window or drag it to the track view to extract a CD track without opening the Extract Audio from CD dialog Note When adding media from multiple CDs you may need to press F5 to refresh the Explorer window to view the new CD s contents Obtaining or editing CD information using Gracenote If ACID can access information about a track or CD either from the file or CD itself or from a local cache it automatically reads and displays this information when you insert a CD or browse your computer However if this information is not available the software can retrieve information over the Internet from Gracenote MusiclD Once ACID obtains information from Gracenote MusiclD it is saved to a local cache so the information displays more quickly the next time the tracks are displayed If the software cannot connect to the Gracenote Media Database and the appropriate CD information is not available on your computer the tracks are simply listed numerically In this case you can edit CD information and submit it to
562. yback A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse To drag and drop you click and hold an item drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor For example orchestral music has a wide dynamic range while thrash metal has a very small always loud range Envelopes allow you to automate the change of a certain parameter over time In the case of volume you can create a fade out which requires a change over time by adding an envelope and creating a point in the line to indicate where the fade starts Then you pull the end point of the envelope down to inf Equalizing a sound file is a process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level EQ has various uses The most common use for ACID users is to simply adjust the subjective timbral qualities of a sound An instance of a media file on a track An event may play an entire media file or a portion of the file A file format specifies the way in which data is stored In Windows the most common audio file format is the Microsoft WAV format Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio To synchronize with audio a rate of 3
563. yback To play a 5 1 surround project you must have an appropriate speaker setup such as Six powered speakers e Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier Your system must also have an appropriate sound card setup such as e 5 1 compatible sound card Sound card with three stereo outputs e Three stereo sound cards There are several ways to set up your system depending on the sound card and speaker setup you are using Six powered speakers Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier 5 1 Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s front rear and center compatible outputs as indicated by your sound card s subwoofer outputs to the appropriate inputs ona sound card documentation six channel amplifier home theater receiver Connect front rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier Sound card Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate with three outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of inputs on a six channel amplifier home theater receiver stereo channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is Connect front rear center and LFE speakers to the outputs the center channel the right channel is the LFE amplifier channel Three stereo Connect powered speakers to your sound cards Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate sound cards outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of inputs on a six ch
564. yboard drum list between the track header and timeline to record MIDI into your ACID project You can record in real time during project playback by using step recording or MIDI merge recording to build MIDI tracks Track level MIDI input filters available on the Input Filters tab in the Track Properties window allow you to control exactly which MIDI messages you want to record or exclude or even split a MIDI keyboard into zones to record into two different tracks at once Tip Ifyou use the keyboard drum list between the track header and timeline to input MIDI notes note that the buttons are velocity sensitive clicking toward the right side of a button plays the note with a higher velocity setting than clicking toward the left side The keyboard drum list is visible in inline MIDI editing mode Important Attempting to record MIDI controller data over an existing event will overwrite existing note data If you want to record controllers over an existing event use MIDI merge recording For more information see Using MIDI merge recording on page 192 WORKING WITH MIDI 189 Setting up a MIDI controller for recording into a track 1 Select the MIDI track you want to record into or press Ctrl Alt Q to add a new blank MIDI track to your project 2 Choose a MIDI input port by clicking the MIDI Input button on the track header Choose a command from the menu w Roundabout GT TA Auto All K DLS Soft 1 F Piano 1 Vol 100 mj kT
565. ynthesizer and send its output to your main mix a b In the I O control region of the input bus s channel strip click the Input Source button and choose the sound card input that is connected to your synthesizer s output Inst 1 for this example Click the Output button and choose the output where you want to send your synthesizer s signal We ll send this signal to the master bus so it is included with your main mix and will be included when performing a real time render aM Input This input bus provides a signal path from your Inst 1 synthesizer s audio output to your project Master fet Touch J 6 0 MyPhaser Send a MIDI track to the synthesizer Click the MIDI Output button on the track header and choose the MIDI port where you connected your synthesizer in step 1 FR Neon tights ie I J Meon Treck The MIDI Output on the track header lets you Cut peal _ 3 send the track s MIDI to your synthesizer aoia EREE 9 Sith Conta vo 100 Ss_ Output Off bane i PreSonus FireBox MIDI Out Pich Bend 6 Device reSonus Firebox MIDI Out b External MID Device Preferences Soft Synth 1 DLS Soft Synth 1 Insert Soft Synth MID Channel Click Play jm When you play your project the track is sent to your synthesizer out of the synthesizer into the input bus and out to the master bus When you re ready to render your project you can use real time rendering to include the ou
566. your new events across the timeline 1 Create atime selection in the portion of the project you want to edit Select the Loop Playback button Copy the one shot you want to use Click the Play button to start playback oe oY Press Shift Y to paste at the play cursor during playback the edit cursor remains fixed and the play cursor follows playback If snapping is enabled events are pasted at the next snap point You can use snapping to quantize your events p Repeat step 5 as needed Click the Stop button when your re finished creating events 8 Edit event positions as necessary Tip f you re using this feature to tap rhythms with one shot tracks try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm For more information see Working with grooves on page 123 56 CHAPTER 3 Cutting events Cutting an event a time selection or an event within a time selection removes the audio data from the track view and places it on the clipboard Once data is placed on the clipboard it can be pasted back into the project an unlimited number of times Clipboard content remains on the clipboard until it is replaced by new data 1 Select the event data you want to cut or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 38 2 Cut the event data using any of the following methods Click the Cut button 4 on the toolbar e Choose Cut from the Edit menu e Right click the sele
567. ype 100 in the From box and 1 in the To box Drag the Curve slider to choose the fade curve that will be used to generate velocity for notes between the first and last note Note Note on velocities are bound between 1 and 127 while note off velocities are bound between 0 and 127 200 CHAPTER 12 5 Select the tracks or events you want to edit e Select a track to edit all events on the track Hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking a track header to select multiple tracks e If you want to edit multiple events on multiple tracks hold Ctrl or Shift while clicking the events to select them and then select the tracks e Ifa selected event has note events selected only the selected notes will be edited Note Muted tracks will not be edited 6 Click the Apply button Editing duration 1 From the Edit menu choose MIDI Processes and Filters The MIDI Processes and Filters dialog is displayed 2 Select the Duration tab 3 Selecta radio button to indicate how you want to change a note duration Item Description Change by Select this radio button and then choose a setting from the drop down list e Setting duration to Allows you to set notes to a specific duration Click the down arrow next to the selected note size and choose the desired note duration from the menu Choose User size to type a duration in beats ticks in the edit box for example type 2 000 for two beats or type 0 200 for 200 ticks e Adding to duration

Sony SAC7000 Computer Accessories User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents